This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
(*i,...iM) is injective and THg(X;A,j.) is a torsion module. The Blanchfield pairing is defined by V(u,v) = 6q(Dq+i(v))(u) for u G THq(X;Afj,) and v e THn.q-x{X,dX\ AJ. The homomorphism OqDq+i may be obtained as the composite pL>£ (A) /3|-\ where p : H*(X;S{AJ) -> HomA(THq(X; A /i ),5(A M )) is the evaluation homomorphism, Dq ' i s the duality isomorphism
32
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
with coefficients 5(A /i ) and (3\T is the restriction to the torsion submodule THn-q-i(X, dX; AM) of the Bockstein homomorphism associated to the coefficient sequence 0 - AM - (AM)0 -> S(A„) - 0 These pairings may be interpreted geometrically in terms of intersections of dual cells in the covering space XH- Fix a triangulation of X. Let C* be the cellular chain complex of XH with respect to the induced triangulation, and let P* be the cellular chain complex of (XH,9XH) with respect to the dual triangulation. Intersection numbers of transverse cells of complementary dimensions determine pairings Iq : Cq x Pn-q —> Z such that Iq(du,v) = (—l) q+1 I q (u,dv) if u € C g +i and v € P„_ g . (We may write IxH instead of Iq when the dimensions are clear but it is important to distinguish the space). Therefore intersections induce well defined pairings on homology. The covering group acts isometrically on Ip and so the pairing Iq:Cqx Pn_q -> Z[TT/H] given by Iq(x, y) = T,ge7r/HIq(x,gy)g is sesquilinear. Hence we may extend these pairings to pairings on homology with other Z[7r/i/]-module coefficients by taking suitable tensor products. These pairings agree with the ones defined by means of the isomorphisms Dq and so are independent of the triangulation used. The geometric properties of intersections of cells in manifolds imply that Ip(a, (3) = (-1^^4(0, a) if ij, : P n _ p x C n _ p - • Z is the transposed pairing. The Blanchfield pairings may be described in such terms as follows. If £ is a q-cycle of XH and y is a relative (n — 1 — )-cycle of (XjjjdXn) such that ax = du and (3y — dv for some (q + 1)chain u and (n — q»)-chain v and some nonzero a, f3 6 A^, then V(x,y) = a-lIq(u,y) = (f3)-lIq(x,v) = (P)-lHg&z^Iq{x,gv)g mod A^ in 5(AM). If n = 2q + 1 the Blanchfield pairing determines a sesquilinear pairing (, ) of THq(X; A^) with itself by (x, y) = V(x, j*y), where j : (X,0) - • (X,dX) is the inclusion. Moreover (x,y) = (-l)q+1(y,x), since we may compute one side via the transposed pairing. In general this pairing is singular; there may be x ^ 0 such that (x, y) — 0 for all
2.4. T H E TOTAL LINKING NUMBER COVER
33
y. In each of the following two sections we shall modify the definition further to obtain a nonsingular pairing. It is useful at this point to introduce some algebraic terminology. Let e = ± 1 , and let R be an integral domain with field of fractions RQ and with an involution. A e-linking pairing over R is a finitely generated .R-torsion module M with a sesquilinear pairing b: M x M —• RQ/R such that b(x,y) = eb(y,x) for all x,y e M, and such that the adjoint homomorphism Ad(b) : M —> Homn(M, Ro/R) given by Ad(b){m2)(m{) = 6(7711,7712) is injective. 2.4. The total linking number cover Let L be a /x-component n-link and let r : ir = irL —+ Z be the homomorphism which sends each meridian to 1 € Z. Let A = Z[i, i _ 1 ] = Ai. The total linking number cover of X is the cover pT : XT —> X associated to Ker(r). A loop in X lifts to a loop in XT if and only if the sum of its linking numbers with the various components of L in 5 n + 2 is 0, whence the name "total linking number cover". Let e : M. —• S1 be the exponential map, given by e(r) = e2mr G S for all r E R. Then e is the universal cover of S 1 . Since S1 = K(Z, 1) there is an unique homotopy class of maps f : X —> S1 inducing r, and pT is the pullback f*e. The Wang sequence for f is also the long exact sequence associated to the exact sequence of coefficient modules 0—>A—>A—>Z—>0. If M is a finitely generated A-module, let TM and zM be its Atorsion submodule and its maximal finite submodule, respectively, and let iM = TM/zM. For each k > 0 let ekM = ExtkA(M, A). 2.1. Let L be a ^-component n-link with exterior X = Then (1) Hq(X;k) and Hq(X;A) are finitely generated, and are 0 if
THEOREM
X(L).
q > n + 1; (2) Z ®A # i ( X ; A) £ Z ^ - 1 and Z ®A Ttfi(X; A) = 0 if n > 1; (3) Z ®A Hq(X;A) = 0 and so Hq(X;K) is a torsion module, for 1 < a < n; (4) i¥„ + 1 (X;A) S* A^" 1 andHi(X\k) has rank n~l, if n > 1;
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
34
(5) H2(X;A) maps onto H2(n;A); (6) there are short exact sequences 0 -* Z = ex1 -» H\X\
A) -> e°Fi(X; A) -» 0,
2
0 -> e // g _ 2 (X;A) -> tf?(X;A) - exHq-r{X\ A) -> 0, /or eac/i 1 < ^ < n, and an exact sequence 0 - Jnil -
tf"+1(*;A)
-> A"" 1 -4 e 2 tf n (X; A) - 0,
where Jn^\ is an extension ofeHn(X;A)
by e Hn-i(X; A).
PROOF. Since X is a compact manifold (n + 2)-manifold with nonempty boundary it is homotopy equivalent to a finite complex of dimension < n + 1, and so the singular chain complex of XT is chain homotopy equivalent to a finitely generated free A-complex which is trivial in dimensions greater than n + 1. Since A is noetherian the homology and cohomology modules of such a complex are finitely generated. Alexander duality in 5"+ 2 gives # i ( X ; Z ) £ Z*4, Hq(X;Z) = 0 for 1 < q < n and tfn+1(X;Z) £ Z ^ 1 . It then follows immediately from the Wang sequence that Z ®A H\{X\ A) = Z ^ - 1 , Z ®A Hq(X;A) = 0 tor 1 < q < n and that i 7 n + i ( X ; A) has rank // — 1. Moreover multiplication by t — 1 is injective on H\(X; A) if n > 1. It follows easily via the Snake Lemma that t—1 acts invertibly on T # i p f ; A), and so Z <8>A T # i ( X ; A) = 0 if n > 1. The module Hn+i(X; A) is free since it is the kernel of a homomorphism between free A-modules. Since dXT is a union of copies of Sn x R the natural homomorphism Hq(X;A) —> Hq(X,dX;A) is an isomorphism if q / 0, 1, n or n + 1, a monomorphism if g = 1 or n + 1 and an epimorphism if # = 0 or n. The kernels and cokernels are torsion modules, since H0(dX;A) = Hn(dX;A) = Z». The rest of (4) now follows from (2), the UCSS and Poincare duality, while (5) is a case of Hopf 's Theorem. Since Hq(X; A) is a torsion module for 1 < q < n the UCSS collapses to give the exact sequences of
(6).
• Let M be a torsion A-module. The exact sequence 0 _» A _• Q(t) -> Q(t)/A -+ 0
2.5. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
35
leads to natural isomorphisms elM = HorriA(M,Q(t)/A), since Q(t) is injective. If N is a finite A-module there are also natural isomorphisms e2N = Homz(N,Q/Z) (see [Le77]). Therefore the Poincare duality isomorphisms in conjunction with the above exact sequences give rise to pairings: (Blanchfield) (, ) : tHq{X; A) x tHn+1_q(X; A) -> Q(*)/A (Farber-Levine) [, ] : zHq(X;A)
x zHn-q(X;A)
-» Q / Z
The Blanchfield pairings are sesquilinear while the Farber-Levine pairings are Z-linear and isometric ([ta,tft] = [a, ft] for any a € zHq(X;A) and ft € zHn-q(X; A)). In each case the adjoint homomorphisms are isomorphisms. If n = 2q+l then (y, x) — (—l)9(x, y), for all x,y € tHq(X;A), while if n = 2<7 it can be shown that [x,y] = (-l)« - 1 [y,a:], for all a;,y G zF g (X;A). If n = 3 there is a Rochlin constraint on the pairing on tH2(X;A). These pairings play central roles in the classification of simple (2q + l)-knots (with q > 1) and simple 2q-knots (with q > 4), respectively [Le70], [Ke75], [Fa83]. Conversely, given n > 1 and any system of modules Hq for 1 < Q < [ n /2] satisfying the conditions of the Lemma and such that TH\n/2\ or zHn/2 admits such a self-dual pairing (for n odd or even, respectively) and the additional condition p.d.^H\ < 1 (which is not necessary) there is a /i-component n-link L such that Hq(X; A) = Hq for 1 < q < [n/2]. There is a parallel result in which the link group 7r is also specified (subject to a constraint stronger than def (w) — fi if n = 2) and H.2 maps onto /^(TT; A). (See [Ne88]. These results extend the work of [Le77] on knot modules and their duality pairings). 2.5. The maximal abelian cover In the remaining sections we shall consider only classical links, as little is known about the homology modules or duality pairings on the maximal abelian covers of higher dimensional links. (Since AM has global dimension fi+1 it is rather difficult to extract useful results about such pairings if fi > 1. We shall however give an analogue of Theorem 2.1 at the end of Chapter 4).
36
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
If M is a finitely generated A^-module, let TM be its A^-torsion submodule and let zM be the submodule of TM generated by elements whose annihilator ideal is not contained in a proper principal ideal. (This is the maximal pseudonull submodule of M, cf. Chapter 3). Let tM = TM/zM. Let L be a /x-component 1-link and let p : X' —> X be the maximal abelian cover of the exterior X — X(L). The meridians of L determine an isomorphism of the covering group TT/TT' = Aut(X'/X) with Z^, and so we may identify Z[7r/7r'] with A^. Let V be the sesquilinear pairing from TH\{X\A^) x TH\(X,dX; AM) to S(Atl) given by the construction of §3. Since z5(AM) = 0 we have V(x, y) = 0 if £ € zH\(X; Afj,) or y € zHi(X, dX; AM). The resulting pairing of tH\{X;A^) with tH\(X,dX; A^) into S(A/j,) is in fact nonsingular. (It may easily be verified by localizing at principal prime ideals that zflp(X; A,,) is the kernel of 6qDq\THp{x.Kii)). When fi = 1 the natural map from H\(X; A) to H\(X, dX; A) is an isomorphism, and zH\(X;A) = 0. The UCSS and duality imply that elH\(X; A) = Hi(X;A). In general, the two outer maps of the sequence H^dX; Ai) -
ffi(X;Ai)
- Hx{X,dX;k{)
->
H^dX-A^
are non-zero. However the extreme terms vanish after localization with respect to any multiplicative system containing I l ^ ^ t j — 1). The localized Blanchfield pairing is then a (+l)-linking pairing on the localization of tH\{X\A^). Note also that the localization of 7M with respect to any such multiplicative system is free, so the localized link module sequence splits. The minimal option is the multiplicative system S generated by these monomials; another interesting choice is the system S generated by all nonzero 1-variable polynomials. For knots multiplication by t — 1 is invertible on H\(X; Ai), and so no information is lost on localization with respect to S. Localization with respect to E annihilates knot modules. It follows easily from this and from Rolfsen's theorem on isotopies that the E-localized Blanchfield pairing is invariant under isotopy. Let bs(L) and b%(L) be the localized Blanchfield pairings of L.
2.6. CONCORDANCE
37
2.6. Concordance We need some further terminology in order to describe the concordance invariants corresponding to the Blanchfield pairing. The sum of two e-linking pairings (M,b) and (M',b') over a ring R with an involution is the pairing (M, b) © (M',b') with underlying module M © M' and with map sending {(mi, mi), (m2, m'2)) to 6(7711,7712) + b'(m'i,m'^). A pairing is neutral if M contains a submodule N such that N = N1 = {m € M \ b{n,m) = OVn e iV}. It is hyperbolic if it is the direct sum of two such submodules. Two pairings are Witt equivalent if there are neutral pairings (N, c) and (N', d) such that (M, 6)©(iV, c) ^ (M', V)@(N', c'). The next result is clear. T H E O R E M 2.2. TTie sei o/ Witt equivalence classes of e-linking pairings is an abelian group, with respect to the addition determined by the sum of pairings and with (M, —b) representing the inverse of the class of (M, b). •
If R is a localization of AM let W e (Q(*i,... t^), R, —) denote this Witt group. If L is a 1-link let Bs(L) and B%(L) denote the Witt equivalence classes of bs(L) and b-^(L) in W+i(Q(£i,... t M ), A^s, —) and W+i(Q(ti,... t^), A^s, - ) , respectively. THEOREM 2.3. Let L(0) and L(l) 6e concordant links. BS(L(0)) = BS(L(1)).
Then
Let £ be a concordance from L(0) to L(\). Let N(C) be an open regular neighbourhood for the image of C, and let Z = S3 x I - W(£). Then d Z = X 0 U p(Sl x S 1 x 7) U Xx, where X; = Z Pi ( 5 3 x {z}) is the complement of L(i) (for i = 0,1) and where the j t / l boundary component of XQ is identified with the j t h boundary component of Xi via an orientation reversing map. The inclusions of XQ and X\ into Z each induce isomorphisms on homology. The Mayer-Vietoris sequence of the triple (dZ', XQ,X[) gives an isomorphism Hi(dZ; A^sj = # I ( X 0 ; A M S ) © H^X^A^). Clearly the Blanchfield pairing on tHi(dZ; A^s) is the direct sum of the Blanchfield pairing on tHi(Xo; AMs) with the negative of the Blanchfield PROOF.
38
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
pairing on iH^X^A^s). Thus to show that Bs(L(0)) = Bs{L(l)) it shall suffice to show that tH\{dZ\ A^s) contains a submodule which is its own annihilator with respect to the pairing. The differentials in the chain complex for the maximal abelian cover of (Z, Xo) reduce to those of the pair. Therefore H
—2—
TH^dZiAJ^THiiZiAJ
is exact. Let P be the image of TH2{Z,dZ\A^s) in tHi(dZ;A^s)Then P is such a submodule. For let Q, R be relative 2-cycles on {Z\ dZ1) representing torsion classes in H2(Z,dZ\Ail) and let q, r be the boundaries of Q,R, respectively, which are 1-cycles on dZ' representing classes in P. Then ar = ds for some nonzero a € A^ and some 2-chain s on dZ''. Then
Vdz>(q,r) = (a)-li:l€z^idz'(q,ish = {a)~l^£zniz>{Q,is)i = Vz'iQ,?) (where r,s denote r, s considered as chains on Z') = 0 in S{Afj), since r bounds R in X'. Thus P < P^. Now let w b e a 1-cycle on dZ' representing a torsion class in THi(dZ;Afj,) (so that j3w = dW for some nonzero (3 6 A and some 2-chain W on dZ') and suppose Vdz'(q, w) = 0 for every 1-cycle q as above, representing a class in P. Then Vz>(Q, w) = Vdz\q-, w) = 0 and hence w bounds in Z', by the primitivity of the Blanchfield pairing for (Z', dZ'). Hence the class represented by w is in the image of d, and so P1 = P. This proves the theorem. • COROLLARY
2.3.1. If L is null concordant then P>s(L) = 0.
•
The analogous results for P>Y.(L) are also immediate consequences of this theorem, namely B E (L(0)) = £ s ( L ( l ) ) if L(0) and L(1) are PL /-equivalent, and in particular B^(L) = 0 if L is PL /-equivalent to a trivial link. The higher-dimensional analogue of B>s(K) is a complete invariant for knot concordance [Ke75']. Although this is not so in the classical case, the known invariants there may be derived from duality pairings on covering spaces [COT99].
2.7. ADDITIVITY
39
2.7. Additivity Let L_ and L+ be /x-component n-links. After an ambient isotopy of each link, if necessary, it may be supposed that Im(L_) c ZT+ 2 , Im(L+) C Dl+2 (where Sn+2 = £>™+2 U D^2) and that for each I < i < fi the ith component of L_ meets Im(L+) only in an arc contained in the ith component of L+, which receives opposing orientations from L_ and L+. Then the closure of the union of arcs Im(L_) Ulm(L+) — (Im(L_) nlm(L+)) is the image of a compatibly oriented link. If one of the links L± is split the ambient isotopy type of the new link is well defined. In particular, this connected sum induces an addition on Cn, the set of knot concordance classes, and the Blanchfield pairing gives rise to a homomorphism from Cn to W e (Q(t),Ai,-), where e = ( - l ) n + 1 . In general however, the connected sum of two links is not well defined, even modulo concordance. For instance the Hopf link may be summed with its reflection to give either a 2-component trivial link or a link L with a(L) = 1. It may also be summed with itself to give a link L with linking number 2 and TA(L) = A2/(M2 + !)• The localization of the latter module with respect to S has length 1 as a A2£-module, and so cannot support any pairing whose Witt class is divisible by 2, as might be expected if additivity always held. Nevertheless some additivity results may be obtained by restricting the classes of links considered. (An alternative approach is to consider based links - see Chapter 12). Let L-$L+ denote any link formed in the above fashion from two such links. In the first place if £ is a concordance then C\^xi embeds fi disjoint arcs and so by general position and the isotopy extension theorem it may be assumed that Im(£) is contained in D " + x I and meets Sn+1 x I in (fJ-Dn) x L Hence if LQ and L are concordant to L'Q and L', respectively, then any link of the form Lo$L is concordant to some link of the form L'^L'. In particular, the set of concordance classes containing split links forms an abelian group, isomorphic to (C n ) M , which acts on the set Cn(/x) of concordance classes of ^-component links. (In fact Cn(fi) is equivariantly isomorphic to ( C y x C^(fi), where C^(/x) is the set of PL /-equivalence
40
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
classes of links. The map from C[(fi) to Ci(/i) sends the class of L to the class of Lj}(H(—Lj)), where II(—Li) is the split link whose ith component is the reflected inverse of Li). Secondly, if L± are each boundary links, and bound systems of disjoint surfaces in D±*~2 then L-$L+ is a boundary link. If n — 1 it is clear from the interpretation of the Blanchfield pairing in terms of Seifert surfaces (see §8 below) that Bs(L-$L+) = Bs(L-) + Bs(L+). Hence the image of the set of boundary 1-links in W+(Q(*i,... t^), A^s, - ) is a subgroup. (Since Bs(-L) = -BS(L) it is clearly closed under inversion). However, the ribbon link L1UL2 of Figure 7.1 is a connected sum of two copies of the trivial link, so a connected sum of boundary links need not be a boundary link. (In this example the homology modules are all torsion free, and so the Blanchfield pairings still add). 2.8. The Seifert approach for boundary 1-links The high dimensional knot concordance groups were first computed in terms of Seifert matrices [Le69], and the Blanchfield pairing for a knot may be derived from such a matrix [Ke75], [Tr77]. A similar computation may also be carried through for boundary links. Let L be a //-component boundary 1-link and let Uj (1 < j < /J,) be disjoint orientable surfaces spanning L. These surfaces are naturally oriented, by the conventions of Chapter I. Let Y — X — L)W where W is an open regular neighbourhood of U = Ullj in X. As in §2 there is a Mayer-Vietoris sequence • • • AM ® HX{U) - ^ - » AM ® HX(Y) - • # i ( X ; A„) - • A^ ® H0(U) where di|#„(c/-)®A = (*j+)*®*j — (£J-)*<8>1. We shall need one result from Chapter 3 below to complete the next lemma. LEMMA
2.4. iH^X-A,,)
= TH^X-A^)
= Coker(di).
Clearly THi(X;Af,) < Coker(di), since H0(U)AM is a free module. Let {a.jm \ 1 < m < m(j)} be a basis for Hi(Uj), for 1 < j < M- Linking in S3 establishes the Alexander duality between H^U) and Hi(Y) = Hi(S3 - U); let {ajm | 1 < m < m(j), 1 < j < PROOF.
2.8. THE SEIFERT APPROACH FOR BOUNDARY 1-LINKS
41
fj,} be the dual basis, so that lk(aj m , £*&„) = 1 if j = k and m = n, and is 0 otherwise. Let M — Sm(j).
Let A be the matrix of (i+)* = ®(ij+)* • H\(U) -> H\{Y) with respect to these bases. Then d\ is represented by the M x M matrix A = QA—Atr where 0 is the diagonal matrix diag[ti, ...t]_,t2,... t^], where there are m(i) repetitions of t{, for 1 < i < fi. As A — Atr is the matrix in the corresponding Mayer-Vietoris sequence for X, it is invertible, and so det(A) ^ 0. Therefore Coker(di) is a torsion module and there is an exact sequence 0 - (A M ) M - (A M ) M - THX{X- A,,) - 0. Therefore zHi{X\A^) TH^X-K^).
= 0, by Theorem 3.8, and so tH^X;^)
= D
Using the same symbols to denote 1-chains in U, Y representing the classes ftj'mi oikn respectively, consider the 2-chain [ 1,1] X Qtjm in X'. Then d([—1,1] x otjm) = tjij+(ajm) — ij-(ajm) and so d([— 1,1] x Tiqjmajm) represents £(A<7)fcnafcn. Therefore, if 5 — det(A), SY.rkn&kn is the class of d([— 1,1] x Tl(A~1Sr)jTnajm) where the matrix A - 1 6 has coefficients in A^, and so the Blanchfield pairing on THi(X;A^) is given by
Mr),# a )) = m r ) , j , # S ) ) = J _ 1 J x ' ( [ - l , l ] x E(A_1<5r)jmQ;jm,T,sknOikn) = J _ 1 Es^'S(A _ 1 ^r) : ; m /x'([-l>l] _1
_1
- 5 Ssfc^S(A 5r) j m (l -
=
tr
X
<Xjm,®kn)
tj)6jk5mn
1
s (I-Q)A- r
(where r and s are column vectors in (A^) , and the equations are taken in S(AfJj) = (AM)o/AM). Thus for boundary links the pairing on tHi(X; A^) is primitive, and in fact perfect, even before localization. (Notice that det(A) represents the Alexander class here). A similar construction works for homology boundary links. Splitting along a system of singular Seifert surfaces V = UV^ and using the Corollary to Theorem 4.14 leads to a short free resolution of
42
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
iHi(X;hij) = THi(X;Afj,)/P. It is however better to localize and thus have an invariant applicable to all links, as there are ribbon links which are not homology boundary links, and so the latter class is not closed under concordance. 2.9. Signatures In the odd dimensional knot theoretic cases the Witt groups WE(Q(t),A,-) are isomorphic to Z°° © (Z/4Z)°° © (Z/2Z)°°, for q e = (—l) [Le69]. The Z summands are detected by signature homomorphisms. LEMMA 2.5. If b is a primitive e-hermitean pairing on a finitely generated R-torsion module M and if N is a finitely generated submodule of M such that N < N1- then (M, b) is Witt-equivalent to (iV-L/./V-L-L,6;v), where b^ is the primitive e-hermitean pairing induced on N±/N-L± by b. PROOF. The pairing b^ is defined by bjv(H, in']) = b(n,n') for all n, n' G N1- is clearly a primitive e-hermitean pairing. Let P = {(P, bl) I P
e
N±
}
be
the
image of N^ in M © (N-^/N^) under the diagonal embedding. Then P is self-orthogonal with respect to ft © (—6JV), for if m 6 M and n 6 N-^ are such that b © (-bN)((m, [n]), (p, ]p])) = 0 for all p e Nx, then 6( m — n, p) = 0 for all p 6 N1- and so m — n G N-11. In particular, m is in and (m, [n]) = (m, [m]) is in P . Therefore (M,b) © (N1/N11,bN) is neutral. • Let i? be a discrete valuation ring with maximal ideal p and field of fractions i?o, and with an involution". If (M, b) is an elinking pairing over R and N is a submodule of M then clearly N < N, and as these submodules have the same length they are in fact equal. If M is annihilated by p" then b takes values in the submodule p~nR/R of RQ/R. Thus if n > 1 and N = pn~lM we have N < N±. Hence (M,b) is Witt-equivalent to (N±/N,bN), where b^ is the ^-linking pairing induced on N^/N by b. Repeating this argument, we see that (M, b) is Witt equivalent to some (M', b') where pM — 0. As M' is then a vector space over the residue
2.9. SIGNATURES
43
field kp = R/p and b' takes values in p~xR/R = kp, we may regard (m',6') as an e-hermitean form on M'. Conversely, every such ehermitean form on a fcp-vector space may be viewed as a e-linking pairing on a torsion i?p-module. Hence We(F, Rp, —) = We(kp,—). Any (+l)-hermitean form (V, b) over an involuted field K splits as an orthogonal direct sum of pairings on 1-dimensional subspaces. If M is a finitely generated R[t]-torsion module then M = ©M p , where M p = Rp ®R M is the p-primary submodule, and the summation is over all prime ideals p = (p(t)) of R[t]. If moreover b is an ^-linking pairing on M then it is easily seen that the summands Mp and Mq are orthogonal if p / q. Moreover if p ^ p then the restriction of the pairing to M p © Mp is neutral (since (Mp)1- = Mp in this submodule). Let RA = R[t,t~x]. Then We(R(t),RA, - ) is naturally isomorphic to ®W£(R(t)/(p(t)),—), where the sum is taken over all irreducible real polynomials such that p(t) = p(£ - 1 ). Apart from t + 1 and t — 1, which play no part in knot theory, any such polynomial must be a quadratic of the form pe(t) = t2 — cos(#)£ + 1, for some 0 < 9 < ir. The induced maps of We(Q(£), A, —) onto W£(R(t)/(p9(t)),-) = Z are the Milnor signatures of. (See [Sto] for a detailed study of the Witt groups We(Q(t), A, —)). These signatures were first denned for a 1-knot K in terms of the Milnor pairing bf on H = H^X^dX'iR) given by b%(a,P) = (aUt*/3 + Pi) t*a)[X',dX'] for all a,/3 e H, where t is the generator of Aut(X'/X) corresponding to a meridian and [X1, dX'] is the generator of H2(X', dX'; Z) determined by the orientation of X. If 9 is irreducible and 9=9 then the ^-primary submodule of H is an orthogonal direct summand and GQ1(K) is the signature of the restriction of bj^ to this summand [Ke79], [Li84]. With respect to a suitable basis b^ has matrix A + Atr, where A is a Seifert matrix for K [Er69]. In this guise b^ and its signature cr(K) (the sum of all the cr^(K)) were originally due to Trotter [Tr62]. The pairing and signature were extended to links by Murasugi [Mu65']. The sum cr(L) + Ti^jiij is invariant under changes of orientation [Mu70']. More generally, if A is the Seifert matrix associated to the homology in degree q of a Seifert hypersurface for a (2q + l)-link L
44
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
and £ is a complex number of modulus 1 then (1 — £)A + (1 — £)Atr is a (—l) 9+1 -hermitean matrix. The signatures (TA(€) S Z depend only on L, and so define a function GL : S1 —* Z. (This is due to [Tr69] for 1-links and [Le69] for odd-dimensional knots). The function GL is piecewise continuous, with jumps only at the roots of A(t) = det(tA - Atr). The jump in aL at 0 € S1 is just of [Ma77], [Li84]. If £ is a pth root of unity for some prime p then CTL(0 is a concordance invariant [Tr69]. Since roots of unity of prime order are dense in 5 1 the function obtained from GL by replacing the value at discontinuities by the average of the limits from either side is also a concordance invariant. The function GL is also a skein invariant, for links with nonzero first Alexander polynomial [Li90]. Viro reinterpreted these signatures for roots of unity in terms of the G-Index Theorem. Let Vk be the fc-fold branched cyclic cover of D 2 9 + 4 , branched o v e r a proper codimension 2 submanifold spanning a (2q + l)-link L. The covering group Z/kZ has a canonical generator t, and acts isometrically on iJg+2(^fc;C) with respect to the intersection pairing. The signature of the restriction of this pairing to the £-eigenspace of the action of t is independent of the choice of spanning submanifold, and is a concordance invariant if k is a prime power, by a G-Index Theorem argument. Moreover if q = 0 and £ is a kth root of unity this signature is GL{£) [Vi73]. (See also [KT76] for the case q = 0 and £ = —1). Smolinsky has extended the G-Index Theorem approach to define multisignatures associated to finite abelian covers of the exteriors of (2q + l)-links [Sm89]. In the classical case similar multisignatures were defined by Cooper [Cp82]. These are again concordance invariants. Can the link signature invariants also be interpreted as homomorphisms from a Witt group to Zl There are also signature invariants associated to pairings on canonical subquotients of a knot module supporting a Blanchfield pairing. Let (M, b) be a +l-linking pairing over RA p , where p = (pe(t)). is generated by an irreducible self-conjugate quadratic polynomial. For each r > 1 let M(r) = {m e M \ pe(t)r — 0} and MT = M(r)/(M(r - l)+pe(t)M(r + 1)). Let <[m], [n])r = 6(p f l (t)'- 1 m,n)
2.9. SIGNATURES
45
for m, n 6 M. Then M r is a finite dimensional vector space over the field MA/p = C, and (-, — ) r is an hermitean pairing on Mr. This pairing is determined up to isomorphism by its signature of (M, b). These signatures are not Witt invariant, but are 0 if M is the direct sum of two self-annihilating submodules. In [Ke81] it is shown that these signatures provide invariants of DNC-equivalence for odd dimensional knots. (For (Aq — l)-knots the Blanchfield pairing is skew hermitean, but multiplication by t —1~1 gives a +l-linking pairing). We shall mention only one of the projections to a torsion summand, the Z/2Z-va\ued Arf invariant, which plays an important role in applications of links to questions about surfaces in 4-manifolds. Robertello defined this invariant for 1-knots in terms of a 4-manifold pair (W4, D2) with boundary (S3, K) and showed that it was a concordance invariant and that it may be computed in terms of a quadratic enhancement of the Seifert form [Ro65]. Levine defined the Arf invariant for odd dimensional knots and showed that Arf(K) — 0 in Z/2Z if and only if Afl-(-l) = ± 1 mod (8), where Afl-(t) is the Alexander polynomial of K [Le66]. (Curiously, this is detected by the image of AK(t) in Rx/{t), where R = F 2 [Z/4Z] = ¥2[t]/(tA - 1)). Since the figure eight knot 4i has Alexander polynomial t2 — 3t + 1 its Arf invariant is nontrivial, and since 4i is -amphicheiral it represents an element of order at most 2 in C\. Hence the Arf invariant homomorphism splits off a ZflZ summand of C\. The Arf invariant has been extended to proper links. A /zcomponent 1-link L is proper if the total linking number of each component Li with all the other components is even, i.e., if Ej^j^j = 0 mod (2) for 1 < i < fi. (Note that sublinks of proper links need not be proper). Robertello showed that if there is a knot K and a planar surface in S3 x [0,1] with boundary L x {0}U K x {1} then Arf(K) depends only on L, provided that L is proper, and so we may set Arf(L) = Arf(K). (Such knots and planar surfaces may be obtained by iterated fusions of distinct components of the link). It is not yet known whether Arf(L) admits a simple description in terms of other invariants of the link, although Arf(L) may be derived from the second derivative of the Conway polynomial of L and its sublinks
46
2. HOMOLOGY AND DUALITY IN COVERS
if all the linking numbers £ij are even [Ho84]. (Hoste's formula is well defined for all links, but it is not known whether it agrees with the Arf invariant for all proper links, nor what its significance may be for other links). See also [Gi93], [KYOO] and [Kw02]. Duality in other covering spaces leads to further invariants. See also [Sm89'], [C093], [CK99] and [LeOO].
CHAPTER 3
Determinantal Invariants In this chapter we shall describe the main determinantal invariants of modules and chain complexes over a noetherian ring R, namely the elementary ideals, their divisorial hulls, ReidemeisterFranz torsion and the Steinitz-Fox-Smythe invariant. We shall also consider some special features of low-dimensional rings and Witt groups of hermitean pairings on torsion modules. Our principal technique shall be to reduce to the case of a discrete valuation ring by localizing at height one prime ideals. (In our applications R shall usually be a quotient of a ring of Laurent polynomials over Z or a field). 3.1. E l e m e n t a r y ideals Let R be a commutative noetherian ring. Let Rx denote the group of units (invertible elements) of R. If two elements r,s G R generate the same principal ideal, i.e., if r = us for some u € Rx, we shall write r = s. If 7 is an ideal of R then \/T is the intersection of the prime ideals that contain I. In particular, radR = VO is the ideal generated by all nilpotent elements of R. A nonzero ideal I of a noetherian domain R is invertible if it is projective as an Rmodule. The ring R has global dimension d if every i?-module M has a projective resolution of length d. Let M be a finitely generated .R-module. The R-torsion submodule of M is TM - {m e M \ rm - 0 for some r G M}, and M is an i?-torsion module if TM = M. The annihilator ideal of M is Ann(M) = {r e R | rm = 0 Vm G M}. If R is an integral domain the rank of M is the dimension of Mo = Ro <8>R M as a vector space over the field of fractions RQ. 47
48
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
We may assume that there is an epimorphism (j>: Rq —> M whose kernel is generated by p elements. If we view the elements of Rq as row vectors then a set of p generators for Ker(>) determines a p x q presentation matrix Q for M. This presentation has deficiency q—p. If Q is injective the exact sequence 0 - • RP — ^ Ri^M-*0 is a short free resolution of M. For each k > 0 the kth elementary ideal of M is the ideal Ek(M) generated by the (q — k) x (q — k) subdeterminants of the matrix representing Q if k < q and by 1 if k > q. Two such finite presentations for M may be related by a sequence of elementary operations ("Tietze moves") and it is not hard to see that these ideals depend only on M [CF]. Clearly Ek{M) < Ek+1(M) and Ek(Ms) = Ek(M)s for any multiplicative system S in R. More generally, if / : R —> R' is a ring homomorphism then f(Q) is a presentation matrix for M' = R' ®R M over R', and so Ek(M') is the ideal generated by f(Ek(M)) in R!. For each k > 0 let A^M be the kth exterior power of M, and let a^M = Ann(AkM). This notation is due to Auslander and Buchsbaum, who showed that if R is a local domain and a^M is principal for all k then M is a direct sum of cyclic modules, and used this to give criteria for projectivity [AB62]. Since Afc(Ms) = (AfcM)s it follows that ak(Ms) = (af-M)s, while clearly akM < ak+iM. We shall usually invoke Cramer's rule in the following form. Let A be an a x a i?-rnatrix and let d ^ 0 divide each of the (a—1) x (a—1) subdeterminants of A. If u is a a x 1 column vector or a 1 x a row vector then (det(A)/d)u is an .R-linear combination of the columns or rows of A, respectively. THEOREM 3.1. Let M be a finitely generated R-module of rank r. Then (1) EQ{M) < Ann(M) - axMj_ (2) if R is a domain then y/Er(M) < y/EQ(TM); (3) y/Ek(M) = y/ak+lM for each k>0. (1) We may assume E0(M) / 0. Let D be a q x q submatrix of a presentation matrix Q for M, with <5 = det(D) ^ 0. PROOF.
3.1. ELEMENTARY IDEALS
49
Then 5W < D{R*) < Q(RP), by Cramer's rule, and so S<j>(u) = (f)(5u) is in Im(>Q) = 0 for all u in Rq. Hence 5 is in Ann(M) and so E0(M) < Ann(M). (2) A similar argument shows that y/Er(M) < ^/EQ{TM). (3) Let p be a prime ideal of R. We must show that Ek(M) < p if and only if ak+\M < p. We may localize with respect to S — R — p and thus assume that P is the unique maximal ideal of R. Let q be the dimension of M/pM as a vector space over the field R/p. Then ak(M/pM) = 0 if k < q and aq+i(M/pM) = R/p, so akM < p if and only if k < q. Moreover M has a presentation with q generators, by Nakayama's Lemma. Since M/pM has dimension q, all the entries of the presentation matrix are in p, and hence Ek(M) < p if and only if k < q, that is, if and only if ak+\M < p. In other words, y/Ek(M) - ^Jak+\M. • In fact Ek(M) < ak+1M < (Ek(M) : Ek+1(M)), for all k > 0 [BE77]. (This paper also gives sufficient conditions for these ideals to be equal). Is Er(M) = EQ(TM)Er(M/TM) always? (See Theorem 3.12 below). Assume for the remainder of this section that R is an integrally closed noetherian domain. (Most of our arguments apply also to any Krull domain). If I is an ideal in R its divisorial hull I is the intersection of the principal ideals of R which contain I. If S is a multiplicative system in R then Is = Is as ideals of the localization Rs, while if R is factorial and 1^0 then / is the principal ideal generated by the highest common factor of the elements of 7. LEMMA 3.2. The divisorial hull of I is flip, the intersection of all of its localizations at height one prime ideals p of R. Since R is an integrally closed noetherian domain it is the intersection of all of its localizations at height 1 primes, and these are each discrete valuation rings. Therefore if I is an ideal of R then Ip = 7 p so I < C\(I)P = n / p = n/p. On the other hand, if I < (a) then n/p < n(a)p = (a) D Rp = (a), so <Mp
If R is factorial and M is a finitely generated i?-module let Afc(M) be any generator of the principal ideal Ek(M), for all k > 0,
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
50
and let Xk(M) = Ak-i(M)/Ak(M), for all k > r. We shall also let Afc(M) = 0 for k < r. If M is an .R-torsion module its order is Ao(Af). We shall say that M satisfies the Elementary Divisor Theorem if it is isomorphic to a direct sum ®i>i(R/(0i)), with 6i+\ dividing 9i for all i > 1. Finitely generated modules over principal ideal domains (PIDs) satisfy the Elementary Divisor Theorem; this is one formulation of the structure theorem for such modules. LEMMA 3.3. If R is a discrete valuation ring and M is a finitely generated R-module of rank r then akM = 0 if k < r and ar+jM = ajTM = (Xr+j(M)), for all j > 1. PROOF. Let p be the maximal ideal of R. Then M = Rr ® TM and TM ^ 0-="(-R/p e ( i ) ), where e{i) > e(i + 1) > 0 for 1 < i < n, by the Elementary Divisor Theorem. Therefore Ek(M) — 0 if k < r and Er+j(M) = Ej(TM) = p % where SJ = S^" + 1 e(i), for each j > 0. Moreover AkM ^ QQiAk-jTM)®. Hence akM = 0 if k < r and ar+jM = ajTM for all j > 0, and so we may assume r = 0. Let I(k) = {L = (i(l),...i(k)) 6 Nfc | 1 < i(l) < ••• < i(k) < where n}. Then AkM - 0 t £ / ( f c ) ((i?/p e ( i ( f c ) ) ) = ®ti(R/Pe{i))m, f(i) = \{t € I(k - 1) | i(k - 1) < *}|. Clearly f(i) = 0 if i < k and f{k) = 1. Therefore akM = Ann(AkM) = p<^ = (Xk(M)). D It follows that for modules M over a Krull domain R the ideal ar+j(M) and the ideal quotient (Er+k_i(M) : Er+k(M)) have the same divisorial hull. THEOREM 3.4. If R is factorial and M is a finitely generated Rmodule of rank r then akM = 0 for all k < r and OL^M = (Xk(M)) for all k > r. Hence Xk+i(M) divides Xk{M) for all k > r and A r + j ( M ) = Aj(TM) for each j > 0. By Lemma 3.2 it is enough to prove that the localizations of the ideals at height 1 primes are the same. This follows from Lemma 3.3 on observing that every step (forming exterior powers, annihilators, etc.) is compatible with localization. • PROOF.
3.1. ELEMENTARY IDEALS
51
COROLLARY 3.4.1. If M is an R-torsion module with a square presentation matrix then Ann(M) — (Ai(M)). It follows easily from Cramer's rule that (Ai(M)) < = a i M < a{M = (A : (M)). D
PROOF.
Ann(M)
A finitely generated .R-module M is pseudonull if Mp = 0 for every height 1 prime ideal p of R. A homomorphism / : M —>• N is an elementary pseudoisomorphism if Ker(/) and Cok(/) are pseudonull. Pseudoisomorphism is the equivalence relation generated by elementary pseudoisomorphisms. T H E O R E M 3.5. Let M and N be finitely generated R-torsion modules. Then M and N are pseudoisomorphic if and only if Ek(M) = Ek(N), for each k > 0. In particular, M is pseudonull if and only if ct{M — R. P R O O F . Since Ek{M)p = Ek(Mp) = Ek({N)p) = Ek(N)p the necessity of these conditions is clear. Suppose that they hold, and let M = ®PMP and N = (BPNP, where the sums are taken over the height 1 primes p which divide E0(M) = E0(N). Let j M • M - • M and jjv : N —> N be the canonical homomorphisms. There is an isomorphism 6 : N = M, by the Elementary Divisor Theorem. Let P = JM(M) + 9JN(N). Then JM and 8JN determine elementary pseudoisomorphisms from M and N to P. The final observation is similar. •
See Theorem VII.4.5 of [Bou] for a different proof of an equivalent result. In general, if M and N are pseudoisomorphic then a^M = ajcN and Ek(M) — Ek(N), for each k > 0. Are modules of rank > 0 determined up to pseudoisomorphism by their elementary ideals? 3.6. Let A be a b x c R-matrix of rank d, and suppose that there is a dxd submatrix D such that det(D) divides every dxd subdeterminant of A. Then there are invertible square matrices B and C such that BAC = ( £ g). LEMMA
PROOF. After permuting the rows and columns if necessary, we may assume that D is in the top left hand corner of A. We may
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
52
then apply Cramer's rule to annihilate the partial rows and columns below and to the right of D. The bottom right hand corner block of the resulting matrix must be zero as the ranks of BAC and D are both d. D A finitely generated .R-module is projective if and only if the localization Mp is a free .Rp-module, for each prime ideal p of R. (Thus an ideal J is invertible if and only if every localization Jp is principal). THEOREM 3.7. Let M be a finitely generated R-module of rank r. Then Er(M) is invertible if and only if P = M/TM is projective and p.d.RTM < 1. If so, then M £ P ®TM and Er+j(M) = Ej(TM) for each j > 0. PROOF. Suppose that Er(M) is invertible and let Q be a presentation matrix for M. Let P = M/TM. On localizing at each prime ideal p we may apply Lemma 3.6, for any generating set of a principal ideal in a local domain must contain a generator, by Nakayama's Lemma. Thus Mp = J ^ , 9 TMp, and TMP has a short free resolution. Thus Pp is free. Hence P is projective and so M = P © TM. Moreover ifip : Rc —> TM is any epimorphism then Ker(V') is locally free, by Schanuel's Lemma, and hence projective, so p.d.RTM < 1. Conversely, if P is projective and p.d.RTM < 1 then Pp is free and TMP has a square presentation matrix, since it is a torsion module. Hence Er(M)p = Er(Mp) = Er{Pp © TMP) = E0{TMp) is principal and so Er(M) is invertible. The final assertion is clear. • COROLLARY 3.7.1. M is projective if and only if ET(M) = R. D THEOREM 3.8. Let M be a finitely generated R-module of rank r and such that p.d.RM < 1. Then M has no nontrivial pseudonull submodule and Ann(TM) = (A r + i(M)). Let iV be a pseudonull submodule of M and p a prime ideal of R. Then Np is a pseudonull submodule of Mp. Since N — 0 if and only if Np = 0 for all p, and since localization is exact, we may therefore assume that R is local, and hence that there is an PROOF.
3.1. ELEMENTARY IDEALS
53
epimorphism <j> : Rq —* M with free kernel. We shall induct on the rank r of M. If r = 0 then M has a square presentation matrix Q, so EQ{M) is principal and E0(M) = E0(M). Since N is pseudonull E0{M/N) = EQ{M), by Theorem 5. Hence the inclusions E0(M) < EQ{M/N) < EQ{M/N) are all equalities. Since M/N is a quotient of M it has a presentation matrix of the form [ n ) , which by the argument of Lemma 3.6 may be changed to ( ^ ) by row operations. Hence the projection of M onto M/N is an isomorphism, so N = 0. If r > 1 then we may assume that m = <^>((1,0,..., 0)) generates a free submodule of M. Let M' = M/Rm and let / : M -> M' be the canonical epimorphism. Then p.d.^M' < 1 and M' has rank r — 1, so by the inductive hypothesis M' has no nontrivial pseudonull submodule. But / maps N isomorphically into M', as Rm is torsion free. Therefore N = 0. Since (Ann(TM))TM is pseudonull Ann{TM) = Ann(TM) = (A r + i(M)), by Theorem 3.4. • If M is a torsion module then EQ(M) principal implies that M has no nontrivial pseudonull submodule, by Theorems 3.7 and 3.8. If R has global dimension < 2 and M is a finitely generated i?-module with no nontrivial pseudonull submodule then p.d.jiM < 1. (See [LV68], or Chapter 6 below for the case R = Z[t,t - 1 ]). However in general these implications are strict. (For instance, if R = Z[X] and M is any maximal ideal then EQ(M) — M is not principal, although M is torsion free, while if M = Z © (Z/2Z) = R/(X) © 12/(2, X) then the second summand is pseudonull although Ann(M) = (X) is principal). At the other extreme we may characterize pseudonull modules homologically. Let ekM = ExtkR(M,R), for all k > 0. The dual M* = e°M = Homji(M, R) is finitely generated and torsion free, and has the same rank as M. There is a natural evaluation homomorphism evM '• M —> M**, with kernel TM. The module M is reflexive if evM is an isomorphism. If M = N* then {ev^)*evj
54
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
same rank, it must be an isomorphism. Thus a finitely generated .R-module is reflexive if and only if it is a dual. If M is a torsion module then e 1 M = Homn(M,Ro/R), as follows on applying Ext^M, —) to the exact sequence 0 -» R -+ R0 -» Ro/R -» 0. Hence there is a similar evaluation WM '• M —> ele1M. THEOREM 3.9. Lei M be a finitely generated R-module.
Then
(1) M is a torsion module if and only if M* = 0; (2) Homn(M, Ro/R) is a torsion R-module with no nontrivial pseudonull submodule; (3) Ker(Wyjv/) is the maximal pseudonull submodule of M. Hence M is pseudonull if and only if e°M = elM = 0. P R O O F . The first assertion is obvious. Let mi,...,mq generate M and let / : M -> R0/R. If f(rm) = n/si mod R (with si ^ 0) then (Usi)f = 0 and so Homji(M,Ro/R) is a torsion module. If /p = 0 for all height 1 prime ideals p then f(m) G n/2 p = R for each m in M. Therefore Homji(M,Ro/R) has no nonzero pseudonull submodule. It is an immediate consequence of the structure theorem for finitely generated modules over a principal ideal domain that 1 1 WTM,P '• TMP —> e e TMp is an isomorphism for each height 1 prime ideal p. Hence Ker(Wyjvf) is pseudonull and the remaining assertions follow readily. •
3.2. The Elementary Divisor Theorem Let R be a factorial noetherian domain and M a finitely generated .R-module which is the direct sum of cyclic submodules. If M satisfies the Elementary Divisor Theorem then all of its elementary ideals are principal. To establish the converse we shall begin with the special case of the direct sum of two cyclic modules. LEMMA 3.10. Let M = (R/^a/h)) © {R/(a(32)) where (Pufo) = R. Then M ^ {R/{af3lf3<2)) © (R/(a)).
3.2. THE ELEMENTARY DIVISOR THEOREM
55
P R O O F . Let m and n e (R/(af3i))®(R/(af32)) generate the first and second summands, respectively. Since (/?i, /?2) = R, there are elements a, b in R such that af3i + bfc = 1. Let m' = am + bn and n' — ftm — Pin. Then m = /3im' + fen' and n = fam' — an', so m! and n' also generate M. Clearly aPifom' — 0 = an', so there is an epimorphism from (R/faPifo)) © (R/(a)) to M. Since these are both pure modules with 0th elementary ideal (a2/?i/?2) this must be an isomorphism. D
In general we may show that if a direct sum of cyclic modules has all its elementary ideals principal then so does the direct sum of any two cyclic summands. The lemma may then be applied repeatedly. 3.11. Let M = ©i>i(.R/(&)) and suppose that the ideals Ei(M) are all principal. Then M satisfies the Elementary Divisor Theorem. THEOREM
P R O O F . We shall work through the case of three summands and then comment on how the argument may be extended. Let a = h c f ( £ i , 6 , 6 ) , A =hcf(&/a, &/<*). ft = hc£(£i/a,&/a) and #3 = hcf(£i/a, $2/^)- Then we may factor the elements & as £1 = afofoli, £2 = 0!/3i/33^2 and £3 = afiifclzNote that a divides all the £s, each j3 divides all but one of the £/as, and each 7 divides all but two of the £/a/?s. We then have EQ{M) = (a3(/?i/32/?3)27i7273). Let Jk = &k{M)-lEk{M) for k > 0. Then h = (/?37i72,/?27i73,A7273) and J 2 = {lhfcl\,P\thl2,Pilhnz), where each of these triples have no common factor. In fact J\ = J<2 = R, since the elementary ideals of M are principal, but the notation shall be useful. Suppose that (£1,^2) = otthithli, P\l2) is n ° t principal. Then (/^27i)/3i72) is contained in some maximal ideal m. Since every element of J2 is divisible by either /?i or fall, we cannot have fa in m, for otherwise J2 < m, contradicting J2 = R. Similarly fa is not in m, so (71,72) < m. But every element of J\ is divisible by either 71 or 72 and so J\ < m, contradicting J\ — R. Therefore we must have
56
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
By Lemma 3.10, (i2/(fr)) © (i?/(&)) = (R/(S) © (fl/(a/%)), where 5 = a/3i/32/337i72- Applying the argument above, and then the lemma, gives (R/(afo)) © (i?/(6)) = ( ^ / ( " A f t & T s ) ) © (#/(«))• One more similar step shows that M satisfies the Elementary Divisor Theorem. In general, if M = ffifc>i(-R/(&)) we may factor each element ^i as (; = a((3 ... )(7 ... )...(/x... )v% where a is the highest common factor of the £jS, each j3 is common to n — 1 of the quotients £i/a, each 7 is common to n — 2 of the £/a/3s, and so on. (In principle there may be 2™ — 1 different factors, with 2 " _ 1 occuring in any one £). We then have Ao(Af) = an{T\p)n-1... (ri/j) 2 (IL/), n 1 n 2 Ai(Af) = a - (UP) ... (Ufi), and so on down to An(M) — a. (Each product is taken over all possible as, and so on). If we suppose that (£i, £2) is not principal, we may write & = £ipi where £ = h.c.f.(£i,£2) a n d (i>i,i>2) i s contained in some maximal ideal m. Assuming that Jk = R for k > 2 we may then use J n _i = R to show that no '/?' factors of ipi or tp2 are contained in m, and working down conclude that (1^1,^2) < ^iBut then J\ < m and so the elementary ideals of M could not be principal. • The Elementary Divisor Theorem also holds in the above sense for finitely generated modules over local domains, by Exercise 22 of Chapter VII of [Bou]. However it does not hold for the direct sum (R/(£)) © (R/(ip)), if £ and ip have no common factor but generate a proper ideal (£, ip) 7^ R. 3.3. Extensions In this section we shall consider relations between the determinantal invariants of a module and its sub- and quotient modules. THEOREM 3.12. Let 0 ^ K —>M—>C—> 0 be an exact sequence of R-modules, and let r be the rank of C. Then (1) Ei(M) > Ej(K)Ei-j(C) for all i > j ; (2) ifp.d.RC < 1 then Er{M) = E0(K)Er(C);
3.3. EXTENSIONS
(3) if K is a torsion module then Er(M) =
57 EQ(K)ET(C).
P R O O F . Let P(K) and P(C) be presentation matrices for K and C, respectively. It is easy to see that M has a presentation matrix of the form ( \ ' p,c-. ) . The first assertion is immediate. Since two ideals agree if and only if their localizations at maximal ideals of R agree we may assume that R is a local ring. In particular, projective .R-modules are free. Therefore if p.d.RC < 1 we may assume that P(C) is a q x (q + r) matrix of rank r. Then the only nonzero elements of Er(M) are those obtained by deleting r columns from P(C) and taking the product of the resulting element of Er(C) with a subdeterminant of P(K) of column index 0. The final assertion follows from the structure theorem for modules over discrete valuation rings, after localizing at height 1 prime ideals. •
COROLLARY 3.12.1. If R has global dimension < 2 then Er{M) = E0(TM)Er(M/TM). PROOF. This follows from the Theorem since p.d.R(M/TM)
1.
<
•
If R is a factorial domain the resultant Resji(9,ip) of 9, ip in R[u, u _ 1 ] is the highest common factor of Ann(M), where M = R[u, u - 1 ] / ^ , •(/>), considered as an .R-module. If 9 factors as 9 = n ( u — £j) in some extension of Ro then ResR(9, ip) = Hip(£j). THEOREM 3.13. Let R be a factorial noetherian domain and N a finitely generated torsion R[u,u~~ ]-module. Let 9 G R[u,u ] be a polynomial. Then Q = N/9N is a torsion R-module if and only if Ao(AQ(£) 7^ 0 for all nonzero roots £ of 9 in an algebraic closure Q. of Ro. If for each principal prime ideal p of R the Rp[u, u~~ ]ideal EQ(NP) is generated by the image of AQ(N) then Ao(Q) = ResR(A0(N),9).
PROOF. To prove the first assertion it suffices to extend coefficients from R to fi, where it becomes obvious. In the second assertion we may assume that Q is an .R-torsion module for otherwise both sides of the equation are 0. We may further assume that R is a discrete valuation ring, since AQ(Q) is determined by the localizations
58
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
of Q at principal prime ideals of R. Since Eo(N) is principal and nonzero N has no nontrivial pseudonull submodules, by Theorems 3.7 and 3.8. Hence multiplication by 9 is injective on N, for otherwise N would contain R[u, u~l]/() for some nontrivial factor of 9, which would divide Ao(AT). There is a submodule C < N which is a direct sum of cyclic modules and such that Ao(C) = Ao(iV). Hence P = N/C is pseudonull and so of finite length as an i?-module. In particular, AQ(P/9P) = A0(K), where K = Ker(9idP). We now apply the Snake Lemma to the endomorphism of the short exact sequence 0—>C—>iV—>P—>0 induced by multiplication by 9 to obtain an exact sequence 0 -» K -» C/9C -» Q -f P/9P -f 0. Using Theorem 3.12 (for R-modules) several more times, we conclude that Ao(Q) = AQ{C/6C) and are thus reduced to the case of a cyclic module, for which the result follows from basic properties of the resultant. • The next result is from [Le87]. 3.14. Let R be a factorial noetherian domain and N a finitely generated torsion R[u,u~l]-module. Let K and C be the kernel and cokernel of multiplication by u — 1 on N. Then AQ(C) = AO(K)E(AQ(N)) (where K and C are considered as R-modules and e : R[u, u - 1 ] —> R sends u to 1). THEOREM
If u — 1 is injective this is a special case of Theorem 13. If u = 1 then K = C and Ann(N) = (u — 1, J) for some ideal J in R. Either J = 0, in which case Ao(iV) = u — 1 and 5o(K) = 0, or J ^ 0 and Ao(iV) = 1. In either case the result holds. If N is an extension of N2 by the submodule Ni and the lemma holds for Ni and ./V2 then it holds for N, by a Snake Lemma argument. In particular, we may show by induction on k that it holds if (u - l)fciV = 0. (Take N1 = (u- l ) * " 1 and N2 = N/N^. Since R is noetherian and N is finitely generated the increasing sequence of submodules {Ker(u — l)k} must be finite. Let iVi be its maximal member. Then (u — 1) is nilpotent on JVi and injective PROOF.
3.4. REIDEMEISTER-FRANZ TORSION
59
on N/Ni, so the result follows from our earlier considerations and another application of the Snake Lemma. • 3.4. Reidemeister-Franz torsion Let R be an integral domain, with field of fractions RQ. If b and c are ordered bases for a finitely generated free i?-module M, with bi — TiPijCj, let [b/c] — det(P) be the determinant of the change of basis matrix. (Our notation follows [Tu86]. In more general treatments of X-theoretic torsion [b/c] denotes the image of the matrix P in Kx(R). See [Mi66] or [Tur]). Let C* be a finitely generated free chain complex over Ro, and suppose that q and hi are bases for Cj and Hi(C*), respectively. (Note that the empty set is the unique basis for the trivial module 0). Choose partial bases 6j in C* such that db{ is a basis for Im(c?;), and choose lifts hi of the bases hi to Kei(di). Then di+i(bi+i)hibi is a basis for C;. The Reidemeister-Franz torsion of the based complex is T{C*-C^K) = n[di+1(bi+1)hibi/ci]eW, where e(t) = ( - l ) i + 1 , for all i € Z. This element of RQ depends only on C„, c* and h*, and not on the choice of partial bases 6* and lifts hi. If C* is a finitely generated free chain complex over R with given bases c; and hi C Hi(C*) represents a basis for Ro ®R Hi(C*) we set T(C*;C*,/J*) = r(Ro <8>R C*; c*,/I*). If Ro <S>R C* is acyclic we write just T(C*;C*), and T(C*) for its image in RQ/RX (which is independent of the bases c*). The torsion is multiplicative with respect to extensions of complexes. [Mi66] Let 0 —> A* —» B* —» C* —> 0 be an exact sequence of finitely generated free R-chain complexes, with bases a*, 6* = a* U b't, and c*, respectively, such that b'^ maps bijectively to c*. Suppose also that the homology modules are free, with bases h*, h~ and h^. Then the exact sequence of homology H* is an acyclic complex with basis /i* — h£ U /if U /if, and r(5*;6*,/if) = ±T(A,; a», hi)r{C^ c„ h° )r(tf*; K). D THEOREM.
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
60
This was first proven in [Wh50] for the case when all the complexes are acyclic. See Theorem 3.2 of [Mi66] for the general case. The order of a torsion module is also multiplicative in short exact sequences, by Theorem 3.12, and together these results enable us to relate Reidemeister-Pranz torsion and the orders of torsion modules. THEOREM 3.15. Let C* = 0 —» Cn —• ...Co —> 0 be a finitely generated free chain complex over a factorial noetherian domain R, with bases c*, and suppose that RQ# C* is acyclic. Then T(C*) =
nAoOffi(C)) e W We shall argue by induction on the length n of C*. As the result is clearly true if n = 1 we may assume that n > 1 and that the theorem holds for all such complexes of length less than n. Let Zn-2 = Ker(„_2) have rank r, and choose c^,..., dr G C„_i whose images under <9n_i generate a free submodule of rank r. Let j : C —> C n _i be the inclusion of the submodule of C n _i generated by {c^,..., c'r}. Let C* be the subcomplex of C* such that C'q = Cq if q < n — 1, C'n_l = C and C — 0 if q > n. Let L>* be the complex PROOF.
...c" — ^ a... concentrated in degrees n and n — 1, and let C" = C* © D*. Define a chain homomorphism a* : C^ —> C" by ag = idcq if q < n — 1 and Q n -i = j ®idc- Then a* is a monomorphism with cokernel E* again concentrated in degrees n and n — 1, and given by Cn®C
- ^
C n _i.
Each of these complexes is free, and i?o<S)flCi, RO®RC" and RQ®RE* are acyclic. Equip each of the auxiliary complexes with the obvious bases. The multiplicativity of torsion implies that T^^C*) = T(C";C'1) = r(C^;c^)r(£^*;e*). The inclusion of C* into C" is a chain homotopy equivalence, and so Hq(C*) = Hq(C") for all q. The long exact sequence of homology determined by the exact sequence 0 -> Ci ^ ^
C'l -» E* -» 0
3.5. STEINITZ-FOX-SMYTHE INVARIANTS
61
breaks up into isomorphisms Hq{C'^) = Hq{C*) if q < n — 2 and an exact sequence 0 —> Hn-i(C*) —> . . . Hn-2(C*) —• 0. These modules are all .R-torsion modules, and so Ao(-H n -i(-E*))Ao(-ffn-2(C'i)) -1 = A o ( F n _ 1 ( a ) ) A 0 ( F n _ 2 ( a ) ) - 1 , by Theorem 3.12. As C'm and £* are each of length < n — 1 the result now follows from the inductive hypothesis. • This was first proven in [Mi68] for R a PID and in [Tu86] for any factorial noetherian domain. It may also be extended to any Krull domain by localization at height 1 primes and using Milnor's argument. (The result should then be viewed as identifying two fractional ideals). In §4.5 of Chapter VII of [Bou] it is shown that if R is an integrally closed noetherian domain then M i—• EQ{M) gives rise to an isomorphism KQ(T/T') = D(R), where T/T' is the category of finitely generated .R-torsion modules modulo the full subcategory of pseudonull modules and D(R) is the group of divisors (divisorial fractional ideals) of R. These different manifestations of EQ(M) are presumably related by a ^-theoretic localization sequence. 3.5. Steinitz-Fox-Smythe invariants Two nonzero ideals / and J are in the same ideal class if they are isomorphic as jR-modules, i.e., if there are nonzero elements a and b in R such that al — bJ. Every finitely generated torsion free .R-module of rank 1 is isomorphic to an ideal, and so represents an ideal class. Let M be a finitely generated .R-module of rank r and let Q be a p x q presentation matrix for M. Steinitz and Fox and Smythe showed that the ideal class of the ideal of R generated by all the subdeterminants of maximal rank from a fixed set oiq—r linearly independent rows of Q depends only on the module M, and not on the matrix Q or the set of rows chosen [St 12], [FS64]. This invariant is the SFS row class p(M); there is a similar column class 7(M). The product of these classes was determined by Steinitz [St 12]. LEMMA 3.16. Let M be a module of rank r. Then the product ~t(M)p(M) is the ideal class of Er{M).
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
62
Let Q be a presentation matrix for M. Suppose that the top left r x r submatrix D has nonzero determinant d. Given a set H of r linearly independent rows there is a matrix MH € GL(r, Ro) which carries the first r rows of Q onto H. Similarly given a set K of r linearly independent columns there is a matrix NK which carries the first r columns of Q onto K. Hence if dj{K is a nonzero r x r subdeterminant corresponding to the intersection of such sets of rows and columns then ddnK = det(Mff D)det(DNK) is the product of a subdeterminant from the first r columns with one from the first r rows. Thus the class of dEr(M) is y(M)p(M). O PROOF.
3.17. The SFS row class p(M) is the isomorphism class of the rank 1 torsion free module (ArM)/T(ArM). THEOREM
PROOF. Let U be a (q — r) X q submatrix of maximal rank q — r of a p x q presentation matrix Q. Let ip : (Rq)r —> R be the function such that ip(vi,...,vr) is the determinant of the qx q matrix whose first r rows are the vectors V{ and whose final q — r rows are given by U. Then ijj is multilinear and alternating, and ip(vi,...,vr) = 0 if any of the arguments is in the image of Q, so ip factors through ArM. The image of ip is the ideal generated by the (q—r) x (q—r) subdeterminants of R, and ip induces an isomorphism from (ArM)/T(ArM) onto this ideal. • It follows immediately that p(M/TM) = p(M). If N is another finitely generated .R-module of rank s and S = M © N then p(S) = p(M®N) is the ideal class of the tensor product of (ArM)/T(ArM) with (ASN)/T(ASN). Thus p defines a homomorphism from the semigroup of finitely generated i?-modules (with respect to direct sum) to the semigroup of ideal classes (with respect to product of ideals), i.e., p(M © N) = p(M)p(N). As moreover p(Rn) = 1 (the principal ideal class) this invariant depends only on the stable isomorphism class of M (with respect to stabilization by forming direct sums with free modules), and p(P) is the class of an invertible ideal if P is projective. If p is the ideal class of an ideal I let p* be the ideal class of e°I = HomR(I,R). The homomorphism r : Ar(e°M) -> e°(A r M),
3.6. 1- AND 2-DIMENSIONAL RINGS
63
determined by r ( / i A ... / r ) ( m i A . . . mT) = det[/j(mj)] is natural, and is an isomorphism if R is a field. The definition of r is compatible with localization and with passage to a quotient with respect to an ideal. Therefore TP is an epimorphism for all prime ideals p, by Nakayama's Lemma. Thus r is an epimorphism and so p(e°M) — p{M)\ There does not appear to be a simple general characterization of j(M) although it is easily seen that -y(M © Rn) = j(M). If p.d.RM < 1 then 7(M) is invertible. In particular, if M is projective then 7(M) = p(e°M) = p(M)*. In this case p(M) is the class of an invertible ideal and p(M)* is the class of the inverse ideal. It is not generally true that 7(M) = p(M)* for every finitely generated module. If R = Q[x, y, z] and M is the ideal (x, y, z) then 7(M) = p(M) = the class of M, which is not principal, but e°M = R and p(M)* = 1.
3.6. 1- and 2-dimensional rings A noetherian ring is 1-dimensional if it has a prime ideal which is not maximal, and if every such prime ideal p is nilpotent, i.e., such that pn = 0 for n large. Such rings arise naturally in the study of knot modules. (See Chapter 6). A 1-dimensional noetherian domain R is Dedekind if it satisfies one (and hence all) of the following equivalent conditions: (1) R is integrally closed; (2) the localization R^ is a discrete valuation ring for each maximal ideal m. (3) every nonzero ideal is invertible; (4) every nonzero ideal factors uniquely as a product of maximal ideals. Moreover the ideal class semigroup is then a group. (See Chapter 9 of [AM]). LEMMA 3.18. A Dedekind domain with only finitely many maximal ideals is a principal ideal domain.
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
64
P R O O F . Let R be a Dedekind domain with finitely many maximal ideals {m; | 1 < i < n}. Since m? ^ rrij we may choose Xi E rrij — m?, for 1 < i < n. There are elements m such that Vi — Xi e m? and yi — 1 G rrij, for all 1 < i 7^ j < n, by the Chinese Remainder Theorem (Exercise 9.9 of [AM]). Hence the prime factorization of the ideal mR is m;. It follows immediately that R is a PID. •
THEOREM 3.19. Let R be a Dedekind domain and M a finitely generated R-module. Then M = (M/TM) ffi TM, and p.d.RM < 1. IfM has rank r > 0 then M/TM ^ i T _ 1 © J, where J is an ideal of R with ideal class p(M). The torsion submodule TM is determined by the elementary ideals of M. PROOF. Since Er(M) ^ 0 it is invertible, and so M/TM is projective and p.d.RM < 1, by Theorem 3.7. Hence M S (M/TM) © TM, and so E{(TM) = Er+i(M) for all i > 0. If r > 0 there is a nonzero homomorphism 6 : M —> R, since M/TM embeds in R ® (M/TM) 9* RT. As 9(M) is an ideal it is projective, so M = Ker(#) © 6(M). We may assume by induction on r that Ker(6)/TM ^ Rr~2 © J' for some ideal J' of R. Let {xm \ i G 1} be the finite set of maximal ideals which contain 6(M) D Er(M). The localization Rs with respect to the multiplicative system S = R — Ui<=imi is a PID, by Lemma 3.18. Hence J's = Rs and so there is an epimorphism V : J's -> (R/(6(M))S = R/6(M). Let ijj : J ' -» R be a homomorphism lifting ip\j> (which exists since J' is projective). Define £ : J' © 0(M) - • # by £ ( / , n) = ^(j') + n for all / G J ' and n G 9(M). Then £ is an epimorphism, so M/TM 9* i? 7 " -1 © J, where J = Ker(£). Clearly J £ Ar(M/TM). Since T M = T M s it is determined as a ife-module by its elementary ideals Et(TMs) = Et(TM)s = Er+i(M)s. • In particular, Dedekind domains have global dimension 1. 3.20. Let M be a finitely generated module over a 1dimensional noetherian ring R. Then M is free of rank r if and only ifEr-i(M) = 0, Er(M) = R and A r M ^ R. THEOREM
3.6. 1- AND 2-DIMENSIONAL RINGS
65
T h e conditions are clearly necessary. If ET-\{M) = 0 and Er (M) = R then Mp is free of rank r for all prime ideals p of R, by an easy extension of Theorem 3.7. If r — 0 then M = 0, by Theorem 1(1), so we may assume r > 0. Therefore M = i ? r _ 1 © J for some ideal J of R, by the Stable Range Theorem [Ba64]. B u t then ArM = J , so M is free if and only if A r M = R. O PROOF.
COROLLARY 3.20.1. If I is an invertible ideal in a 1-dimensional noetherian domain R then I can be generated by two elements. P R O O F . Let P be a projective module such t h a t / © P is free, and let J be an ideal in the class p(P). Then I © J = R2, by the Theorem, and so / is a quotient of R?. •
THEOREM 3.21. Let R be an integrally closed noetherian domain such that all maximal ideals of R have height 2, and let M be a finitely generated R-module. Then M is pseudonull if and only if it has finite length. PROOF. Since a finitely generated module is pseudonull or of finite length if and only if its cyclic submodules are pseudonull or of finite length (respectively), it suffices to assume t h a t M = R/I, for some ideal / . T h e ideal / is the intersection of powers of prime ideals, by the Primary Decomposition Theorem for noetherian rings. Clearly UR/I is pseudonull" and UR/I has finite length" are each equivalent to this decomposition being an intersection of powers of maximal ideals, since all maximal ideals of R have height 2. D THEOREM 3.22. Let R be an integrally closed noetherian domain of global dimension 2, and let M be a finitely generated R-module. Then (1) p.d.RM < 1 if and only if M has no nontrivial pseudonull submodule; (2) the maximal pseudonull submodule of M is isomorphic to e2e2M. P R O O F . Let K = K e r ( W T M ) and L = I m ( W T M ) . T h e n K is the maximal pseudonull submodule of M and L < e 1 e 1 M , by Theorem 9.
66
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
Applying the functor e* = ExtR(—, R) to a short exact sequence of i?-modules 0—* A —> B —>C—> 0 gives a 9-term exact sequence terminating with • • • —+ e2C —* e2B —> e2A —> 0, since i? has global dimension 2. In particular, if p.d.RB < 1 then p.d.RA < 1 also. Therefore p.d.RL < 1. If p.d.RM < 1 then if = 0, by Theorem 3.7. Conversely, if if = 0 then TM = L and so p.d.RTM < 1. Since M / T M is finitely generated and torsion free it is a submodule of a free module, and so p.d.R{M/TM) < 1 also. Therefore p.d.RM < 1. Since TM is an extension of L by K the e*-sequence gives an isomorphism e2TM = e2K, while since M is an extension of M/TM by T M there is an isomorphism e2M = e2TM. Since e°K = e1K = 0 it is easily seen that K = e2e2K. Therefore K = e2e2M. D With more care one may show that there is a natural isomorphism K == e 2 e 2 M. More generally, if R has global dimension d and M i s a finitely generated i2-module then M has no nontrivial submodule of finite length if and only if edM = 0 and the maximal submodule of finite length is naturally isomorphic to ededM [LV68]. 3.7. Bilinear pairings An inner product module over R is a finitely generated i?-module X with a bilinear pairing b : XxX —> R which is symmetric and nonsingular (the adjoint map Ad(b) : X —> X* given by Ad(b)(x)(y) = b(x,y) is an isomorphism). In particular, X is reflexive. In the study of the stable classification of inner product modules it is usual to require also that X be projective. Here we shall see that projectivity follows from the existence of such a nonsingular symmetric bilinear form exactly when R is regular of global dimension < 2. LEMMA 3.23. Let R be a noetherian domain. The following are equivalent: (1) every inner product module over R is projective; (2) every reflexive module is projective; (3) R has global dimension < 2.
3.7. BILINEAR PAIRINGS
67
P R O O F . If M is reflexive then M®e°M supports an inner product, given by b((m,fi), (m',fx')) = fi(m') + fj,'(m). Hence (1) implies (2). Clearly (2) implies (1). If Q : Rp —> Rq is a homomorphism with cokernel M then M* = Kev(Q*). Hence every dual is projective if and only if R has global dimension < 2, by Schanuel's Lemma, •
Suppose now that R has an involution ~. (This extends to an involution of the field Ro). If M is an .R-module M shall denote the conjugate .R-module, with the same underlying abelian group but with module action given by r.m = fm for all r 6 R and m 6 M. Let Mi, M 2 and N be i?-modules. A map c : Mi x Mi —> N is a sesquilinear pairing if it is .R-linear in the first variable and Rantilinear in the second variable, i.e., if c(rmi,m2) = rc(mi,m2) = c(mi,fm2) for all m\ G Mi, mi 6 Mi and r € R. The transposed pairing is defined by c^(m2,m{) = c(mi,m2). The adjoint of c is the homomorphism ^4d(c) : Mi —> HomR(M2,N) given by i4d(c)(mi)(m2) = c(mi,m2). The pairing is Ze/t primitive if Ai(c) is injective, and is n^/ii primitive if Ad(c^) is injective. Let e = ± 1 . An e-hermitean pairing on an i?-torsion module M is a sesquilinear pairing b : M x M —• RQ/R such that 6 = efct. It is primitive if Ad(6) is injective and perfect if Ad(6) is an isomorphism. The conull space of 6 is CokerAd(6). Thus an e-linking pairing over R (as defined in §3 of Chapter 2) is a primitive e-hermitean pairing. If M is a finitely generated i?-module we shall let iN = N/P, where P is the maximal pseudonull submodule of N. If a torsion module M supports a primitive hermitean pairing then P = 0, by Theorem 9, and so M = tM. LEMMA 3.24. If R is a principal ideal domain then primitive pairings on torsion modules are perfect. Let M be a torsion .R-module. As M has finite length, and as e M is isomorphic to M, by the Structure Theorem for finitely generated modules over PIDs, any monomorphism from M to elM must be an isomorphism. D PROOF. l
Let Ws(Ro,R,—) denote the Witt group of e-linking pairings over R (as defined in §6 of Chapter 2). The Witt groups of greatest
3. DETERMINANTAL INVARIANTS
68
interest to the algebraists are based on perfect pairings with an additional quadratic structure. If 2 is invertible in R any perfect pairing can be endowed with such a quadratic structure. In particular, if R is a PID containing 5 every primitive pairing on a .R-torsion module is perfect and has an unique quadratic structure. Assume now that R is factorial. LEMMA 3.25. / / c : M\ x Mi —> RQ/R is a sesquilinear pairing which is primitive on both sides then Ao(Mi) = AQ(MI). PROOF. This follows on localizing with respect to the multiplicative systems R — (p U p), for each height 1 prime p of R. • LEMMA 3.26. / / (N, c) is a neutral e-linking pairing over R then Ao(N) = ff for some nonzero f 6 R. Let P < N be a submodule such that P = P1-. The pairing c induces a sesquilinear pairing of P and N/P into RQ/R which is primitive on both sides. Since AQ(P) = AQ(N/P), by Lemma 25, A0(N) = A0(P)A0(N/P) = A 0 (P)A^(P). D PROOF.
THEOREM 3.27. / / (M,b) and (M',b') are Witt equivalent elinking pairings over R then ffAo(M) ^ f'f'Ao(M') for some / , / ' inR-{0}. PROOF.
This follows from Theorem 3.12 and Lemma 3.26.
D
The determinant class 5(M, b) of a e-linking pairing (M, b) is the class of Ao(M) modulo products with uff, where u is a unit of R and / 7^ 0. By the theorem, 6 determines a homomorphism from the Witt group We(Ro, R,—) to the group {f € R$ I f = uf for some u € Rx}/{ugg \ u € Rx,g € RQ}. If R is a Dedekind domain with an involution the argument of §9 of Chapter 2 extends to give natural isomorphisms We(Ro,R, —) = (Bp=pW£(Ro, Rp, —) = ®p=pWe(kp, —), where the sum is taken over the maximal ideals which are invariant under the involution.
CHAPTER 4
The Maximal Abelian Cover In this chapter we shall define the Crowell sequence for a group and extend to links various results of Crowell on the Alexander modules of classical knots. We shall focus particularly on the interactions between properties known to hold for boundary links, such as the Alexander module having rank /x, the first nonzero Alexander ideal being principal and the longitudes being in {itJ)''• 4.1. Metabelian groups and the Crowell sequence Let G be a finitely generated group and s : Z[G] —> Z be the augmentation homomorphism of the group ring. If G is generated by { • • -9n} the augmentation ideal I = 1(G) = Ker(e) is generated as a Z[G]-module by {gi — 1 | 1 < i < n). The augmentation sequence for G is the sequence 0 -> 1(G) -> Z[G] ^ ^
Z -» 0.
Tensoring this sequence with a right Z[G]-module M gives an exact sequence 0 -» Hx(G- M)-+M
® Z[G] 7(G) -* M -» eM = M/I(G)M
-> 0.
Suppose instead that M is a left Z[G]-module and let Der(G;M) = Homj\G-\(I(G),M). Then the functor ffom2[g](-,M) gives an isomorphism tf^G; M) = Der(G; M)/P(G; M), where P(G, M) is the image of M = HomZ[G](Z[G],M) under restriction. The group Der(G; M) may be identified with the group of derivations or crossed homomorphisms f : G —> M such that /(g/i) = f(g) + gf(h) for all g,h e G, via f >-> f, where /(#) = f(g — 1). These in turn correspond to splitting homomorphisms for the semidirect product M*G, sending g e G to (f(g),g) € MxG. The subgroup P(G, M) 69
70
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
corresponds to the "principal" crossed homomorphisms fm, where fm{g) = (g — l ) m f° r aH g £ G. If G' acts trivially on M these groups are left Z[G/G']-modules, Let A(G) = Z[G/G'} ® Z[G] 1(G). Then A(G) = / / / / ' , where / ' = I'(G) is the ideal generated by {w — 1 | w e G'}, and is finitely generated as a Z[G/G']-module. The conjugation action of G/G1 on G'/G", given by gG'.aG" = gag^G" for g € G and a G G', makes G'/G" into a Z[G/G']-module, and the natural homomorphism 6 : G'/G" -> 4(G) which sends aG" to [a-1] = ( a - 1 ) + J / ' is injective, with image I'/II'. Let <j>G([g - 1]) = 5 G ' - 1, for g € G. The fourterm exact sequence Gr(G) :
0 -> G'/G" —^
A(G) - ^ - > Z[G/G'] ^ ^
Z -> 0
is called the Crowell sequence for G. (This corresponds to the choice M = TL\G/G'\ in the above paragraph). There is an equivalent short exact sequence 0 -* G'/G" -> A(G) -* I{G/G') -f 0. (Tensoring with Z leads to an isomorphism sA{G) = eI(G/G')). If M is a Z[G/G']-module then Der(G;M) = f T o m z f c / c / j ^ ^ . M ) . A homomorphism f : G —> H induces a homomorphism Cr(f) of Crowell sequences, and the induced homomorphism G/G" = H/H" is an isomorphism if and only if fab : G/G' —> H/H' and Cr(f) are isomorphisms [Cr61], [Cr71]. The Crowell sequence represents an element of Ext'LCn(7i,G'/G"), which corresponds to the extension 1 -> G'/G" -+ G/G" -f G/G' -» 1 via the isomorphism Ext| [ G ] (Z, G'/G") £ H2(G/G; G'/G"). (The group G/G" may be recovered from Cr(G) as a quotient of a semidirect product (G'/G") x F ( r ) . See §3 below for the cases with G/G' free abelian). If X is a finite complex with fundamental group G, basepoint * and maximal abelian cover p : X' —> X then the Crowell sequence may be identified with the nontrivial part of the long exact sequence of homology for the pair (X',p - 1 (*)). In particular, a finite presentation for the group G determines a presentation for A(G) as a
4.2. FREE METABELIAN GROUPS
71
module (with the same numbers of generators and relations) by the free differential calculus. We shall henceforth assume that G/G' = Z>* is free abelian of finite rank /J, > 0, with a given basis. We may then identify Z[G/G'] with A^ = Z[tut^1,... ,t^t~x}, and we shall let 1^ = I{Z») = (t\ — 1 , . . . , tfj, — 1) be the augmentation ideal of AM. We shall also let RAn = R®i Ap, for any PID R. Then i?A^ is a factorial noetherian domain of global dimension fi, if R is a field, and fi + 1 otherwise, by Hilbert's Syzygy Theorem. In particular, its height 1 prime ideals are principal. Moreover projective .RA^-modules are free, by a theorem of Suslin. (See page 67 of [Lam]). 4.2. Free metabelian groups The Crowell sequence for the free group F(fi) is a partial resolution for Z as a A^-module. This may be continued to a full resolution K(A)X)^ with j t h term K{A)J)j = Aj(Afj,),i and differentials given by dk(eh A • • • A eik) = E^lf ( - l ) ' - 1 ^ ~ !)( e u A . . . e£ • • • A eifc). (This is the Koszul complex for A^ with respect to the regular sequence {t\ — 1 , . . . , tfj, — 1). It is also the equivariant cellular chain complex for i?M, as the universal cover of (S1)^ with its standard minimal cell structure). We may also construct this complex by taking the tensor product over Z of /i copies of K(Ai)*. Since all the differentials of Z ®A K(A)* are 0 we find eq7L = 0 if <jr ^ /x, e^Z = Z and TorA(Z, Z) =* LEMMA
4.1. Ei{Iv) =
zO.
{Illy-1.
P R O O F . We shall induct on /x. The result is clear if /x = 1, since I\ = (ti — 1) = Ai. It is also clear from the Koszul complex that Ei(I^) < (I^Y-1. Let 4>j '• AM_i —> A^ be the ring homomorphism defined byj(ti) — U if 1 < i < j and <j)j{ti) = ij+i if j < i < n, for 1 < j < /i. Then A H (tj — 1)A determines an isomorphism of AM-modules AfJ,/( j(Ill-i)) = 7 M /(0j(/ M _i)). There is an exact sequence 0 —• ( ^ ( / ^ - i ) ) —• 1^ —> /^/(^-(J^-i)) —> 0. Hence
£i(/„) >
ft(/,/(^i(Vi)))£i(^(Vi))
= (^-(Vi))"-^ byTheo-
rem 3.12. Since each of the generating monomials of (Z^)^ * involves
72
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
only fi — 1 of the variables it follows that Ex(Ifj) > {I^Y the lemma.
l
, proving •
The Koszul complex gives a presentation with (£) generators and (^) relations for the A^-module B(fi) = F(fi)'/F(fi)". Hence m 1 E^{B{ji)) < (/ M ) , where m = ("- ). It can be shown that these ideals are equal [CSt69]. THEOREM 4.2. Let G be a finitely generated group such that G/G' ^ Z». If G maps onto F(ji)/F{fi)" then E^X{G) = 0. Moreover G/G" 9i F(fj,)/F(jj,)" if and only if ^ _ i ( G ) = 0 and E^G) = A„. PROOF. An epimorphism / : G —> H induces an epimorphism A(f) : A(G) -> A(H). Therefore the image of Et(G) in Z[H/H'] is contained in Ei(H). In particular, if G/G' = Z^ and G maps onto F(fi)/F(fi)" then E„_i(G) = 0. If £ M _i(G) = 0 and E^G) = AM then A(G/G") = 4(G) is projective of rank /x, by Corollary 3.7.1. Hence A(G/G") = ( A ^ = A(F(/J,)/F(IJ,)"), since projective A^-modules are free. Therefore G/G" 2< F(ii)/F(n)", by Corollary 2 of [GM86]. The converse is clear. • This criterion for recognizing free metabelian groups derives from the one given by Groves and Miller, but has simpler hypotheses. COROLLARY 4.2.1. Let G be a finitely generated group such that G/G' ^ Z2. Then G maps onto F{2)/F{2)" if and only if G'/G" maps onto A2. The condition is clearly necessary. Suppose it holds, and let H = (G/G")/T(G'/G"). Then H'/H" £ A2, so E^H) = 0 and E2(H) > E^I^E^H'/H") = I2. Moreover e(E2(H)) = Z, since 2 H/H' * Z . Therefore E2(H) = A2 and so H ^ F(2)/F{2)". U PROOF.
This corollary also follows from consideration of the possible extensions of Z2 by F(2)'/F{2)" £ A 2 . For H2(Z;A2) 3 Z, and if G(n) is the group corresponding to n € Z then G(—n) = G(n) and G(n)/G(n)' 2i Z2 if and only if n = ± 1 .
4.3. LINK MODULE SEQUENCES
73
4.3. Let G be a finitely presentable group such that G/G' ^ Zf and def(G) = //. Then £ M _i(G) = 0, and G maps onto F(fj,)/F(jj,)" if and only if E^G) is principal. THEOREM
P R O O F . Since G/G' = Z» and A(G) has a presentation of deficiency /J, we have £7M_i(G) = 0 and £(£JM(G)) = Z, so A(G) has rank /x. If G maps onto F(/J,)/F((J)" then A(G) maps onto (A^)^, so A(G) SS (K^Y ®TA(G). Adding /i relations to kill a basis for the free summand gives a square presentation matrix for TA(G). Therefore Ep{G) = E^(A{G)) = E0{TA{G)) is principal. Conversely if Ep-i{G) = 0 and E^G) is principal then A(G) S* ( A ^ © TA(G), by Theorem 3.7 and the fact that projective A^-modules are free. Let K < G be the subgroup containing G" and such that K/G" = T(G'/G") = TA(G). Then A(G/K) s A(G)/TA(G) £* (A,,)", and so G/K maps onto F(n)/F(n)", by Theorem 4.2. •
4.3. Link module sequences Let 0 —> Z? —• ^4 —> i^ —> 0 be an exact sequence of finitely generated A^-modules, where eA = el^ = Z^. We may construct the group corresponding to this sequence as follows. Let / : (A^)^ —• A be a homomorphism lifting 4>F{y)i a n d let S = B x (F(/i)/F(/i)"), where F{y)/F{y)" acts on the A^-module B through F(fj)/F(fj,)'. Let r ( / | B ( / l ) ) be the graph of / | B ( M ) . Then G = S/T(f\BM) is a metabelian group with G/G' = Z^ and Cr(G) is isomorphic to the sequence we started with. 4.4. Let G and H be finitely generated metabelian groups such that G/G' ^ H/H' 3* Z*. Fix an isomorphism a : G/G' ^ H/H'. Then Cr determines a surjection from {/ € Hom(G,H) \ fab = a } to i/ie sei of homomorphisms from Cr{G) to Cr(H) inducing Z[a] : Z[G/G'] S Z[tf/iT]. LEMMA
Let 7 : Cr(G) —> Cr{H) be a homomorphism which induces Z[a], and let / : JF(/X) —> G be a homomorphism such that / a b is an isomorphism. We may choose a homomorphism h : F([i) —> H such that Cr(h) = jCr(f). Then h\p^y — 7 | G ' / | F ( ^ ) ' - Therefore h induces a homorphism ho from G = G' xi (F(fj,/F(fj,)")/F(f\p^y) PROOF.
74
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
to H 9i H' x {F{n/F{pL)")/T(h\F{jj),). Cr(hG) = 7 .
It is easily verified that •
If G is relatively free (G = F(/J.)/F(/J.)") then these homomor1 phism sets may each be identified with (H )^ and the correspondance is bijective. A link module sequence is an exact sequence of finitely generated AM-modules 0—> B —* A —> Ip —> 0 such that A has a presentation of deficiency 1. Clearly A has rank > 1, and so EQ{A) = 0. Let e*(—) denote the functor Ext^(—, A^). LEMMA 4.5. Let 0 —>£?—>.A—>/M—> 0 le a ZinA; module sequence. Then either p.d.^B < p.d.\A = fi — 1 or p.d.\A < p.d.B = fi — 2 or p.d.\A = p.d.^B > fi. P R O O F . This follows on applying the functor e*(—) to the link module sequence, and from the fact that e 9 _ 1 / M = e 9 Z for q > 0. •
An immediate consequence of this lemma is that if A has rank 1 then B has a square presentation matrix if and only if /z < 3. For if A has deficiency 1 and rank 1 then p.d.\A < 1 and fi is a A^-torsion module. Since projective A^-modules are free, a torsion module B has projective dimension < 1 if and only if it has a square presentation matrix. THEOREM 4.6. Let 0 -> B -» A -> 7M -> 0 be a link module sequence, and let A have rank r. Then (1) iffi = 1 then A^B®AX and Ei{A) = (Ai(A)), while if n > 1 then E\{A) = Ai(A)I^; (2) ifr — 1 then B = TA has no nonzero pseudonull submodule and Ann(B) = (Xi(B)) = (X2(A)); (3) if Er-i(B) and Er(A) are both principal then /z < 2; (4) if n = 2 then E0(B) = (Ai(A)); if moreover ZA A £ Z2 then Z ®A B = Z/ZZ, w/iere / = \e(Ai{A))\, and i/ie sequence splits if and only if I = 1; (5) if /x > 2 and Z <8>A -A = Z^ then the sequence does not split; (6) ifEr{A) = (Ar(A)) ande{Ar{A)) = ±1 then A is 1-torsion free.
4.3. LINK MODULE SEQUENCES
75
If \i — 1 then I\ — (ti - 1) = Ai, so the sequence splits. Suppose that r = 1. Then B = TA and A/TA ^ i^, so p(A) is the class of JM. Moreover j(A) — 1 since A has deficiency 1. Hence p(A) is the class of Ei(A), by Lemma 3.17. If r > 1 then £7i(^) = (A!(^)) = 0. Since p.d.^A < 1 if r = 1, part (2) follows from Theorem 3.8. If £ r _ i ( B ) and Er(A) are both principal then B/TB and A/TB are projective, and so 0 —> B/TB —> A/TB —> JM —> 0 is a projective resolution for the augmentation module. Hence /x = 1+p.d.A^i^ < 2. Since Z ®A ^4 = ZM = Z ® 1^, the sequence can only split if Z (8>A B = 0. Therefore £b(Z ®A B) ^ 0 and so r = 1. Prom this and the other assumptions on A it follows that Tor A (Z,>1) = Z ^ _ 1 . On applying Tor A (Z, —) to the link module sequence we find that Z 0 A B i s a quotient of Tor A (Z,I^) ^ z(a) and has rank at least (2) -Z^ + l- Hence zx < 2. If /x = 2 then p.d.AI2 = 1, so ^ ( A ) = E0(B)Ei(I2), by Theorem 3.12. Hence J5b(J3) = (Ai(A)). Moreover E x t \ ( J 2 , £ ) = £ / J 2 £ = Z<8)A-B, which is cyclic of order / = |e(Ai(A))|. Therefore Z<8>\B = 0 if and only if / = 1, and then Ext\(I2, B) = 0, so A =* B © J 2 . Suppose that (6) holds. Let p be an integral prime and suppose that pm = 0 for some m G A. Then ^4nn(AAim) contains p and Ann(TVl), and hence Eo(TA), by Theorem 3.1. Hence if Ann^m) < (6), S divides p and A0(TA) = Ar(A). Since e(Ar(.A)) is = ± 1 , S must be a unit and so A^m is pseudonull. It now follows from Theorems 3.7 and 3.8 that m — 0. • PROOF.
Parts (1) and (4-6) of this theorem were originally proven in [Cr65]. Since Ei(J„) = (I^'1 we have E ^ B ) ^ ) " - 1 < Ek(A), by Theorem 3.12. The link module sequence together with the Crowell sequence for F(/i) give an exact sequence 0 -» B{n) -» B © (A,,)** -» A -» 0. Using Theorem 3.12 again gives Ek-\{B) = Ek+fi-i(B © ( A ^ ) > £ fc (A).£ M _i(B(/x)), for any k > 1. Hence E fc _i(B) > Efc(A).(JA1)p, where r = ( ^ j . (In particular, E2(A) < E\{B) if /* = 2). If /x > 1
76
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
then E0(B) = A 1 (A)(/ / i ) m , where m = ^~2), while if k > 1 then Ek-i(B) > Ek(A).(Ifi)r+k-'1, where r = ^~l). (See [CSt69] and [Tr82']). 4.4. Localization of link module sequences Let S = 1 + I/j, = {/ € AM | e(/) = 1} be the multiplicative system consisting of Laurent polynomials augmenting to 1. The next result is due to Massey [Ma80], who however used completion rather than localization. THEOREM 4.7. Let 0 — > £ — > y l — > / M — > 0 6 e a link module sequence such that Z <8>A A = Z^. Then (1) As has a presentation with fi generators and s < /i relations; (2) Bs has a presentation with (^) generators and (^) + s relations. Moreover (^) of these generators are common to all such modules. PROOF. Let g : A —> 1^ be the epimorphism provided by the link module sequence, and choose a map / : (A^)^ —> A such that gf sends the ith standard generator to t{ — 1 G I p. Then Z ®A / is a n isomorphism and so Nakayama's Lemma implies that fs : (A^s)'1 —> As is an epimorphism. Let K = Ker(/ S ). Then ZA K 2£ Tor A (Z, ,4), which is generated by at most /i — 1 elements, since A has deficiency > 1 and Z 0 A -4 — Z^. Therefore K is generated by at most /i — 1 elements, by Nakayama's Lemma. (This argument applies for any epimorphism F : (A^sY —*• As)The homomorphism / also induces a commuting diagram of homomorphisms between the localized sequences 0 - B(ti)s
- ( A ^ ) " -> Itf - 0
and 0 - 5 5 - • A 5 -> / M s -> 0, from which (2) follows easily. In particular, Bs = 0 if /x = 1 and Bs is cyclic if /i = 2.
•
4.5. CHEN GROUPS COROLLARY
77
4.7.1. If B — I^B then /J, < 2.
Since localization is exact and Bs = 0 we have As = I^s- Hence p.d.^A > p-d.^gl^s = jtt — 1. On the other hand, A has rank 1 and deficiency 1, so p.d.^A < 1. Therefore /x < 2. • PROOF.
COROLLARY 4.7.2. If A has rank r = /j, then As = (A^s)M and so Z®ATA = 0. PROOF.
Since TAS
= 0 we have ZA TA = (Z A TA)S
Z ®A T^ 5 = 0.
=
•
The higher Tors of such a module are also 0, by the following lemma, due to Sato [Sa81"]. LEMMA 4.8. Let M be a finitely generated h.jx-modu\e such that Z ®e M = 0. T/ien.Tor A(Z, M) = 0 for all i > 0. P R O O F . Since Ms/I^sMs = Z£ Ms = 0 we have Ms = 0, by Nakayama's Lemma. Therefore TorA(Z,M) = TorA(Z,M)s = TorA(Z, Ms) = 0, for all z > 0, since Ker(e) acts trivially on Z. •
Let AM be the 1^-adic completion of A^. Then A^ embeds in AM = Z[[Xi,..., Xfj]] via U >-> 1 + Xj. This embedding extends to an embedding of A^s into A^. In each of these rings the image of 7^ generates the Jacobson radical. If M is the 7M-adic completion of a finitely generated AM-module M then M = A^ <8>A M. Tensor product with A^ is a faithfully flat functor on finitely generated A^s-modules, by Krull's Theorem (Theorem 10.17 of [AM]). Hence the completed link module sequence is also exact. Arguments involving 7M-adic completion are usually equivalent to ones involving localization with respect to 5. 4.5. C h e n groups Let G be a finitely generated group. The Chen groups for G are the quotients Ch(G;q) = GqG"/Gq+1G", for q > 2. (See [Ch51]. The notation Q(G;q) is used in [Mu70], [Hi78] and [Ma80]). For later use, we shall set G(oo) = Dq>i(GqG"). Clearly G"GW < G(oo); in general, this inclusion is proper. Note that G" < G4.
78
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
4.9. Let G be a finitely generated group with G/G' = Z^, and let B = G'/G". Then B/(I^)nB Si G'/Gn+2G" for all n > 0. If moreover f : G —> H is a homomorphism which induces isomorphisms on abelianization then the induced homomorphisms Ch(f; q) : Ch(G; q) —> Ch(H; q) are isomorphisms if and only if A(f)s is an isomorphism. LEMMA
An easy induction on n shows that (I,j,)nB is the image of Gn+2 in B. The second assertion is straightforward. • PROOF.
Thus the {q + 2)th Chen group is the q summand of the associated graded module Gr(B) = e g >o((-f M ) 9 5 s /(/ M )«+ 1 J B 5 )- (This is also ®g>0((I^B/(I^+1B)). THEOREM 4.10. Let G be a finitely generated group with G/G' = Z*. Then £ M _i(A(G)) = 0 if and only if Ch(G;q) £S Ch{F(p);q) for all q> 1. Let B - G'/G". If / : F(/x) —> G is a homomorphism which induces isomorphisms on abelianization then it induces epimorphisms on all Chen groups, and also induces an epimorphism A(f)s : (A^s)" A(G)S. Then A has rank [i if and only if A(f)s is an isomorphism. Since B/I^B = G'/Gn+2G" this is so if and only if the induced maps on Chen groups are all isomorphisms. Since they are epimorphisms, and since these groups are finitely generated, this must be so if Ch(G; q) ^ Ch(F((i); q) for all q > 1. • PROOF.
4.6. Applications to links Let £ be a /i-component 1-link with exterior X = X(L) and group n = TTL. Then A(L) = A(ir), a(L) = rank^A{L), Ek(L) = Ek(A(L)) and A^(L) = Ak(A(L)) are, respectively, the Alexander module, Alexander nullity, kth Alexander ideal and kth Alexander polynomial of L. Let B(L) = TT'/TT". Since X is a compact bounded 3-manifold and x P O = 0> it is homotopy equivalent to a finite 2complex with one 0-cell *, n + 1 l-cells and n 2-cells, for some n > 0. Let p : X' —> X be the maximal abelian cover of X. The meridians of
4.6. APPLICATIONS TO LINKS
79
L determine an isomorphism of the covering group Aut(X'/X) with M Z . The equivariant chain complex of X' is homotopy equivalent to a finite free complex D* with Do = AM, D\ = (A^,)n+l and D2 = (A M ) n , while the relative complex of the pair (A"',p _1 (*)) is chain homotopy equivalent to the complex ... 0 —> D2 —> D\ —> 0. Hence there is an exact sequence 0 - H2(X; AM) -> (A M r - ^
(A„) n + 1 - ^ )
- 0.
In particular, H2(X; AM) is torsion free and p.d./^H2(X; A^) < /x — 1. LEMMA
(1) (2) (3) (4)
4.11. Let L be a ^-component 1-link. Then
Z ® A A(L) * Z*1, e{E»{L)) H2(X;AI1) has rank a{L) ifa(L) = 2 then H2{X;K^) in general, p.d.^H2{X;A^)
= Z and 1 < a(L) < /x; 1; * AM; = max{0,p.d.\A(L) — 2}.
P R O O F . It is immediate that a(L) = min{& | Ek(L) ^ 0} > 1. Since we may obtain the cellular chain complex for (X, *) by tensoring that for (X',p - 1 (*)) over A^ with Z we have Z<8>A^4(£) — Hi(X, *; Z) S Z*1. Hence e{Eil{L)) = Z and so a{L) < p.. The second assertion is obvious. Let tx and v belong to # 2 ( ^ 1 A^) < (A M ) n . Then since H2(X; AM) has rank n + 2 — (n + 1) =• 1, there are a and f3 in A^ such that au = f3v. We may assume that a and f3 have no common factor. Since A^ is factorial v = aw for some w in (A^) n which must actually be in H2(X; A^) by the exactness of the above sequence and the fact that (A^) n + 1 is torsion free. Hence every 2-generator submodule of H2(X; An) is cyclic. As this module is finitely generated and torsion free it is free of rank 1. The final assertion follows on applying Schanuel's Lemma to the above sequence. •
In general, H2(X;AfJ,) is free if and only if p.d.\A(L) < 2. If H < 2 then p.d.\A(L) < p. Can we ever have p.d.^A(L) = xx + 1? THEOREM 4.12. Let L be a ^.-component 1-link with group n = irL. Then
80
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
(1) iff* = l then A(L) * (TT'/TT") © Ai and EX(L) = (Ai(L)), while if ii > 1 then E\(L) — Ai(L)i^; (2) if a(L) = 1 then TT'/TT" = Tyl(L) /ias no nonzero pseudonull submodule and Ann(n'/n") — (\2(L)); (3) i/£?a(L)-i( 7r V 7r ") and Ea(L){L) are both principal then (4) if /J, = 2 then |£r(Ai(L))| = |^i2|> the absolute value of the linking number, and A(L) = (TT'/TT") © I 2 t/ien i/ie sequence 0 —> TT'/TT" —> vl(L) —* 7M —* 0 does not split; (6) if Ea(L)(L) — (A a (£)(L)) t/ien ^4 is "L-torsion free; (7) ^T(TT'/TT") = (A a W + f c (L)), /or eac/i fc > 1. Most of this theorem follows immediately from Theorem 4.6. If // = 2 then TT/TT3 has a presentation (x, y \ x,y ^=± [x,y],[x,y]tl2 = 1), by Theorem 1.4. Hence Tr'/Tr3 S Z/£12Z. Since £o(Tr'/Tr3) = 6(E0(IT'/IT")) it follows that ^ i 2 = |e(Ai(L))|. Part (7) follows from Theorem 3.4. • PROOF.
Wirtinger presentations were used to prove (1) [To53], (2) and (3) in the knot-theoretic case (// = 1) [Cr64], and (4) and (5) [Cr65]. The higher Alexander ideals need not be principal, even for knots. (For instance, B(9 46 ) = ( A i / ( t - 2 ) ) S ( A i / ( 2 t - l ) ) , so£ 2 (9 4 6 ) = (3,i+l)). The evaluation |e(Ai(L))| = |lk(Li,L,2)\ follows also from Corollary 5.3.1. COROLLARY 4.12.1. The group TT is a semidirect product IT' » Z^ if and only if /i = 1 or /J, = 2 and l\i = ± 1 . The conditions are necessary by (4) and (5) of the theorem. If they hold the inclusion of a meridian or a boundary component (respectively) induces a splitting 7T = TT' X! Z^. D PROOF.
We may use Theorem 4.7 to show that 1, Z and Z2 are the only nilpotent 1-link groups. If K is a knot the lower central series of TT = irK terminates at TT2. Therefore TT is nilpotent if and only if K is trivial. In general, if TTL is nilpotent so are all of its quotient groups.
4.6. APPLICATIONS TO LINKS
81
Thus we may assume that \i < 3, so B(L)s has a presentation of deficiency > 0 as a AMs-module. As (7^)"B(L) = 0 for n large, B(L)s = B(L) and is finitely generated as an abelian group. If fi > 1 this implies B(L) = 0, and so irL = Z M . Since H2(TTL;Z) is a quotient of H2(X(L);Z) ^ Z^~l we must have /x < 2. Since loops at * in X lift to paths in X' with endpoints in p _ 1 (*) the meridians and longitudes of L give rise to meridianal and longitudinal elements rrii and £i in >1(L). The next result is the analogue of Theorem 1.4 for A(L), and may be deduced from it by considering the 7^-adic completion. We shall instead give a homological argument close to that of Levine [Le83]. THEOREM 4.13. Let L be a fi-component 1-link with group -K = TTL. Then A(L)s is generated by a set of meridianal elements mi, subject only to the relations (T\ — l)m; = (£; — l)SjZ]*Ajjmj; where T{ = Ifptt'j' andli = T,^Xijmj, forl
Moreover E(\i:j) =
P R O O F . We shall follow the notation of Theorem 1.4. Since the meridians freely generate the nilpotent quotients G/Gn, the inclusion of meridians induces isomorphisms (AMs)M = Hi(W, *; A^s) = A(G)S, by Theorems 4.7 and 4.10. The module H2(X,W;AtlS) is freely generated by the classes di corresponding to lifts of the 2-cells Di, for 1 < i < JJ,, by excision. The image of di under the connecting homomorphism 5 is (T; — l)m; —fa— l)£i, where mi and £{ are classes corresponding to meridianal and longitudinal loops on W fldX(Li). Since A(L)s is freely generated by the meridians, we have £{ = J ^ jZi^ijmj m A(L)s, for some coefficients Xij € A^s- On considering the images under the homomorphism fas '• A(L)s —> A^s of the localised Crowell sequence, we obtain the equations (Tj — \)fa — 1) = (ti - l^Zi^ijitj ~ 1), for 1 < i < /i. Dividing by U - 1 and considering Taylor expansions about t\ — 1 , . . . ^ = 1 now gives e(Ajj) = £ij. The final assertion follows since LldDi = dN in W, and so Z5(di) = 0. •
Levine showed also that if 0 —• Bs —» As —> I^s —* 0 is a sequence of A^s-modules such that Z ® As = ZM, A has generators
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
82
rrij with images 4>(mi) — t\ — 1 in I^s and TAs = 0 then there is a ^-component 1-link L with all linking numbers 0 and such that the sequence 0 - (B(L)/TA(L))S
-* (A(L)/TA(L))s
- I»s - 0.
is isomorphic to the given sequence, via an isomorphism carrying meridianal elements to the m;. The next two corollaries are from [Tr83] and [Tr84], respectively. 4.13.1. Let dt = h.c.f.{% | 1 < j < //} for each 1 < » < / * . ThenEll-i(L) = (di(t1-l),...dll(tll-l))mod(Ili)2. D COROLLARY
See [Tr84] for refinements of this result, and a more precise description of the presentation matrix, in terms of Milnor invariants. 4.13.2. If/i > 2 then Ai(L) € (-^) M_2 . If moreover all the linking numbers are 0 then Ai(L) € ( / ^ ) 2 M _ 3 . COROLLARY
P R O O F . The entries in the above presentation matrix are all in I^s, and so E\{L) < {I^sY-1If all the linking numbers are 0 2 the entries are in (7Ms) and so E\{L) < (7 M s) 2/i ~ 2 . Since E\{L) — ^.\{L)I^, the result follows. •
In particular, if Ai(Iv) = 1 then fi < 2 and ir' — ir". If all the linking numbers are 0 and /x is even the exponent can be improved to 2/x—2. These estimates are best possible, in general [Tr84]. (However if L can be obtained by surgery on the trivial link then Ai(L) e (7 M ) 3 "- 4 [P188]). The localized invariants are trivial for homology boundary links. The ith longitudinal element £{ is unlinked if the ith longitude is in 7r', i.e., if £^ = 0 for all j ^ i. It is then the image of this longitude in B(L) = TT'/W", and (U — l)£i = 0. Henceforth we shall abbreviate "longitudinal element" to "longitude". The longitudinal polynomial of £i is the greatest common divisor in A^/fti — 1) = AM_i of the annihilator of the image of £i in A(L)/U, where U is the submodule generated by the other unlinked longitudes. (If £{ is not unlinked we define the longitudinal polynomial to be 0).
4.7. CHEN GROUPS, NULLITY AND LONGITUDES
83
4.7. Chen groups, nullity and longitudes If L is a jz-component boundary 1-link with group TT — nL then E„-i{L) = 0, E„(L) is principal, H2(X;Alt) =* ( A ^ " 1 and the longitudes of L are in {ixj)1 < n". (In particular, if // = 1 then //^(-X'jAi) = 0 and ^ = 7r'). These properties all follow from the fact that the maximal abelian and maximal free covering spaces X' and Xw of X — X(L) may be obtained by splitting X along a family of disjoint Seifert surfaces. We may then apply Alexander duality in S3 and a Mayer-Vietoris argument. In this section we shall relate these properties for more general links. THEOREM 4.14. Let L be a ^-component 1-link with group ir = TTL, and let P be the submodule of A(L) generated by the longitudes. Then the following are equivalent: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Eli-1(L) = 0; Ch{ir;q) £ Ch{F(n);q) for all q > 1; the longitudes of L are in 7r(oo); there is an f e Ann(P) such that e(f) — 1; the linking numbers are all 0 and 7r(oo)/7r" = T(TT'/TT") = TA(L).
Moreover P is then pseudonull. The equivalence (1) 4=> (2) was proven in Theorem 4.10. Let 6 : F(fx) —> 7r be the homomorphism determined by a choice of meridians. The induced homomorphisms 9q : F{n)/F(ij)q —> 7r/7rq are epimorphisms. Hence the homomorphisms Ch(6; q) are also epimorphisms. The longitudes of L are all in IT' if and only if Ch(6; 3) is an isomorphism, by Theorem 1.4. We assume henceforth that this is so. Then (U — 1)£; = 0, for all 1 < i < /*. Let [wiiq] be the image of £, in Ch(F(/j,);q), and let B = TT'/TT" and B(JJ) = F(n)'/F(JJ)". Then Ch(9;q)([wi,q]) is the image of £{ in Tr'/TTgTr" = B/(I^i-2B. If Ch(ir;q) ^ Ch(F(n);q) then Ch(9;q) is an isomorphism, since Ch(F(/j,; q) is a finitely generated abelian group. Hence (£» —1)[IUJ)9] is in (I^)q~2B(ii), for all i. There is a k > 0 such that if (U - l)w e (I,t)tB(fi) for some i, t then w e (^)* _ f c 5(/i), by the Artin-Rees Lemma (Proposition 10.9 of [AM]). PROOF.
84
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
Thus if Ch(n;q) 2£ Ch(F(/j,);q) for all q > 1 then U is in q>o(In)9B = C\q>2({irqir")/-K") = TT(OO)/TT", and so the longitudes are in 7r(oo). Conversely, if the longitudes are in 7r(oo) then Ch(d; q) is an isomorphism for all q>2. Thus (2) <=> (3). The ideal E^(L) contains some <5 such that e(S) = 1, since e{Ell{L)) = Z. Let D = {5n \n> 0}. If £ M -i(L) = 0 then A(L)D is a projective A^-module, by Corollary 3.7.1, so some power 5N annihilates TB = TA(L). Moreover T(n'/n") is annihilated by 1 + j , where j = 6N - 1 6 I„. Since n n > 0 ((/ M ) n 5) = {g € B | (1 + j)g = 0 for some j 6 1^}, by Krull's Theorem (Theorem 10.17 of [AM]), we get 7r(oo)/7r" = TB = TA(L). Thus (1) implies (4) and (5). If (4) holds then 1 - / e 1^, so P = I^P. Hence P < ir(oo)/ir" = nq>2((I^,)qB), and so (4) implies (3). Similarly, (5) implies (3) since the longitudes represent elements of T(n'/n"). Since Ann(P) contains both U^Z^(ti — 1) and 6N (for some N » 0), which have no nontrivial common factor, P is pseudonull. • n
The equivalence of (1-3) when /J, — 2 is due to Murasugi [Mu70]). If the linking numbers are all 0 but Ai(L) ^ 0 then P is nontrivial, but A(L) has no nontrivial pseudonull submodule, by part (2) of Theorem 4.12. (In this case the longitudinal polynomials are all 0). Similarly, Theorem 1.4 implies that ir/^q = F(fi)/F(fi)q for all q > 1 if and only if all the longitudes are in Gu. (For an homology boundary 1-link we can see this more directly. As ir/n^ = -F(M)> which has no noncyclic abelian subgroups, the longitudes are in TT^). THEOREM 4.15. Let L be a ^-component 1-link with group TV = nL and such that £^_i(L) = 0, and let P be the submodule of A(L) generated by the images of the longitudes. Then the following are equivalent: (1) there is an epimorphism from n onto F(/x)/F(/u)"; (2) £^(A(L)/P) is principal;
(3)
TTMCO)
(4)
- F{p)IF{p)»;
A(L)^(k^Y®TA{L).
Suppose that / : -n —>• F(/j,)/F(fi)" is an epimorphism. Then A{L) =* (AM)^ © TA(L) and Ker(/) = TT(OO), since B(/J) is PROOF.
4.7. CHEN GROUPS, NULLITY AND LONGITUDES
85
torsion free as a AM-module. Moreover TT/TT" is a semidirect product (7r(oo)/7r") x F(n)/F(ii)", and so TT'/TT" S B(ji) © (7r(oo)/7r"). Let M be the closed 3-manifold obtained via 0-framed surgery on L, and let PM : M ' -> M be its maximal abelian cover. Then Hi(M;Z) = TT/TT' (since the longitudes are in TT') and #i(M;A M ) = Hi{M'-Z) £ {TT'/TT")/P = fl(/z) © T, where T = (ir(oo)/*")/P is a torsion module. As # 2 (M;A M ) 9* F ^ M j A ^ ) ^ e°B(n), it has projective dimension at most 1. Therefore the only nonzero entries in the £ 2 page of the UCSS E f = eqHp(M; A,,) => HP+<*(M; AM) are ^ ^ Z, K^9 = e ? 5 ( ^ ) © e ? T ( f o r ° < 9 < A* + 1)> Ef = x 1 e°H2(M;Afl) and £ | = e H2(M; A^), which is 0 if /i = 2 and ^ Z if /x > 2. (Note that if /x = 1 or 2 then £(/x) £ (A^) M_1 , while if /x > 3 then e*B(fi) = 0 for g ^ 0 or /x - 2). Let (5 and £> be as in Theorem 4.14. Then ZD = Z and To = 0, q so e {T)o = 0 also, since localization is exact. Since H3(M; A^) = Z we may conclude from the localized spectral sequence that the maps between the copies of Z in the positions (0, zx), (1,/J, — 2) and (2,1) are what they should be. Therefore it follows from the unlocalized spectral sequence that eqT = 0 if q > 2 and there is an exact sequence 0 -» elT -> tf2(M; AM) -> e°H2(M;Al,)
-» e 2 T -» 0.
Poincare duality gives isomorphisms H2(M; AM) = B(/x) © T and e°H2{M\Atl) — e°e°B(fi). Hence there is an exact sequence 0 -* B(/x) ^ - ^
e°e°B(n) - • e 2 T -> 0.
and e 1 T = T. On dualizing this sequence it follows that e°a is an isomorphism, since eqe2T is 0 for q < 2. Hence e°e°a is an isomorphism. But evB(fj) • B(/J.) —> e°e°B(xx) is an isomorphism and hence e°e°Q! = a. Therefore e 2 T = 0. (If /x < 2 this follows more easily, for e2T is then a pseudonull module with a short free resolution). Hence e°T = 0 and so p.d.AT < 1. Therefore E^A^/P) = £ 0 (T) is invertible, by Theorem 3.7, and so is principal, since A^ is factorial. Thus (1) implies (2). If En{A(L)/P) is principal then A(L)/TA(L) = A(TT/TT{OO)) is projective, and therefore free, by Theorem 3.7. Hence TT/TT(OO) =
86
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
F(/i)/F(/i)", by Theorem 4.2. Thus (2) implies (3), which in turn clearly implies (4). If A(L) * (A p )" © TA(L) then TA(L) < B(L). Let K be the preimage of TA(L) in TT and G = n/K. Then G/G" = F(n)/F((i)", by Theorem 4.2, and so TT maps onto F(/J,)/F(fj,)". This proves the theorem. • COROLLARY 4.15.1. / / the above conditions hold then P is the maximal pseudonull submodule ofA(L), Ann(TA(L)/P) = (A/U(L)), A{L)/P is Z-torsion free and E^L) = A M (L)£ 0 (P). PROOF. Since E^(A(L)/P) is principal and P is pseudonull it follows from Theorems 3.7 and 3.12 that Ey,{L) = E0(TA(L)) = Afl(L)Eo(P). The remaining assertions are immediate consequences of Theorem 3.8 and part (6) of Theorem 4.12. • 4.15.2. i*^_i(L) = 0 and Ep(L) is principal if and only if TT maps onto F(/i)/F(/x)" and the longitudes of L lie in TT". If these conditions hold then H2{X\h.fX) is free. • COROLLARY
The conditions on TT and the longitudes in this corollary each imply that ^ _ i ( L ) is 0; otherwise all four conditions are independent. The connection between longitudes and principality for 2-component homology boundary links is due to Crowell and Brown [Cr76]. There are examples of 3-component homology boundary links for which the module H.2{X\Ktl) is not free. (See §7 of Chapter 7). Boundary 1-links may also be characterized as links whose components are sparated by a system of connected closed surfaces C{ such that each component of the link is null-homologous in S3 — UCj. (We may take C{ = dRi, where the Ri are disjoint regular neighbourhoods in S3 of a set of orientable spanning surfaces for the link. See [Sm66] and [Sm70]). By Alexander duality, each component of C lifts to X'. Hence the projection p : X' —> X induces an epimorphism H2(p;Z). We show next that in general this projection is an epimorphism if and only if A(L) has rank ^. THEOREM 4.16. Let L be a \i-component 1-link with group n = TTL. The homomorphism H2(p) : H2{X{L);KIJ) -* H2(X(L);Z)
4.8. /-EQUIVALENCE
87
has cokernel Tor^ (Z, vl(L)), and is an epimorphism if and only if Efl-1(L) = 0. The Cartan-Leray spectral sequence of the projection p : (X',p (*)) —> (X, *) gives an exact sequence PROOF. _1
• Z ® A H2(X; A) - • ff2(*;Z) -> Torf (Z,4(L)) -> 0. It is clear from the proof of Theorem 4.7 that Torf (Z, A(L)) = 0 if and only if i4g = (A^s)^, where 5 = 1+/^. This is in turn equivalent to En-i(L) = 0, by Lemma 4.9 and Theorem 4.10. • If a(L) = n = 2 then H2(X(L); A2) = A2) by Lemma 4.11. See also Theorem 9.12 for a related characterization of 2-component boundary links among homology boundary links. 4.8. /-equivalence Let C be an /-equivalence between //-component n-links L(0) and L(l), and let X(C) = Sn+2 x [0,1] - C. Then the inclusions of X(L(0)) and X(L(l)) into X{C) induce isomorphisms on homology, so irL(Q)/nL(Q)q £ 7rI(l)/7rL(l)„ for all g > 1, by Theorem 1.3. Let Cr(rr)s denote the localization of the Crowell sequence for it with respect to the multiplicative system S C A^ — {0}. THEOREM 4.17. Let L be a pi-component 1-link with group ix =• irL and let S = 1 + /^. Then (1) the sequence Cr(ir)s is invariant under I-equivalence; (2) if Ai(L) = Su, where e(u) = ± 1 and no factor of 6 augments to ± 1 , then (5) is invariant under I-equivalence; (3) OL(L) is invariant under I-equivalence; (4) Tor^CZ, A(L)) is invariant under I-equivalence; (5) //L(0) and L{\) are concordant 1-links then there are / o , / i in S such that /o/oA Q (L(0)) = / i / i A a ( L ( l ) ) in A^. PROOF. Part (1) follows from Lemma 4.9. It implies that the principal ideal generated by the image of Ai(L) in A^s is invariant under /-equivalence. As an element of A^ becomes a unit in A^s if and only if it augments to ± 1 , this in turn implies (2). It also implies (3), as a(L) is the rank of A(L)s-
88
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
Let T = Torf (Z, A(L)). Then T = T 5 ) since I^T = 0. Since localization is an exact functor we have T = TS = Tor^s(Zs, A(L)S), which is clearly invariant under /-equivalence. Let £ be a concordance from L(0) to L(l), with exterior Z, as in Theorem 2.3. The argument of that theorem shows that the Blanchfield pairing on £ffi(<9Z; A^) is neutral (without localization) and so AoC&TiCdZjA,,)) = / / for some f £ A^ - {0}, by Lemma 3.26. Moreover the Mayer-Vietoris sequence of the triple (dZ',X'0,X[) shows that the kernel and cokernel of the natural homomorphism from iHi(Xo\ A^) ® iHi(X\\ AM) to tH\{dZ\ AM) are annihilated by II = IIi
4.9. THE SIGN-DETERMINED ALEXANDER POLYNOMIAL
89
is then an immediate consequence of a Mayer-Vietoris sequence argument with coefficients A^. • 4.9. The sign-determined Alexander polynomial The cellular chain modules of a regular covering of a finite cell complex pair (X, Y) have natural bases, determined by lifting cells. (We consider the attaching maps for the cells to be part of the data of a cell complex, and so each cell is naturally oriented, by our conventions on orientations for discs and spheres). The bases are well denned up to order and the action of the covering group. In particular, if p : X' —• X is the covering associated to an epimorphism 9 : TTI(X) - • Z", Y' = p-\Y) and H*(X,Y;(A„)0) = 0 then the torsion of C*(X',Y') with respect to such bases is well defined up to multiplication by elements of A* and so we obtain an invariant T(X,Y;0) G ( A M ) £ / A * . If H*(X,Y; (AJo) ^ 0 then T(X,Y;9) is defined to be 0. If 9 is the Hurewicz epimorphism to Hi(X;Z)/(torsion) we shall write just T(X,Y). This is in fact an invariant of simple homotopy type. The multiplicativity of the torsion gives T(X; 9) = T(X, Y; 9)T(Y; 9). There is a similar "MayerVietoris" equation T(X U Y; 0)T(X nY;9) = T(X; 9)T(Y; 9). THEOREM
(t - l^AiiL)
4.19. Let Lbea pi-component 1-link. Then T(X(L)) ifn = \ and T(X(L)) = Ai(L) if fi > 1.
PROOF. This is an immediate consequence of Theorem 3.15.
=
•
Turaev showed how to refine the torsion to a "sign-determined" torsion, with values in (A M )Q /Z^. An h-orientation of a pair of finite complexes (X, Y) is an orientation for the Q-vector space ®Hi(X,Y;Q), in other words the orbit of a (graded) basis under the action of automorphisms ©OJ; such that IIdet(a:;) > 0. Clearly every nonempty finite complex has exactly two /i-orientations. Our conventions on orienting spheres and links determine a canonical horientation of a 1-link exterior X(L), represented by the image of any base-point in HQ(X;Q), the meridians in Hi(X;Q) and the oriented boundaries of X(Li) for 1 < i < \i in H2{X;Q).
90
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
Let /i* be an /i-orientation for (X, Y). A basis e* for C*(X',Y') determines a basis e* for C*(X, Y) = Z ®A C*(X',Y'). Let a; = Eg
4.10. HIGHER DIMENSIONAL LINKS
91
of the maximal abelian covers of higher dimensional links with fi > 1 beyond the following analogue of Theorem 2.1, due to Kobelskii [Ko82] and Sato [Sa84], and some partial results of Kobelskii. 4.20. Let L be a fj,-component n-link with exterior Then
THEOREM
X = X(L).
(1) Hj(X; AM) and W(X;Afj) are finitely generated for all j , and are 0 if j > n + 1; (2) Z®\Hj(X;AfJi) — 0 and so Hj{X\Afj) is a torsion module, for 2 < j < n. If moreover either n > 1 or n = 1 and a(L) = /x then (3) Z®TH1(X(L);Ali) = 0; (4) Hn+i(X; A^) is torsion free of rank fj, — 1; (5) Hi(X; Afj,) has rank /J, — 1 (i.e., £^_i(7rL) = 0). PROOF. The first assertion and the fact that Hn+i(X; A^) is torsion free hold since X is a compact (n + 2)-manifold with nonempty boundary and AM is a noetherian ring. A choice of meridians for L determines a map / : V = V^S 1 —> X = X(L), which we may assume is an embedding, and which is homologically n-connected, i.e. Hq(X, V; Z) = 0 for all q < n. Let S = l+I^ = {/ G AM | e(/) = 1}. If C* is a finitely generated free AM-chain complex such that Ho(Z <8>A C*) = 0 then i?o(C*)s = Ho(C*s) = 0) by Nakayama's Lemma. If Hj{Z <8>A C*) = 0 for j < n an easy induction then shows that Hj(C*)s = Hj(C*s) = 0 for j < n also. Applying this argument to the cellular chain complex of the maximal abelian covering of the pair (X, V) we see that Hj(X,V;Z)s = 0 for j < n. Since i ? i ( / ; Z ) is an isomorphism and the Chen groups Ch(irL;q) are all free A(f)s is an isomorphism, by Lemma 4.9. Hence Hi(f;A)s is also an isomorphism. Therefore T,ffi(.X'(L);AAi)s = 0 and H/(X;A)S = 0 for 2 < j < n. Hence Hi(X(L);Afj,) has rank fj, — 1 and Hj(X(L);Afi) is a torsion module for 2 < j < n. Since x(X(L)) = (1 - /i)(l - ( - l ) n ) it follows that Hn+i(X(L); An) also has rank /x - 1. Since Z <8>A M = Z ®A M S for any finitely generated AM-module this implies the theorem. •
92
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
In particular, if L is a knot (fi = 1) then Hj(X; Ai) = 0 for all j > n and Z <8>A HJ(X; A I ) = 0 for 1 < j < n. (See Chapter 6 below for more on such "knot modules"). COROLLARY
4.20.1. e(A0(Hj(X;AJ)
= ± 1 for2<j
•
If L is an homology boundary n-link the maps dj in the MayerVietoris sequence for X' determined by a family of disjoint Seifert hypersurfaces are monomorphisms if j ^ 0 or n, since the maps edj are monomorphisms in this range, by the Mayer-Vietoris sequence for X. The maps s dj are isomorphisms if j / 0,1, n or n + 1, or if L is a boundary link and j ^ 0 or n + 1. (See [Le66] for the case /z = 1). Hence the homology modules have presentations of the form 0 -» A,x ® A —^—• AM ® 4 -> F,-(X; A,,) -> 0, where A is a finitely generated abelian group and e / is an automorphism of A (Such modules clearly have projective dimension < 2). Modules having such presentations are said to be of type BL. Thus the modules Hj(X;Afl) are of type BL for 2 < j < n — 1. If moreover L is a boundary link Ti?i(X;A M ) and Hn(X;A^) are of type BL and Hn+\{X; A^) = (A M ) M_1 . Conversely, given n > 2 and a family of modules Hj of type BL for 1 < j < [n/2] and such that iJi is Z-torsion free there is a /x-component boundary n-link L such that Hj(X;AfJi) = Hj [Sa86]. A similar agument shows that if F is a field then p.d. F A#jpf(-t<);FA,J < 1 for all 2 < j < n - 1. (The latter result is also a simple consequence of the factorization of the abelianization homomorphism from F[7r] to FAM through Z[F(fi)] [Ko89]). The examples constructed from the parafree groups G(i,j) of Baumslag show that in general higher dimensional links are not homology boundary links. Kobelskii asserted that THi(X;Afj,) and Hj(X; AM) are of type BL for any n-link L and 2 < j < n — 1 [Ko82]. In [Ko89] he showed that if L is any 2-component n-link and F is a field then p.d.^^Hj{X{L);¥Atl) < 1 for all 2 < j < n - 1, by means of the following lemma, which he proved for \x = 2 using a carefully chosen presentation for TV.
4.10. HIGHER DIMENSIONAL LINKS
93
LEMMA 4.21. Let IT be a finitely presentable group such that TT/TT' = Z^ and 7/2(71"; Z) = 0. Then the abelianization homomorphism from IT to Z^ factors through F(fi)/F(/j,)". P R O O F . Let
A
= A(n),
B
=
B(ir)
= TT'/TT" and
^
be
the
class of Cr(7r) in Ext^JJ^B). Let £p be the class of Cr(F(fi)) in T ^ A (7^,7? (//)). Let S = 1 + 7M and let £„.§ be the class of
Cr{n)s in Ext^I^B^s)
= Ext\{I^ B(fj))s =*
Ext\(I^B^)).
Then As = (A^s)^, by Theorems 1.3, 4.10 and Nakayama's Lemma. Since Bs is the kernel of an epimorphism from As to Izs we have Bs © (AJJS)'* - 75(/x)s © (^-fisY, by Schanuel's Lemma. Since .As is free of rank fj, it follows easily that £ws — €FSThe image of B in Bs is contained in 7? = s -1 7?(/z), for some s £ S. Let A be the pushout of A and 7? under B, and let £ be the class of the extension 0 —> B —> A —> 7^ in Ext^I^B). Then £„•, £p and £ each have image £„-s in Ext^I^s, B((J,)s), and so £ = £p. There is a homomorphism from IT/IT" to 7 1 (/i)/F(/x) // which induces an isomorphism on abelianization and the pushout homomorphism from £ to £, by Lemma 4.4. • In the rest of his argument he uses the ring ¥B = F[G]/F7'(G) 2 , where G = F(2)/F(2)" and F7'(G) is the kernel of the abelianization homomorphism from ¥[G] to FA2. The key step is to show that if Ei and Ei are finitely generated free FB-modules, ipi : Ei —» Ei = FA2 ® F B £4 and ip2 • Ei —• Ei — FA2 <8>FB EI are the canonical epimorphisms and there is a commutative square Ei ip:
E\
> Ei V>2
> Ei
such that wKer(>) < V'i(Ker(>)) for some o> G FA2 (cf. part (2) of Theorem 4.20) then Im(!>) is projective. Prom this his main result follows easily. To establish the key step he exploits the fact that FT? is a (noncommutative) extension of FA2 by the ideal F7'(G)/F7'(G) 2 , which is free as a left (or right) FA2-module. He also applies the
94
4. THE MAXIMAL ABELIAN COVER
fact that if M is a FA2-module such that p.d.^j^M > 1 then it has a nontrivial pseudonuU submodule to M = Cok((/>). (See part (1) of Theorem 3.22). It is not clear how to extend this part of his argument to the general case.
CHAPTER 5
Sublinks and Other Abelian Covers In this chapter we shall relate the Alexander invariants of a link to those of its sublinks, and to the invariants of intermediate abelian covering spaces. We shall consider in some detail the homology of abelian branched coverings of homology 3-spheres, branched over links. 5.1. The Torres conditions Let L be a /x-component n-link and let L(j) be the (fj, — 1)component sublink obtained by deleting the j t h component Lj. Let ip : A^ —> A /i _i be the homomorphism determined by tp(ti) = U if 1 < i < /i and V(*M) = -*•• If ^f is a A^-module let I/JM = M/(t„ - 1)M. The two conditions of Torres for classical links [To53] may be stated as follows; (1) If ii = I then Ai(£) = t2aAi(L) for some a G Z; if? > 1 then Ax(L) = ( - 1 ) ^ ( ^ = 1 ^ ) A i ( L ) , where b{ = 1 — E J I ^ J J modulo (2). (2) If n = 1 then ^{Ei{L)) = Z; iff, > 1 then ^{EX{L)) = (R^t^ - l)Ei(L(£)). Condition (1) does not depend on the choice of representative for the first Alexander polynomial, while deleting other components of L leads to conditions similar to (2). Duality establishes (1) up to multiplication by units, as in the follwing theorem from [BL57]. THEOREM 5.1. Let L be a ^-component l-link. Then Aj(L) = Ai(L), for alii >0. 95
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
96
Let p = (p) be a height 1 prime ideal of AM, generated by an irreducible element p. If p = p then pa divides A, (L) if and only if it divides A,(L). So we may assume that p ^ p. In particular, the monomials tj — 1 are units in the PID A w . On localizing the long exact sequence of homology with coefficients A^ for the pair (X, dX) and on observing that II(tj — 1) annihilates H*(dX; AM) we conclude that Hq(X;AIJ,p) is isomorphic to Hq(X,dX;Afip), for all q > 0. The UCSS gives an exact sequence PROOF.
0 - e ^ i p f ; A w ) -> H2(X; A w ) - e ° t f 2 ( X ; A w ) - 0. L e t T = T^i(X;A / 1 ). T h e n e 1 ^ = e 1 # i ( X ; A w ) = Ttfi(X; AMP-) = Tp, by Poincare duality and the facts that e°H2(X;AfJiP) is torsion free and the rings A w are PIDs. The result now follows from the Elementary Divisor Theorem, which implies that N = e1N, for N any finitely generated torsion module over a PID. D If L is a boundary 1-link then TiIi(X;A / i ) has a square presentation matrix d\ with transpose — @di, by Lemma 2.4. Hence Ei(L) = Ei(L) for all i > 0. This holds for all l-links when i = 1, by Theorem 4.12.(1), but is not true in general [Tu89]. The SFS row invariants may be used to show that there are knots for which Hi(X;A) is not isomorphic to # i ( X ; A ) [FS64]. The more precise assertion of the first Torres condition follows easily from Theorem 5.1 and the second Torres condition. (See below). We shall derive the later condition from excision and a Wang sequence. The next lemma is due to Sato [Sa81]. LEMMA 5.2. Let L be a pi-component n-link, and let X — X(L), Y = X(L(jj,)) and U = Ui=i *?"• Then (1) if n = 1 there is an ideal J containing II — 1 and an exact sequence 0 —»• A ^ _ i / J —> ipA(L) —> A(L((1)) —> 0; (2) if n > 2 and 2 < k < n there is an exact sequence 0 - itH^X-A^) - HkiX-A^) - Tor^iA^uHu^X-AJ) - 0, and Hk(X; AM_i) = ^ f c ( F ; A„_i) if2
5.1. THE TORRES CONDITIONS
97
let * G X be a basepoint. The cover r : (X',p - 1 (*)) —* (X,py X (*)) is infinite cyclic, and the Wang sequence for r gives an isomorphism Hi(X, *; AM_i) = X/JA(L). NOW Y — X is a regular neighbourhood of L„, so # i ( y , X ; AM_i) - 0 and tf2(y,X; A ^ x ) ^ A ^ _ i / ( n - 1). The exact sequence of homology for the triple (Y',X,PY (*)) gives an exact sequence H2(Y,X; A^-i) -> ^A(L) -> A(L(A)) -> 0, which reduces to the claimed form. If n > 2 the argument is similar, but simpler as Hq(Y, X; A^_i) = 0 for 2 < g < n + 1. D It follows that if n > 1 and A 0 , g (L) = A0(Hq(X(L); AM), for all 5, then ?/>(Ao,9(L)) divides Ao)9(L(/x)) for 2 < g < n. When n = 2A; — 1 > 3 and q = k this divisibility can be sharpened; see Theorem 5.6 below. THEOREM 5.3. Let L be a ^-component riitTi V
an
d
a = a
{L)-
1-link, and let U =
Then
(1) if p. = 1 i/ien I/J(EI(L)) = Z, while if /J, > 1 then 4(E1(L)) = (U-l)E1(L(jj)); (2) i/fc > 1 iften Ek-i(L(ji)) + (II - l)Ek{L(p)) < ^{Ek{L)) and 4>(Ek(L)) < Ek^(L(jl)) + I^xEk{L{p))\ (3) a(L(jj,)) > a — 1, with equality only if lip = 0 for i < JJL; (4) ip(Aa(L)) divides A a _i(L(/i)); (5) ifa(L(fi)) = a then ip(Aa(L)) divides (U - l)A Q (L(/2)); ifa{L{jl)) > a then ip(Aa(L)) = 0. We retain the notation from Lemma 5.2. If p = 1 then tp = e, so i/)(Ei(L)) = Z, by Lemma 4.11, while the other assertions are trivial. We may assume henceforth that /i > 1. If Ai(L(/t)) = 0 then both sides of the equation in part (1) are 0, so it is trivially true. Otherwise H2{Y;A^-i) = 0 and there is an exact sequence 0 - • A M _i/(n - 1) - • 1>A(L) -> A(L(p)) -» 0. Moreover A{L(p,)) has a short free resolution and ip(Ei(L)) = Ei{ipA{L)), so (1) now follows from Theorem 3.12. PROOF.
98
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
In general, there is an ideal J containing IT — 1 and an exact sequence 0 -> A M _i/J -> ij>A(L) - • A{L{fi)) -> 0. Hence if P is a presentation matrix for J4(L(/2)) then tpA(L) has a presentation matrix of the form ( ^ *$*) where X* and J* are column vectors and the entries of J* generate the ideal J. Hence rp(Ek(L)) — Ek(tpA(L)) contains the products Eo(Afl-i/' J)Ek{L{jx)) and Ei(A^i/J)Ek_i(L(p,)). Therefore E fc -i(L(/i)) + ( n - l)Ek{L(jJL)) < i/>(Ek{L)), since I I - l £ Eo(Afi-i/J) and E^A^-i/J) = A^_i. Similarly 1>(Ek(L)) < JE7fc_i(L(A)) + ( # , J)Ek(L(fi)). Since Z ® ^ ( L ) £* Z " and Z®i4(L(/i)) = Z ^ - 1 , the column (*[.*) is in the span of the columns of (•£) modulo i ^ - i . Hence
V>(£*(L)) < E
M M
+ V I ^ O T -
If A a _ i (L(/t)) 7^ 0 the rank of xpA(L) is strictly greater than that of A(L(fi)), and the sequence of part (1) of Lemma 5.2 reduces to 0 - A^-i - <M(£) - A{L{jj)) -> 0. In particular, ip(Ea(L)) ^ 0 and so ip(Aa(L)) ^ 0. Let C = i>TA{L). Since A Q (L) = A0(T-A(L)), by Theorem 3.4, it follows that C is a torsion A^_i-module, and ip(Aa(L)) divides AQ(C), by Theorem 3.14. Since C is isomorphic to a submodule of if>A(L), by the Snake Lemma, it maps injectively to A(L(fi)). Therefore Ao(C) divides A a _i(L(/t)), and so i/j(Aa(L)) divides A a _i(L(/t)). The remaining assertions of (3), (4) and (5) follow immediately from part (1) of Lemma 5.2. • The result of part (2) is due to Traldi, who gave examples of 1-links such that both inclusions are strict, and examples such that one or both are equalities [Tr82]. Let vk(t) = (tk - l ) / ( t - 1), for keZ. 5.3.1. / / fi = 2 then ip(Ai(L)) = while if ix > 2 then V>(Ai(L)) = (II - l)Ai(L(/2)). COROLLARY
vil2{t)Ai{Lx),
5.1. THE TORRES CONDITIONS
99
P R O O F . These follow from (1) since Ei(L) = Ai(L)/ / i if ^ > 1, by Theorem 4.12, and ip(I2) = (t-1) while V>(/M) = I^-i if [i > 2. •
Since the ideal (Ai(L)) is self conjugate, by Theorem 5.1, there is a unit u E A* such that Ai(L) = uAi(L). If /i = 1 then Ai(L) = uAi(L) and e(Ai(L)) = ± 1 f£ 0 mod (2) easily imply that u — t2a for some a E Z. In general Ai(L) = uAi(L) implies that I/J(AI(L)) = ip(u)xp(Ai(L)). The Corollary then gives i// ia (t)Ai(Li) = ^ i a ~V(tt)i// 1 2 (t)Ai(Li) if /x = 2, while if /i > 2 we have (n - l)Ai(Z(£)) = -Ity(u)(II - l)Ai (!(£)). If sufficiently many linking numbers are nonzero a simple induction now gives the first Torres condition. Otherwise, adjoin a new component KQ such that ^o; = lk(Ko, Li) is nonzero, for 1 < i < fi, and let L+ = ifo U L be the resulting (fj, + l)-component link. We may now use the above argument to conclude that Ai(L + )(io, • • -ty) satisfies the first Torres condition, so that Ai(L+) = ( - l ) A t + 1 ( n f = o i i i ) A i ( L + ) > w i t h a = 1 — EJ-ZQ^JJ modulo (2). On applying (ii) to the link L obtained by deleting the component KQ of L+ we have (n£=i ^i°' ~ l)Ai (L) = ( - l ) ^ + 1 ( ] i r = i t?)(Yli=i ^0i - l)Ai(L). As the common factor is nonzero we get - A i ( L ) = (-lY+1(Ui=i t ^ A ^ L ) , where bt = — Ci + £oi = 1 2^-Z^jj modulo (2). This proves the first Torres condition. (This argument is due to Fox and Torres [FT54]). Using knots constructed by imbedding once-punctured surfaces in S 3 with suitable self-linking, Seifert showed that any integral Laurent polynomial 6 E A\ such that 6 = ±tn6 and e(d) — ± 1 could be realized as the first Alexander polynomial of a knot [Se34]. Levine used surgery to construct a knot with ir'/ir" = A\/(5), and hence (by taking knot sums) obtained a similar characterization of the family of Alexander polynomials Ai(K) ([Le65] - see also Theorem 6.10 below). The natural question is whether the Torres conditions suffice also if /z > 1. We shall see (in Chapter 7) that in general further conditions are needed if fi = 2 and |^i2| > 1.
100
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
THEOREM 5.4. Let L be a ^-component 1-link. If a{L) = 2 and a(L(fj.)) — 1 then Ann(£fj,) = (tfj, — 1,6) for some 6 G A^_i and t^ generates Ker(iM — 1). PROOF. We retain the notation from Lemma 5.2. The linking numbers £ifJi are all 0, by part (3) of Theorem 5.3. Hence the solid torus Y — X lifts to X1, since it is a regular neighbourhood of L^, and so Hs(Y, X; A^-i) = A^_i, The connecting homomorphism to H2(X; AM_i) is injective, with image generated by the fundamental class of a lift D^ of <9X(LM) to Y'. The class [Z?M] has image t^ in H\(X; Afj,) under the Wang sequence homomorphism. Now H2(X; A/J = A/,, by Lemma 4.11, and H-2,{X; A^_i) is freely generated by [DM] as a A^-i-module. Hence Ann^^) = (t^ — 1,0), where 0 [£>/*] generates the image of H2(r) in H2(X\ A^-i). The final assertion is clear from exactness of the Wang sequence. • 5.2. Torsion again Turaev introduced a further modification of the torsion, which takes Poincare duality into account. Let (X,dX) be an oriented (2k + l)-dimensional Poincare duality pair, and let X' be the maximal free abelian cover of X. Let 6 : iti{X) —* ZM be an epimorphism, and suppose that H*(dX; (A/Jo) = 0. Let C* be the cellular chain complex of X', and let c* be the basis of C* determined by a choice of lifts of the cells of X. Choose bases hi of Hi(X; (A/Jo), for 1 < i < 2k, and let Vi be the matrix of the intersection pairing of Hi(X; (A/Jo) with H2k+i-i(X; (A/Jo) with respect to these bases, for 1 < i < k. Let e(i) = (—l) l+1 . Then varying the choice of bases changes T(C*;C*,/i*)ni(X) may be refined to a sign-determined invariant u+(X), as in §9 of Chapter 4. Changing the homological orientation of X changes the sign of ui+(X), while changing the sign of the fundamental class affects all
5.2. TORSION AGAIN
101
the intersection pairings, and thus multiplies u+(X) by (—l) s , where s is the sum of the ranks of Hi(X; AM), for 0 < i < k. An argument related to that of Theorem 3.15 shows that ui(X) is the image of Ao(Tfc)Ao(J)e(fc)n0 1 and let X = X(L) and w(L) = v(X). Then dX is a disjoint union of copies of Sl x S2k~K Let n 5 = Uies^i ~ *)> f o r e a c h S C { 1 , . . . , / / } . If A; = 1 then AQ(Ho(dX; A„)) = A 0 ( # i ( 3 X ; A„)) = 11/, where I = {i \ etj = 0, Vj ^ i}. Since J is by definition a quotient of H\(dX; A^) it follows from the above formula that u(L) is the image of AQ(L)II/g, for some uniquely determined j3 C 7. Similar formulae apply for the torsions u>(X; 0) associated to intermediate abelian covers of X. (In Theorem 5.3.1 of [Tu86] it is shown that for the maximal abelian cover /3 = {i \ "(*) = l^jyti^ij mod (2)}> where the u(i) are the exponents in the equation Aa(L) = {-l)m Xl^t^ Aa(L), following from Theorem 1). In particular, if k = fj, — 1 then A\(L)/(t — 1) represents u(L), as in Theorem 4.19. If k > 2 then Hi(dX;A^) = 0 for 1 < i < k (so J — 0 also), and Hk(X; AM) is a A^-torsion module, by Theorem 4.20. Hence Ao(#fc(X; A^)) ^ 0 and A0(Hk(X; A M ))ni< i < /l (t i - 1) represents to(L). The w-torsion may be used to strengthen the divisibility results of part (4) of Theorem 3, and to extend them to higher dimensional links. In each case the major part of the argument is in relating OJ(L) with w(L(/i)). Once the connection is made and representatives for each are chosen as above, the results follow by elementary considerations of factorization in AM_i, as in [Tu86]. THEOREM 5.5. Let L be a fi-component 1-link such that a — a(L) > 2. Then there are a X E AM_i and a (3 C { 1 , . . . , /z — 1} such that {YlU ^ - 1 ) M £ ( £ ) ) = (IL e/3 (*i - l))AA>(Aa(L)). Let II = n C i * 4ifl, and let: TTL - • Z»~l be the composition of abelianization and projection onto the first /x — 1 factors of Z^. We may assume that (II — l)Aa(L(ji)) ^ 0, for otherwise PROOF.
102
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
the result is trivially true, as we may take A = 0 and j3 — 0. Hence a(L(p,)) = a(L) and tp(Aa(L)) divides (II - l)AQ(Z/(/})), by parts (3) and (4) of Theorem 5.3. In particular, t/;(Aa(L)) / 0. Then u>(X(L); 4>) is the image of II7V>(Aa(L)) and oj(L(p)) is the image of U^Aa(L(fi)), where 7 and £ C { 1 , . . . , // - 1}, as observed above. On applying the multiplicativity of torsion to the short exact sequence of chain complexes arising from the maximal abelian covering of the pair (X(L(jj)),X(L)), we obtain u(L(fl))(U-l) = u(X(L);>). Taking into account the indeterminacy in the definition of the torsions, we get an equation kkH^Aa(L(fi))(n.— 1) = uhhH.1i^{Aa{L)), where u E A*, h,k E A^ — {0}, and hh and kk are relatively prime. Since tp(Aa(L)) divides Aa(L(p.))(U - 1), by Theorem 5.3, kk divides 11^, and so k = 1. Moreover IT^ divides hhllp. Therefore ij — 1 divides h for alH € £ - 7. Let (3 = (7 - £) U (£ - 7) and A = /i/II^_ 7 . Then (II - l)A Q (L(/i))=AAn^(A a (L)). D If a(L(jl)) = a — 1 then ij)(Aa(L)) divides A a _i(L(/t)), by part (4) of Theorem 5.3, and so is nonzero. As II — 1 is now 0, by part (3) of Theorem 5.3, we must have A = 0 in Theorem 5.5, which thus holds for trivial reasons only. There is instead the following more substantial result from [Tu88]. T H E O R E M 5.6. Let L be a //-component (2k — l)-link with /x > 2 and let a = a(L).
(1) If k = 1 then there are a a E A^-i and a <J C { 1 , . . . , /z — 1} such that A a _i(L(/i)) = tfli€*(*i - l))(Aa(L)). (2) If k > 2 then there is a a E AM_i such that e(a) = 1 and AoiHkWLWhA^) = o-a^AoiHkiXiLYiA^). P R O O F . (Sketch). Turaev shows that in each case u>(L) has a representative u £ (AM)o such that (t^ — 1)UJ = f/g, where f,g E A^ and tp(g) 7^ 0, and such that tp((t^ — l)u;) represents u>(L(jl)). The rest of the proof is similar to that of Theorem 5.4. (If k > 1 we use A(L) = A0(Hk(X; A^)) instead of Aa(L) and u>(L) — A(L) nf=i(*i - !))• If As > 2 then e(a) = 1, by Theorem 4.20. •
Part (1) was first proven by Levine, for the cases with a(L) = 2. If moreover fi = 2 thenis the longitudinal polynomial of £2- (See
5.3. PARTIAL DERIVATIVES
103
also Theorem 7.5 below). If a(L) = fj, then 5 = 0 and e(<j>) = ± 1 , for then a(L(fi)) = \i — 1 and we can iterate the argument until we reach a knot polynomial. However if // > a(L) then 8 can be any subset of { 1 , . . . , fi - 1} [Le87].
5.3. P a r t i a l derivatives Let di denote partial differentiation with respect to the ith variable t{. Although di is not AM-linear, the Leibniz formula implies immediately that d;(AA) = A<9jA modulo (A), for any A, A € AM. Thus the principal ideal generated by the image of di A in any quotient ring of A^/(A) depends only on the principal ideal (A). In particular, the ideal generated by the image of •0(5 /i Ai(L)) in A M _i/(Ai(L(/}))) is well defined, by the Torres conditions. Murasugi showed that it is invariant under homotopy of the fith component [Mu80']. T H E O R E M 5.7. Let L_ and L+ be two fj,-component 1-links such that L-(jj,) — L+(/t) = K, say, and such that L_M is homotopic to L+n inX(K). Then the images o/^(d A t Ai(L_)) and V ' ( ^ A i ( L + ) ) generate the same ideal in A^_i/(Ai(iC)). P R O O F . We may assume that L± differ only by an elementary homotopy, involving the crossing of two arcs in a small ball B. Such a homotopy may be realized by performing a ±l-framed surgery on the boundary Z of a 2-disc D C B which meets L_^ transversely in two points, with opposite orientations, and is otherwise disjoint from L-. In particular, we may view X(L+) as the union of X(L_ U Z) with a solid torus. Let A± = A(L±) and M = Hi(X(L- U Z),*;A M ). Note that Hq(X(L±),X(L± U Z);KJ S A^ if q = 2, and is 0 if q = 1, by excision. Hence there are exact sequences
A^ —^-f M -* A- -> 0 and AM —J^-f M -» A + -» 0.
104
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
A Mayer-Vietoris argument (with coefficients A^_i = •(/'(A^)) applied to the triple ( I ( L _ U Z ) ; I ( i . ) - S , 5 - L _ - Z ) implies that the homomorphism ip(i-) splits. Let w,z E M represent meridians for L_M and Z, respectively. Then i-(l) = z and i+(l) = z + (it — l)w, for some unit u S A*. The module M has a presentation matrix (P, u>, £), where the last two columns correspond to generators mapping to w and z, respectively. Hence A- has a presentation matrix ( £ Q £) > while A+ has a presentation matrix ( o u - i 1 ) • Hence A- and A+ have the simpler presentation matrices (P, u>) and (P,u>+), repectively, where u>+ = to — (u — 1)£. Moreover tp(P) is a presentation matrix for A(K), and -0(C) = 0 since ip(i-) splits. The first elementary ideals are generated by the minors obtained by deleting 1 column and some rows. Suppose that P has n columns, and let Q be an n x (n — 1) submatrix of P. Then det(Q,u) — det(Q,cu + ) = (1 — u)det(Q, C), and so ^detiQ^))
- ^(dltdeb(Q,u+))
= (1 - ^(«))det(^(Q), V ( ^ 0 ) ,
since ?/>(£) = 0. Expanding the latter determinant by its last column gives a linear combination of (n — 1) x (n — 1) minors of I/J(P), and so a multiple of A\(K). The result is now straightforward. • Murasugi compared the Jacobian matrices of Wirtinger presentations for the links L±; otherwise this is essentially his argument. (It also follows easily from the Conway skein relation for the normalized Alexander polynomials). We are grateful to Murasugi for supplying an English outline of his result, which was originally published in Japanese. In Chapter 7 we shall use such ideals to show that the Torres conditions do not completely characterize link polynomials, if /J. = 2 and \£\ > 1. The first derivative of the Alexander polynomial also plays a role in Jin's exposition of the Kojima-Yamasaki invariant [KY79], [Ji87]. Let / = (ii,...ir) be a multi-index with 1 < ij < ji for all r an 1 < 3 < \I\ — i d let P = i\\...ir\. Let d\ — d^.-.d^ be the corresponding r-fold partial derivative. If |7| < fi — 2 then
5.4. THE TOTAL LINKING NUMBER COVER
105
e(0/Ai(L)) = 0, by Corollary 4.13.2, while if \I\ = fi - 2 and g € AM then edi(gAi(L)) = s(g)edi(Ai(L)), so the integers |ed/(gAi(L))| depend only on / and L. These integers are absolute values of sums of products of linking numbers, by Theorem 5.3. (Explicit formulae for the derivatives of total order \I\ < fj, of a normalization of Ai(L) are given in Chapter 2 of [Les]). In particular, | e c T 2 ( A i ( L ) ) | = i r W u l - K/* = 2 then |*12| = |e(Ai(L))|, while if fj, = 3 then 4|ea f c (Ai(L))| = |ea i (Ai(L))eo» j A 1 (L))| for i.j.fc distinct, and so the \l{j | are determined if all are nonzero. We can detect when at most one is zero. If L is an algebraic link all the linking numbers are strictly positive and are determined by A\{L) [Ym84]. However if L is a 4-component link such that £12 = ^13 = ^34 = 1 and £23 = ^14 — ^24 = 2 and 7L is the link obtained by interchanging components 2 and 4 then the values of these derivatives are equal for L and 7L, and so do not determine the linking numbers. Can they be recovered from a normalization of the Alexander polynomial?
5.4. The total linking number cover Let L be a //-component 1-link and let pT : XT —» X be the total linking number cover of X — X{L). The total linking number homomorphism r : IT = TTL —> Z induces an epimorphism from AM to A. The reduced Alexander module of L is Ared{L) = TA(L) — A ®AM A(L). The reduced Alexander polynomial of L is A r e d (L)(t) = r(A x (L)). (Thus Ared(L)(t) = Ai(L)(t,... *)). This is well defined up to a unit factor ±tn. In the knot theoretic case fi = 1 it is the usual first Alexander polynomial, and we may assume that Ared(L)(t) — Ai(L)(i) is symmetric and has augmentation 1. The equivariant chain complex of (X T ,p~ 1 (*)) is chain homotopy equivalent to one of the form 0 -> As - ^ - > A s + 1 ^ 0 ^ 0 where d is the boundary map for the corresponding complex for ( X ' . p - ^ * ) ) . Thus rA(L) = # i ( X , * ; A ) = H1(XT,p-1(*);Z). The exact sequence of homology for the pair (XT,p~l(*)) gives a short
106
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
exact sequence 0 -» Hi(X; A) -» TA(L)
-* A -» 0,
so rA(L) ^ A e i T i ( X ; A ) . Hence £ ; ( # i ( X ; A ) ) = £ ; + I ( T A ( L ) ) = r ( E i + i ( L ) ) , for alii > 0 . The reduced nullity of L is n(L) = min{fc | r{Ek{L)) ^ 0}. It is obvious that 1 < Q;(^) < K(L) < fj,, and it is easily seen that K(L) = l + rankAHi(X;A). THEOREM 5.8. The following are equivalent: (1) «(L) = /i/ (2) i/ie longitudes of L are mKer(r)', the commutator subgroup o/Ker(T); (3) # i ( X ; Z ) ^ # i ( M ( L ) ; Z ) and # i ( X ; A ) 9* # i ( M ( L ) ; A ) , where M(L) is obtained by 0-framed surgery on L in If L is a ^-component sublink of L then K ( L ) — ft(£) < // — v\ hence K(L) = v if K(L) = /z. In particular, if (1) holds then the 2-component sublinks have reduced nullity 0, and so the linking numbers are 0, by the Torres conditions. Hence all the longitudes of L are in IT' < Ker(r). The image of each longitude in H2(X; A) is annihilated by (t — 1), since each longitude commutes with a meridian. By an easy argument (as in Theorem 4.14) there is a 5 E T(EH(L)) such that e(<5) = 1 and which annihilates the A-torsion submodule of H\{X; A). Hence all the longitudes are in Ker(r)'. Conversely, all the longitudes are in TT' if and only if the inclusion of X into M(L) induces an isomorphism # i ( X ; Z ) 9* Hi(M(L);Z), in which case i?2(M(L), X; A) = Z^, by excision, and the connecting homomorphism to H\(X; A) is trivial if and only if either (2) or (3) is true. Thus (2) and (3) are equivalent. The remaining implication now follows on taking coefficients Q and appealing to duality, which implies that H2{M(L);© (QA) r , where r is the rank over QA of Hi(M{L); QA) * # i ( X ; QA) and so equals K(L) - 1. • PROOF.
The argument of Theorem 4.15 may be adapted to show that if K(L) = fi then H^X; A)/TH1(X; A) ^ A* if and only if T(E^(L)) is principal. In particular, this is so if A(L) maps onto (A^)^. We then
5.4. T H E TOTAL LINKING NUMBER COVER
107
have Ep{L) = A^L)E0(P), by Corollary 4.15.1, and e(£ M (L)) ^ 0. Hence the ideal T(EO(P)) is principal, but is not contained in (t — 1). However it contains (t—l)N for iV large, since ]lf=i(^ —1) annihilates P. Therefore T(E0{P)) = A, and so ^E^L)) = (r(A M (L))). This provides another test for homology boundary links. LEMMA 5.9. Let L be a ^i-component 1-link such that /x > 1. Then T{EX{L)) = (t - l)(A r e d (L)) < (t - l ) " " 1 . This follows from part (1) of Theorem 4.12 and Corollary 4.13.2. • PROOF.
This ideal is nonzero if and only if H2(X;A) = 0. We may normalize the choice of generator for the ideal (t— 1 ) 1 _ / X T ( £ I ( L ) ) , up to sign, by using the Torres conditions. For if h(t) generates this ideal then h(t~l) = t2mh(t) for some m, by the first Torres condition, and so tmh(t) is a symmetric generator. The Hosokawa polynomial of L is the generator V(L)(i) of ( t - l ^ - ' V ^ I ) ) such that V(L) = V(L), V(L) = Ai(L) if /x = 1 and V(L) = Ared(L)/(t - l ) ^ " 2 if /* > 1. (There remains an ambiguity of sign). Hosokawa showed that any such symmetric polynomial is realized by some //-component link, for each /x > 1, and computed |e(V(L))| as a determinant in the linking numbers of L [Hs58]. THEOREM 5.10. Let L be a /x-component 1-link. Then |e(V(L))| = \Ei(N)\, where N is the xx x /x matrix with Nu = —Y?~^tij and Nij =£ij ifi^j. Let R — (t — l)Hi(X;A). The Wang sequence for pT M_1 gives an isomorphism Hi(X;A)/R = Z and an exact sequence PROOF.
H2(X;Z)
-f # i ( X ; A ) -> R -» 0.
Hence there is an exact sequence
H2(X;Z) —^-*
Hl{X;A)/R^R/{t-l)R^0.
Let Xi be the image of the orientation class of dX{Li) in H2(X; Z), for 1 < i < xx. Then H2(X;Z) is generated by the x^, subject only to the relation EZJ = 0. Since TA(L) = H\(X; A) © A and eA(L) = Z ®A A(L) — %**•, with basis the images of the meridianal
108
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
elements, we see that Hx(X;A)/R — Z ®A HI(X;A) is isomorphic to Z11-1, and has basis the images of the elements mj — mi, for 1 < i < /x. The matrix of U with respect to these bases is a minor of the matrix N. Since the sums of the rows and of the columns of N are each 0, the (/x— 1) x (/x—1) minors of N all have the same absolute value. Therefore |e(V(L))| = \A0(R/{t - 1)R)\ = |£i(A/")|. D If the choice of Alexander polynomials is normalized (as in [Les] or [Tu86]) so that the second Torres condition is an equality of Laurent polynomials this formula follows from the equation e(V(L)) = J i m ^ i ( A r e d ( L ) ( t ) / ( t - I)"" 2 ) = £ ( ( ! ) " - 2 A r e d ( L ) ) / ( M - 2)! = E|/| =M _ 2 £<9/(Ai(L))//!. The summands may be computed inductively using the Torres conditions, and compared with the terms in the expansion of a principal (/x — 1) x (/x — 1) minor of N. If all the linking numbers are 0 then ATed{L) = ( t - l ) 2 M _ 3 / ( t ) , for some / € A, by Corollary 4.13.2. The first Torres condition implies that f^-1) = (-l)'*- 1 t 2 m + ' 1 - 1 /(*), for some m, and so / ( l ) = 0 if \x is even. Kidwell used a Seifert surface argument to prove that |/(1)| is the determinant of a (/x — 1) x (/x — 1) skew symmetric matrix derived from Hosokawa's matrix, and so is 0 if xx is even and a perfect square if /x is odd [Ki78]. Are there any other constraints on / ? (We may assume /x > 2). 5.5. Murasugi nullity The total Z/2Z-linking number defines a homomorphism from TTL to {±1} which sends each meridian to —1. Let e : AM —* Z — A M /(ti + l , . . . , t^ + 1) be the ring epimorphism determined by s{U) = — 1, for all 1 < i < ix. (As rings Z and Z are isomorphic, but they are distinct as AM-algebras). The Murasugi nullity rj(L) of a /x-component 1-link L is the rank of Z <8>A A(L) [Mu65'j. Since i = e modulo (2), it is easily seen that a(L) < K(L) < rj(L) < \i. Moreover rj(L) = 1 + s, where s is the number of factors (t + 1) dividing Ared(L), since i factors through r. (In particular, rj(L) = 1 if and only if L has nonzero determinant \Ared{L)(—1)|). Theorem 4.17 implies that r](L) is invariant under /-equivalence and that the power of 2 dividing s(Ei(L)) is an invariant of /-equivalence,
5.6. FIBRED LINKS
109
for all i [Tr85]. It is also invariant under changes of orientation, since ^(*r ) ~ z{U)- However niWh) = 1 and so rj(L) is not a homotopy invariant. THEOREM 5.11. Let L be a ^-component Z/2Z-homology boundary 1-link with group IT = TTL. Then r](L) = //. PROOF. Let / : w —> *fi(Z/2Z) be an epimorphism such that composition with abelianization sends meridians to standard generators. Then the composite of / with abelianization and the homomorphism T^ : (Z/2ZY —• {±1} which sends each standard generator to —1 is the total Z/2Z-linking number homomorphism. The homomorphism T A(*^(Z/2Z)) gives rise to an epimorphism Z®AA(n) -> Z ®A A{*^{Z/2Z)) = W, and so r/(L) = /J. D COROLLARY 5.11.1. Given integers 1 < a < n < fi there is a /tcomponent 1-link L with Alexander nullity a(L) — a and Murasugi nullity r?(L) = n. P R O O F . Let / / = JJ, — a + 1 and rf — n — a + 1. Let V be a / / -
component link, all of whose linking numbers are odd, and let L" be the link obtained by replacing each of the first rf components by the (2, l)-cable about that component (i.e., by the boundary of a Mobius band whose centreline is that component). The link L obtained by adjoining a trivial (a — l)-component link to L" is a //-component link with a(L) = a and ry(L) = 77. • The Murasugi nullity n(L) and signature o~(L) = <7£,(—1) may be computed from any diagram for L, in terms of the associated Goeritz matrix (as modified in [GL78] and [Tr85]). These invariants have natural interpretations in terms of 2-fold branched covers; see §8 below. 5.6. Fibred links A //-component n-link L is fibred if there is a fibre bundle projection f : X —> S1 such that the induced map of fundamental groups
no
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
is the total linking number homomorphism r . (The latter condition is redundant if \x — 1). The fibre F — f _ 1 (1) is a compact connected oriented (n + l)-manifold with boundary dF = fj,Sn. In the knot theoretic case fi — 1 each fibre is a Seifert surface for the knot. The exterior of the Hopf link Ho is homeomorphic to S1 x S1 x [0,1], and so fibres over the circle in many ways. However there is only one bundle projection inducing r, up to composition with an isotopy of X(Ho). We shall see that if n > 1 there are no fibred n-links with more than one component. Let e : R —> S1 be the universal cover of S1. Since R is contractible the pullback e*f is a trivial bundle, and so there is a commutative diagram F x R —^-> X
R —?—+ S1 where pr^ is projection onto the second factor and E is a covering map. The covering group of E is generated by a map H : (v, r) — t> (h(v),r + 1), where h is a homeomorphism of F, and E induces a homeomorphism from the mapping torus of h to X. The map h is called the characteristic map of the bundle, since it determines the bundle up to isomorphism. Although h is only defined up to pseudoisotopy, the induced map on homology is well defined, and induces multiplication by t on the homology of F x R, considered as an infinite cyclic cover of X. THEOREM 5.12. Let L be a /J,-component fibred n-link. (1) If n = 1 then Areci(L) ^ 0 and the leading coefficient is ± 1 . (2) Ifn> 1 thenfi = 1. P R O O F . Since Hi(X;A) = Hi(F;Z) it is finitely generated as an abelian group. Therefore it must be a A-torsion module and so, if n = 1, Ared(L) ^ 0 and its leading coefficient must be ± 1 . If n > 1 then £ M _ 2 ( # i ( X ; A)) = r(£^_i(L)) = 0, by Theorem 1.3 and Theorem 4.10, so Hi(X;A) can only be a torsion module if A» = l . •
5.6. FIBRED LINKS
111
If n > 4 an n-knot K is fibred if and only if X(K)' has the homotopy type of a finite complex and a torsion invariant in Wh(nK) is 0, by the Farrell fibration theorem. This criterion holds also for n = 3, if TTK is "good", in the sense of [FQ]. As our primary interests are links we shall concentrate on the case n = 1. (See §5 of [KW78] for more on higher dimensional fibred knots). A classical link L is fibred if and only if Ker(r) is finitely generated, by Stallings' fibration theorem for 3-manifolds [St62]. The Whitehead link (£ = 0) and the (2,2£)-torus link {£ ^ 0) are fibred, and so there are no restrictions on the linking numbers of fibred 2-component links. A fibred 2component link has linking number 0 if and only if the boundary of the fibre is a union of longitudes, for the linking number is the image of either longitude under r when \i = 2. Since the action of h\ = Hi{h\"L) determines the module structure on Hi(X;A) = Hi(F;Z) its characteristic and minimal polynomials generate EQ(H\(X;A)) and Ann(Hi(X;A)), respectively. Therefore if \x — 1 the characteristic polynomial is Ai(L) and the minimal polynomial is Ai(L), while if /x > 1 they are (t — l)Ared{L) and (t — l)Ared(L)/Ai(Hi(X; A)), respectively. (The minimal polynomial divides (t - l)r(A 2 (L)) since £ i ( # i ( X ; A)) = r(E2(L))). The most interesting class of fibred links is the class of links of isolated singularities of plane algebraic curves [Mil]. Let f(w,z) G C[w, z] satisfy /(0,0) = 0, and let Be = {(w, z) \ \w\2 + \z\2 < e} and S% = dBe, for e > 0. Then / has no repeated factors vanishing at O = (0,0) if and only if some Be contains no critical point of / other than O. (We allow the possibility that / is regular at O). In that case the pair (S^, 5f D / - 1 ( 0 ) ) determines a fibred link L whose link type is independent of e, for e small. (The fibration may be given by p(w,z) = f(w,z)/\f(w,z)\ for (w,z) € 5e3 - Z " 1 ^ ) ) . We shall call such a link an algebraic link. The geometry of such links is well understood, as L is an "iterated torus link", with one component for each branch of / at O. The branches are the irreducible factors of / in C[[w, z]}, and Li is determined by the Puiseux expansion of the ith branch. In [EN] these links are considered in the wider context of "graph links" - those whose exteriors have JSJ decompositions with
112
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
no hyperbolic pieces. However, graph links need not be fibred, and not all iterated torus links are algebraic. (See Theorem 9.4 of [EN]). Let J(f) = (fw, fz) be the ideal in C[[w, z]] generated by the partial derivatives of / . If the multiplicity fi(f) = dimc{C[[w, z]]/ J ( / ) ) is finite, then / has an isolated singularity at O. (The converse is also true, but is not easy to prove). The rank of H\(X; A) as an abelian group is fi(f) [Mil]. (Note that the symbol fj, is often used for this invariant by singularity theorists). The automorphism hi is the (local algebraic) monodromy of / at O. It can be computed in terms of the Puiseux expansion of / [A'C73]. The Blanchfield pairing on Hi(X;CA[(t — l ) - 1 ] ) may be described in terms of the local Gauss-Manin connection [Ba85]. Mayer-Vietoris arguments show that the reduced Alexander polynomial of an iterated torus link is a product of cyclotomic polynomials. If L is a knot Ai(L) has distinct roots and so hi has finite order [Le72]. In general (h?! - l ) 2 = 0, by Theorem 13.6 of [EN]. (This is a special case of the "quasiunipotence of monodromy", proved by the algebraic geometers). As the monodromy of (w2 + z3)(w3 + z2) at O has infinite order and the isotopy class of h has finite order only if L is a torus knot, this result is best possible [A'C73]. (See also [SW77]). The linking numbers of an algebraic link are all nonzero. (This is essentially a consequence of Bezout's theorem). The characteristic polynomial is exactly divisible by (t — l ) ^ - 1 and so e(V(L)) ^ 0 [Du75]. In particular, the Borromean ring link Bo is not algebraic (although it is fibred [Go75]). If there is a prime p and a root of unity C,pm of order pm such that (t — (pmY divides the characteristic polynomial then the monodromy has infinite order [SW77]. The trace of the monodromy is 1 [A'C73'], and Hi(F;Z) has a basis for which the Seifert matrix is upper triangular with entries —1 on the diagonal [Du74]. The Alexander polynomial of an algebraic knot determines its Puiseux expansion, and hence its isotopy type [Le72]. If /x > 1 the monodromy does not in general determine the link. (The pair of polynomials (wu — zn)(w21 — z 44 ) and (u>28 — z^)(w7 — z22) gives a
5.7. FINITE ABELIAN COVERS
113
simple counterexample [Gr74]). Yamamoto showed that the linking numbers of an algebraic link are determined by the multivariable polynomial Ai(L) € AM [Ym84]. As the linking numbers are nonzero Ai(L) also determines each Ai (Li), and hence each component knot L{, by Theorem 1. Therefore Ai(L) is a complete invariant, since the component knots and their linking numbers determine the link, by a theorem of Zariski. (See also [GDC99] and [CSOO]). If an algebraic knot K is concordant to a sum of n > 0 nontrivial algebraic knots JtiLi-^i then n = 1 and K is isotopic to K\ [Li79]. In particular, concordant algebraic knots are isotopic, while the sum of two nontrivial algebraic knots is never algebraic. (However, see page 122 of [EN] for an example of a nontrivial linear relation between concordance classes of algebraic knots). It is an open question whether every fibred classical link arises from an isolated singularity of a real polynomial map F : i? 4 —> R2. See [BS98].
5.7. Finite abelian covers Let pk : Xk —• X be the finite cyclic cover corresponding to the subgroup T~1(kZ) of TV. There are Wang sequences relating the homology of Xk to that of XT, since pr factors through Xk- In low dimensions, the Wang sequence reduces to ...#i(X;A) - ^
ffi(A-;A)->ffi(Xfc;Z)->Z->0.
The image of the kth power of a meridian in H\{Xk\ Z) determines a splitting for the final epimorphism, so Hi(Xk;Z) = Z®H/(tk - 1)H, where tf = # i ( X ; A ) . The k-fold cyclic branched covering space of S , branched over L is the closed 3-manifold M^ = XkUfiD2 x S1. (Thus we may obtain Mk from Xk by adjoining // 2-cells to kill the kth powers of meridians and then closing off with \i 3-cells). Let Uk{t) = (tk - l)/(t-l). The exact sequence of coefficient modules 0 _• z - ^ ^
A/(tk - 1) -» A/(i/fc) -» 0
114
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
gives rise to an exact sequence #i(A-;Z) - £ - Hi(Xk;Z)
- H^X; A/(uk)) - 0,
where tr is the transfer. The image of the transfer is generated by the lifts of the kth powers of the meridians and so H\{Mk\Z) = Hi(X; A/(vk)). On the other hand the latter group may be described as a quotient of the homology of XT, via the short exact sequence of chain complexes 0 -> C* - ^ - > C* - • (A/(i/fc)) ® C* -» 0, where C* is the singular chain complex for XT. Hence H\{Mk\ Z) = On extending coefficients to C (and noting that CA is a PID) we see that the rank of Hi(Mk;Z) = (3i(Mk;C) is the number of roots of V(L) (multiplicities counted) which are nontrivial kth roots of unity [Su74]. In particular, r)(L) = /?i(M 2 ;C) + 1 and /3i(Mk;C) is periodic as a function of k. Moreover Ao((t — 1)H) = V(L), since H/(t - \)H = (A/(t - l))** -1 . The Snake Lemma gives a short exact sequence 0 - • (t - l)H/uk(t
- \)H -» H/ukH
-* {Z/kZy-1
- • 0,
since multiplication by z^(l) = k is injective on Z = A/(t—l). Hence Hi(Mk;Z) = ff/i/fcA" has order A;^- 1 |i?es(V(L),i/ fc )|, by Theorem 3.13. (If jj, = 1 this reduces to |.Res(A re d(L), i/fc)|, while if fi > 1 it is fc|i2es(ArBd(L),i/fc)|, since \Res(t - l,i/ fc )| = fc). Clearly Hi(Mk;Z) is finite if and only if this number is nonzero. Tensoring the exact sequence 0 - A/{yk) - A/(tfc - 1) - A/(t - 1) - 0 with H gives an exact sequence 0 - • i2/i/fciE - • iJ/(*fc - l)fT -» Z ®A fl" = Z'* - 1 -» 0. Therefore R/ukR is the torsion subgroup of H if it is finite. In other words, if /?i(Mfc) = 0 then the torsion subgroup of H\(Xk;Z) has order \Res(7(L),i/k)\The above discusion is based on the approach of Sakuma [Sk79]. It may be extended in several ways, at the cost of inverting the order
5.7. FINITE ABELIAN COVERS
115
of the covering group. (The rest of this section is taken from [HS97]). Let L be a /z-component link in an homology 3-sphere E. Given an epimorphism: TTL —> A, we shall let X^L) be the corresponding covering space of X{L) — £ — L; if A is finite let M<j,(L) be the corresponding branched covering space of S, branched over L. Let L^ be the sublink of L whose components have meridians mapped nontrivially by . We shall assume henceforth that A is a finite abelian group, of order \A\, and that R = Z[|.<4|-1]. Let (n be a primitive nth root of unity, and 0n(t) € A be the cyclotomic polynomial which is the minimal polynomial of £n over Q. Let S1 of order n(x) — n and the corresponding epimorphism to Z/nZ. The ring of algebraic numbers generated by R and the values of x is i? x = R[Cn] — #A/(0 n ). All tensor products shall be taken over R[A], unless otherwise indicated. LEMMA 5.13. Let P be a set of characters x '• A —> S1 such that every subgroup B < A with A/B cyclic is the kernel of exactly one character in P. Then R[A] = ®x€pRx. PROOF. For each x € P let e x = |yl| _ 1 Ex'(a)a, where the sum runs over all a G A and characters x' with Ker(x') = Ker(x)- Then the ex are mutually orthogonal idempotents and £ x G p e x = 1. • Let G b e a finite group acting effectively on a closed 3-manifold M, and let p : M -> M/G be the orbit map. Let tr : H^M/G; Z) -»• ifi(M;Z) be the transfer homomorphism. Then p*tr is multiplication by |G| and tr op* — Hgec9*- (See Chapter IV.2 of [Bre]). LEMMA 5.14. Let x '• A —> 5 1 be a character. Then (1) Rx ® i J i ( ^ ( L ) ; Z ) S* Rx ® Hi(Xx^(L);Z); (2) Rx ® #i(Afy(L);Z) ^Rx® #i(M^(Lx^);Z). Let C* be the singular chain complex for X^L), considered as a Z[A]-complex. Then Z[A/Ker(x)] <8> C* is the singular chain complex for XX<^(L) and RX®C* = RX® Z[A/Ker(x)] ® C*. PROOF.
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
116
Since Rx is a direct summand of a localization of ZL4] it is a flat Z[i4]-module and so (1) follows. Let K = Ker(x) and let p : M^(L) -+ Mx4>(Lx4>) = M^,(L)/K be the orbit map. Let q = |.RT|-1£r. Then p*q — id and qp* — \K\~lT,gGK9 n a s image 1 in Rx. Hence Rx®p is an isomorphism. • LEMMA
5.15. Let x '• A —• S1 be a character. Then
Rx® H^M^iL^-Z)
*± Rx®
Hl{XX(j>{Lx<j>)\'l).
PROOF. The inclusion of XX^(LX<^) into MX^(LX^) induces an epimorphism from RxHi(Xx^(Lx^); Z) to Rx H\{MX^{LX^)] Z), with kernel generated by lifts of multiples of meridians. Since each meridian of Lx<^ has nontrivial image under x each such generator of this kernel is annihilated by td — 1, for some proper divisor d of the order of x- But the images of such terms in Rx are invertible, and so the kernel is 0. • 5.16. Let x '• A —> S1 be a character and let x • ^L —• Z be an epimorphism lifting x§- Then LEMMA
(1)
Hl{X(L)-R)^R®A{L);
(2) if x 7^ 1 then RxA(L) is isomorphic to (Rx ® Hi(XX4,(L);Z))
®RX^
(RA ®x A(L)) / <j>n{x)(RA ®x A(L));
(3) RA ®x A(L) * HX(XX{L);R) e RA. Moreover Hi(Xx(L);R) has a square presentation matrix as an RAmodule and x{E\(L)) is a principal ideal, generated by x(Ai(L)) if /j, — 1 and by (t - l)x(Ai(L)) if fi> 1. PROOF. The link exterior X(L) is homotopy equivalent to a finite 2-complex with one 0-cell and Euler characteristic 0. The first two assertions and the first part of (3) follow from the exact sequence of homology for covering spaces of X(L), together with the facts that Rx is a flat Z[A]-module and that RxR = 0 unless x — 1The cellular chain complex for XX(L) (with coefficients R) is a free #A-chain complex C* with C 0 = RA, C\ = (RA)9+1 and C 2 S (RA)9, for some g > 0. Since Im(di) = Ker(e) = (t - 1) is free of rank 1 and projective i?A-modules are free Ker(di) = (RA)9, and
5.7. FINITE ABELIAN COVERS
117
so Hi(X^(L);R) has a square presentation matrix. In particular, x(Ei(L)) = £i(#Ax A(L)) = EoiH^X^L); R)) is principal. We may also see this directly. If fi = 1 then E\ (L) is principal, and so x{Ex{L) = (x(Ai(L))). If // > 1 then EX(L) = Ai(L)/ M . We may assume that x maps the ith meridians to tdi in Z. Since x is an epimorphismh.c.f.(di,...d M ) = 1 and so (tdl-l,... td»-l) = (t-1). Hence x(£i(L)) = (x(Ai(L))(t - 1)). D It follows from these lemmas that the first homology of X^{L) and M^(L) with coefficients R are determined as modules over R[A] by the homology of intermediate cyclic covers with coefficients Rx, and that these are essentially direct summands of quotients of the localized Alexander module. LEMMA 5.17. Let H be a finitely generated RK-module. Then H/9nH is determined as a module by the elementary ideals of H and an ideal class invariant. In particular, the %-torsion subgroup T has order \T\ = \RA/(Er(H),6n)\, where r = min{j | Ej(H) % (0„)}. Hence \Res(Ar(H),6n)\ divides \T\ in R. The module H/9nH is finitely generated and of rank r as a module over i2[£n], and its Z-torsion subgroup is also its i?[Cn]torsion submodule. The first assertion then follows from Theorem 3.19, since R[^n] is a Dedekind domain. Let I be the set of maximal ideals of R[Cn] which contain Ann(T), and let S be the multiplicative system S = R[Cn] — U m e /m. Since Ts and R[(n]s/Eo(T)s are .R[Cn]s-torsion modules they have finite composition series. The simple i?[Cn]s-modules are the quotients R[Cn]s/ms — R[Cn]/fn f° r rn e I, and the number of simple factors isomorphic to a given simple module in any such composition series for R[Cn]s/EQ(TS) is the same as for Ts- Hence \T\ = Ts\ = \R[Cn]s/Eo(Ts)\ = \R[Cn]/Eo{T)\ = \RA/(Er(H),6n)\. The final observation is clear, since (Er(H),8n) < (Ar(H),On). D PROOF.
If H is a A-module with a square presentation matrix and 8n does not divide AQ(H) then r = 0 and H/0nH = T. In this case
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
118
\H/9nH\ = \Res(A0(H),en)\ = |II(fc,„)=i A o(#)(tf)l- (Theproduct th is taken over all primitive n roots of unity). THEOREM 5.18. Let L be a link in an homology 3-sphere £ and let cj) : TTL —> A be an epimorphism to a finite abelian group. Then (1) H 1 ( ^ ( L ) ; Z [ | v l | - 1 ] ) - e x e p ( i ? x ® ^ i ( X ^ ( L ) ; Z ) ) ; (2) H^M^-ZUr1}) ^ ®xep(Rx ® ^ i ( ^ ( ^ ) ; Z ) ) . 1 In particular, H^X^L^ZWA]' }) and H^M^L^ZWA^1]) are determined by the Alexander ideals of L together with the Steinitz-FoxSmythe row class invariants corresponding to characters x € P such that Rx is not a principal ideal domain. The direct sum decompositions follow from Lemmas 5.13 to 5.15, and the further assertions then follow from Lemmas 5.16 and 5.17. • PROOF.
Let null(L;x) 1. Then E(L;x) COROLLARY
of Hi(X^(L);Z)
=
= max{d | x(Ed(L)) = 0} and N = null(L;x) + X (EN(L)) is an ideal in the ring Z x = Z[£n(x)].
5.18.1. Let Tx and TM be the Z-torsion subgroups and Hi(M^(L);7i), respectively. Then
(1) 0i(X+(L)) = ZxeP;x); (3) \Tx\ = U^p\^x/E(L;X)\and \TM\ = Y\x&p\Zx/E{Lx4>-x)\, up to powers of divisors of \A\. Moreover if x has order n and x '• ^L —> Z is an epimorphism lifting x4> then \Zx/E(L;x)\ = \A-/(x(E(L;x)i0n)\ o,nd is divisible by \Res(x(AN(L),9n)\, where N = null(L;x) + 1• Note in particular that Hi(Mj,(L);Z) is finite if and only if X^»(Ai(L^)) ^ 0 in Q x , for all * € P . The above argument does not work for integral homology, since ZL4] does not decompose as a direct sum of Dedekind domains. However the natural homomorphism from Z[A] to © x e p Z x is injective, and its cokernel F is a finite Z[A]-module with exponent dividing \A\. The long exact sequence of homology derived from the coefficient
5.8. CYCLIC BRANCHED COVERS
119
module sequence gives rise to a homomorphism from H^X^L);!,) to ®xeP{Zx®Hi(Xx<j>(L); Z)) with cokernel Hi(X(L);F) and kernel a quotient of H2(X(L); F). Mayberry and Murasugi give a formula for the order of /fi(M^,(L);Z), when it is finite, without localization. In our terms their formula reads approximately as follows: |ffi(M,(L);Z)| = D((j>)l[xeP | i M * ( A i ( £ ) ) A ( x ) ) l , where D(>) is an integer defined in [MM82] which divides n and depends only on the homomorphism from Z^ = 7r/7r' to A induced by <j>. Silver and Williams have applied ideas from symbolic dynamics to study the asymptotic behaviour of the homology of abelian branched covers of links. The statement of their result uses the notion of Mahler measure M(A) of a multivariable polynomial A. THEOREM. [SW02] Let L be a /x-component 1-link such that Ai(L) ^ 0. Then ImT l^l" 1 logflTffi (M^L); Z)|) = log(M(Ai(L))).
D
Here the limit is taken over epimorphisms (f> : -KL —• A = ® r%(Z/\i(A)Z), where |AM(A)| -* oo. When /x = 1 the limsup may be replaced by ordinary limit, as \A\ —> oo, and the Mahler measure of a one-variable polynomial an n™=i(^ — &) ^s \an\ Yl?=i m a x { l ; {£%{}• The theorem then implies that \torsHi(Mk(K);Z)\ grows exponentially, provided that A\(K) is not a product of cyclotomic polynomials. l
5.8. Cyclic branched covers Suppose now that A — Z/kZ. Then Hi(Mx(L);Z) is annihilated by z/fc. The cover is meridian-cyclic or ^-cyclic in the terminology of [MM82] if x maps each meridian of L to a generator of A; it is strictly cyclic if all meridians have the same image. The argument for the latter case at the beginning of §7 extends to show that HX{MX{L);Z) * Hx{Xx{L);Z)/VkHx(Xx(L);Z), where x : TTL ^ Z is an epimorphism lifting x- (I n the strictly cyclic case this is the total linking number cover up to sign, i.e., x = ± r ) - It *s finite if and only if i?es(x(Ai(L)),f fc ) # 0.
120
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
Suppose that %(Ai(L)) ^ 0. Let J be the image of Hi(X;A,j,) in # i ( X x ( L ) ; Z ) . Then H^X^L^Z) / J ^ Z ^ - 1 = (A/(t - l))* 4 - 1 , by an iterated Wang sequence argument. Hence H\(MX(L);Z) is 1 1 an extension of (Z/nZY' = (A/(t - l , ^ ) ) ^ " by J/unJ. Since i?i (Xx (L); Z) has a square presentation matrix with nonzero determinant it is a torsion A-module of projective dimension < 1. Hence J is also a torsion A-module of projective dimension < 1 and so also has a square presentation matrix with nonzero determinant. If VX(L) is the latter determinant and JJL > 1 then V X (L) = x{/±x(L))/(t—\y~l. (Otherwise V X (L) = Ai(L)). If n = pr is a prime power then Res(Vx(L),vn) = e(Vx(L))pr~p modulo (p), and so J/vnJ is finite of order prime to p if (e(V x (X)),p) — 1. Moreover if s < s' then and (
THEOREM 5.19. Let L be a link in an homology 3-sphere S and let x be a character of irL of order k. Then (1) ifk is odd Hi(Mx(L);1[\}) is a direct double; (2) if k is even the kernel of the natural homomorphism from #i(M x (L);Z[£]) to H1(M2(L);Z[^\) is a direct double. If L is a knot the corresponding assertions hold with coefficients Z. P R O O F . The projection from MX(L) to Mxr(L) is surjective on homology with coefficients Z[£], by the transfer formula. Since (p(n) is even if n > 2 it then follows from Corollary 5.18.1 that in each case the rank is even. Let T be the Z-torsion subgroup of H]_(MX(L);Z), and let Ik : T xT —>• Q/Z be the torsion linking pairing of MX(L). Then Ik is nonsingular and symmetric, and t E A acts isometrically. The pairing S defined by S(x,y) = lk((t — t~lx,y) for x, y E T is alternate, i.e., S(x, x) = 0 for all x E T, and has radical Ker((£2 — \)idr)- As H\(MX(L);Z) is annihilated by Uk(t) and ^fc(l) = k and ffc(—1) = fc (1 - (-l) )/2, it follows that if A; is odd then Z[\](t2 - 1) is injective. ThusZ[£] T is a direct double, since it supports a nonsingular
5.8. CYCLIC BRANCHED COVERS
121
alternate pairing. If K is a knot then t — 1 is invertible and it is not necessary to invert k. A similar argument applies in case (2), since the kernel in question is annihilated by vk/2(t2). D Note that it is not assumed that the cover is the total linking number cover. As the lens spaces L(k, q) may be obtained as fc-fold cyclic branched covers of S3, branched over the Hopf link, the result does not extend to fc-primary torsion in general. The rank of #i(M2(L);Z) is rj(L) — 1, and the Goeritz matrix G associated to any diagram for L is a presentation matrix for this group. If rj{L) = 1 then the linking pairing on the finite group H\(M2(L);1i) is determined (up to sign) by the matrix G~l. (See [GL78] for modern proofs of these observations, due originally to Seifert for knots and Kyle for links). The Murasugi signature cr(L) is the signature of the intersection pairing on H2(W;Q), where W is the 2-fold cyclic branched cover of Z)4, branched over a properly embedded surface with boundary L [Vi73], [KT76]. If R is a Dedekind domain and N is a finitely generated .R-module then the kernel of any epimorphism / : Rn —> N is projective, and [N] = /9(Ker(/)) _1 is a well defined element of the ideal class group Cl(R), by Schanuel's Lemma. (If N is i?-torsion free then it is projective, and [N] = p(N)). We shall use an overline to denote the involution on C/(Z[Cn, ^]) induced by complex conjugation. If n — pr then Z[C„, -] = Z[Cn][(l — Cn)_1] and the localization induces an isomorphism of ideal class groups. LEMMA 5.20. Let L be a ^-component link in an homology 3sphere E, and let x '• KL —>• Z/nZ be an epimorphism. Let Tx be the "L-torsion submodule of Hx = RxH\{MX{L)\'L) and let Px = Hx/Tx. Then (1) Tx^HomRx(T,Q(Cn)/Rx); (2) [Tx]p{Px)p{P£) = linCl{Rx). Let C* be the cellular chain complex for MX(L), considered as a complex of Z[Z/nZ]-modules, and let D* = Rx ® C*. PROOF.
122
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
The first assertion follows from Poincare duality, which also gives Rx ® H2(MX(L);Z) ^1^ = 7*. Since Rx is a direct summand of a localization of Z[Z/nZ] it is a flat Z[Z/nZ]-module. Moreover RxZ = 0. Hence there are exact sequences 0 -> Z2 -> D2 © £>o -» £>i -» ^
= T x © P x -> 0
and 0 —> L>3 —> Z2 —> P x —»• 0, from which the second assertion follows. D If n = p is prime these necessary conditions are sufficient modulo p-torsion, and provide a complete criterion in the knot-theoretic case fi = 1 [Da95]. 5.9. Families of coverings Let F be a field. If M is a 1-dimensional F[7r]-module, with action determined by a homomorphism p : n —> Fx, we may also write M = F(p) and HI(IT;M) = Hi(ir;p). Let f3i(n;p) = dimFHi(ir;p). The action p corresponds to a ring epimorphism p : FA^ —• F, i.e., to an F-rational closed point of the algebraic torus Spec(FAp). In particular, the trivial 1-dimensional representation ep corresponds to the augmentation ep — idpe : FA^ —* F. The ith characteristic variety of L is V{(L) = V(E{(L)) — {p € Spec(FA/j,) \ Ei{L) < p}. Then V5(L) > Vi+1(L), and V^Z) is the support of Ai(Hi(X(L);FAfj,), by the argument of Theorem 3.1. THEOREM 5.21. Let L be a p,-component 1-link and F a field. Then (1) Vi(L) = V(Ai(L)) ifp<2 and Vi(L) = F(Ai(L)) U {Ker( £ )} i//x > 2. (2) /?I(7T;£F) = /i and (3i(ir;p) = max{z | p 6 Vi(L)} = max{z I p(Ei(ir)) = 0} otherwise. P R O O F . The first assertion follows immediately from Theorems 3.1 and 4.12. If p = £p then PI(TT,P) = dimpHi(ir; F) = p,. If p is nontrivial then HO(TT; p) = 0, and tensoring the augmentation sequence for TV
5.9. FAMILIES OF COVERINGS
123
with F(p) gives a short exact sequence 0 - H^-p)
-> F(p) ® z[w] A(n) = F(p) ®m
J(TT)
-> F(p) - 0,
and so /?i(7r; p) = max{i | p G Vf(I,)} = max{i | p{Ei(n)) = 0}.
D
The support is all of 5pec(FA M ) if Ai(L) = 0 and has dimension p — 1 otherwise, except if F(ir'/ir") — 0, when it is empty. (This can only happen if /i < 2). The first Betti number jumps along the subvarieties of Spec(FA^) determined by the elementary ideals. (See [Th93] for some results on cohomology jumps for nonabelian representations of knot groups). In particular, p 6 Vi(n) if and only if either p = e and p > 2 or p / e and Hi(ir; p) ^ 0. An epimorphism a : ir —> Zk induces an embedding Spec(a) of Spec(FAk) as a subtorus of Spec(FAlx). A translate of a subtorus is a subvariety determined by equations of the form lit" = / , with n(i) E Z for 1 < i < p and / € F. THEOREM 5.22. Let L be a p-component iterated torus link and F a field. Then V\ (L) is the union of finitely many translates of subtori. P R O O F . (Sketch). We may assume that L may be obtained from a simpler iterated torus link £ (with m < p components) by composing one component £j with an m'-component link £' in S1 x D2 which is either a torus knot or the union of such a knot and the core S1 x {0} [SW77]. Let C'+ denote the corresponding 2- or 3component link in S3. As X(L) = X(£) UX(C'+), identified along the torus T = dX(Ci), and all the linking numbers are nonzero we find that
#i(A-(L);A„) <* (A„ ® ^ ( X ( £ ) ; A m ) 0
(A,l®H1(X{£'+);Aml+1).
(The tensor products are taken over the appropriate subrings for each summand). Thus we may argue by induction, once the claim is established for the model links C'+. We refer to [SW77] for these. • This was first obtained for algebraic 1-links in [Sa90]. The present argument applies to all the characteristic varieties V^L), and is due to Libgober [Li02].
124
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
Let Aff(F) be the group of affine transformations a : F —> F, such that a(z) — rz + s for some r,s G F with r ^ 0 and for all z E F. Let xi,... Xfj, be a meridianal basis for IT, and suppose that /o : n —> Aff(F) is a homomorphism. Let Aff(n; /o) be the set of homomorphisms f : n —> Aff(F) such that /(a?;) = fo(xi) for all i. Then there is a representation p : n —> F x such that such that /()(-*) " /()(0) = p(g)z for all 5 e TT, z E F and / e Aff(ir; /„). If / € A / / ( T T ; /O) let / V ) = /()(0) for all g E TT'. Then f(gh*") = Kg-*") + f(hir") and / ( A ^ A r V ) = p(k)f(gir") for all g, h E TT' and k E n, so f : IT'/TT" —> F(p) is a homomorphism. If p ^ £p the function from Aff(ir;fo) to Hom^}^'/n",F(p)) which sends / to / is 1-1. It is easily seen to be bijective if p < 2. (See [deR67] for the knot-theoretic case). However this map is no longer onto if p > 3. Coverings of the exterior X of a /Lz-component link with covering group isomorphic to Zk are parametrized by fc-planes in i J 1 ( X ; Q ) . The variation of the homology of such coverings of finite complexes as the fc-plane moves in the Grassmannian Gk(H1(X;Q)) is studied in [DF87] and [Pr87]. We shall specialize the argument of [DF87] to the case of classical links. (The further subtleties of [Fr87] are irrelevant here, as V\{L) has dimension > p — 1 or is empty). Let a : IT —> Zk be an epimorphism. Since FAfc ®a A(L) is an extension of the maximal ideal Ik of FA& by Hi(X;a*FAk) and Ei(L) — Ai(L)Ifj, it is easily seen that the support of Hi(X;a*FAk) contains Spec(a)~1(V(Ai(L))) and is contained in Spec(a)~\Vi(L)). As a finitely generated .FAfc-module is finite dimensional over F if and only if its support is finite, H\{X\a*FKk) is finite dimensional if and only if VX{L) n lm(Spec(a)) is finite [DF87]. This is trivially the case if k — 0 or if p < 2 and Ai(L) = 1. Otherwise V\(L) has codimension < 1, and so V\(L) D Im(Spec(a)) can only be finite if k = 1 and Ai(L) ^ 0. An epimorphism a : -K —> Z sends each U to some power tai, for 1 < i < p. As FAi is a PID Hi(X;a*FAi) is infinite-dimensional if and only if a(Ai(L)) is identically 0. This is easily seen to impose finitely many linear constraints on the exponents a;, and so the set of infinite cyclic covers of X with finite dimensional homology corresponds to the
5.10. TWISTED ALEXANDER INVARIANTS
125
Q-rational points of a (possibly empty) Zariski open subset of the projective space V(H1(X;Q)). Let cf>n : nL —> {Z/nZY be the epimorphism sending meridians to the standard generators. Then there is q € N and polynomials Pi(t) for 1 < i < q such that /3i(M^ n (L); C) = Pi(n) if i = n modulo (q) [ASZ94]. The Betti numbers are said to be polynomially periodic. As observed in §7 above, when fi = 1 the Betti numbers are in fact periodic. The argument depends on the fact that the algebraic group (G m ) M = Spec(AM) has the strong approximation property and on the proof of a conjecture of Lang about torsion points in an algebraic subvariety of 5pec(A^). In general, may we always assume that the polynomials pi(t) have degree < /x? 5.10. T w i s t e d A l e x a n d e r invariants Let a : IT —> Zk be an epimorphism, and let K = Ker(a). Let R be a factorial domain, M a finitely generated left i?[7r]-module and V a right i?[7r]-module which is finitely generated and free as an .R-module. Let V\K denote V considered as a right i?[/f]-module by restriction. The diagonal action of -K on V ®R M (determined by g(vgm for all g € 7r, V E V and m G M) induces an action of -K/K on V <8)R\K} M, and this module is finitely generated over R[ir/K] = RAk- (It suffices to check this when M = R[ir]). Therefore if C* is a finitely generated free i?[-7r]-chain complex the homology groups Hq{V ®R[K] C*) are finitely generated .RA^-modules. The elementary ideals of these modules are the twisted Alexander invariants of X with respect to a and V [Wa94], [KL99]. If X = X(L) and V = R with the trivial (augmentation) 7r-action the determinantal invariants of i/*(X; a, R) are essentially specializations of the ordinary Alexander invariants of L. If X is a finite complex with TTI(X) = ir let H*(X;a, V) = H*(V ®R[K] Cm(X)). Thus H,(X;a,V) £ H*{XK;V\K), with the additional data of the .RAfc-module structure. If moreover V\K is a direct summand of R[K/N]n for some subgroup N < K and some integer n > 0 then H*(X; a, V) is a direct summand of H*(XN; R)n. (This is so if R is a field and K acts on V through a finite group whose
126
5. SUBLINKS AND OTHER ABELIAN COVERS
order is not divisible by the characteristic of R). If k = 0 (so K = re) then H*(X; a, V) is just the homology of X with local coefficients V. If k = 1 we may identify H*(X; a, V) as homology of X with local coefficients in a related module. Let V[Z] — V ®R RAI, with the right i?[7r]-module structure determined by (v 0 tn)g = vg 0 £n+Q(s) for all v G V, n G Z and g G n. THEOREM 5.23. Let X be a finite complex with 7Ti(X) = TT and let V be a right R[i{\-module which is finitely generated and free as an R-module. Let a : IT —> Z be an epimorphism. Then H*(X; a, V) and H*(X; V[Z]) are canonically isomorphic as R-modules. PROOF. Let K = Ker(a) and choose a splitting a : Z —> ir. If M is a left i2[7r]-module define a surjection 0 : V[Z]®RM —> V®R{K\ M by 9((v 0 tn) 0 m) = va{t~n) 0 a(tn)m, for allv€V,neZ and n n me M. Then 6 is i?-linear and 0((v 0 t )g 0 m) = 9({v 0 t ) 0 gm), for all v G V, n G Z, g € ir and m G M. Hence 0 induces an ii-linear epimorphism from V[Z] ®R[n] M to V®R^ M. This is easily seen to be independent of the choice of splitting a and to be an isomorphism for M a finitely generated free R[ir]-module. Hence it induces a canonical isomorphism of the chain complexes V[Z] <S>R[n] C*(X) and V®R[K\ C*(X), and so H*(X; a, V) and H*(X; V[Z\) are isomorphic as .R-modules. D We may use such a splitting a to define a (RA, i?[7r])-bimodule structure on V[Z], so that 9 induces isomorphisms of i?A-modules. (If X = X(L) for some /x-component 1-link L and k = \x > 1 the abelianization homomorphism from TTL to Z^ usually does not split - see Corollary 4.12.1). For each % > 0 let Ai(X,a,V) be the highest common factor of the first nonzero elementary ideal of Hi(X;V[Z]). This is the ith twisted Alexander polynomial of X, twisted by the representation V. It may be calculated in terms of the free differential calculus. Twisted polynomial invariants associated to representations in 5L(2,Fy) were used to distinguish the two 11-crossing knots with Alexander polynomial 1 [Wa94].
5.10. TWISTED ALEXANDER INVARIANTS
127
We shall summarize briefly the main results of [KL99] relating twisted Alexander polynomials to Reidemeister-Pranz torsions. Assume that the coefficient ring is a field F and that the complex C*(X;V(t)) = F(t) ®FA (V ®F[K) C*{X)) is acyclic. A basis of V and lifts of the cells of X determine a class of bases for C„{X\ V(t)), and the torsion of this based complex is the image in F(t)x/FAX of i+ T(X,a,V) = TLAi(X,a,Vy® (where e(i) = ( - l ) \ for all i 6 Z), as in Theorem 3.15. Standard duality properties of torsion [Mi62] imply that if X is a closed odd-dimensional manifold and V is a unitary representation then T(X, a, V) = T(X, a, V), while if moreover X — dW where W is an even-dimensional manifold, and a and V each extend to -K\{W) then T(X, a, V) — ff for some / 6 F(t). An important special case leads to a purely 3-dimensional definition of certain invariants of knot concordance. Let K be a 1-knot and let Xm be the m-fold cyclic coovering space of X — X(K) and Mm be the m-fold cyclic branched covering space of 5 3 , branched over K, as above. Let Ym be the m-fold cyclic covering space of Y — M{K). The composition of the inclusion of IT = 7Ti(Ym) into ni(Y) with the Hurewicz homomorphism gives an epimorphism a from TT to mZ = Z. The inclusion of Xm into Ym induces an isomorphism on homology in degree < 1, while the inclusion of Xm into Mm induces a surjection to ifi(M m ;Z). Hence a character x '• ffi(Mm;Z) —> Z/dZ determines a 1-dimensional representation Vx of tr in Q(Cd)- If K is a slice knot and m = pr and n = qs, where p and q are primes, then A i ( y m , a, Vx) = / ( t ) / ( t _ 1 ) ( t - l ) s , for certain X , while T(Ym, a, Vx) is the determinant class of the Casson-Gordon Witt class defined in [CG86]. This work is used in [KL99'] to show that the knot 8i 7 is not concordant to its reverse (the knot obtained by reversing both the string orientation and the ambient orientation).
This page is intentionally left blank
Part 2
Applications: Special Cases and Symmetries
This page is intentionally left blank
CHAPTER 6
Knot Modules In this chapter and the next we shall consider the special cases fi — 1 and /i = 2, respectively. The knot theoretic case has been the most studied. In higher dimensions knot modules and the associated pairing provide complete invariants for significant classes of knots ([Le70], [Fa83]), and the Witt class of the Blanchfield pairing on the middle dimensional knot module is a complete invariant of concordance for (2q + l)-dimensional knots with q > 1 [Le69], [Ke75]. The question of which modules are realized by knots has been almost completely answered by Levine [Le77], and the algebraic study of such modules was pursued in [Lev]. We shall make some observations on the structure of knot modules which complement this work, and give some further detail on Blanchfield pairings and cyclic branched covers for classical knots. 6.1. Knot modules Let A = Ai = Z[t, t _ 1 ] be the ring of integral Laurent polynomials in one variable, and let RA = R2 A, for any noetherian ring R. Then RA is a PID if R is a field and is a factorial noetherian domain of global dimension 2 if R is a PID. Since A is finitely generated as a ring, its prime ideals are intersections of maximal ideals. Moreover projective A-modules are free. Let M be a finitely generated A-module and F a field. Then FM — F ® M is a direct sum of cyclic modules, since FA is a PID. In fact FM = ©,>i(FA/Ai(M)), and so its structure is determined by the invariants Aj(M). However A is not a PID, and in general the A-modules arising in knot theory are not direct sums of cyclic modules. 131
132
6. KNOT MODULES
Let zM denote the maximal finite A-submodule of M. Then zM is naturally isomorphic to e 2 e 2 M, by Theorem 3.22. Every finite Amodule can be decomposed uniquely as a direct sum of m-primary modules, where the summation is over the maximal ideals m of A. By the Krull-Schmidt Theorem these summands are in turn direct sums of indecomposable modules in an essentially unique way. An m-primary finite A-module may be considered as a module over the m-adic completion Am. (The latter ring is isomorphic to a ring of power series 5[[X]] in one variable with coefficients in an unramified extension S of the p-adic integers, where (p) = m n Z). If M is a torsion A-module then it is pure if zM — 0, i.e., if it has no nonzero finite submodule. A torsion module M is pure if and only if Eo(M) is principal if and only if M has a square presentation matrix, by Theorems 7, 8, 21 and 22 of Chapter 3. A knot module is a finitely generated A-module on which t—1 acts invertibly. The homology modules of the infinite cyclic covering of a knot complement are knot modules, by Lemma 2.1. A knot module M is a torsion A-module, since t — 1 acts invertibly on Q ®% M. Its Z-torsion submodule is the direct sum of its p-primary components. Since t — 1 acts invertibly on these components, and since a finitely generated FpA-module on which t—1 acts invertibly is finite induction on the exponent of the Z-torsion shows that it is finite. Hence zM is the submodule of elements of finite additive order, and the pure torsion quotient M/zM is Z-torsion free. 6.2. A Dedekind criterion If 9 is an irreducible element of A then (9) is a prime ideal, and Re — A/(6) is a 1-dimensional noetherian domain. It is then a subring of the algebraic number field KQ —A/(0). If Rg is integrally closed (and so a localization of the ring of integers in KQ) we shall call 9 a Dedekind element. T H E O R E M 6.1. Let m be a maximal ideal of Z[t]. Then m — (p,g(t)) for some prime p in Z and some polynomial g(t) whose image in Fp[t] is irreducible.
6.2. A DEDEKIND CRITERION
133
P R O O F . If m n Z = 0 then mo = mQ[t] is a proper maximal ideal of Q[t], and so is principal. Therefore after enlarging the coefficient ring ring Z to A by localizing away from finitely many primes of Z we may assume that m = (/) for some nonconstant polynomial / . Let p be a nonzero prime of A and let p in A generate the maximal ideal of Ap. Then p maps to a nonzero element of the field A[t]/(f), so pg — 1 = hf for some g, h in A[i\. Therefore / maps to a unit in (ylp/p)[£] and so one coefficient of / is a unit in Ap/p, while all the other coefficients are in p. But at least one of these coefficients is nonzero and so is divisible by only finitely many primes. Since A has infinitely many primes, this gives a contradiction. Hence m fl Z is a nonzero prime ideal. The rest follows easily. •
In particular, if d is the degree of g(t) and n = pd — 1 then m must contain tn — 1. An interesting consequence is that if II is a set of rational primes and S is the multiplicative system generated by n U {tn - 1 | (n,p) = lVp 6 II} then Z[t]s is a PID. (The case II = 0 inverts all cyclotomic polynomials, while at the other extreme we obtain Q[i]). It also follows from this theorem that the localizations of Z[t] or A at maximal ideals are regular noetherian domains of dimension 2 (see page 123 of [AM]). THEOREM 6.2. Let 9 be an irreducible element of A. Then 9 is Dedekind if and only if it is not contained in m2, for any maximal ideal m = (p,g(t)) such that p divides the resultant R(9,6') and the image of g(t) divides the image of 9 in ¥pA. The maximal ideals m of A which contain 9 correspond bijectively to the maximal ideals n of RQ under the canonical epimorphism. It shall suffice to show that for such an n the localization Rgjn is a discrete valuation ring if and only if 9 is not in m 2 . Let p = mDZ and S = A m . Then S is a local ring with maximal ideal generated by p and g(t), for some g(t) representing an irreducible factor of the image of 9 modulo p. Since 0 < (9) < mS is a chain of distinct prime ideals, mS cannot be principal, and so mS/(mS)2 has dimension 2 as a vector space over the field S/mS, by Nakayama's PROOF.
134
6. KNOT MODULES
Lemma. The maximal ideal of RetU is mS/(9) and so is principal if and only if there is some s in S such that mS = (9, s). In this case the images of 9 and s in mS/{mS)2 would form a basis, so 9 is not in m 2 . Conversely if 9 is not in m2 then there is some s in S such that the images of 9 and s generate mS/(mS)2, and hence mS = (9,s), by Nakayama's Lemma again. If 9 is in m 2 then the derivative 9' is in m, so the images of 9 and 9' in F p A have a common root in an extension of F p . Thus p must divide the resultant R(9,9'), and the image of g{t) must divide the image of 9 in F p A. • The above argument applies equally well to polynomials in one variable with coefficients in any Dedekind domain with infinitely many prime ideals. In particular, it may be used to give a quick proof for the Nullstellensatz for two variables, and to show that a plane curve denned by a polynomial equation f(X, Y) = 0 with coefficients in a perfect field F is nonsingular (has well defined tangents every where) if and only if its coordinate ring F[X, Y]/(f) is Dedekind. It also provides a quick method for showing that rings of cyclotomic integers are integrally closed. In general an irreducible element need not be Dedekind but it is at least true that every maximal ideal of RQ can be generated by at most two elements (since this is so for A) and so every finitely generated torsion free i?^-module is reflexive. (See Theorem 41 of [Mat]). Moreover RQ is Gorenstein, since it has a finite injective resolution 0 —• RQ —> KQ —> KQ/RQ —> 0 over itself. (See Theorem 7 of [Mat]). This may be of relevance in studying the duality pairings arising in knot theory. 6.3. Cyclic modules Since A is factorial the conditions EQ(M) = 0 and E\{M) — A characterize free cyclic modules, by Corollary 3.7.1. If M is a cyclic torsion A-module then clearly E\{M) = A and for each factor 9 of Ao(M) the quotient module M/9M is pure cyclic. In particular, if 9 is irreducible the SFS invariants of M/9M (considered as a module over R — A/\9)) are both 1. If
6.3. CYCLIC MODULES
135
6 = (fnjj then M/8M may be considered as an extension of A/(tp) by A/(). Such extension modules have a presentation matrix ( 't j,) for some rj and are determined up to isomorphism by the class of r\ in the quotient of Ext\(A/(il;),A/(^)) = A/(>, V>)) by the action of Aut(A/(1>)) x Aut(A/( )) - (A/(V))x(A/(^))x. If 4> and ip have no common factor this group is finite. If also E\ (JV) = A the class of r\ in A/(>, ip) is a unit, and so JV is determined by a unit u MN) in [/(>, V) = (A/(0, >))*/( A/WO)* (A/(>))*. (If (0,^>) = A we set U((f>,ijj) — 1). For the module JV to be cyclic we must have u(N) = 1. Modules P which are extensions of a pure cyclic module A/(A) by a finite cyclic module A / J (= zP) are similarly classified by an invariant u&tj(P) in the quotient of the unit group (A/(A, J ) ) x by its subgroup (A/(A)) X (A/J) X . In this section we shall show that these necessary conditions for a A-module to be a cyclic pure torsion module are also sufficient. (However we do not know how to compute u(N) from an arbitrary presentation matrix for JV if U(<j>, ^) ^ 1). LEMMA 6.3. Let M be a pure torsion A-module with E\{M) = A. Let A 0 (M) = rq=?<5te(i) be the factorization of A 0 (M) into powers of distinct irreducibles, and suppose that M/5iM = A/(Si), for all 1 < i < n. Then M has a composition series {Mi \ 0 < i < n} such that Mi/Mi-! ^ A/(^ e ( i ) ), for alll
We shall induct on n, the number of distinct irreducible factors of A 0 (M). Let Mn = M and N = M/5%n)M. Then P = N/TN is a pure <5n-primary A-torsion module such that Ao(P) = 5en{n) and P/SnP 2i M/SnM £* A/(«J„), and so P S A/(Sen{n)), by Nakayama's Lemma. Let M n _i be the kernel of the projection of M onto P . It shall suffice to show that Mn-i satisfies assumptions similar to those on M. Certainly Ao(M n _i) = I I ^ " - 1 < ^ . Since M n / M n _ i is cyclic, consideration of presentation matrices as in Lemma 3.12 shows that E\(Mn) < Ei(Mn-i). Hence E\(Mn-i) = A. Finally if for each i < nwe apply the Snake Lemma to the endomorphism of the short exact sequence PROOF.
0 - M n _! - Mn -» A/(Sen{n)) -» 0
6. KNOT MODULES
136
given by multiplication by 5i we obtain an exact sequence of cokernels 0 -> M^lb-iM^
- • Mn/6iMn =* A/(6i) -» A/{5u5en{n))
from which it follows that M „ _ i / ^ M „ _ i S A/(Jj), for i < n.
-» 0, O
An easy induction now gives p.d.\ M < 1, i.e., e 2 M = 0. 6.4. A A-torsion module M is cyclic if and only if Ei(M) — A, p(M/5M) = 1 for all irreducible factors 6 of Ao(M), u^^M/tpM) = 1 for any two factors 4> and ip of Ao(M) such that 4>tp is square free and u&j(M) = 1 where A = Ao(M) and J = A-lE0(M). THEOREM
PROOF. The conditions are clearly necessary. Suppose that they hold. If P is an m x n presentation matrix for M and 6 divides Ao(M) then ( ^ ) is a presentation matrix for M/8M. Therefore Eo(M/9M) = (Eo(M),6Ei(M),...) = (9), since EX(M) = A, so M/9M is a pure module. Let 6 be the product of the distinct irreducible factors of AQ{M). Since the SFS invariants are trivial, the lemma implies that M/9M has a composition series with pure cyclic factors. By a finite induction on the number of factors of Ao(M), and using the conditions u^{M'/'(fitpM) = 1 repeatedly, it follows that M/9M is cyclic. Nakayama's Lemma then implies that Ml AM =* A/(A 0 (M)). Consideration of presentation matrices (as in Lemma 3.12) gives EX(M) = (AEi(zM),E0(zM)) < E^zM), so Ei(zM) = A. The finite module zM may be regarded as a module over the ring R — A/Ann(zM). Since this ring is artinian, R/radR = n(A/mj) is a finite product of fields. Each of the maximal ideals rrii contains Ann(zM) and hence EQ(ZM), by Theorem 3.1. Since E\{zM) = A we have zM/mizM = A/m, and so zM/^jAnn(zM)zM = R/radR. Nakayama's Lemma now implies that zM is cyclic. If zM = A/ J we must have EQ{M) — A J. The theorem now follows on using the condition u^,j(M) = 1. D Let 6 = 13t2 — 25£+13 and J be the ideal generated by the image of (3,t + l)'mR = A/(5) ^ Z [ ^ , 1 + ^ = 5 T ] . As a A-module J has a
6.3. CYCLIC MODULES
presentation matrix Pj = (
137
13(t+l) '171
J. It is a pure torsion module and EQ(J) = (5) and E\(J) = A, but p(J) = [J] is nontrivial and J is not cyclic. The module M with presentation matrix 5Pj is pure, J-primary, has all elementary ideals principal, and M/SM = (A/(S)) 2 , but SM = J and M does not have a composition series with pure cyclic factors. For otherwise it would have a 3 x 3 lower triangular presentation matrix of the form 6 0 0\ a S O] . P 7and 9 are Dedekind, and A/(V0 and A/(0) are PIDs. The units of A/(ip) are represented by {±(5£ — 4) n I n e Z}, while those of A/(0) are represented by { ± l , ± t , ±(£ — 1)}. The element a = 1 + 2t represents a unit of A/(ip, 6) (= Z/4Z[r] where r 2 = r — 1) which is not in the subgroup generated by the images of (A/( / 0)) x and (A/(0)) x . Therefore the module N presented by ( ^ ) is not cyclic, although EQ{N) = (ip9), Ei(N) = A, N/I/JN S A/(V>) and N/6N) * A/(5) (and thus the SFS invariants of these quotients are all 1). Let 5 = t2 — t + 1. Then the module with presentation matrix ( g ° 2 ) is pure, 6-primary and M/SM ^ (A/(S))2, but Ei(M) is not principal and so M is not a direct sum of cyclic modules. Let 6 = 13i2 — 25t + 13 and Mn be the module presented by <*n (i3(f+i) %) over A. Then E0(Mn) = (S2^), £ i ( M n ) = (*») and Mn/6nMn £ (A/6m)2, but £™M„ ^ J and so M n is not a direct sum of cyclic modules.
6. KNOT MODULES
138
6.4. Recovering the module from the polynomial In this section we shall show that the Alexander polynomial Ao(M) of a pure knot module M determines the module up to finite ambiguity if and only if Ai(M) has no repeated factors. If M is a finitely generated A-module and S 6 A is irreducible the (£)-primary submodule of M is M(5) — {m € M \ 6nm - OVn > 0}. If M is pure and (S) ^ (5') then M{8) D M{8') = 0, and so there is a monomorphism @M{8) —> M. However M need not be the direct sum of its primary submodules. It is at least an iterated extension of pure primary modules. LEMMA 6.5. Let M be a pure knot module and let A = 11^ be a factorization of A = Ao(M) into irreducibles. Then M has a filtration 0 = Mo < • • • < Mn = M such that Mi/Mi-i is a pure knot module with Eo(Mi/Mi-i) = (<Sj)(eW, for 1 < i < n. Conversely if M admits such a filtration it is a pure knot module, and EQ(M) is the product of the 0th elementary ideals of the subquotients. PROOF. Let MQ = 0. If Mj has been determined for j < i and M/Mi-i is pure, let Mj be the preimage in M of (M/M;_i)(£;). Then Mi is finitely generated, since A is noetherian, and Mj/Mj_i is a finitely generated A-torsion module annihilated by a power of <5j. It is easily seen by induction on i that M/Mi is pure, and M/Mi(Sj) = 0 for j < i. Therefore M n = M, since M/Mn is annihilated by A. Moreover E0(Mn) = nj=?£k(Afi/A/i_i). Hence £b(Afi/Mi_i) = (5i)e(
PROOF. Let A = n < ^ w be the factorization into irreducibles. We may assume that the factors Si are polynomials of degree d(i), with nonzero constant term. If EQ{M) = (A) then M is a pure knot module. Suppose that Ann(M) — y/(A) — (U5i). Let M = UM; be a filtration as in the Lemma, and for each 1 < j < n let Nj = Mj/Mj-i. Then E0(Nj) = (6j)e^ and so Nj is a pure knot module
6.5. HOMOGENEITY AND REALIZING TT-PRIMARY SEQUENCES
139
also. Moreover Ann(Nj) = (Sj), and so we may consider Nj as a torsion free i?j-module, of rank e(j), where Rj = A/(Sj). Let ay be a root of Sj, and let (3j = (1 — a y ) - 1 . Then /3j is an algebraic integer, since it is a root of td^6j(l — £ _ 1 ). Since (t — 1) acts invertibly on Nj we may view Nj as a finitely generated torsion free Sj-module, where Sj = Z[/3j, (3~\ (fa - l)" 1 ] = Z[oy, aj\ (1 - ay) - 1 ]- Since Sj is a localization of an order in the number field QA/(5j) the JordanZassenhaus Theorem holds, and so Nj is determined up to a finite ambiguity by its rank. If P and Q are finitely generated A-modules then Ext\(P, Q) is finitely generated and is annihilated by (Ann(P),Ann(Q)). Therefore if P and Q are pure knot modules such that EQ(P) and EQ{Q) have no common factors then Ext\(P, Q) is finite. The theorem now follows by a finite induction. • In particular, if A has no repeated factors there are only finitely many pure A-torsion modules with Alexander polynomial A. On the other hand, if A has repeated factors, then there are infinitely many isomorphism classes of finitely generated pure A-torsion modules M with EQ(M) = (A). To see this it suffices to assume that A is a power of a single irreducible element, A — dr, say, with r > 2. Let 0 < s < r/2. For each u G A let Mu be the A-module with generators e, / and g and relations 8s~re = 5r~lf = 6g + uf = 0. Then E0(MU) = (A) and Ei{Mu) = Ss(5,u). Thus Ann(Mu) = (Sr) if u is not divisible by 6, while if u and v have distinct residue classes modulo (5) then Mu and Mv are not isomorphic. (Note however that all the modules Q <8> Mu are isomorphic).
6.5. Homogeneity and realizing 7r-primary sequences A pure torsion module M is homogeneous if for each irreducible factor 5 of Ao(M) there is a k > 1 such that if Sd is the power of 8 dividing Ai(M) then 5d divides \{M) for 1 < i < k, while 6 does not divide Afc+i(M). (The pair (d, k) may vary with the factor S). It is of type A if A/t(M) = A or 1 for all k > 1 are either A or 1.
140
6. KNOT MODULES
THEOREM 6.7. An homogeneous A-module M of type ire, with IT irreducible, is free as a module over A./(ne) if and only if all of its elementary ideals are principal and p(M/nM) = 1. P R O O F . The conditions are clearly necessary. Conversely, they imply that M/TTM satisfies the hypotheses of Corollary 3.7.1 for some r and so is free over A/(TT). By the homogeneity of M and Nakayama's Lemma there is a surjection (A/(ire))r —* M, which must be an isomorphism since the kernel is a pure A-module, and its 0th elementary ideal is A, by Lemma 3.12. •
This extends Lemma 15.1 of [Lev] which assumes that irM is the kernel of multiplication by ire~l and that M/TTM is free. Let S = t2 — t + 1. Then the module with presentation matrix (*§) is pure, ^-primary and homogeneous, but does not satisfy this assumption. By similar arguments we may relax the hypothesis of Levine's nprimary sequence realization theorem (§10-16 of [Lev]) from "A/(7r) is Dedekind" to "the lower derivative A/(7r)-modules involved are projective". The key constructive step is Lemma 14.1 of [Lev], which we may restate as follows. LEMMA 6.8. Letir be an irreducible element of A and M a finitely generated projective A/(TT)-module, and let R — A/(-rre). Then there is a projective R-module M such that M/TTM = M. PROOF. We may assume that M = (A/(n))r~1 © I for some ideal I of A/(IT), by the Stable Range Theorem [Ba64]. Clearly we may assume in fact that M = I. Since I can be generated by two elements, by Corollary 3.20.1, the rest of Levine's construction applies. • We may similarly improve Lemma 15.2 of [Lev] to a characterization of projective i?-modules. If M is homogeneous of type ire and M/TTM is projective of rank r over A/(IT) then Er-\(M) < (ire) while (Er(M), TT) = A, and so also (Er(M), 7Te) = A. Thus the image in R of ET-\(M) is 0, while that of Er(M) is R, and so M is projective as an .R-module. The hypotheses of Lemmas 15.3 and 15.5 of
6.6. THE BLANCHFIELD PAIRING
141
[Lev] may be altered accordingly. (Lemma 15.5 follows from 15.3 by Nakayama's Lemma, as in the Theorem above). The proof of the realization theorem may now be completed as in Section 16 of [Lev]. We may give another partial answer to our general question. THEOREM 6.9. Let M be a homogeneous pure A-torsion module such that (1) all of its elementary ideals are principal; (2) p(M/8M) = 1 for each irreducible factor 8 of A 0 ( M ) ; (3) if 8 and 8' are distinct irreducible factors of AQ(M) then (6,8') = A. Then M is a direct sum of cyclic modules and satisfies the Elementary Divisor Theorem. P R O O F . Condition (3) implies that M is the direct sum of its primary submodules. Conditions (1) and (2) with Theorem 6.7 then imply that these are direct sums of cyclic modules. Finally the Elementary Divisor Theorem follows on using (3) again. •
Conditions (1) and (2) of the Theorem are evidently necessary and are easily checked. Condition (3) simplifies our task in two ways. On the one hand we thereby avoid extension problems. On the other hand, it enables us to identify M(8)/8M(8) with M/SM and so to determine M(8) (by Theorem 4) directly from a presentation for M. In general it seems difficult to use a presentation for a module to determine the structure of its primary submodules (apart from their polynomial invariants), Even if the elementary ideals and SFS invariants of a primary module are principal, it need not be a sum of cyclic modules. However, if so it satisfies the Elementary Divisor Theorem. 6.6. The Blanchfield pairing We shall describe the Blanchfield pairing of a classical knot K from a surgical point of view. The archetype of all subsequent applications of constructive surgery to knot theory is the following result of Levine [Le65].
6. KNOT MODULES
142
THEOREM 6.10. Let A e A be such that A = A and e(A) = 1. Then there is a 1-knot K such that B{K) = A/(A). Let X0 = X(U) es S1 x D2, where [/ is a trivial knot. Suppose that A = T,o S1 x D2 is a homeomorphism which preserves the ambient orientation and the meridian then ghg~1(z,d) = (z,zd) for all (z,d) 6 Sl x D2). Since the image of U lies in X(C) we may define a new knot K by K = hoU. Since U is trivial X'0 ^ R x D2. Let Z = X(U U C) = X0 intN and let Z' be the infinite cyclic covering space induced by the inclusion Z C X0. Since lk(C, ?7) = 0 the inclusion of N into X0 lifts to X'Q. Let d be a meridianal disc for N with oriented boundary m, and which is contained in D. (Thus m is a meridian for C). Let N be a fixed lift of N to X'Q and let c and d be the induced lifts of C and d. Let a and m be the lifts of m and /i(m) (respectively) to Z' C X„ which meet d. Let L> be the lift of D which meets N, and let Ko,... Ks be the lifts of KQ, ... Ks to D. An easy excision argument shows that H2(X0,Z;A) is freely generated by the relative 2-cycle corresponding to d. Moreover H2{X0,Z;A) = Hi(Z;A), since X'Q is contractible, and H\(Z\ A) is generated by a. PROOF.
We may recover X(K)' from Z' by adjoining copies of lifts of AT along lifts of h\dN. Thus B(K) = Hl(Z;A)/Am. Since intX'Q £ # 3 we may apply linking number arguments to identify m. Clearly lk(a, tlc) = 1 if i = 0 and is 0 otherwise, and s o m = Slk(m, tlc)tla. Now c is the sum of the knots Ko,tKi,.. .tsKs along lifts of the
6.6. THE BLANCHFIELD PAIRING
143
bands 5 ; . If i ^ 0 then m is homotopic to c in the complement of tfc, and so lk(m, fc) = lk(c, tlc) = a^y Hence rh = X'a, where A' = 6o + Y,i B(K) is the associated epimorphism and {OJI, . . . an} is the standard basis of A™ the Blanchfield pairing of K is given by THEOREM
{9{'Zuiai),9(Zvjaj))
= -v*B-1u
mod
A,
where (ui) and (VJ) are regarded as column vectors in A m . By the Addendum to Lemma 1.11 there is an embedding T of nS x D2 in X0 = Sl x D2 (the exterior of the unknot U) with core T,|n5ix^o} a trivial link such that ik(Tj, U) = 0 for each 1 < i < n and a self homeomorphism h of X{T) = S 3 — UT, where UT is the interior of T(nSl x D 2 ), such that h(Ti(l, s)) = Ti(s, s) for all s e S1 PROOF. 1
144
6. KNOT MODULES
and 1 < i < n and hoU = K (as knots in S3 = X(T)uT(nS1xD2)). We may recover X(K) from Z = X0 — UT by attaching a 2-cell and a 3-cell for each surgery torus. Each surgery torus lifts to X'a, since it has linking number 0 with U, and so X(K)' may be obtained from the lift Z of Z in X'Q by adjoining 2- and 3-cells. Hence there is an epimorphism 0 : Hi(Z;A) —• B(K) = Hi(X;A) with kernel the submodule generated by the attaching maps for the 2-cells. Moreover the natural map from B(K) to Hi(X,dX;A) is an isomorphism, since the longitude of K lifts to a loop in X' which is null homologous there. Since X0—Z is a disjoint union of open solid tori which are nullhomologous in X0, the module H2(X0, Z; A) is freely generated by relative 2-cycles corresponding to meridianal discs of the components of X0-Z, while HX(X0, Z; A) = 0. Therefore HX{Z; A) S* H2(X0, Z; A). Let c; and rrii be the centreline and meridian of T, and let C{ and rhi be fixed lifts of c* to X'Q and h(rrii) to Z' C X„, respectively. Then H\(Z; A) is free of rank n, with basis {a\,... an}, where a.i is Alexander dual to C; in S3 = (intX'0) U {oo} (i.e., \k(ai,tpCj) = 1 if i = j and p — 0, and is 0 otherwise). The relator obtained by sewing in a meridianal disc to h(rrii) (for 1 < i < n) is Ri = J2pjripjtpaj, where ripj = lk(rhi,tpCj). Thus the n x n-matrix D with (i,j)-entry By = Tipripjtp is a presentation matrix for B(K). Ifi^jorp^O then as m; is homologous to Cj in X'a we have lk(mi,i p Cj) = lk(ci,tpCj) = \k{t~pCi,c.j) = lk(cj,i _p Cj). Hence D is hermitean, i.e., D^ = Djj. Moreover, on projecting into X0 we see that e(D) = dza^[±l, • • • ± 1]. Since B(K) is a torsion module A = det(D) ^ 0 and since ID) is hermitean A = A. Let z be a 1-cycle on Z' and S1 a 2-chain on X' such that dS C Z' and which is transverse to z in X'. The intersection number of z and 5 in X' is i*/(z, 5) = Iz,(z, S (1 Z') = Is3(z, S n Z'), which in turn equals \k(z,d(SnZ')) = \k(z,dS) + \k(z,SndZ'). Since AB(Jf) = 0 there is a 2-chain Sj on X' such that dSj = A a j . Since rhi is homologous to SjC™DijQ!j and Sj D 9Z' and 55j together bound S" fl Z' in Z', 5,- D dZ' is homologous to - S ^ z f A p D - ^ ^ m f c . Let E = —AD - 1 , for brevity in the following equations. Then
6.6. THE BLANCHFIELD PAIRING
145
neZ fc=m
= J2 A-^lkiai^Aaj) n&L
+ \k(&i,tnJ2 ^kjrhk)tn) fc=l
fc=m n€Z fc=l fc=m neZ fe=l
= -P~x\a (where the congruences are mod A). Conversely, every such presentation matrix D may be realized by some classical knot. The l x l case corresponds to Theorem 6.10. We shall follow (in outline) the exposition of [Bai]. Let D = [0, n] x [0, l ] 2 and Di = [i- l,i] x [0, l] 2 , for 1 < i < n. Let j : D -» S 1 x D2 be an embedding and Tj an unknotted solid torus in Di, for 1 < i < n. Modify T\ as in Theorem 6.10 to give O n , the coefficient of a.\ in R\. Since e(I!>2i) = 0 the coefficient of a.\ in Ri has the form £fc/o(£fc "~ l)cfc- Let N be a small neighbourhood of T\ in j(D\). Let 5 ^ and Sk be small circles in N bounding disjoint discs in X0 and such that lk(5^,Ti) = - l k ( 5 ^ , T i ) = ck. Let a'k be an arc from S£ to Sk in N and let uk represent tk in H\{X0) = Z. Let ak be the connected sum of a'k and w^ along an arc between them, and let Sk be the boundary connected sum of Sk and Sk along an untwisted band with core ak (so Sk and Tj are unlinked). A boundary connected sum of T
146
6. KNOT MODULES
In practice one can effectively calculate the entries of B for a given knot (see [Rol]). Every pure knot module M with a (+1)linking pairing has such a presentation matrix [Tr77], and so is realized by a 1-knot. (This was first proven via a Seifert surface argument [Ke75]). A derivation of the Blanchfield pairing for a 1-knot via the free differential calculus is given in [Ke79]. In Chapter 7 we shall use a similar argument to characterize presentation matrices for the modules B(L) for 2-component links L. 6.7. Branched covers Let If be a 1-knot and Xq and Mq be the unbranched and branched g-fold cyclic covering spaces corresponding to an epimorphism: n = TTK - • Z/qZ. Then Hi(Xq;Z) = H\{Mq\Z) © Z. If q is odd then H\(Mq;Z) is a direct double, as is the kernel of the natural homomorphism from Hi(M2k',Z) to H\(M2',Z), by Theorem 5.18. If we assume moreover that q = p is a prime then H\{Mq; Z) is a finite Z[£p]-module of order prime to p. When p = 2 it is easy to see that any finite group of odd order may be realized. (Cyclic groups of odd order may be realized by knots with cyclic knot module; the general case follows on taking connected sums). Davis has shown that the conditions of Lemma 5.20 characterize such homology modules when p is odd [Da95]. If Hi(Mq; Z) is finite its order is determined by Ai(K). However the Alexander polynomials need not determine the structure of this group. For example, JE?i(6i) = £i(9 4 6 ) = (2t2 -5t + 2), £?2(6i) = A, #2(946) = (3>* - 1) a n d Ej(6l) = EJ(94B) = A for all j > 2. Hence these knots each have Ai =2t2 — 5t + 2 and Aj = 1 for all j > 1, but #i(M 2 (6i);Z) S Z/9Z and iJi(M 2 (9 4 6 );Z) S (Z/3Z)2. Moreover, the Alexander polynomials alone do not even determine the prime divisors of the order of the torsion of Hi(Mq;Z[M), if this group is infinite [We80]. Let K = 3itf95. Then Ai(K) = Srj, where S = t2-t + landr] = 6t2-llt + 6, and Hi(M6(K);Z) has nontrivial 5torsion. On the other hand, there is a 1-knot K' with B(K') = A/STJ, by Theorem 6.10, and for any such knot Hi(M6(K');Z) ^ Z2. It
6.7. BRANCHED COVERS
147
remains open to what extent the Alexander ideals determine the torsion. LEMMA 6.12. Let P be a finitely generated 'L[u]-torsion module such that (un - \)P = {u- \)P for alln>\. Then (u - 1)P = 0. Let S = {(u — l)n \ n > 1}. If m is a maximal ideal in R = l{u]s then m contains some un — 1, by Theorem 1, and so mPs = Ps- Since Ps is finitely generated this implies that Ps = 0. Thus (u - l)kP = 0 for some k > 1. Let Q — (u — 1)P. Then Q is a finitely generated abelian group and Q = vn(u)Q for all n > 1. If p is a prime then vp(u) = (u — l)p~l mod (p) and so (u — 1) acts invertibly on Q/pQ. Therefore Q = pQ for all primes p and so Q = 0. • PROOF.
The following criteria for the homology of the branched cyclic covers of a 1-knot to be periodic are due to Gordon [Go72]. THEOREM 6.13. Let K be a knot in an homology 3-sphere. Then the following are equivalent (1) Hx(Mkm;%) * # i ( M m ; Z ) for all k > 1; (2) #i(M f c ;Z) <* ffi(M(fcifn);Z) for all k > 1; (3) Ai(if) divides tm - 1. Let H = # i ( X ; A ) . Then Hx{Mk;Z) ^ H/(tk - 1)H. It follows easily that (3) implies (2) and (2) implies (1). Suppose that (1) holds. Then (tkm - l)H = (tm - l)H for all k > 1. Let u = tm. Considering H as a Z[u]-module and applying Lemma 11 we see that (u — 1)H = 0. • PROOF.
The group Hi(Mk; 1) has order \Res(Ai(K), tm - 1)|, when this is nonzero. These resultants satisfy a linear recursion formula of length 3 d over Z, where d is the degree of Ai(K) [Le33], [StOO]. The nonzero values grow exponentially if ^i(K) has a noncyclotomic factor [Ri90]. (See also [GAS91], [KW92] and [SW99]). If we use coefficients Z/p r Z instead then the homology is always periodic [St99, SW99'].
148
6. KNOT MODULES
THEOREM 6.14. Let K be a 1-knot, p a prime integer and r > 1. Then there is an integer n > 1 such that Hi(Mic+n;Z/prZ) = r iJi(Mfc;Z/p Z) as A-modules, for all k > 0. Let H = H\(X;A), and let C* be the singular chain complex for X(K)' with coefficients Z/prZ. Then H(r) = ^i(C*) £* H/prH is a finitely generated A-module annihilated by (Xi(K),pr), and so is finite, Hence the automorphism of H induced by t has finite order, n say. Since Hi(Mk;Z/prZ) 9i H(r)/(tk - l)H(r) the result is immediate. • PROOF.
CHAPTER 7
Links with Two Components Linking as distinct from knotting is first apparent when fj, = 2. In this case there are also some simplifications and special results, both in the algebra and the topology. Bailey has characterized the A2-modules which arise as B{L) for some 2-component link L as the modules having certain presentation matrices. Link-homotopy is determined by linking number alone. On the other hand, the classification of links up to /-equivalence is poorly understood, even in the 2-component case. Throughout this chapter "link" shall mean "1-link", and 5 6 AM is a (^-component) link polynomial if 6 = Ai(L) for some ficomponent link L. To simplify the notation we shall use x and y instead of ii and t
7.1. Bailey's Theorem Let L be a 2-component link with exterior X and group TT = ITL. The equivariant chain complex of X' is homotopy equivalent to a finite free complex D* with DQ = A2, D\ = (A2) n+1 and Di = (A2) n . Let ZD < D\ be the submodule of 1-cycles. Then there are exact sequences (A2)n
-> ZD
-> B{L)
= TT'/TT" -» 0
and 0 - • ZD -» ( A 2 ) n + 1 -» A 2 -» Z -» 0. 149
150
7. LINKS WITH T W O COMPONENTS
Hence Z^ has rank n, and is projective, by Schanuel's Lemma. Therefore B(L) has a square presentation matrix, as projective A^modules are free. Moreover p.d.^A(L) < 2, by Lemma 4.11, and so B(L) has no nontrivial finite A2-submodule. (See the remark following Theorem 3.22). THEOREM 7.1. A h.2-module is isomorphic to B(L) for some 2component link L with lk(Li,L2) = £ > 0 if and only if it has a square presentation matrix of the form \ \ 1 ) where v = v^ixy), /3 = — {x — l)(y — \)vt-i(xy), 7 is a row vector, A = A' and e(A) = diag(±l, • • • ± 1). Moreover A(t, 1) and A(l, t) are presentation matrices for B(L{) and B{Li2), respectively. P R O O F . We shall simplify L by surgery, in two stages. The link L is link homotopic to the (2,2£)-torus link L* — L(2, 2£), since their linking numbers are equal. By the addendum to Lemma 1.11 there is an embedding T of nS1 x D2 in X(L*) with core T| n 5 i x { 0 } a trivial link such that lk(T;,LJ) = lk(7i,L?;) = 0 for each 1 < i < n and a self homeomorphism h of X{T) = S3 — T(nSl x D2) such that h(Ti(l,s)) = Ti(s,s) for all s e S1 and 1 < i < n and h o L* = L. The map h carries meridians of L* to meridians of L and so induces an isomorphism Hi(X(L*);Z) = Hi(X(L);Z). (Note also that B(L*) * A2/(ve(xy))). Suppose first that £ = 1. Our argument in this case is closely related to that of Theorem 6.11. The model is now the Hopf link (L* — Ho), with group irHo = Z2 and exterior X0 = X(H6) = S1 x S1 x [0,1] (rather than the unknot, Z and S1 x D2), and we may again apply linking number arguments, since intX'Q = R3. Let UT denote the interior of T{nSl x D2) and let Z = X0 - UT. We may recover X(L) from Z by attaching a 2-cell and a 3-cell for each surgery torus. Hence B(L) = H\{X; A2) is the quotient of H\(Z; A2) by the submodule determined by the attaching maps for the 2-cells. Let c* and mi be the centreline and meridian of T; and let c; and rhi be fixed lifts of Cj to X'0 and h(rrii) to Z' C X'0, respectively. Then H.\[Z\ A2) is free of rank n, with basis { a i , . . . an}, where <Sj is Alexander dual to 5j in S3 = (intX'0) U {00} (i.e., Yk(ai,xpyqc~j) = 1
7.1. BAILEY'S THEOREM
151
if i = j and p = q = 0, and is 0 otherwise). The relator obtained by sewing in a meridianal disc to h(mi) (for 1 < i < n) is Ri = TlptqjripqjXpyqaj, where ripqj = \k(rhi,xpyqCj). Thus the n x n-matrix A — A(x,y) with (z,j)-entry Aij = Y,PiqripqjXpyq is a presentation matrix for B{L). As in the knot theoretic case A is hermitean {Aij = Aji) and so &et{A) = det(A). There is an exact sequence Q^H2(X{LX),X{L);KX) —^-> # i ( X ( L ) ; Ai) - B{L{) -> 0, since H2(X(L\); Ai) = 0. The Wang sequence for -0 gives an exact sequence
O - V W - ' f f i W i ^ A i ) — ^ F 0 (X(L);A 2 )^0. Since £ = 1 we have i?2(X(Li),X(L);Ai) = Z, by excision, and the composite TS : H2(X(Li),X(L);Ai) -+ #o(X(L);A2) is an isomorphism. It follows that B(L{) = ipB(L) Therefore A(t, 1) is a presentation matrix for B(Li), and similarly A(l,t) is a presentation matrix for B(Li). Moreover, if a,/3 are closed loops in R3 which project to disjoint loops a,/? in S1 x R2 C i? 3 then lk(a,/3) = Slk(a,t fc j9). Applying this observation twice we find that A(l, 1) = diag[±l, • • • ± 1]. The bordered matrix ( t A ) ls another presentation matrix for B{L) which is as in the enunciation (with v = v\ (xy) = 1 and 7 arbitrary). In general, we may reduce L* to the Hopf link Ho by untwisting it t — 1 times. Let B = D2 x J be a 3-ball in S3 which meets Ho in two parallel, unknotted arcs {d±} x /, where d± = (±5,0) e D2, with one arc on each component of Ho and oriented compatibly with the natural orientation of I = [0,1]. Let g(z,t) = (e2mtz,t) for (z,t) G B. Then g is a self homeomorphism of B which twists B once around its axis {0} x / . Let Y = X0 — intB. Then X0 = YU(B-N) and X(L*) = Yuh(B-N), where N is an open regular e 1 neighbourhood of Ho and h = g ~ \dB-N- We may clearly arrange that these changes take place in the complement of the surgery tori. The space Y ~ S1 V S1 is a handlebody and 7ri(y) = F(2) is freely generated by loops £ and £ corresponding to meridians of L*. Let £" = {0} x D1 x I be the "vertical" 2-disc separating the arcs
152
7. LINKS WITH T W O COMPONENTS
{d±} x / in B. The loop dE represents the conjugacy class of the commutator [£, £] in TTI{Y), and lifts to a generator of Hi(Y; A2) = A2. Moreover X0 ~ Y U £ and X(L*) ~ y Ufc|E £ . (In other words, we may recover L from Ho by performing a Dehn surgery on dE. Note that as the surgery torus has linking number 1 with each component of Ho it does not lift to nontrivial abelian covers). We now let Z = Y — UT and let Z be the preimage of Z in Y> c X'Q = R3. Let &o be a lift of dE to a loop in Z. Then Hi(Z; A2) is free of rank n + 1, with basis { a o , . . . an}. Since the disc E lifts to the complement of the surgery tori in X'0 we have \k(ao,xpyqCj) — 0 for all p, q and 1 < j < n. The abelian covering space (B — Ho)' is Z 2 -equivariantly homeomorphic to a regular neighbourhood of the planar lattice R x Z u Z x R in R3 = R2 x R. Let Co be the closure in R3 U {00} of the union of the rays (—00,0] x {0} and {0} x [0, 00). Then ik(aj, xpyqco) = 0 for all p, q and 1 < i < n, while lk(ao, xpyqco) = lifp = q = 0 and is 0 otherwise. Thus the &{S are Alexander dual to the CjS (for 0 < i,j < n). Let m 0 be a lift of h(dE) to Z C Y'. Since h{dE) is freely homotopic to (£C)^(C£)~^ m Y, the image of mo in iJi(y;A2) is ue(xy)ao. Therefore the coefficient of OCQ in mo is vi{xy). The cycle (1 — a;)(l — y)cQ is homologous in S3 — Y' (the onepoint compactiflcation of (B — Ho)') to a loop running once around the unit square, i.e., to the lift of the commutator of the meridians to a loop at (0,0,0) in (S — Ho)'. Since h(dE) is freely homotopic to (xy)e~1(yx)1~e in B — Ho, mo is homologous in S3 — Y' to — (1 — x)(l — y)ve-i(xy)co. Hence the coefficient of am in Ro is -T,jik(l-x)(l-y)ue-i(xy)r0jkmXiyk, wherer0jkm = lk(c0,xjykcm). We thus obtain an (n+1) x (n+l)-presentation matrix for B(L), whose (i,j)-entry is the coefficient of ay in Ri, for 0 < i, j < n. Let A(x, y) be the submatrix obtained by deleting the row and column corresponding to ao and Ro, and f3{x~x,y~1)^ be the column matrix corresponding to ao, omitting the RQ entry. Symmetry of the linking invariants implies that A{x, y) = A{x~l,y~1)^ and that the top row is [ve(xy), —(1 — x)(l — y)v^\{xy)(i{x, y)]. (This row corresponds to Ro).
7.1. BAILEY'S THEOREM
153
Let V be the link obtained from Ho by using the surgeries on T that lead from L* to L (but not twisting along D). Then U\ = L\, L" 2 = hi and lk(L"i,L"2) = 1, and it is clear from the above argument that A(x, y) is a presentation matrix for B{V). Now 5 ( L " i ) = tpB(L"), since the linking number is 1, so A(t, 1) and A(l,t) are presentation matrices for B(L\) = B(L"i), and B(L,2), respectively, and A(l, 1) = diag[±l, • • • ± 1], as before. The argument for the converse is very similar to that for the knot theoretic case considered in Theorem 6.11, which follows [Le67] closely. We embed unknotted and unlinked surgery tori T{ in Y together with surgery coefficients corresponding to the relators Ri for 1 < i < n. The main novelty is due to the twisting. Let D = [0,n + l ] x [ 0 , l ] 2 and A = [*-1,»] x [0, l ] 2 , for 1 < t < n + l . Let Tt be an unknotted solid torus in Di, for 1 < i < n and let j : D —> X0 be an embedding where ao C j{intD)C\B c j(Dn+i). (Thus j maps D—Dn+i into Y). If the coefficient of ao in R^ is S(jj)6/CjJa;ty-?, then place disjoint 2-discs Dij in j{Dn+\) so that dDij — Sij is homotopic to (ao) Cij in j(Dn+i) — B and use these for further modifications of Tfc as in [Le67]. • This theorem is due to Bailey [Bai]. As the constructive part of Bailey's Theorem is based on [Le67], it does not provide new proofs of the following special cases found by Levine. COROLLARY 7.1.1. If A is a 2-component link polynomial and X E A.2 is such that A = A and e(A) = 1 then AA is a 2-component link polynomial. If A = det(M), where M = ( ^ ^ ) , then Mx = (*f °) also satisfies Bailey's criteria, and det(Mi) = AA. • PROOF.
There is a similar result for /^-component link polynomials. COROLLARY 7.1.2. A polynomial A G A2 is the first Alexander polynomial of a 2-component link L with £ = ± 1 if and only if A = A and |e(A)| = 1. PROOF.
This follows from Corollary 7.1.1, since A(Ho) = 1.
•
154
7. LINKS WITH TWO COMPONENTS
An alternative presentation matrix for B(L) was given by Cooper [Cp82]. (See also [Le82] for the case £ — 0). Presentation matrices of 3-component links with all linking numbers 0, and of links resulting from surgery on the trivial //-component link (for fi arbitrary) have been characterized by Turaev [Tu86] and Piatt [P188], respectively. 7.2. Consequences of Bailey's Theorem The Torres conditions characterize link polynomials with £ — 0 or 1, by Corollary 7.1.2 above and Corollary 7.4.1 below. We shall assume henceforth that £ > 1. Bailey's Theorem implies that a 2-component link polynomial has the form vf + (3g, where f — f, e(f) — ± 1 and g — g. (We may take / = det(A) and g = det(B), where B — ( t ^ J). He showed moreover that a polynomial S in A2 has this form if and only if it satisfies the Torres conditions. The representation of such a polynomial is not unique. If / , g and / ' , g' both give rise to 5 then there is some h € A2 such that f — f = /3h and g — g' = uh, so we may get rid of the ambiguity by passing to a quotient ring in which u and (3 each map to 0. If p is a prime ideal of A2 containing v and (3 then it must contain either (x — 1) or (y — 1), since v^[xy) and ve-i(xy) together generate A2. If y — 1 is in p then vt(x) is in p, and so p must contain the d-cyclotomic polynomial (j)d{x) for some d > 1 which divides I. (Similarly if x — 1 € p). The ideal (d(x),y — 1) is a height 2 prime ideal of A2. Any prime ideal properly containing it is maximal, and has the form (p, k(x), y — 1), for some prime integer p and polynomial k(x) representing an irreducible factor of (f>d{x) in ¥p[x]. (See Lemma 6.1). Thus if we wish our quotient ring to be an integral domain we may as well fix a primitive d*'1 root of unity Q and consider the homomorphism F : A2 —> %[Cd] mapping x to Q and y to 1. Notice that the involution on A2 induces complex conjugation on 1\C,d\- We may also consider the images in the finite field Z[Cd]/(p, HCd)) = Fp[x]/(fc(x)) = F p A!/(fc(x)). As F factors though the projection of A2 onto A2/(y — 1) we see that F(f) = Q(Q - l)F(d5/dx)/i (the value of 6(x, l)/ue(x) at x = Q). Hence F(g) = Q{Q-\)-\F{d5/dy)-QF{d5/dx)). Since
7.2. CONSEQUENCES OF BAILEY'S THEOREM
155
f — f and g = g these values are real. Moreover whether F(f) is 0 is independant of the choice of Q, since S has coefficients in Z. THEOREM 7.2. Let L be a 2-component link with linking number I > 1 and let A = Ai(L).
(1) Suppose that A(x, l)/vg(x) =d{x)h{x), where d > 1 divides I and h(Q) ^ 0. Then the ideal in Z[^] generated by hiQy^dA/dy^Q, 1) is of the form J J for some ideal J. (2) Suppose that A(x, l)/ue(x) = ph(x) + q(x)k(x), for some prime p 6 Z and k(x) € Ai representing an irreducible factor of 4>,i(x) in F p [x], and that h{x) has nonzero image in ¥q = ¥pAi/(k(x)). Then x(x - l)-1(dA/dy)(x,l) has image ±bbh in ¥q, for some b G F g . There are hermitean square matrices A and B = ( t ^ J such that A = V((xy)det(A) — (x — l)(y — l)ue-i(xy)det(B), by Bailey's Theorem. (1). Suppose that d(x) divides A(x, l)/ui(x) = det(A(a:, 1)). Then Q(Q - l)F(d5/dx)/e = det(F(A)) = F(det(A)) = 0, and so F(det(B)) = Cd(0 - l)~lF{dA/dy). Since <j>d(x) is a knot polynomial d(l) = 1, and so d cannot be a prime power. Ideals in Z[Q] are uniquely factorizable as products of powers of prime ideals, since this ring is a Dedekind domain. Let p be a prime ideal of Z[Cd], R = Z[Cd]P and S = F-l(1[C,d] - p). Then F extends to an epimorphism from A25 to R. Since det(F(^4)) = 0 and R is a local domain one of the rows of F(A) is a linear combination of the others. Therefore we may find a A2s-matrix P with determinant 1 such that PAP^ = ( u e tp), where e = a(f>d{x) + b(y — 1) and u — (f>d{x)v+(y—l)w, for some a,b 6 A25 and row vectors v, w. Thus F(PAP^) has first row and column 0. (We perform the conjugate column operations also so as to preserve the hermitean character of the matrices). Let Q - [I] © P. Since d{x) divides the first row of PA(x, l ) P t we have PROOF.
F(a)F(det(C))
= F(>d(x)~ldet{PA{x, l ) p t ) )
F{>d(x)-1aet(A{x,l)))
= l,
=
156
7. LINKS WITH T W O COMPONENTS
so F(det(C)) is a unit. Moreover F(det(B))
= F(det(QBQl))
=
-F(p)F~(p)F(det(C)),
where p is the (l,2)-entry of QBQ^. Hence ((dA/dy)(Q,l)) = (F(det(B))) = (F(p))(F(p)), since Q(Q - 1) is also a unit in R. Let v(p) be the p-adic valuation of F(det(£?)). If p = p then v(p) is even, while if p ^ p then v(p) = f(p). Let U be the set of prime ideals of Z[Cd] obtained by choosing one representative from each pair p^p. Let J = (UqeUqv{q))(Ilr=frv^)/2). Then ((3A/dj,)(Cd,l)) = J J . (2). The argument is similar, but simpler. Since ¥p[x]/(k(x)) is a field, the only elementary matrices needed are those corresponding to adding multiples of one row to another, and these always lift to elementary A2-matrices. • Although this theorem follows almost inevitably from Bailey's Theorem, its meaning is rather obscure. The partial derivative is an invariant of homotopies of the second component of the link, by Theorem 5.7, while the cyclotomic polynomials suggest that the homology of a cyclic cover of X is involved. As the proof of Bailey's Theorem involves using surgeries to change crossings of the components of the link with themselves, in other words to carry out a link homotopy, we might expect a deeper connection between these ideas. 7.2.1. Let f = 4 x - 7 + 4 x _ 1 , g — l and I = 2m, for some m > 0. Then D(x,y) = V2m(xy)f - (x - l)(y l)u2m-i(xy) is not a 2-component link polynomial. COROLLARY
P R O O F . Let p = 5 and k(x) = x + 1. Then we may take h(x) = —3. Now x(x — l)~1(dA/dy)(x, 1) = —xv2m-i(x) = 1 mod(5,x + l). 2 Since 1 = ±b .3 has no solutions mod (5), part (2) of the theorem fails for D. D
The first counterexample found was the polynomial D(x,y) = ue(xy)x~1(j)e(x) — 2(x — l)(y — l)v${xy). The ideal generated by ((<9£>/<9y)(C6,1)) = (2) in Z[Ce] is (2), which is not of the form Jl in 1>[C&]- Piatt extended this example to ones for all composite linking numbers [P186].
7.2. CONSEQUENCES OP BAILEY'S THEOREM
157
T H E O R E M 7.3. If d is divisible by at least two primes then there is an integer q such that the ideal gZ[Cd] is not of the form J J.
Let q be a prime which is congruent to —1 mod (d). (There are infinitely many such primes, by a well-known theorem of Dirichlet). Then q is unramified in the extension Q(Cf)/Q, since the only ramified primes are the divisors of d, and the decomposition group of (q) is the subgroup of Gal(Q(Q)/Q) ^ (Z/dZ)x generated by the image of q, and so contains complex conjugation. Hence gZ[^] is a product of distinct primes which are invariant under conjugation. This proves the theorem. • PROOF.
It is easy to find explicit counterexamples for any such q. In particular, D(x, y) = vd(xy)x-^dy24>d(x) -{x- \){y l)vd-i(xy).q is not a 2-component link polynomial, Piatt has also extended the argument of Theorem 2 to the cases when £ = pr is a prime power greater than 2. (She assumes that f(x, 1) is an irreducible quadratic a{x — 2 + x _ 1 ) + 1, and considers the image of g in 1\C,d]/{f{Cdi 1))The construction of counter-examples is rather more delicate, but involves similar number-theoretic ideas. Thus for any £ > 2 there is a polynomial A(x,y) with e(A) = £ and which satisfies the Torres conditions, but which is not a 2-component link polynomial. The Torres conditions characterize the Alexander polynomials of the localizations of the modules of 2-component links, after localization with respect to the multiplicative system S = 1 + I2, by the following result of [Le88]. THEOREM 7.4. Let A = vf + fig, where f = / , e{f) = ±1 and g = g. Then there is a 2-component link L such that Ai(L) = / n A for some n > 0. Since g = g we may write g as a sum of terms of the form ±hh, where h(x,y) — xkyl + 1 or 1. Suppose g = E^eihihi. Let A be the diagonal k x k matrix diag[eif] and let B — ( t ^ J, where PROOF.
7 = ( h i , . . . hk). Then det(A) = (Uei)fk and /.det(B) = and so / f c _ 1 A is a link polynomial.
-g.det(A), D
7. LINKS WITH TWO COMPONENTS
158
7.4.1. There is a 2-component link L with linking number £ = 0 and Ai(L) = A if and only if A == A and A is divisible by(x-l)(y-l). COROLLARY
PROOF. Since v = 0 if £ = 0 we may take / = 1 above.
•
The graded module associated to the completion B(L) is a cyclic module over Gr(A^) = Z[X,Y], and Ann(Gr(B{L))) is generated by the "initial form" of the image of Ai(L) in A2, i.e., the homogeneous polynomial consisting of the nonzero terms of lowest degree in this element. If I ^ 0 the initial form is just I, while if / = 0 the Torres conditions imply that the initial form has even degree in X and Y, and if the total degree is d the coefficients of Xd and Yd are both 0. These conditions characterize such initial forms, by Theorem 7.4. If Ai(L) 7^ 0 then IT' /TT" has nontrivial p-torsion for an integral prime p if and only if p divides Ai(L), in which case it divides the linking number. For Ann{ir' /TT") is generated by Ai(L), which is divisible by each of the prime factors of Ai(L). Given any A G A2 such that A = A there is a 2-component link L with I = 0 such that Ai(L) = X(x — l)(y — 1), by the Corollary. Hence on taking A = p we see that TT'/IT" need not be Z-torsion free. If Ai(L) = 0 and E2{L) is principal then IT'/IT" is Z-torsion free, by part (6) of Theorem 4.12. If £ = 0 we may assume that Ai(L) = (1 — :r - 1 )(l — y~^)g where g — g. Jin has used Bailey's Theorem to show that the /-equivalence invariants r/fY introduced by Kojima and Yamasaki are given by r,?Y(x) = ( x - l ) 2 5 ( x , l ) / x A i ( L ! ) =(x-l)(d/dy\y=1A1(L))/A1(Ll) Y 2 and ^ (y) = (y - l) g(l,y)/yA1(L2). (See [Ji87], [KY79] and [MM83]). 7.3. The Blanchfield pairing Let L be a 2-component link. If £ = lk(Li, L
7.3. THE BLANCHFIELD PAIRING
159
pairing on a torsion A2-module M such that Z ®A M = 0 realized by such a link? In general the Blanchfield pairing is not perfect, but we may remedy that by localization, as suggested in Chapter 2. Let E be the multiplicative system in A2 generated by all nonzero 1-variable polynomials, E = {p(x)q(y)}. Then R = A2E is the subring of Q(x,y) generated by Q(x) L)Q(y), and is a PID containing Q, since it is a localization of Q(x)[y]. A prime ideal p in R is generated by a polynomial p(x,y) which is irreducible in Q[x, y] and is of positive degree in each variable. The residue field R/p is an algebraic extension of Q(x), K = Q(x)[z], say (where p(x,z) = 0). Prime ideals invariant under the involution of R correspond to such p for which also p(x~1,y"1) = a(x)b(y)p(x,y) for some 1-variable rational functions a(x) and b(y). Since p is irreducible we must have p(x~1,y~l) — ±xrysp(x,y) for some sign and exponents r, s. If ~p~ = p the involution of R induces a nontrivial involution on K = R/p, and K = -K+[a], where K+ is the fixed field of the involution and a — x — x~l. (Note that a = —a). If 6 is a e-hermitean form on the K-vector space V the form ab is (—£)-hermitean. Hence in discussing Witt groups it suffices to consider the case e = + 1 , which is anyway the case relevant for classical links. The Blanchfield pairing on tH1(X;A2)^ = THi(X;R) is perfect, since R is a PID. If L is split THi{X; R) = 0, so the Witt class B-E(L) may be used to detect links not concordant to split links. If Ai(L) = 0 then THi(X;R) is annihilated by A2(L), which has integral coefficients and augmentation e(h2(L)) = ± 1 . Any factorization of such a polynomial into irreducibles in R must come from a factorization in A2, by the Gauss Content Lemma. Thus if R/pe is a direct summand of TH\(X; R) then p is generated by an integral polynomial which divides \2{L). On the other hand, if q € A2 is such that q = q and s(q) — ±1 then there is a 2-component link L such that H1(X;A2) S A2 ® (A 2 )/(g), by Bailey's Theorem. (We may assume L is a boundary link [GL02]). In particular, if q is irreducible (and not a unit in R) then THi(X;R) has length 1 and
7. LINKS WITH TWO COMPONENTS
160
so b%(L) is not neutral. For instance, the links obtained by Whitehead doubling each component of the Hopf link are boundary links with such modules, and so are not split concordant. More generally, the image of the set of such links in W+I(RQ, R, —) is not finitely generated. This invariant may also be applied to links with nonzero first Alexander polynomial. For instance, the link L = KII <9A of Figure 1.2 is /-equivalent to the Hopf link, by Theorem 1.9. Since Ai(L) = (xy)2 — x2y — xy2 + xy — x — y + l is irreducible the localized module TH\(X{L);R) has length 1. Thus the localized Blanchfield pairing cannot be Witt equivalent to the trivial pairing, and so L cannot be concordant to the Hopf link. Closer study of the UCSS over A2S when S = {((x - l)(y - l ) ) n | n > 0} shows that bs{L) is primitive, and is perfect if Ai(L) ^ 0 or if L is a boundary link, and Qbs(L) is always perfect. If Ai(L) = 0 the kernel and cokernel of the adjoint map of the imlocalized Blanchfield pairing are determined by the rank 1 A2module I = B(TT)/TB(TT) and the longitude-annihilating polynomials bx{y), b2(x) [Le82].
7.4. Links with Alexander polynomial 0 Throughout this section we shall assume that Ai(L) = 0. THEOREM 7.5. Let L be a 2-component link with group TT = irL and such that E\{L) = 0. Let P be the submodule of A(L) generated by the longitudes. Then P ^ (A2/(bi(y),xl ) ) e (A 2 /(6 2 (a;),y- 1)) for some bi(y),b2(x) € A2 such that &i(l) = ^ ( l ) = 1 • Hence Ann(P) = E0(P) = (bi(y) + b2(x)-l, (x- l)6 2 (x), ( y - l)h(y)) and P is TL-torsion free. Let Pi and P2 be the cyclic submodules of P generated by t\ and t2, respectively. Then Ann{P\) = (x — l,&i(y)) and Ann(P2) = (y — 1,62(2;)), for some polynomials 61 and b2, by Theorem 5.4. Since the longitudes are in TV' and so are nullhomologous in X, b\ and b2 must augment to a generator ± 1 of Z. Therefore PROOF.
7.4. LINKS WITH ALEXANDER POLYNOMIAL 0
161
Pi ^ A2/(fci(y), x - 1) and P 2 Q* A2/(b2(x), y - 1 ) are Z-torsion free, by the argument of part (6) of Theorem 4.6. We may assume that bi(l) — 62(1) = +1- Suppose that a\{x,y) and a2(x,y) in A2 are such that ai(x,y)P.\ + a2(x,y)£2 = 0- Then a\{x, y)l\ — ai(x,y)b2(x)£i (since b2(x) = 1 mod(x—1)) = 0. Therefore a\(x, y) is in Ann(Pi), and similarly a2(x, y) is in Ann(P2), and so P = Pi © P2. In particular, P is Z-torsion free. Let p = bi(y) + b2{x) - 1, q = (x - l)b2{x), r = (y - l)&i(y), s = (x - l)(y - 1), u = 6i(y)6 2 (x), fci = (&!(y) - l)/(y - 1) and 6'2 = (62(2:) - l ) / ( z - 1). Then ^ ( P ) = (g,r,s,u) = (p,g,r), since p = u — sb\b'2, u = b2(y)p — b2q and s = — s p + ( y — l ) g + ( x — l)r. Clearly also E0(P) < Ann(P) = .Arm (Pi) r\Ann(P2). Suppose that a(x,y) isinylnn(P). Then a(x,y) = m(x, y)(x — l)+n(x, y)&i(y) (since it is in Ann(Pi)). Now m(x,y) = rh(x) — m(x, 1) and n(x,y) = n(a?) = n,(x, 1) mod (y — 1), so a(x, y) = m(x)(x — 1) + n(x)b\(y) mod (r, s). Hence a(x,y) = a(x) = m(x)(j; — 1) + n(a;)(l — b2(x)) mod (p,r,s). We also have a{x) = (x — l)a'(x) for some a'(x), since 62(1) = 1- The term a(x) is also in Ann(P), and hence in Ann(P2), since (p, g, r) < Ann(P). Therefore a'(x) is Ann(P2), since multiplication by (x — 1) is injective on P2. Thus a(i) is in (x — l)Ann(P2) = (q,s) and so a(x,y) is in (p,q,r,s). Hence Ann(P) = £ 0 ( P ) = (&ifc/) + 62(x) - 1, (x - l)6 2 (x), (y - l)&i(y)). D This result was first announced by Crowell and Brown (in 1976 - not published) for L an homology boundary link. The quotient of it'/ir" by its A2-torsion submodule is isomorphic to an ideal I in A2, since it is torsion free and of rank 1. The ideal / may be uniquely specified by requiring that I = A2, and then 6i(y) + b2(x) — 1 € I and e(I) = Z. Bailey's Theorem may be used to show that any such triple b\,b2,I is realized by some 2-component link L with Ai(L) = 0 [Le82]. In [Le87] it is shown that Ai(Li) = b2(x)b2(x~1)A2(L)(x, 1) and conversely that for any pair (b2{x), S(x)) with 6 a knot polynomial divisible by b2(x)b2(x~1)
7. LINKS WITH TWO COMPONENTS
162
there is a 2-component link L such that Ai(Li) = 8{x) =
b2(x)b2(x-1)A2(L)(x,l).
COROLLARY 7.5.1. Ifir maps onto F(2)/F(2)" sion free and T(E2(L)) = (T(A2(L))).
then TT/TT" is tor-
Both assertions follow from Corollary 4.15.1, which establishes that A{L)/P is Z-torsion free and E2(L) = A2(L)E0(P). It is easily seen that T(E0(P)) = A, and so T(E2{L)) = (T(A2(L))). • PROOF.
The conditions of the next theorem imply that TT maps onto F(2)/F(2)", by Corollary 4.15.2. THEOREM 7.6. Let L be a 2-component link with group n = TTL and such that E\{L) — 0. Then the following are equivalent (1) E2(L) is principal; (2) E\(TT'/TT") is principal; (3) p.d.kA{L) < 1; (4) p.d.ATr'/ir"
< 1.
P R O O F . (1) => (2, 3, 4). If E2{L) is principal then A(L) s (A2)2 © TA(L) and TA(L) has a square presentation matrix, by Theorem 3.7, whence (3) holds, and TT'/TT" £* A2®TA(L) by Theorem 4.15, so (2) and (4) hold. (2) =• (1, 3, 4). This is similar. (3) <£> (4). This follows from Lemma 4.5. (4) => (2). If p.d.^TT1 /TT" < 1 the longitudes of L must be in IT", by Theorems 3.8 and 4.14. Let Y be the closed 3-manifold obtained by surgery on the longitudes. As in Theorem 4.15 Poincare duality and the UCSS give an exact sequence
H\Y;
A2) - e°H2(Y; A2) - e^/ir")
= 0
2
and an isomorphism H (Y;A2) = Hi(Y;A2). Since H2(Y;A2) has rank 1, wejiave e°H2(Y;A2) ^ A2. Therefore TT'/TT" £ H2(Y]A2) maps onto A^ 9i A2, so TT'/TT" 2 A2 0 T(TT'/TT"), p.d.KT(Tr'/TT") < 1 and (2) follows from Theorem 3.7. • A 2-component boundary link L may also be characterized as one for which there is a connected closed surface C in X(L) which
7.5. 2-COMPONENT Z/2Z-BOUNDARY LINKS
163
separates the components of L in S3 and such that each component is nullhomologous in X(L) — C. Such a surface represents a generator of H2(X(L);Z) and lifts to a generator of H2(X'\T) = H2(X;A2). If L is a 2-component homology boundary link there is a map / : X{L) —> S1 V S1 which induces an epimorphism from irL to F(2). Does the inverse image of the wedge point serve as a singular separating surface for L? Is there a geometrically significant generator for H2(X;A2) which projects nicely? (See also Theorem 9.12). 7.5. 2-Component Z/2Z-houndary
links
If L is a 2-component Z/2Z-homology boundary link then L is a Z/2Z-boundary link. This follows from the algebraic characterization of such links, as given in the next theorem, but can be seen more directly. Let U\ and U2 be disjoint singular spanning hypersurfaces corresponding to the components L\ and L2 of such a link L. Then U\ n dX(Li) and U2 l~l dX(L\) are unions of odd and even numbers of copies of longitudes of L\, respectively. Since the total number of boundary components on dX(L{) is odd, there must be a pair of adjacent components from the same hypersurface, C/j say. By pushing a copy of the annular region between these longitudes off dX(L\) we reduce the number of components of dUi by two. After finitely many such steps (applied also near dX{L2)) we obtain disjoint spanning hypersurfaces which each have just one boundary component. Whether a 2-component link is a Z/2Z-boundary link is determined by its Murasugi nullity, since (Z/2Z) * (Z/2Z) is metabelian. THEOREM 7.7. Let L be a 2-component link with group ir = TTL and linking number £. Then the following are equivalent (1) r,(L) = 2; (2) A 1 ( L ) ( - 1 , - 1 ) = 0; (3) L is a Z/2Z-boundary
link.
Moreover, if these conditions hold t is divisible by 4PROOF. Let B - n'/n". Since E\{L) = Ai(L)J 2 , the equivalence (1) <$• (2) is immediate. If L is a 2"/2Z-boundary link then r)(L) = 2, by Theorem 5.11. If r)(L) = 2 there is a A2-epimorphism
164
7. LINKS WITH TWO COMPONENTS
from p:Z®AB-*Z with finite kernel. Then C = (7r/7r")/Ker(p) has a presentation (x,y,u \ [x,y] — ur,xux~l = u~1,yuy~1 = it - 1 ) for some r, which must be odd since C/C = Z2. After replacing y by a conjugate, if necessary, we may assume that r = ± 1 , and the presentation is then (x,y | x2y = yx2,xy2 = y2x). The centre of C is (C = {x2,y2) 9* Z2. Let K be the preimage of C,C in n. Then TT/K = C/C.C ^ (Z/2Z) * (Z/2Z), where each factor is generated by the image of a meridian, and so L is a Z/2Z-boundary link. Let Mi and M2 be disjoint surfaces in S3 such that dMi — Lj, for i = 1,2. As the image of [Li] — [dMi] in Hi(Mi;Z) is divisible by 2, the linking number lk(Li, L2) is divisible by 4. • COROLLARY 7.7.1. If L is a 2-component link such that Ai(L) = 0 then L is a Z/2Z-boundary link. • The linking number condition follows also from the Torres conditions. A similar argument shows that if £ is a concordance between two 2-component links L(0) and L(l) such that one end is a Z/2Zboundary link then £ is a Z/2Z-boundary concordance, i.e., it extends to an embedding of disjoint (n + l)-manifolds which meet gn+2 x Q^Q^ jj transversely in Seifert hypersurfaces for the links. Is there a geometric proof that 2-component slice links are Z/2Zboundary links? The group C defined in Theorem 7.7 is a universal quotient of the groups of 2-component Z/2Z-boundary links, since it may be obtained from IT by passing to (TT/TT")/(X +1, y + \){TT'/TT") and then factoring out the torsion subgroup of this quotient. It may also be described as the fibre product in the following pullback diagram: C
>
Z2 mod (2)
(Z/2Z) * (Z/2Z)
-^-*
(Z/2Z)2
Similarly, the pullback of C and F(2)/F(2)z over Z2 is an universal quotient for 2-component Z/2Z-boundary links with linking number
7.6. TOPOLOGICAL CONCORDANCE AND F-ISOTOPY
165
0. The ring Z[C] is a twisted quadratic extension of A3, and is a noetherian domain of global dimension 4. The above argument can be extended to show that if L\ = dM\ and Li = dMi where M\ is a Z/pZ-manifold in S3 and Mi is a Z/gZ-manifold in S3 - Mi then lk(Li,I,2) is divisible by pq. For then L\ is homologous to pj3{M\) in S3 — Mi and Li is homologous to q(3(Mi) in S3 — Mi, where /?(Mj) is the closed curve representing the Bockstein of the characteristic class of the singular manifold Mi. 7.6. Topological concordance and F-isotopy One of the triumphs of Freedman's work on 4-dimensional TOP surgery was his demonstration that a classical knot with Alexander polynomial 1 bounds a disc D C DA such that ni(D4 -D) = Z. All classical link groups other than 1, Z or Z2 have nonabelian free subgroups, and thus are outside the range of current surgery techniques. We shall follow Freedman's analysis of the problem of slicing knots to construct concordances from 2-component links with Alexander polynomial 1 to the Hopf link Ho. There remains a possible codimension 2 Kervaire obstruction in Z/2Z. Let L be a 2-component link with linking number 1 and let T = S1 x S1. Let E = S2 x S2 - intD4 (viewed as the result of plumbing two copies of S2 x D2) and identify N(L) C S3 x {1} with N(H) c BE = S3 via a meridian and longitude preserving homeomorphism h, to form W = (S3 x [0,1]) U^ E. Then W is a 4-manifold with boundary dW = d^W II d+W, where dJW = S3 and d+W 9* X(L) U2T X(H). Moreover ir\(W) = Z and the characteristic classes of W are trivial. There is an unique framing on W such that the restriction to an embedded circle representing a generator of 7ri(W) bounds. (Note also that the 4-manifold obtained from S3 x [0,1] by attaching a 2-handle to S3 x {1} along the 0-framing of Li is a codimension-0 submanifold of W with boundary M(Li)). Let an : X(Ho) —» T x [0,1] be a homeomorphism. There is a map aL : (X(L),dX(L)) -> T x ([0,1], {0,1}) which induces an isomorphism on homology and restricts to a homeomorphism on the boundary. We may assume that these maps carry meridians to
166
7. LINKS WITH TWO COMPONENTS
the standard generators of 7Ti(T). Together they determine a map a : d+W —> T x 5 1 which induces an isomorphism on first homology and hence has degree 1. LEMMA 7.8. If A\(L) = 1 then a is a A.2-homology equivalence. PROOF. If Ai(L) = 1 then X{L)' is acyclic, and so aj, is a homology equivalence over A2. Since an is a homeomorphism the lemma follows by a Mayer-Vietoris argument. D Let 3 be the composite of a with projection onto T. Thus 3 represents an element of fi{r(T). This group is an extension of H2(T;tt{r) by #i(T;ft£ r ), by the Atiyah-Hirzebruch spectral sequence. The image of 3 in H2(T;£l{r) = £l{r is the framed cobordism class of the transverse inverse image of a point, which is 0 by the choice of framing on W. Another transversality argument now shows that the image of 3 in Hi{T;Sl{r) = (Z/2Z)2 is determined by the framed cobordism classes of Seifert surfaces for the components of L, and so is the pair (Ar}\L\), Arf'(£2))• If Ai(L) = 1 then Ai(Li) = Ai(L2) = 1 also, and so these Arf invariants are 0. Thus 3 bounds a map from a framed 4-manifold N to T. Since dN = d+W = d(W U DA) and a(W U £>4) = 0, we have a(N) = 0 mod (16), by Rochlin's Theorem. After replacing iV by the connected sum with copies of the K3-manifold, if necessary, we may assume that a(N) — 0. We may homotope 3 x idjj2 on a collar neighbourhood of dN to obtain a map F : (N, dN) - • T x (D2, S1) such that F\QN = a, and which therefore has degree 1. Let B b e a bundle map covering F. Then the normal map (F, B) has a well defined surgery obstruction o-±(F,B) e L^(Z2). This group is isomorphic to the sum £4(1) © £2(1) — Z @ (Z/2Z), by Shaneson's Splitting Theorem. The first summand is detected by the signature difference cr(N) — o(T x D2), which is 0. The second summand is detected by a codimension 2 Kervaire invariant. If this invariant is 0 the surgery problem is unobstructed and so there is a homotopy equivalence h : P —> T x D2, where P is a TOP 4manifold with OP — ON — d+W. The union PuW is a 1-connected homology ball with boundary S3, and so is homeomorphic to D4.
7.7. SOME EXAMPLES
167
The components of L bound locally flat discs which intersect in one point (in E C W). On deleting a small ball centred on this point of intersection we obtain a TOP concordance from L to Ho. A strict elementary F-isotopy one the ith component of a link L is the result of composition of L; with a knot K in S1 x D2 = X(U) such that Ai(K II U)=l, where U is a trivial knot. If the Kervaire obstruction is always 0 for such links KII U then strictly F-isotopic links are TOP concordant. Is the codimension 2 Kervaire obstruction always 0?
7.7. Some examples There is an algorithm due to J.H.C.Whitehead which makes it possible to decide whether a given set of elements of F(fi) generates the group. (See page 166 of [MKS]). If /i = 2 a theorem of Nielsen allows us to replace elements by their conjugates, and leads to a criterion for showing that an homology boundary link is not a boundary link which is apparently independent of conditions in terms of ideals. An element w\ in F(fi) is primitive if there are elements w2,... w^ such that {wi,.. .w^} generates F(fi); equivalently, if there is an automorphism ip of F(/J) such that i^(w\) = xi, where {xi,... x^} is a basis for F(/i). THEOREM (Nielsen). There is at most one conjugacy class of primitive elements of F(2) with given image in F(2)/F(2)' = Z2.
• See Theorem 3.9 of [MKS] for a proof. It follows that if wi and w
168
7. LINKS WITH TWO COMPONENTS
procedure for finding a primitive word in the coset of xmyn mod F(2)', whenever (m,n) = 1 [OZ81]. (See also [GAR99]). The link L of Figure 1.5 is a ribbon link, and its ribbon group has a presentation (a, w, x,y,z \ axa"1 = y, wyw~l = z, zwz"1 = x). This presentation is Tietze-equivalent to (a,w,z | wazw = zwaz), and hence to (b, w | 0), where b = azw"1, and so L is an homology boundary link. This is the simplest nonsplittable link with Alexander polynomial 0, since the nonsplittable links with diagrams having at most 9 crossings all have nonzero Alexander polynomial [Rol]. The meridian a has image bw2bw~1b~1w~l in (6, w | 0), and so a is not conjugate to b. Since a and b have the same image in Z2 it follows that the image of a is not primitive, and so L is not a boundary link. If / : X(L) —> S1 V S1 is a map realizing the projection of irL onto (b, w | 0) the preimages of generic points of the circles corresponding to b and w are disjoint singular Seifert surfaces for L. We may arrange that one has three boundary components, all parallels of Li, while the other has five boundary components, four of which are parallels of L\ and the other a parallel of L%. (Note also that Ei{V) = (x — 1, y2 — y + 1), so Efl(H(R)) principal need not imply that E^L) is principal). The 2-component 2-link with group H(R) = F(2) constructed as in §7 of Chapter 1 from the ribbon of Figure 1.5 cannot be trivial, for a slice of a trivial link must be a boundary link. This gives a simple illustration of the result of [Po71]. Smythe's original homology boundary link may be obtained by giving the knotted ribbon of this link three half twists. It has a 13 crossing diagram, but the singular Seifert surfaces are easier to visualize than those for Figure 1.5 as they each have three boundary components. (The words corresponding to the meridians are a and ax2a~lx~1). As one of its longitudes is not in n" it is not a boundary link [Sm66]. Moreover for this link E2(L) + E2(L). The 2-component link L — L\ U Li of Figure 1 is a Z/2Zboundary link, with one spanning surface orientable. It extends to a ribbon map R with four throughcuts. The ribbon group H{R) has
7.7. SOME EXAMPLES
a presentation (x1,x2,x3,y1,y2,y3 ywzvz1
= xz,xTly\x\
169
| Vi lxiyi = x2, = y2,%3ly2X3 = 2/3)
which is Tietze-equivalent to (x,y,a \ xy~lxyx~l = (yxa)~lxayxa). (Here x = x±, y = y\ and a = x^xj ). From this we see that E2(H(R)) = (x+l,2y1). As E2{H{R)) is not principal H(R) cannot map onto F(2)/F(2)", by Theorem 4.3. Hence nL cannot map onto .F(2) and so L is not an homology boundary link. (The link obtained by untwisting the lower ribbon disc is a boundary link).
Figure 1. Further calculation shows that the longitudes of L are in IT", but E2{L)
= (x + l,2y
-
l)(x + 1,2 - y), T(E2{L))
= (3,t + l ) 2
and
TA(L) = A2/(x + l,2 — y) is pseudozero. Thus L is not an homology boundary link, by Theorem 4.15 or by the Corollary of Theorem 5. The 3-component link L of Figure 1 is an homology boundary link such that H2(L]As) is not free. The 2-component link L represented by the labeled arcs in Figure 2 is a ribbon link with trivial components. Its group IT has a presentation (a,6,c,d,e,/,g,x \ g~lcac~lg — b,aba-1 = c, g~1cec~lg = d,db_1 fbd~l = e^ede"1 = c,db~1x"1fxbd~1 xgx~l — a, fa~1xaf~1
= g,
— x)
where a, b, c, d, e, / , g, x are Wirtinger generators associated with the arcs so labeled in the Figure. The words c~1ga~1eg~lcdb~1xbd~1x~1 -1 and / a represent longitudes commuting with a and x, respectively. On replacing the generators b,c,d,e,f and g by /3 = fca_1,7 = -1 ca ^ = d a - 1 , e = ea _ 1 ,a n d
170
7. LINKS WITH T W O COMPONENTS
5(3 lxj38 lx l represent the images of the longitudes, and 7r/7r" has a presentation (a, x, /3,7,5, £,<j),6 \ x(j) =x, aft = 7a, (f>a = as, 4>ax = xe~l6ae, 7a = 6ad~1^,
8 — /3e, ea.8 = jae, xOa — ax,
F(a,x,p,i,6,e,,9)"). These relations imply that s, 4> and 5f3~x represent 1 6 7r/7r", and so the longitudes of L are in ir". We may eliminate in turn the generators /?, 7 and 6 to obtain the equivalent presentation (a, x, \ F{a,x)"). Hence TT/TT" £ F(2)/F{2)". In particular, L has the same Alexander module as a trivial 2-component link, and so cannot be proven nontrivial by the usual metabelian invariants. c e
Figure 2. This link extends to a ribbon map R with four throughcuts (cf. Figure 2). The corresponding ribbon group H(R) has the presentation (a,b,c,g,x \ aba"1 = c,cac~lgbg-1, xgx-1 — a). This is l l l 1 equivalent to (a, x, t | tx~ a~ xat~ ata~ ), which is a presentation for the group G(—1,1) of Baumslag. Theorem 1.15 implies that ir/iTu S H(R) £ G ( - l , 1), since G(-l, 1) is residually nilpotent [Ba69]. Hence L is not an homology boundary link, since G(—1,1) is not free. On comparing the presentations of n and H(R) we see that 7T is a semidirect product n = n^ xi H(R) (where n^ is the normal closure in TT of the subgroup generated by the image of s). The 3-component link of Figure 2 is an homology boundary link whose longitudes are all in n", but which is not a boundary link.
CHAPTER 8
Symmetries The word "symmetry" may be interpreted in several ways: we shall consider both questions dealing with symmetries of link types such as whether a link is invertible, amphicheiral or interchangeable, and also those dealing with group actions on a particular link. Tables of symmetries of knots and knot types for knots with diagrams having at most 10 crossings may be found in [Ka2]. 8.1. Basic notions If if is a 1-knot changing the ambient orientation inverts the meridians and changes the signs of intersection numbers in S 3 , and so Hi(X(rK);A) = Hi(X(K);A) and brK(a,(3) = -bK(a,/3) = —bK(P,a). Changing the string orientation also inverts meridians, but does not change intersection numbers, and so H\{X{Kp); A) = Hi(X(K);A) and bKp(a,f3) = bK(a,(3) = bK(P,a). Thus if K is invertible there is a bijection / from H\(X\ A) to itself which is antilinear (f(ra + s(3) = ff(a) + sf(J3) and such that bK(f(a), /(/?)) = 6R:(/?, a); if K is +amphicheiral there is an antilinear bijection g from Hi(X; A) to itself such that b/f(<7(a), #(/?)) = —b^(/?, a) while if K is —amphicheiral there is an automorphism h of H\{X\ A) such that bK(h(a),h(f3)) = — bx(a,/?). There are very similar results in all odd dimensions. (Symmetries of simple even-dimensional knots may be studied through the Farber classification of such knots. We shall not consider them here). For links there are the additional features that a permutation of the components induces a permutation of the meridians, and for 1-links the longitudes become important. If 7 = (eo, • • • £/i, c) is in the link-symmetric group LS(fi) let 7(*i) = te3ei, for 1 < i < \i. If 171
8. SYMMETRIES
172
M is a A^-module let 7 M be the module with the same underlying abelian group and A^-action given by X.m = j(X)m for all A G A^ and m e M. If 6 : M x M -> Q(*i, • • • VV-^W is a bilinear pairing let 76(772, n) — eo7(6(m, n)) for all m,n € M. We may then extend and summarize the conditions given earlier for knots as follows. THEOREM 8.1. If a 1-link L admits 7 then there is an isomorphism f : A(L) = -)A{L) such that bL(f(a),f((3)) = jbL(a,/3) for all a,@€ iA{L)sMoreover f(m,i) — UjeoejmCT(j) and f(£j) = Vj€oej£a(j), for some units Ui, Vj G A* and for alll +(L), up to positive units. Similarly, reflection changes the orientation of X(L) and of its boundary components, and inverts the meridians. Therefore
uj+(rL) = (-l)^-1(-l)a^^L)
=
(-l)a^+'i-1(j+(L),
up to positive units. 8.2. S y m m e t r i e s of knot t y p e s If K is a (2q - l)-knot let B{K) = Hq(X(K);A)/T, where T is the Z-torsion submodule. Let \(K) — Ai_i(B(K)) (so the indexing is consistent with our earlier usage for 1-links). Then X(K) = A1(K)/A2(K) generates Ann(B(K)). The Blanchfield pairing bK : B(K) x B(K) -y Q(t)/A is (-l)9 + 1 -hermitean. If q > 1 then the isometry class of b^ is a complete invariant for the subclass of simple (2q— l)-knots (those for which X(K)' is (q— l)-connected). Moreover the Witt class of bj< is a complete invariant for the concordance class of K. The confirmation that certain classical knots are invertible is notoriously delicate. As every 5 € A such that 5 = 5 and e(5) = 1 is the first Alexander polynomial of some invertible 1-knot K [Sa83], the
8.2. SYMMETRIES OF KNOT TYPES
173
Alexander polynomial conveys no useful information about invertibility of classical knots. The SFS invariants may be used to show that the pretzel knot #(25, -3,13) is not invertible [FS64]. THEOREM 8.2. Let K be an invertible (2q — l)-knot and 5 a simple factor of X(K) such that 5 = 5. Then the SFS row class of B(K)/5B(K) is invariant under the involution. If moreover the power of 5 that divides A\(K) is odd there is an element u in the field QA/((J) such that uu = ( - 1 ) 9 + 1 . Conversely, if K is simple, q > 2, A\(K) is irreducible, the SFS row class of B(K) contains an ideal J such that J = J and u E A/(Ai(K)) is such that uu = (—1)9+1 then K is invertible. If K is invertible then B{K) = B(K) and the first assertion follows easily. Suppose that 5 is a simple factor of \(K) such that 5 = 5. We may assume in fact that \(K) = \(K) and that 5 = 5. Let F = QA/(6). The Blanchfield pairing bx takes values in A(.FQ_1A/A < Q(t)/A and so determines a (—l) 9+1 )-hermitean pairing c with values in A/(5) by c(u,v) = X(K)bx(u,v) mod (5). This induces a nonsingular (—l) 9+1 -hermitean pairing (which we also denote by c) on the F-vector space V = F <8>A B(K). The dimension of V is the power of 5 that divides Ai(K). If / is an antiautomorphism of B(K) such that bK(f(x),f(y)) = b(x,y) = (-l)i+1b(y,x) for all x,y in B(K) we must have (on choosing a basis for V) det{f)det{c)det(f) = (-l)^+1>det(c). Thus u = det(f) satisfies +1 s uu = (—l)(9 ) ; i n particular, uu = — 1 if s is odd and q is even. Suppose that Ai(K) is irreducible. Then B(K) is a torsion free A/(5)-module of rank 1. Hence there is an embedding j of B(K) in A/(<J) with image an ideal J. If J = J and u € A/(6) is such that uu = (—1)9+1 then f(x) = j~luj(x)) is an antiautomorphism of B(K). The Blanchfield pairing is necessarily of the form bx(x,y) = kj(x)j(y) for all x, y 6 B(K), and for some k € QA/(<5) such that k = (-l)q+1k. We then see that bK(f(x)J(y)) = b{x,y) and so K is invertible. • PROOF.
8. SYMMETRIES
174
The strongest results on the polynomials of amphicheiral knots known at present are due to Hartley [Ha80, Ha80']. We say that r(t) E A is of type X if r(t) = /o(t) 2 /i(*) • • • /n(*) for some n > 0, where fc = ft for all i and fi =2 fo'v?~ f° r some fixed odd £ and all i > 0, where =2 means the images in F2A are equal up to multiplication by a unit. Then he proved THEOREM.
Let K be a 1-knot.
(1) / / K is -amphicheiral then Ai(if)(i 2 ) = / ( i ) / ( t _ 1 ) for some f such that f(t) = /(—£ _ 1 ). (2) If K is + amphicheiral then there are polynomials r-j(i) of type X and odd integers a(i), for 1 < i < m, such that An amphicheiral invertible knot satisfies both conditions. The proof uses the Jaco-Shalen-Johansen decomposition of an irreducible 3-manifold along essential tori and Mostow rigidity to reduce to cases already considered by Kawauchi. (The congruence conditions derive ultimately from the Murasugi congruences, given below). Any knot polynomial Ai(.K') satisfying (1) is the Alexander polynomial of some strongly —amphicheiral knot (see the Figure in the announcement [Va79]!). The following theorem of Cor ay and Michel [CM83] may be used to show that (1) it does not follow from consideration of the Blanchfield pairing alone. THEOREM 8.3. Let K be a —amphicheiral (2q—l)-knot. Suppose that Ai(K) = dSYl-ji, where the 7, are distinct irreducible polynomials such that 77 ^ 7J . Then for each i there is an element U{ in the integral closure of A / ( 7 J ) such that U{Ul — —1. Conversely, if K is simple, q > 2 and u € A/(Ai(K)) is such that uu = — 1 then K is —amphicheiral. PROOF. (Sketch). We shall assume that X(K) is irreducible. Then Ai(K) = \(K)S, for some s > 1. We may also assume that s is odd, for otherwise there is nothing to prove. Let F — QA/(X(K)) and V = QB(K) ^ Fs. The Blanchfield pairing determines a (—l) 9+1 -hermitean pairing from b : V x V —* F. Since
8.2. SYMMETRIES OF KNOT TYPES
175
K is -amphicheiral there is an automorphism h of B(K) such that bK(h(x),h(y)) = -bK(x,y) for all x,y £ B(K). Let u = det(Q®h). Then u is in the integral closure of R = A/(X(K)) since it is an automorphism of the finitely generated R-module ASB(K). and s u.det(b).u = (—l) det(b) = —det(b). Thus uu = —1. Conversely, multiplication by such a u gives an automorphism of B(K) which changes the sign of bxd The proof in the general case proceeds by first restricting the Blanchfield pairing to the ^-primary submodule B(K)(6i) to obtain a nondegenerate pairing. Then, there are nondegenerate pairings induced on the subquotients Ker(<5f )/(Ker(jf - 1 ) + <5iKer(5*:+1), for each k > 0 (see [Mi69]) and at least one of these modules must have odd rank. The polynomial Ai(8i) = 3£2 — It + 3 does not satisfy condition (i) of Hartley's Theorem so 8i is not —amphicheiral, but _ 1 = ( a t ^ S ) ( 3 = ^ I ) i n AAAxfSx)) = Z[l±jf% There is a corresponding result for -(-amphicheiral knots. THEOREM 8.4. Let K be a + amphicheiral (2q — l)-knot and 5 a simple factor of X(K) such that 6 = 6. Then the SFS row class of B(K)/6B(K) is invariant under the involution. If moreover the power of 5 that divides A\(K) is odd there is an element v in the field QA/(<5) such that vv = ( - 1 ) ' . Conversely, if K is simple, q > 1, A\{K) is irreducible, the SFS row class of B{K) contains an ideal J such that J = J and v € A/(Ai(K)) is such that vv = (—l)9 then K is + amphicheiral. PROOF.
The argument is similar to that of Theorem 8.2.
•
We may modify the notion of link symmetry by relaxing the equivalence relation of ambient isotopy to concordance or, if JJL > 1, to isotopy or even homotopy. If K is concordant to — K then either K is slice or its concordance class has order 2. It is unknown whether every class of order 2 in the classical knot concordance group contains a —amphicheiral 1-knot, but Coray and Michel gave counterexamples in higher dimensions, based on the following theorem [CM83]
176
8. SYMMETRIES
THEOREM. Let K be a (2q — l)-knot such that Ai(K) is irreducible. Let Op be the ring of algebraic integers inF — Q A / ( A i ( i ( r ) ) . Then (1) the Witt class bx has order 2 in W e (Q(i), A, —) (with e — (—1) 9 + 1 ) if and only if there is an element a E F such that da = —1. (2) If K is concordant to some — amphicheiral knot there is a (3 € OF[l/S(0)] such that /3/3 = - 1 . If 5(0) is prime there is such a /3 in OFd T h e simplest irreducible polynomials satisfying (1) b u t not (2) are perhaps 367t 2 - 735* + 367 and t4 - 72t3 + 143t 2 — 72* + 1. A classical knot represents an element of infinite order in the concordance group if and only if some Milnor signature is not 0. No such knot can be —amphicheiral. THEOREM 8.5. Let K be a (2q — l)-knot with q > 2 and let S be an irreducible factor of X(K) such that 5 = 5 and such that the power of 5 dividing Ai(K) is odd. If K is concordant to an invertible, + amphicheiral or —amphicheiral knot then there is an element w £ QA/(5) such that ww = (—1) 9 + 1 ; (—l) 9 or —1, respectively. PROOF. Let K' be a knot concordant to K with the asserted symmetry, and let Kj, be the simple knot with Blanchfield pairing bx>- T h e n Kb is concordant to K and has the same symmetry as K'. A Blanchfield pairing b on a module M is W i t t equivalent to one on a subquotient of M with squarefree annihilator, in such a way t h a t any (anti) automorphism of M which transposes or changes the sign of b induces a similar (anti)automorphism of the new pairing. If 6 is as stated then the power of 6 dividing Ai(K') must be odd, for any K' concordant to K. T h e result now follows from Theorems 8.2, 8.3 and 8.4. • T h e following result on —amphicheiral 1-links is due to Traldi [Tr84], who showed t h a t the Milnor invariants of such a link must vanish (see Chapter 10). This implies t h a t all the nilpotent quotients of 7rL are free, and hence a(L) = fi.
8.3. GROUP ACTIONS ON LINKS
177
THEOREM 8.6. Let L be a —amphicheiral /i-component 1-link. Then E^L) = 0. PROOF. Let h : 5 3 —» S3 be an orientation reversing homeomorphism such that h o Li = Lip — L{ o r\ for 1 < i < \x. We may assume that h fixes a point * e X(L) and points Pi E dX(Li), and choose paths 7; from * to Pi, for 1 < i < //. Then h induces an automorphism 9 of A{L) such that 6{mi) = Uimi and 6(£i) — —U^i, where Ui = Tlt^' is the image in n/n' of the loop 7i U /i(7i), for 1 < i < MWe shall show that £4 € (7M)"^L(L) for all 1 < i < /i and n > 0, by induction on n. This is clear when n = 0. Suppose that ^ is in ( ^ ) M ( L ) , for 1 < * < M- Then ^ ( ^ / ( ^ ^ ^ ( L ) ^ ( A M / ( ^ ) " + 1 ) " (see Theorem 4.13). Moreover 2£; = 0 in this quotient, since C/j = 1 mod 7^, and so £i is in (7 M ) n+1 >l(L). It now follows as in Theorem 4.14 that the longitudes are in 7r(oo) and so £^M_i(L) = 0. • Traldi shows also that if L is a +amphicheiral 2-component link then E\{L) — 0. (This was first observed in [Co70]). Turaev has used the properties of u>+(L) to show that if L is concordant to rL or — L then a(L) = /x + 1 mod (2) [Tu86]. (Note that the Borromean rings are a strongly + amphicheiral 3-component link with nonzero first Alexander ideal). 8.3. Group actions on links If p is a prime the fixed point set of a Z/pZ-action on an homology n-sphere is a Z/pZ-homology sphere of even or odd codimension (the empty set 5 _ 1 = 0 having codimension n + 1) according as whether the map preserves or reverses the orientation, by Smith theory. (Consideration of orthogonal matrix actions on spheres show there are no further constraints on the codimension). If the fixed point set has dimension > 2 it need not be simply connected. The Smith theory makes no tameness assumptions, and the fixed point set can be wild, even for an involution of S3. However we shall assume always that the fixed point sets of the actions are locally flat submanifolds.
178
8. SYMMETRIES
In particular, if the fixed point set of an orientation preserving homeomorphism h of finite order q on an homology 3-sphere M is nonempty it is homeomorphic to S1, and is unknotted if E = 5 3 , by the resolution of the celebrated Smith Conjecture [BM]. (Hence a finite group G which acts effectively on S3 and leaves invariant a nontrivial knot K must be cyclic or dihedral). Suppose that L is a /i-component link in M which is invariant under such a homeomorphism h. There are three cases of particular interest. If the cyclic group (h) = Z/qZ acts freely on M then L has free period q. If it fixes pointwise an axis A = Sl disjoint from L then L has semifree period q. (For q an odd prime these are the only possibilities). If each component of L meets the fixed point set A in two points (equivalently, if h\ii is an orientation reversing self map of Li, for all 1 < i < fi) then q = 2 and L is strongly invertible. If h is orientation reversing then it has even order, and there are further possibilities. In particular, if h2 = idM and h(Li) = Li for all 1 < i < n then L is strongly -{-amphicheiral if h preserves the orientations of each component of L and is strongly — amphicheiral if h reverses the orientations of each component of L. If moreover h fixes just two points of S3 then in the latter case L must be a knot. A link L is periodically -{-amphicheiral if it is componentwise invariant under an orientation reversing homeomorphism h of finite order q such that h\Lt is orientation preserving, for all 1 < i < fi. On replacing h by an odd power of h if necessary we may assume that h has order 2 r for some r > 1. Such a link is -(-amphicheiral, and is strongly -(-amphicheiral if we may take r = 1. The analogous definitions of "periodically —amphicheiral" and "periodically invertible" lead to nothing new. For if h]^ is orientation reversing for all i then h? fixes L pointwise. Therefore either \i — 1 and L is unknotted (by the Smith conjecture for involutions) or h? = 1. In either case L is strongly —amphicheiral or strongly invertible, respectively. Similarly, a periodically -(-amphicheiral link is either strongly -(-amphicheiral or has semifree period q/2. The torus links provide useful examples of many of these types of symmetry. Let m,n be integers > 1. The (m, n)-torus link L(m,n)
8.4. SEMIFREE PERIODS
179
has image the subset {(u, v) E C 2 | um + vn = 0} of the unit sphere in C 2 . If (m, n) — 1 then L(m, n) is a knot, which we denote by -Krn,n below. It is nontrivial if m , n > 1. The 5 1 -action on S3 C C 2 given by z(u,v) = (znu,zmv) for all z E S1 and (u,v) E S3 leaves L(m,n) invariant. This induced action of the qth roots of unity is free if (q, mn) — 1, and is semifree if q divides m or n. We shall see below that these are the only free or semifree periods of Kmn. Complex conjugation induces an orientation preserving involution of 5 3 which leaves L(m, n) invariant and reverses the string orientations, so torus links are strongly invertible. (However nontrivial torus knots are never iamphicheiral). If a knot K is not a torus knot then it has only finitely many finite group actions, up to conjugacy in DiS(S3,K) [F185]. 8.4. Semifree periods Let L be a i/-component link in an (oriented) homology 3-sphere M which is invariant under a rotation h of order q about a disjoint axis A. The orbit space M = M/{h) is again an homology sphere, and the orbit map c : M —> M is a q-fold cyclic branched cover, branched over A = c(A). Moreover c(L) is the image of a /i-component link L in M, for some [i
Let X = M-L, Y = M-L-A,
X = M - I and F =
Jd-JC-A,
and choose basepoints * E Y and * — c(*) € Y. The map on homology induced by c\x carries meridians to meridians and so is onto. Hence it determines an epimorphism 7 : A^ —> A^. Let m and m be the meridians of A and A, and let u E Aut(Y /Y) be covering transformation determined by m. Let x : X1 —> X and y : Y1 —* Y be the covers induced from the maximal abelian cover of X by c\x and c\y- Then x is the g-fold cyclic branched cover of X , branched over the lifts of A, while V = Y /(u«) and cy is an (unbranched) abelian covering of Y. In what follows we shall view A^ as both a subring and a quotient of A^+i = A^[u, u - 1 ] .
8. SYMMETRIES
180
T H E O R E M 8.7. Let L be a v-component link in an homology 3sphere M with a semifree period q. Then
™ 7 (Ai(L)) = A i ( Z ) / f e * ( A i ( Z u 3 W , where w = t — 1 if u > fi = 1 and w = 1 otherwise, and vq = (U9-l)/(«-l). We shall show that each side of the equation equals A 0 (#i(XT;Z)). Let 7A(L) = H1(X,*;c*Afl) = HX{X\x"1 {*)-Z) be the corresponding relative module. Then PROOF.
A 0 ( t f i ( J n ; Z ) ) = A 0 (^i(X;c*A^)) = Ai( 7 A(L)), by Theorem 3.4. Since Ei{^A{L)) = j(Ei(L)), which is 7(Ai(L)), if v = 1, and 7(J„)7(Ai(L)), if i/ > 1, by Theorem 4.12, it follows that A 0 ( t f i p n ; Z ) ) ) = wyiA^L)). Let i? = H\(Y; A M+ i). The Wang sequence for the projection of Y onto Y /(u) gives a short exact sequence 0 -» ff/(u - 1)BT - • # i ( F 7 ( u ) ; Z) -+ Z - • 0, in which the right hand term is generated by the image of m. There is a similar exact sequence 0 -» ff/(u9 - 1 ) F -y i ? i ( y 7 ; Z ) -» Z -f 0, in which the right hand term is generated by the image of m. We may complete Y and V to X and X by adding a 2-cell along meridians of the axes, and then adding a 3-cell. Similarly, we may obtain X from Y'/(u) and JH from Y 7 = ¥'/(ui) by adding 2-cells along the lifts of meridians and then 3-cells. The transfer tr from H\{Y /(u); Z) to i/i(Y 7 ;Z) sends the class of h to the class of uqh, for h £ H, while ir[m] = [m]. We obtain the exact sequence f?i(X;A M ) —^-> H i ( X 7 ; Z ) -> tf/^H - • 0. If /x = 1 then iJ has a square presentation matrix, and so EQ(H) is principal. If \i > 1 then I^+ip — A w [u, u _ 1 ] for any principal prime ideal p of A^, as t\ — 1 and *2 — 1 a r e relatively prime. Thus
8.4. SEMIFREE PERIODS
181
E0(H)P is generated by the image of Ao(H) = Ai(L U A), by Theorem 4.12.(1). In all cases A0(H/uqH) = Res(A1(Zl)~A),vq), by Theorem 3.13. If Ao(H/vqH) = 0 then H/uqH has positive rank as a A^module. Hence so does .ffi(X;c*AM), which maps onto H/vqH, and both sides of the equation are 0. If A0{H/uqH) + 0 then E0(Hp) = (A 0 (#)) ^ 0, for p any principal prime ideal of A^. Hence the A^+i^-module Hp has a square presentation matrix with nonzero determinant, by Theorem 3.7, and has no nontrivial pseudonull submodule, by Theorem 3.8. As vq and Ao(-ff) have no common factors, multiplication by vq is injective on Hp. It follows easily that the localization of the transfer homomorphism is injective. Thus we may apply Theorem 3.12 to the above sequence to get AQ(H\(X';c*A^))
= A\(L)AQ(H/vqH)
in
AMp. As this holds for all principal prime ideals of A^, this completes the proof. •
This result was first proven by Murasugi, for knots in S3 ([Mu71] - see the Corollary below), and in general by Sakuma [Sk81]; an independent proof requiring the hypothesis that lk(yl, Li) ^ 0 for at least one component of L was given in [Hi81']. The present argument combines ideas from the latter two proofs. (Compare also the discussion of cyclic branched covers of homology 3-spheres in §7 of Chapter 5). The proof can be simplified when /i = 1 and |lk(A, i Q | = 1, for then [m] generates an infinite cyclic direct summand in .ffi(Y 7 ;Z), so that H1(X'T;Z) S H/(u« - 1)H, and we may apply Theorem 3.13 directly to this quotient. Davis and Livingston conjecture that any knot polynomial satisfying the Murasugi conditions (i.e., with a factorization as in the theorem) is the polynomial of some knot K with semifree period q, and with £ — |lk(A, K)\ as determined from this equation in Corollary 1 below. They have confirmed this when t — 1, by surgically modifying one of the components of the Hopf link [DL91]. Thus for knots the Murasugi conditions may well be best possible in terms of the Alexander polynomial.
182
8. SYMMETRIES
COROLLARY 8.7.1. If K is a 1-knot which has a semifree period of prime power order q — pr > 1 then A\(K) = {v^)q (A\(K))q mod (p), where £ is prime to p. Therefore either A\(K) = 1 mod (p) or the degree of A\{K) is at least q — 1. Furthermore Ai(K) is divisible by Ai(K). PROOF. This follows immediately from the theorem and the Torres conditions, since every pth root of unity is congruent to 1 mod (p). On reducing the equation mod (t — l,p) we get 1 = A 9 - 1 mod (p), and so (A,p) = 1. (This is also clear for topological reasons, since £ = lk(A, K) and the link K covering K is connected). D We do not need the full strength of Theorem 3.13 to obtain this congruence. For we may take R to be the PID FPA and q — pr, so that uq - l = (u-l)q. If N = F i ( F ; F p A ) then E0(N) is principal. q The module Q = N/(u — 1) N is an R-torsion module if and only if s(Ao(N)) ^ 0, in which case multiplication by (u — 1) is injective on N and so N/(u - 1)N S (u - l)J'JV/(u - iy+1N for all j > 0. Hence A 0 (Q)(t) = A 0 (iV)(M) 9 in FPA. This congruence extends to higher dimensional knots invariant under a Z/prZ action which is free off a 1-dimensional fixed point set S1 [DL91']. COROLLARY 8.7.2. Let L be a 2-component link with linking number £ which is componentwise invariant under a rotation h of order q about a disjoint axis A. Then q divides £. PROOF. We may assume that q = pr for some prime p and r > 1, and induct on r. Let A, L, L\ and Li be the images of A, L and its component knots in M = M/(hqlp), and let £{ = lk(A,Li). These linking numbers £\ and t
(z - lKCzKCOAiCiXz) so |A| = plAinp-'lAitl)^)! = P|A|, since M is an homology 3-sphere. This proves the Lemma if q — p, i.e., if r = 1. Now h induces a rotation of order q/p = pr~l on M
8.4. SEMIFREE PERIODS
183
about the axis A, leaving the components of L invariant, and so pr divides A, by the inductive hypothesis. Hence q — pT divides A. • In general a rotation of a 2-component link may interchange the components, and so its order need only divide twice the linking number. (The Hopf link in S3 has a semifree period 2). If v > fi = 1 it is easy to see that (q, £) > 1, where I = lk(.A, L). 8.7.3. If m,n > 1 the (rn,n)-torus semifree period q if and only if q divides m or n. COROLLARY
knot Km^n has
We have already seen that Km0 and (a,p) = 1 and let / = v\{t)Ai(K)The congruence of Corollary 1 gives PROOF.
i(tx - i)/((f - m a n - i)/(ta - i)yr = r mod (P)
and / has degree > A — 1. Moreover (A,p) = 1, by Corollary 1. If (k,p) = 1 then tk — 1 has no repeated roots in ¥p[t], since its derivative is ktk~l. Therefore we must have A = n and r > 0. In particular, p must divide m. Similarly, if p does not divide m then it divides n and A = m. It follows that if q is divisible by two distinct primes p ^ p' then either both divide m or both divide n. Suppose now that pr+l divides q, where m = pra with (a, p) = 1. Then we obtain the congruence ((tan — l)/ta — l)pT = fpT mod (p), and so the quotient (tan - l)/(ta - 1 ) is a pth power in ¥p(t). But the roots of (tan — l)/(ta — 1) are distinct mod (p), and so pr+1 cannot divide q. Together these observations give the Corollary. • This was first proven by Conner [Cn59]. The above argument is a variation on that of Murasugi. Edmonds showed that the semifree periods of a knot of genus g are bounded by 2g + 1, and for fibred knots this bound is attained only by the (2,2g + l)-torus knot [Ed84]. Naik combined the results of Edmonds and Murasugi with an elementary estimate for the genus to obtain the following result [Na94].
8. SYMMETRIES
184
THEOREM. Let K be a knot with an n-crossing diagram and which is not a (2,n)-torus knot. Let g be the genus of K. If K has a semifree period of order q = pr > [n/2] where p is prime then K is trivial and either (1) q = 2g + l, Ai(K) = (t+ 1) 9 _ 1 mod (p) and deg(Ai(K)) = 2g; or (2) q = g + 1 = [n/2], Ai(K) = (t2 + t + l)9'1 mod (p) and deg(A1(K)) = 2g;or (3) q = g + 1 = [n/2] and Ai(K) = 1 mod (p). • Sakuma has used the Equivariant Sphere Theorem to show that the only semifree periods of a composite knot are the obvious ones (rotating one possibly trivial summand and permuting the others). He also showed that the semifree periods of a composite link are sharply constrained by the multiplicities of the prime factors [Sk81]. If / € Q[t] we shall let Split(f/Q) denote the splitting field of / over Q. Trotter showed that if K is a 1-knot such that (TTK)' is free and Ai(K) has no repeated roots then the qth roots of unity are in Split(Ai(K)/Q) [Tr61]. This is an immediate consequence of the following theorem. 8.8. Let A e Z[t] satisfy the Murasugi conditions for some prime power q = pr. Suppose that A has irreducible factorization A = II<5^ . Then either A = 1 mod (p) or the degree of Q(Cg) over Q(Cg) C"1 Split(A/Q>) is at most m = max{e(i)}. THEOREM
PROOF. Let G = Gal(Q(£q)/Q). The Murasugi conditions assert that there is an integer A, a knot polynomial S and a polynomial f(t) e Z[C„ t] such that A = AUgeGf9 and f(t) = v\A mod (p). We may assume that A ^ 1 mod (p). Then / is nontrivial and so has a nontrivial irreducible factor h in Q(Cg)[*]- Let S — {g e G \ h9 = h} and let T be a set of coset representatives for the subgroup S in G. Then H = UT&ThT is irreducible in Z[t] and H^ = Ug€Gh9 divides A, so \S\ < m. Let M = Q(Cq)S be the subfield fixed by S. Then M is generated over Q by the coefficients of h, and [Q(Cq) : M] — \S\. Since the coefficients of h are elementary symmetric functions of the
8.4. SEMIFREE PERIODS
roots of h, which are among the roots of A, they are in The theorem now follows easily.
185
Split(A/Q). •
Burde weakened Trotter's hypotheses to requiring that Ai(K) does not represent a unit in F p A and that Az(K) = 1 [Bu78]. This condition is relaxed further in Theorem 10 below. LEMMA 8.9. Let C be a finitely generated QA-torsion module with an automorphism r of prime power order q = pr. Suppose that n is the least integer such that An(C) = 1. Then the degree of the qth roots of unity over 5p/it(Ao(C)/Q) is at most n. PROOF. The module C is the direct sum of its <5-primary submodules, over irreducible factors S of 6Q(C), and this decomposition is preserved by r. The order of r is the least common multiple of the orders of its restrictions to such summands. Hence the order must be exactly q for at least one such summand, and so we may assume that Ao(C) = 5e, where 5 is irreducible. Let L = QA/(<5). The kernel of the natural homomorphism from Aut(C/5m+iC) to Aut(C/SmC) is isomorphic to HomL(C/5m+lC,6mC/5m+1C), and so is an L-vector space, if m > 1. In particular, it is torsion free. Therefore the image of r in Aut(C/5C) = GL(n, L) has order exactly q. Let A — L[T] be the subalgebra of M(n, L) generated by this element. Then dimiA < n, by the Cayley-Hamilton Theorem. On the other hand, the image of r in the semisimple algebra A/radA again has order exactly q, as the kernel of the map on units is an iterated extension of L-vector spaces. The algebra A/radA is a product of fields containing L (see page 452 of [Lan]), so some factor is an extension L' of L which contains the qth roots of unity and for which [V : L] < dimi,A < n. This implies the lemma, since L is contained in 5p/it(A 0 (C)/Q). • 8.10. Let K be a knot in an homology 3-sphere M which has a semifree period q — pr for some prime p. Then either THEOREM
(1) Ai{K) = 1 mod (p); or (2) the degree of the qth roots of unity over Split(Ai(K)/Q) at most n, where An(K) ^ 1 but An+\(K) = 1.
is
8. SYMMETRIES
186
Let / i b e a self homeomorphism of M of order q which leaves K invariant and fixes a circle A disjoint from K. Let TT = •KK and let r be the induced automorphism of the A-module ir'/ir". Suppose that (2) does not hold. Since n'/ir" is Z-torsion free r n = 1 if and only if (idT)™ = 1. By Lemma 8.9 the order of idq ® r is a proper divisor of q. Thus on replacing h by hq/p we may assume that K is invariant under a self homeomorphism h of M of prime order p > 1 which induces the identity on TT'/TT". Let M be the orbit space of h and let c : M —> M, if = c(if), X and X be as above. (Here we shall asume the base point * is fixed by h). Let T? = Trif. Then TT = n / ((g^1 h*(g) \ g € 7r)), where /i* is the automorphism of it induced by h, and so c\x : X -+ X induces an isomorphism from TT/TT" to Tf/ff". The map c\x extends to ap-fold cyclic branched cover d : Z —> Z, where Z and Z are the closed 3-manifolds obtained by 0-framed surgery on K and K. The map d is of degree p, and induces an isomorphism of TT/TT" = ni{Z)/Tti{Z)" with ff/fr" = m(Z)/iri(Z)"t since the longitudes of a knot lie in the second commutator subgroup of the knot group. Let Z' and Z be the maximal abelian covering spaces of Z and Z, respectively, and let d' : Z' —* Z be a lift of d. The modules Hq(Z;¥pA) are finitely generated and Hq(Z;¥p) = ¥p or 0, for all q. It follows from the exact sequence of homology associated to the coefficient sequence 0 —> F p A —* F p A —* F p —> 0 and the structure theorem for finitely generated modules over the PID F p A that Hq(Z';¥p) = Hq(Z;¥pA) is a torsion module, and so is finitely generated over F p . If F is a field the functors Hompi^—, F) and HomFh{-,F(t)/Fk) = ExtpA(-,FA) are naturally isomorphic on the category of finitely generated torsion FA-modules. It follows that Hi(Z';¥p) as i7« + 1 (Z;F p A), for all q. Let dt = Hi(d;¥pA) and0. Since d\ = Hi(d';¥p) is an isomorphism so is iJ 1 ((i / ;F p ). Hence d2 is also an isomorphism, by naturality. Now di(d?(a PI [Z])) — a PI G^fZ] for all a € i/ 2 (Z;F p A). But c^ = 0, since d has degree p, and so H2(Z;¥PA) = 0. Therefore # i ( Z ; F p A ) = 0 also, and so A^K) = 1 PROOF.
mod (p).
•
8.5. LINKS WITH INFINITELY MANY SEMIFREE PERIODS
187
The polynomial A = (fa)3 satisfies the Murasugi conditions with n = 3 and A = 1. It is the Alexander polynomial of (t33i, which clearly has a semifree period 3. However Theorem 8.8 implies that no knot with this polynomial and which is invariant under a rotation of order 3 about a disjoint axis can have a cyclic knot module. (In particular, no such knot can have unknotting number 1). The polynomial 3t2 — 5£ + 3 satisfies the Murasugi conditions with q = 3 and A = 1, and hence is the Alexander polynomial of some knot with a semifree period 3, by Theorem 1.1 of [DL91]. As the splitting field for this quadratic is Q( v / —11), which does not contain £3, we see that in general the alternative uAi(K) = 1 mod (p)" is necessary. Theorem 8.10 may be extended to the Hosokawa polynomial of a link, if its coefficients have highest common factor 1, as is the case for knots and fibred links. (This condition ensures that Hi(XT;Z) is Z-torsion free). 8.5. Links with infinitely many semifree periods Trivial knots are the only knots with infinitely many distinct semifree periods [F185]. The argument uses the Equivariant Characteristic Variety Theorem to reduce to the cases of torus knots and hyperbolic knots. We shall extend Flapan's argument to obtain the corresponding result for links by reduction to the cases where the complements are Seifert fibred or hyperbolic. (The Seifert case uses Corollary 7.3 and the Burde-Murasugi characterization of links with Seifert fibred complement). The equivariant Dehn Lemma then implies that the axis of a rotation must link each component in the simplest nontrivial fashion, as in a keyring. LEMMA 8.11. Let K be a knot invariant under a homeomorphism h of order q, and let N be a regular neighbourhood of K. Then h is conjugate to a homeomorphism of order q which leaves K and N invariant.
Let Nh = r\j>0hj(N). Then Nh is a regular neighbourhood of K which is invariant under h. by the uniqueness of regular neighbourhoods there is an isotopy 4>t of S3 fixing K and such that PROOF.
8. SYMMETRIES
188
i(Nh) = N. Therefore ih i1 is a homeomorphism of S3 of order q which leaves K and iV invariant. • LEMMA 8.12. Let U C S3 be a solid torus which is invariant under a rotation h of order q > 2 about an axis A. Then either S3-U^D2xS1orADU =
Notice that if h is an involution (h2 — id) then the axis of h may meet U. In this case h must reverse both meridian and longitude of U. If U is an invariant neighbourhood of a knot K then the axis also meets K, and the knot is said to be "strongly irreducible". THEOREM 8.13. Let T C S3 be a torus which is invariant under rotations of infinitely many orders. Then T is unknotted, i.e., the closure of each component of S 3 — T is a solid torus. By Alexander's torus theorem at least one component N of S — T is an open solid torus. Let X = S3 — N. Suppose that X is not a solid torus, then X is irreducible and has incompressible boundary, and so has a characteristic family of tori T = {Tj | 1 < j < m}. This is a minimal family of disjoint incompressible nonparallel tori in X, one of which is dX, such that the PROOF. 3
8.5. LINKS WITH INFINITELY MANY SEMIFREE PERIODS
189
closures of the components of X — \J3JZ™Tj are either Seifert fibred or simple, and T is unique up to ambient isotopy of X. If h is a homeomorphism of X of finite order then there is a characteristic family of tori for X whose union is invariant under h. Since there is an ambient isotopy carrying such an invariant family to T, we may find (as in Lemma 8.11) a conjugate homeomorphism h which leaves UT invariant. Furthermore (h) m ! leaves each torus in T invariant. Thus after conjugating and raising to the m\th power if necessary, we may assume that there is a family {hi \ i 6 N} of rotations of finite order rii > 2 of S3, each of which leaves each torus in T invariant, and such that {n;}j e ^ is an unbounded sequence. There is a component X\ of X — UTj whose closure has connected boundary. (This follows by induction on m and the fact that each closed surface in S3 separates). This component is either simple or a torus knot exterior. If X\ is simple then the mapping class group of X\ is finite, of order / say, and so each homeomorphism (hi|xi)^ is isotopic to the identity. With only minor modifications the argument of [Gi67] then implies that {hi\xxY is the identity, since 7ri(Xi) has trivial centre. But then h{ = id for all z G N, contradicting the unboundedness of the orders of the rotations. Thus X\ must be the exterior of a torus knot. If X\ is not a solid torus then it contains the axes of all the rotations /ij, which therefore act freely on S3 — X\ = S1 x D2. After conjugating each hi by a map fa isotopic to the identity rel X\, we may assume that the core Sl x {0} is invariant under all the rotations. But the only semifree periods of a (p, q)-torus knot with p, q > 1 divide pq. Therefore X\ must be a solid torus, and so dX is compressible in X, contradicting the definition of characteristic family. Thus our supposition was wrong and X must also be a solid torus. D COROLLARY
8.13.1. A 1-knot K with infinitely many semifree
periods is trivial. Let N be a regular neighbourhood of K. By Lemma 8.11 we may assume that there is a family {hi | i € N} of rotations of finite order of S3, each of which leaves K, N and hence X = X(K) PROOF.
190
8. SYMMETRIES
and ON = dX invariant and has axis disjoint from K, and such that the sequence of orders is unbounded. By Theorem 8.13 the exterior X is a solid torus, and so K is trivial. • A similar strategy of reduction to the Seifert fibred case extends this result to links. THEOREM 8.14. Let L be a ^-component 1-link with infinitely many semifree periods. Then L is trivial. P R O O F . AS before we may assume that there are infinitely many rotations {hi \ i € N} leaving L componentwise invariant. We may also assume that L is unsplittable, and hence that X{L) is irreducible. By Corollary 8.13.1 the components of L are trivial. We shall show that // = 1. Suppose that X has an incompressible boundary, i.e., that /x > 1. Let T = {Tj | 1 < j < m} be a characteristic family of tori for X. Again, we may assume that each torus in T is invariant under each of the rotations hi, and that each component of X — ^J\<j<mTj is Seifert fibred. At least one such component, X\ say, contains the axes of infinitely many of the rotations. The complement S3 — Xi is a union of solid tori, since by Theorem 8.13 each torus in T is unknotted, and so X\ = X(L\) for some link L\. By the definition of characteristic family L\ is not the unknot. It is clear from the work of Burde and Murasugi on links whose exteriors are Seifert fibred [BM70] that L\ must have a sublink L 1. By filling in the solid tori corresponding to the other components of L\ we obtain a submanifold X% which is homeomorphic to X{L
8.6. KNOTS WITH FREE PERIODS
191
The axis of a rotation leaving a trivial link componentwise invariant must be in the "obvious" position with respect to the link, as the next result shows. 8.15. Let L be a trivial ^-component 1-link which is componentwise invariant under a rotation of finite order q about a disjoint axis A. Then there are disjoint discs Df C 5 3 which meet A transversely in one point and such that dDi = Li, for each 1 < i < \i. THEOREM
P R O O F . Suppose that there are invariant discs Di,... Dk-i, with dDi — Li and which are disjoint from one another and from the remaining components of L. Let N be an open regular neighbourhood of L U (Ui0 either h^(D) = D or h?(D) n D = 0. But Lk must link A, by Corollary 8.7.1, and so D fl A ^ 0. Therefore D is invariant under h, and so may be extended to an invariant spanning disc Dk for L^, which is disjoint from Ui^Di and from the other components of L. An application of the Hurwitz formula to the discs £); and their images D* in S3/(h) shows that each map : D\ —* D* has just one branch point, and hence that A meets each Di in one point. The intersections must be transverse for (as remarked above) A must link each component of L. D
In higher dimensions, if an ra-knot K has semifree periods of every finite order then X(K)' is acyclic, and so if also irK = Z then K is trivial [Su75]. A simple (2q — l)-knot (with q > 1) has infinitely many semifree periods if and only if it is fibred and the homological monodromy has finite order [CN96]. 8.6. Knots with free periods If a knot K in an homology 3-sphere M has free period q then a suitable 1/n-surgery on K will give another knot K in another
192
8. SYMMETRIES
homology 3-sphere M which is the fixed point set of a Z/qZ-action and such that X{K) and X(K) are equivariantly homeomorphic. THEOREM 8.16. Let K be a knot in an homology ^-sphere M which has free period q (or which is fixed pointwise under a Z/qZaction on M). Then Ai(K)(tq) = n ^ f < J « ^ ) , where 6 is a knot polynomial. P R O O F . We shall assume that K is freely periodic. Let X = M — K and X = M — K and suppose that X and X and K and K are compatibly oriented. Then H\(f) is injective, so X' is also the maximal abelian covering space of X. The automorphism of X' which generates Aut(X'/X) ^ H\{X; Z) = Z is the qth power of the automorphism which generates Aut(X'/X). 1 Let Au = Z[u, u" ] and A„ = Z[t>, v~x], where u and v correspond to meridians for K and for K, respectively, and let g : A u —> Av be the homomorphism sending u to vq induced by / . Let Hu = H^X-K) and Hv = H^X'K). (Of course Hu - tfi(X';Z) = Hv as abelian groups, while Hu = g*Hv as a A u -module). Let At = Z[t, t~l] be yet another copy of the Laurent polynomial ring, let ip : Au —> At be the homomorphism sending u to tq and let At>v = Z[t,t-X,v,v-X). Then
Af ®A„ Hu = (At ® Au A„) ®A„ Hv = {Kt,v/{vq - tq)) ®A„ Hv, as At-modules. Clearly Eo(At <8>AU i? u ) is generated by Ai(K)(tq), since i7 u — Hi(X;Au), while to make the corresponding computation for the module on the right we may extend coefficients from Z to Z[C,]. But then Z[C,] ® ((At,v/(vq - tq)) ®A„ 5«) has a filtration with subquotients isomorphic to Z[£9] ® ((AtiV/(v — C,qt)) ®A„ ^ U ) , and the theorem follows from Theorem 3.12. • This theorem was first proven by Kinoshita, for knots fixed pointwise [Ki58]. The connection with freely periodic knots is due to Hartley [Ha81]. A similar argument may be used to show that if a /i-component link L is componentwise invariant under a free Z/qZaction then there are integers 0 < fej < q such that (bi,q) = 1, for 2 < i < n and an / G A^ such that Ai(L)(t 1 n2
8.6. KNOTS WITH FREE PERIODS
193
R3jZif((qtut2,...tIJ). (There are analogous results for the other components of L). Such conditions obviously imply the corresponding ones for sublinks of L. There appears to be no such result for the Hosokawa polynomial, for Aut(XT/X) may not be infinite cyclic. When /i = 2 setting h = t2 = 1 gives £12 = ±TVjZq1f((Jg). In fact we must have (£ l2 , q) — 1, for the diagram ffi(Li;Z)
i?i(Li;Z)
- ^
^i(X(L2);Z)
>
H1(X(L2;Z)
commutes and L\ represents a generator of H\{M\'L). Every polynomial satisfying the above condition is the Alexander polynomial of some freely periodic knot in an homology 3-sphere. Let K be a knot with Ai(iT) = 5 and let K be the branch locus in M = Mq(K). Then 1/n surgery on K produces such a knot. Are there always such knots in S 3 ? The generator of Aut(X'/X) induces an isometry V of bj< such that V« = u.idHu and bj^(a,/3) = S J l f ^ ' 6 x ( a , ^ 7 ? ) in Q(«)/A„. In particular, the pairing on the right hand side is nonsingular. The following consequences of Theorem 8.16 were observed by Fox (1) Ai(K) and S have the same degree; (2) the leading coefficient of Ai(K) is a qth power; (3) the roots of A\(K) are the q powers of roots of S. Using the following result from number theory it is not hard to show that conditions (1) and (2) imply that if K is a knot with infinitely many free periods then Ai(.K') is a product of cyclotomic polynomials. LEMMA (Kronecker). For each n there is an en > 0 such that any algebraic integer of degree n and such that all of its conjugates in C have absolute value less than 1 + e n must be a root of unity. •
194
8. SYMMETRIES
Hartley refined this Lemma to find explicit bounds on the possible free periods of knots whose Alexander polynomials have noncyclotomic factors. He also used Theorem 8.16 to show that if K has free period q and Ai(K) = TLiai' then there are integers bi and pi such that (aj,p;) = 1, b{ divides a; and biPi = q, for all 1 < i < n and strengthened another result of Fox by showing that if Ai(K) is quadratic but is not t2 — t + 1 then K has no free period. Since Ai{Km^n){i) contains >mn(t) as a simple factor, (f>mn{tq) is a simple factor of Ai(Km,n)(tq). Multiplication by C,q permutes th the primitive (mnq) roots of unity, and so A\{Km,n)(tq) has no factorization as in Theorem 8.16. Thus Km^n has free period q if and only if (q,mn) = 1. Torus knots are the only knots in 5 3 with infinitely many free periods [F185]. If a link L in an homology 3sphere has infinitely many free periods must X(L) be Seifert fibred? The following result from [Ha81] is analogous to Theorem 5.19. T H E O R E M 8.17. Let K be a knot in an homology ^-sphere M which has free period q (or which is fixed pointwise under a Z/qZaction on M), and let 5 be as in the preceding theorem. Then there is a homomorphism ofi!i(M2;Z) onto some group E of order 6(—1) with kernel a direct double. Hence ifi(M2;Z) is not cyclic unless \S(-1)\ = \Ai(K)(-l)\. In particular, if q = 2 then Hi(M2;Z) is always a direct double. P R O O F . Consider the case when K is fixed pointwise and apply Theorem 5.19 to the 2g-fold cyclic branched cover of the orbit space M, branched over the orbit knot K. D
If q > 1 a (2q — l)-knot K with TTK = Z has semifree period m if and only if it has free period m, and the actions can be assumed to agree on X(K). It follows easily by Smith theory that at most one of the components of a (2q — l)-link is invariant under a free action of Z/mZ, the others being permuted [Ni92]. 8.7. S t r o n g s y m m e t r i e s We shall give here some necessary conditions for odd-dimensional knots to admit strong symmetries of order 2.
8.7. STRONG SYMMETRIES
195
THEOREM 8.18. Let K be a strongly —amphicheiral (2q—l)-knot. Then there is an automorphism 9 of Hq(X;A) such that 92 = id or t.id and b(6(x), 9(y) — -b(x, y) for all x, y. If 92 = id then Z[±] ® b is hyperbolic. Conversely, if K is simple, q > 1 and b is hyperbolic then K is amphicheiral. If A(K) = Ao(Hq(X;A)) is an irreducible quadratic, A(K) = at2 + (1 — 2a)t + a then —a is a perfect square. Let h be an involution of Sn+2 which leaves an n-knot K invariant. Let t be the meridianal generator of the covering group Aut(X'/X). Then h\x lifts to a map h : X' -> X' such that h o t£ = toh, where e = 1 or —1 as h\x preserves or reverses the meridians. Moreover (h)2 = tm for some m, as it lifts idx- If h has nonempty fixed point set we may assume that (h)2 = idx>', if e = + 1 we may assume that m = 0 or 1. The first assertion follows from n = 2q — 1 and e = 1 on taking 9 to be the automorphism induced by h. If 92 = id let A± be the ± 1 eigenspaces of Z[^] ® 9. They are self-orthogonal with respect to Z^jofr, and H\(X; h{\}) = A_®A+. Conversely, if b is hyperbolic then the map which multiplies one of a pair of complementary self-orthogonal sumands of H\{X; A) by —1 induces an isometry of b with —b, and so if K is simple and q > 1 then K is —amphicheiral. If A(K) is an irreducible quadratic then Q6 and hence Z[^] ®b cannot be hyperbolic, so we must have 92 ~ t.id. Therefore the image of t in F — QA/(A(K)) is a perfect square in F. Since a(t — l ) 2 = —t in F it follows that —a is a square in F. The discriminant of F divides 1 — 4a and cannot be 1, since F ^ Q. Therefore —a is a square in Q and hence in Z. D PROOF.
The Blanchfield pairing of an odd dimensional knot is also hyperbolic if the knot is doubly null concordant. A simple (2q — l)-knot (with q > 1) with hyperbolic Blanchfield pairing is doubly null concordant. When is a strongly —amphicheiral knot doubly null concordant, or vice-versa? For any knot K the sum iftf — AT is both doubly null concordant and strongly —amphicheiral. On the other hand 4i is strongly —amphicheiral but not slice, while 946 is doubly null concordant but not amphicheiral.
8. SYMMETRIES
196
A closer connection between concordance and strong symmetries is given by the following result of Long [Lo84]. THEOREM 8.19. Let b be an e-linking pairing on a knot module M with an antilinear involution 6 such that b(6(m),9(n)) — —b(n,m) for all m,n € M. Then the Witt class ofb is trivial. By assumption, 0 2 (m) = m and Q(tm) = t~l6(m) for all m e M. Let rj = ± 1 and Mv - Ker(0 - rjid). If Mn = 0 then 6 — r\id is 1-1 so 6 + md = 0. Hence tm = t~lm for all m € M and so (t2 — 1)M = 0. Since M is a pure knot module this implies that M = 0. Thus we may assume that neither M+ nor M_ is 0. If m € Mv then b(m,m) = —b(6(m),6(m)) = —b(j]m,r)m) — —b(m,m) and so is 0. Therefore W — Am is a self orthogonal submodule of M as 0(W) = W, WL and W11 are also preserved by 6. Then b induces a Witt equivalent pairing 6i on M\ — W1- /W r - U -, and 6 induces an antilinear involution 6\ of M\ which changes the sign of b\. If M 7^ 0 then dimqQMi < dimqM, and so by a finite induction we conclude that 6 is Witt equivalent to the trivial pairing. D PROOF.
COROLLARY 8.19.1. Every strongly + amphicheiral 1-knot is algebraically slice. Every strongly invertible (4A; — l)-knot or strongly + amphicheiral (4A; + l)-knot (with k > 0) is slice. The involution must fix a point in X(K), and so induces an antilinear involution 6 as in the theorem. • PROOF.
If a 1-knot K is not concordant to its reverse Kp then K%rK is strongly + amphicheiral but is not slice. Is a Blanchfield pairing admitting an antilinear involution as in Theorem 8.19 hyperbolic? 8.8. Equivariant concordance Let L(0) and L(l) be //-component 1-links which are invariant under Z/qZ-actions determined by homeomorphisms ho and hi, respectively. The links with these actions are equivariantly concordant if there is an action h of Z/qZ on S3 x [0,1] such that h\S3xu\ = hi for i = 0 and 1, and which leaves invariant a concordance C from L(0) to L(l).
8.8. EQUIVARIANT CONCORDANCE
197
8.20. Let h be a self-homeomorphism of S3 x [0,1] which is orientation preserving, leaves the boundary components invariant and has finite order q > 1. Then the fixed point set of h is empty or is an annulus meeting S3 x {i} in a circle, for i = 0 and 1. LEMMA
P R O O F . Let F be the fixed point set of h. If F is nonempty it is a submanifold of even codimension in S3 x [0,1], which meets the boundary components S3 x {i} properly. The homeomorphism h may be extended by coning to a periodic self-homeomorphism h of S 4 = DA U (S3 x [0,1])UD 4 . The fixed point set of h is the union of F with the cones over F n (S3 x {i}) for i = 0 and 1, and so is nonempty. Moreover it is a Z/pZ-homology sphere of even codimension, for each prime p dividing q, by Smith theory. Therefore either F is empty or F is an annulus. •
It follows that if two links with Z/qZ-actions are equivariantly concordant then one action is semifree if and only if the other is. A link L with a semifree Z/qZ-action fixing L component-wise is equivariantly slice if the action bounds an action of Z/qZ on D 4 which leaves invariant a null-concordance of L. Smith theory (applied to the actions on Z)4 and on the slice discs) implies that the fixed point set of the action on £) 4 is a 2-disc which meets each invariant slice disc in 1 point. (The fixed point set may be knotted). The orbit space is a 1-connected homology 4-ball with boundary S3. and so is homeomorphic to D 4 , by topological surgery. Clearly L is equivariantly slice if and only if it is equivariantly concordant to the trivial //-component link with the standard Z/qZ-action. THEOREM 8.21. Let L(0) and L(l) be 1-links with semifree period q, determined by homeomorphisms ho and hi with axes A(0) and A(l), respectively. If these actions are equivariantly concordant the links AQ II L(0) and A{\) II L(l) are concordant. P R O O F . The fixed point set A of a periodic homeomorphism h extending ho and hi is an annulus, by the Lemma. An analogous argument shows that AnJC is empty. Therefore AuC is a concordance between A0 H L(0) and A(l) II L(l). •
8. SYMMETRIES
198
COROLLARY 8.21.1. / / a l-knot K has semifree period q, with axis A, then lk(A, K) is an invariant of equivariant concordance. PROOF.
This follows from the theorem and Corollary 4.17.1.
•
If K is a knot invariant under a rotation h of order q about a disjoint axis A let AZ/qZ(K) be the image of Ai(A U K) in the ring Z[Z x (Z/qZ)] = A2/(ti - 1 ) , where AuK is the orbit link in S3/(h) and u, t are the meridians corresponding to A and K, respectively. Let T = Q[Z/nZ] 2* Q[u]/(«« - 1) and S = Az T = QA 2 /(u 9 - 1). THEOREM 8.22. Let K be a l-knot with semifree period q about an axis A and which is equivariantly slice. Then \lk(A,K)\ = 1 and we may normalize our choice of Ai(.A u K) so that AZ/qZ(K) = aa for some a — a(t,u) € S such that a(l,u) — 1. P R O O F . The first assertion follows from the Corollary above (or on considering the fixed point set of the restriction of the action to an invariant slice disc). As a consequence we may use the Torres conditions (Corollary 5.3.1) to normalize Az/qZ{K) to be fixed under conjugation and augment to 1. Let X = X(K), Y = X(AL)T(). M = Hi(X;QA) and H = Hi(y;h.2). Since |lk(A,L)\ = 1 the meridian for A splits the sequence 0 -» H/(u" - \)H - • i ? i ( y 7 ; Z) -» Z -» 0 (i.e., (t — l)m = 0), and so M = S <8>A2 H. Hence M has a square presentation matrix over S, since H has a square presentation matrix over A2, and EQ(M) — (Az/qZ(K)) in S. The automorphism u e S acts isometrically on the Blanchfield pairing b : M x M —» Q(t)/QA (i.e., b(ug,uh) = b(g,h) for all g, h 6 M). Let Z — D4 — N(JC) be the complement of an open regular neighbourhood of an equivariant null concordance K. for K. Then H*(Z;QA) and H*(Z,dZ;QA) are QA-torsion modules and thus have finite dimension as Q-vector spaces. The inclusion of X into dZ = I U (S 1 x D2) induces an isomorphism M ^ H^dZ; QA), and the Blanchfield pairings agree. Let P be the image of . ^ ( Z , dZ; QA) in H\(dZ; QA). Then P is invariant under the automorphism u, and so is an 5-submodule.
8.8. EQUIVARIANT CONCORDANCE
199
Since dimqiP < oo and T is semisimple, P is finitely generated and projective as a r-module. Let P' be a projective complement, so that P®P' £* T9 for some g>\. Let Pi = AzP and P 2 = A zP', with the S-module structures given by tkum(tn p) = tk+n ® ump, for all p € P or P', respectively, and k,m,n € Z. Let Z) be the endomorphism of S® = A z r» = (Pi)» © (P 2 ) 9 given by D(q, q') = ((t - l)q,q') for all q € (Pi) s and a' € (P 2 ) s , and let a = a(t,u) = det(D). Then 0 -» S 9 —^-» S 9 -+ P - • 0 is a resolution of P as an S-module, and so EQ(P) = (a). Let x '• S —> QA be the QA-linear function defined by x(^rju^) = r 0 . If N is an 5-module let N\QA denote the underlying QA-module. Composition with x induces natural isomorphisms Homs(N, S) = HomQj\_(N\Q\,QA) for all finitely generated 5-modules. These are 5-linear if we set u(j>(n) = (un) for all <> / : N —> QA and n € N. Since restriction is exact and takes projectives to projectives these lead to natural isomorphisms Extls(N, S) = ExtqA(N\tQ\, QA) for all i > 0. In particular, if e(P) = Ext\(P, S) then e(P) ^ iJorriQA(P|QAiQ(0/Q-^)- Moreover this is an isomorphism of Smodules if we set u<j)(p) = (j)(up) for all p € P and cj> : P —» Q(t)/QA. Since the transpose D t r is a (square) presentation matrix for e(P) we have £ 0 (e(P)) = {det(Dtr)) = £ 0 ( P ) . The isomorphism M / P = e(P) implicit in Theorem 2.3 is 5linear. Hence (Az/qZ(K)) = E0(M) = (det(D)det(D)) = (aa), by Theorem 3.12, so Az/qz{K) = vtnaa for some v e Tx and n e Z (since SIX = T x (<)). Since A ^ 9 2 ( ^ ) n a s been normalized n = 0 and 1 = Ai(A) = v a ( l , i t ) a ( l , u _ 1 ) , by Corollary 5.3.1. Hence a(l,u) 6 r x , and so Az/qZ(K) = aa, where a = a(t, ti) = a(t,u)/a(l,u). O In particular, Ai(K)(t) — n^ q = 1 a(i, C)a(* _1 ,C -1 )- May we assume that a(t, u) is in A 2 /(u 9 — 1)? In [DN02] it is shown that there are a = a(t,u) and b = b(t,u) in A 2 /(u 9 — 1) such that a(l,it) = 6(1, u) = 1 and Az/qZ(K)bb = aa. Moreover if a(t,u) € A 2 /(u 9 - 1) and a(l,u) — 1 then ad — AZ/qZ(K) for some equivariantly ribbon knot K with semifree period q.
This page is intentionally left blank
Part 3
Free Covers, Nilpotent Quotients and Completion
This page is intentionally left blank
CHAPTER 9
Free Covers From the homological perspective the significant feature of the group Z is that it is free, rather than that it is abelian. The Laurent polynomial ring AM = Z[ZM] is a commutative factorial noetherian domain, but it has global dimension /x + 1, and so homological arguments can become unwieldy for \i large. In contrast, while the group ring Z[F(fi)] of a finitely generated nonabelian free group is no longer commutative or noetherian, it is coherent and has global dimension 2, for any value of /x. In this chapter we shall concentrate on the algebra of modules over free group rings, and we shall refer to the papers of Sato, Duval and (particularly) Farber for the major applications to the study of boundary links. 9.1. Free group rings Let TM = Z[F(p)] and KT^ = K[F{fi)}, for any field K. These group rings have canonical involutions, defined by g = g~x for all g € F(/i), and augmentations e : TM —» Z and £K ' KFy, —> K, induced by the projection of F(/J.) onto the trivial group. In particular, every free module over TM or KF^ has a well defined rank. Moreover F^ = *^A.i is the coproduct (in the category of augmented Z-algebras) of H copies of Ai, and similarly KF^ = *^Kk\. Therefore every (left) ideal of KF^ is free [Coh]. (This is of course false for T^, even if H = 1). Hence every submodule of a free .KT^-module is free and so every (left) i£TM-module M has a short free resolution 0 -> {KT^W
-* (KF^ 203
-* M - 0.
204
9. FREE COVERS
However the index set I need not be finite even if J is finite. It follows that KTp has no zerodivisors and that finitely generated free modules are hopfian: every epimorphism from (RF^)™ to itself is an isomorphism. The latter results hold also for F^, since they hold for Qr^. The units of TM and KY^ are all of the form 1*7, where u — ± 1 (respectively, u e Kx) and 7 G F(/J,). It follows easily from the characterizations of free groups and free modules in terms of universal properties, together with the correspondance between module homomorphisms from 1(G) to M and splitting homomorphisms for semidirect products (given in §1 of Chapter 4) that I(F(fi)) = Ker(e) is freely generated by the elements {xi — 1 , . . . x^ — 1} a s a left T^-module. Thus there is an exact sequence 0 -y (r^)" - ^ - > r^ ^-^
z -> 0,
where A ( 7 l , . . .7^) = Ztyfo - 1), for all ( 7 l , . . . 7 / i ) € ( r ^ . The ideal I(F(fi)) is two-sided (and so is a ( r ^ r ^ - b i m o d u l e ) and the elements {x\ — 1 , . . . x^ — 1} also form a basis for Ker(e) as a free right T^-module. However A is not a bimodule homomorphism, and in fact I(F(fi)) is not free as a (r M , r^)-bimodule. There are analogous sequences of left .KT^-modules. Let Ffj, be the /(F(/x))-adic completion of TM. The canonical homomorphism from T^ to T^ is an embedding, since nn>oI(F(fj,))n = 0 [Fo53]. The elements Xi = xi — 1 generate T^, and so we may identify T^ with Z ( ( X i , . . . X/j)), the ring of formal power series in the noncommuting variables. (The group homomorphism M : F(/i) —» Z((Xi,... X / i )) x determined by Mfa) = 1 + X{ for 1 < * < y. is the Magnus embedding. See also Chapter 5 of [MKS]). Let \& be the set of all square matrices over F^ whose images under e have determinant ± 1 . A ring homomorphism / : F^ —> R is ^-inverting if the image of every matrix in ^ is invertible as an i?-matrix. There is a universal ^-inverting homomorphism F^ —> F^ (the Cohn localization of TM) through which every ^-inverting homomorphism factors. Moreover this homomorphism is injective, since Q I ^ is a free ideal ring, and so has a universal field of fractions,
9.2. Z[F(/i)]-MODULES
205
and the involution of F^ extends to an involution on F^, since \I> is stable under transposition and involution of the entries [Coh]. The Cohn localization of Ti = Ai is localization with respect to 5 = {/ € Ai | e(f) — ±1}. In general, F^ may be identified with the subring of "rational functions" in F\ [FV92]. The rings F^ and KF^ are (left) coherent: every finitely generated submodule of a finitely presentable module is finitely presentable. Every (left) T^-module N has a projective resolution of length at most two: 0 -» P2 -» Px -f P0 - • N -» 0. Similarly, every (left) AT^-module has a short free resolution. Projective modules are free [Ba64']. Hence the projective modules Pi may be assumed free of finite rank if N is finitely presentable. 9.2. Z[F(/i)]-Modules We shall now look more closely at modules over these rings. If M is a left T^-module then the dual M* = Homr (M,F^) and the extension modules ElM = Extlr (M, TM) for i = 1,2 are naturally right T^-modules, since F^ is a bimodule over itself. (We shall use similar notation for the duals N* et cetera of right T^-modules and of left and right iM**, given by evM(m)(f) — / ( m ) f° r a u
me M and / e M*. We shall consider first modules over KF^ (with K a field), where the situation is relatively simple. If H is a left .KT^-module and / : H —> KFfj, a nonzero homomorphism, then Im(/) is a left ideal, and so is free. Therefore H = L©Ker(/), where L is free. If H is finitely generated then L is of finite rank not greater than the minimal number of generators of H. Thus after iterating the process of splitting off free factors finitely many times we find that H = {KF^Y © T, where T* = 0 and r is an integer. Clearly H* 9* (KrJ)r © T* = (AT M ) r and H** e* (KF^f. Then the rank r of H is well defined and evjj is an epimorphism, with kernel T. Moreover ElH = E1T. Since T has a short free resolution and T* = 0, we find
9. FREE COVERS
206
that T S E1E1T. Hence Kev(evH) = E1E1H. Clearly T contains the .RT^-torsion elements of H (those elements t e H for which there is a nonzero w € KT^ such that wt — 0), but it may also contain a free submodule. (If /x = 1 there is a much stronger structure result, for KFi = KAi is then a commutative PID and so T is a direct sum of cyclic modules). A consequence of this result is that if M is a finitely generated left ifrymodule such that K ®EK M = 0 then M* = 0. We now turn to the more difficult case of T^-modules. A left r M -module is a torsion module if M* — 0; it is a pure torsion module if also E2M = 0, and it is pseudonull if M* = ElM = 0. (Note that these definitions agree with the earlier definitions for the commutative case n = 1, by Theorem 3.9). If fi > 1 a torsion module may contain free submodules (in contrast to the commutative case). Let {x, y} generate F(2). Then {x— 1,3/ — 1} is a basis for the augmentation ideal, and so T = I ^ A M y — 1) contains the free submodule generated by the image of x — 1, while T* = 0 (since a nontrivial homomorphism from T^ to T^j must be injective). LEMMA 9.1. Let M be a finitely presentable left T^-module. Then M* is a finitely generated free right T^-module, and the modules ElM and E2M are finitely presentable. PROOF. Since M is finitely presentable it has a finite free resolution of length at most 2:
o - (r M )° ^ ^ (r M ) 6 - £ - * (r M ) c —^-
M
-> o.
The modules M*, EXM and E2M are the cohomology modules of the dual complex of right modules:
o-(r,o c - ^ - (rv)b -21- (iv)"-o. Let A ~ Ker(a*). Then there are exact sequences 0 -> M* —£-» (r^) c — ? - • A -» ^ M -> 0 and
o ->
A
- ^ - » (r^) 6 - = 1 - (r M ) a -• £ 2 M - » o
9.2.
207
Z[F(M)]-MODULES
with pq = /?*. Since T^ is coherent of global dimension 2, A is a finitely generated free (right) T^-module, and therefore so is M*. Moreover the latter two sequences are finite free resolutions for ElM and E2M. • Note that since (E2M) % Q = E2(Q ®i M) - 0 the sequence obtained on tensoring the above resolution of E2M with Q splits, and so A has rank a — b. The above resolutions of the right F^-modules ElM and E2M give rise to dual complexes of left T^-modules: 0 -» A* —£-> (r M ) c - ^
M** -» 0 -> . . .
and
o - (rM)a ^ ^ (i^) 6 - £ — A* - o - . . . Prom these may be obtained four new exact sequences 0 -» {ElM)* - • A* -» Ker(7**) -> E ^ M -> 0, 0 -+ Ker(7**) -» ( r ^ ) c - ^ - + M** -> E ^ M -> 0, 0 - • (£ 2 M)* -» (r M ) a -» Ker(p*) -» E ^ M -> 0 and 0 -+ Ker(p*) -» (r^) 6 - • A* - • £ 2 £ 2 M -> 0. Since the composition ( r ^ ) a —»• Ker(p*) —• (r^) 6 is a** = a, it is injective, and so (E2M)* = 0. Since q*p* = j3** = (3, Ker(p*) < Ker(/3) = Im(a), and so the homomorphism from (1^)° to Ker(p*) is an isomorphism. Therefore also E1E2M — 0. LEMMA 9.2. LetM be a finitely presentable left T^-module. Then E M is a finitely presentable pseudonull module. If M is pseudonull then M £* E2E2M. 2
P R O O F . The first assertion follows from Lemma 9.1 and the above paragraph. If M is pseudonull the four new exact sequences above simplify to give an exact sequence
0 - (T^
— 2 U (r M ) 6 - £ — (IV)C - E2E2M
whence it is clear that E2E2M
= Coker(/3) = M.
-» 0, •
9. FREE COVERS
208
We shall show below that E2E2M phic.
and M are naturally isomor-
LEMMA 9.3. Let M be a finitely presentable leftT^-module. Then M has a finite free resolution of length 1 if and only if E2M = 0. In this case E2N = 0 for any submodule N < M. The module M is free if and only if ElM = E2M = 0.
If E2M = 0 then a* is an epimorphism and so splits, and therefore a is a split monomorphism. Hence Im(/?) is free and M has a finite free resolution of length (at most) 1. The argument in the other direction is clear. The second assertion follows from the long exact sequence of Ext*, since E3(M/N) = 0. The final assertion has a similar proof. D PROOF.
If M has a short free resolution we may assume that a = 0 and so the exact sequences following Lemma 9.1 reduce to 0 -> (r^) 6 -> Ker(7**) - • E1E1M
-> 0
and 0 -f Ker(7**) -» (r^) c -f M** - • E2ElM
-> 0.
It follows that there is a natural embedding of ElElM into M, which is an isomorphism if and only if M** — 0, and hence if and only if M is a pure torsion module. LEMMA 9.4. Let N be a finitely presentable left T^-module.
Then
2
(1) (E^-N)* = 0 and E N has finite exponent as an abelian group; (2) ifZ®£N = 0 then N* = 0 and HamTli{M, Z/rZ[f(/*)]) = 0 for all r > 1; (3) ifZ ®e N = 0 then E1N is Z-torsion free. PROOF. The functor Qz - = Q I ^ r„ - from the category of left r M -modules to the category of left Qr^-modules is exact, and so (Q®zA0* = N*®ZQ, E^QQzN) = (E1N)^ZQ and (E2N)®ZQ = E2(Q ®z N)) =0. If L is a finitely presentable left r M -module then L* is free so L* = 0 if and only if ( z L)* = L* ® z Q = 0. An
9.2. Z[F(^)]-MODULES
209
analogous argument for right modules shows that (ElN)* = 0, since J E ^ Q O Z - W ) * = 0. (For this it suffices that N be finitely generated). If K = Q or Wp (for some prime p e Z) then K ®£K (K ®% N) = K®z{Z®£N). Therefore if Z®£iV = 0 then N*<S>zQ = (Q®Z-W)* = 0, so N* = 0. Similarly, Fp®e (Fpz JV) = 0, so HomVll (N, F p r M ) = (F p ®z W)* = 0. A finite induction on the number of factors of r now gives ffomrM(M,Z/rZ[F(/x)]) = 0 for all r > 1. Since JV is finitely presentable E2N is finitely presentable. Let {wi,... wn} generate E2N. Then there are nonzero integers e i , . . . en such that eiWi — 0, for 1 < i < n, since <8>z £ 2 N = 0. Let e = I i p ^ . Then clearly ew = 0 for all w € £ 2 iV. If Homr^ (M, F p r M ) = 0 multiplication by p induces an infective endomorphism of ElN. Therefore E^N is Z-torsion free if HomVtl (M, F p r^) = 0 for all primes p. • We may now return to the four sequences following Lemma 9.1, which derive from a finite free resolution for an arbitrary finitely presentable left I^-module M. Since (ElM)* = 0 they reduce to 0 - • A* -» Ker(7**) -» E1E1M
-> 0,
0 -> Ker(7**) -> (r^) c - ^ - > M** -* E ^ M -> 0 and
o -> (r^)° - » ( r ^ ) b -»
A* -• £ 2 £ 2 M - » o . Bearing in mind the original resolution of M in Lemma 9.1, we obtain a natural isomorphism Coker(evM) — E2ElM, and a monomorphism from E2E2M to M with image in Ker(eujvf) and such that Ker(evM)/E2E2M = ElElM. Hence if M is a torsion l module then E M is a pure torsion module. Let fM = M/E2E2M. The long exact sequence: 0 -» (/M)* -» M* -> (E2E2M)* E1E2E2M
- • - • E2fM
-» S V M -» ^ A f -»
-> £ 2 M - • E2E2E2M 2
2 2 2
-» 0
and the fact that the homomorphism £' M —> E E E M is the natural isomorphism for the pseudonull module £ 2 M give (fM)* = M*,
9. F R E E COVERS
210
ElfM ^ E1M and E2fM = 0. In particular, if M is a torsion module fM is a pure torsion module, and so is isomorphic to E1E1fM ^ E1E1M. LEMMA 9.5. Let 0 —> S —> P —* Q —• 0 be an exact sequence of left T ^-modules. If S andQ are both torsion (respectively, pseudonull or pure torsion) then so is P. Conversely if P is torsion then so is Q, and if P is finitely presentable and pseudonull then Q is pseudonull and S is torsion.
PROOF. We shall only prove the last assertion, as the other proofs are similar and easier. Prom the long exact sequence of Ext* it follows that tiP* = E1P = 0 then Q* = 0 and S* = EXQ. Since P is of finite exponent as an abelian group so is S and therefore
ElQ = S* = 0. THEOREM
• 9.6. Let M be a finitely presentable left T^-module.
(1) Ker(et»M) is the maximal torsion submodule of M; (2) E2E2M is the maximal pseudonull submodule of M. Let N =zM. Then Ker(evM)*®i.Q = Ker(evN)* = 0, and so Ker(evM) is a torsion module. If T < M is any torsion submodule then evM{T) is a torsion submodule of the free module M** and so must be 0. Hence Ker(evM) is the maximal torsion submodule of M. Let j : N -> M be a monomorphism. Then E2j : E2M -> E2N is an epimorphism, since E3(M/j(N)) = 0. Since E1E2N = 0 it follows from the long exact sequence of Ext* that E2E2j is a monomorphism. Therefore if N is pseudonull j(N) < E2E2M, since the inclusion E2E2L —• L is natural in L. Hence E2E2M is the maximal pseudonull submodule of M. • PROOF.
If evM is an epimorphism then it splits, since M** is free, and so
M^M**®Ker(evM)We have seen that a torsion module may contain a free module. Similarly a pseudonull module may contain a pure torsion module. (Consider the module P = T-2/r2(p,x — l) for p G Z a prime, which is
9.3. THE SATO PROPERTY
211
pseudonull but contains a submodule isomorphic to Fpl^ = I^/pF^, generated by the image of y — 1). 9.3. The Sato property A r M -module M is of type L if it is finitely presentable and Tor[ M (Z, M) = 0 for all i > 0. This is a key property of the homology modules of the maximal free covers of boundary link exteriors . . We shall omit the proof of the following alternative characterizations as it is straightforward [Sa81']. 9.7. Let M be a finitely presentable V^-module. Then the following conditions are equivalent: THEOREM
(1) Tor[ M (Z, M) = 0 for all i > 0; (2) the homomorphism from M^ to M sending ( m i , . . . m^) to T,(xi — \)rrii is an isomorphism; (3) there is an exact sequence
o - (r„) a —^-> (r„)°+6 —£— (rM)b - ^ U such that the sequence a a b
o^z
- ^ - z + ^U
M
- o
zb^o
is also exact.
•
The equivalence (1) <^> (2) does not require that M be finitely presentable. If /x = 1 and M is a finitely generated Ai-module such that ZeM = 0 then (t — l)idM is an isomorphism, and M is of type L, by Lemma 4.8 or Theorem 9.7. In general these Tor-conditions are independent if // > 1. For instance, if N = I ^ / T ^ x 2 — x+l,y—1) then Z®£N = 0 while Tor[ 2 (Z, AT) s Z. LEMMA 9.8. Let M be a Y^-module of type L. Then M* = 0 and ElM is of type L and is Z-torsion free. Moreover E2E2M is the maximal Z-torsion submodule, and M is Z-torsion free if and only if E2M = 0 if and only if M S E1E1M.
The first assertion follows from Lemma 9.4. Therefore E M has a short free resolution PROOF.
X
0 -» (r M ) 6 — 5 U (r )* - • EXM -+ 0,
9. FREE COVERS
212
by Lemma 9.1 and the subsequent remark. Moreover e{q) is an isomorphism, and so ElM is a (right) module of type L. Hence E1ElM is Z-torsion free. Since M is a torsion module it is an extension of ElE1M by E2E2M. The latter submodule has finite exponent, and so is the maximal Z-torsion submodule. Hence M is Z-torsion free if and only if E2M = 0 if and only if M S ElElM. • The next lemma is from [Fa92]. A T^-module M is separated if nq>0I(F(ti))iM = 0. LEMMA 9.9. Let M be a T ^-module of type L and let N be a separated I(F(/j,))-adically complete V^-module. Then Homr^(M,N) — Ext^(M,N) =0. P R O O F . If / : M —> N is a homomorphism then a simple induction shows that f(M) < 7(F(/z))«JV for all q > 0, since Z ®£ M = 0 if and only if M = 7(F(/i))M. Therefore Homr^M, N) = 0. Suppose
O^N —±-+ P —g—+ M ^ O is an extension. Then we shall construct inductively a sequence of homomorphisms hq : P —> N/I(F(fj,))qN, for q > 0, such that hq o / is the canonical projection and hq factors through hq+\. Let ho = 0. Suppose that hj has been constructed for j < q with the above properties. If p 6 P then p = E-Z^X, — l)pi + / ( n ) , for some pi € P and n € N, since M is of type L. It is easily verified that the function hq(p) = [EJl£(X i -l)fc,_i(p i )+n] € N/I(F(/j,))iN is a well defined homomorphism, with the required properties. Since iV is complete the sequence converges to a homomorphism h: P -> N which splits the extension. Hence Ext\ (M, N) - 0. • THEOREM
9.10. Let M be a F^-module of type L. Then ElM
tf0mrM(M,I>/IV)
^
^
ffomrl.(M,iyr/1).
PROOF. If M is of type L and E2M = 0 it has a short free resolution with a square presentation matrix:
o - (r„)* —^- (r„)* -> M - o,
9.4. T H E FARBER DERIVATIONS
213
where det(s(P)) = ± 1 . Hence HomTfi{M,r^) = Ext\. (M,T^) = 0, since r^<8>P is invertible. On applying Ext^ (M, —) to the short exact sequence
o -> r„ -> r > -> i > / r „ - o we obtain HomT^{M,T^/V^ ^ £XM. Since N = Y^ is complete and separated a similar argument (using Lemma 9.9) shows that Homr^M, f^/T^) = £ ^ M . D The first isomorphism is from [Du86], and the second from [Fa92]. Farber showed also that E2M = Homrfi(E2E2M, Q i y (f^ + Qr^)). In [Fa92'j he showed that a iiT M -module of type L has a finite composition series whose subquotients are of type L and have no proper submodules of type L. 9.4. T h e F a r b e r derivations If M is a rymodule such that Tor^(Z,M) = 0 for all * > 0 then the inclusion of the augmentation ideal into T^ induces an isomorphism M = I(F(fi))M = M». The projections of M to the summands determine derivations df : M —> M, for 1 < i < /i, such that m = S j l f ( a : i - l ) 6 f (m) and df(ym) = (d^/dxi)m+e{j)df (m) for all 7 € T^ and m e M. (Here d^/dxi is the free derivative of 7 with respect to £;). These derivations were introduced by Farber [Fa91]. The module M may be viewed as a module over the ring D^ = Z(d[,... df) of polynomials in noncommuting variables df. Every T^-homomorphism between modules M and M' of type L is a DM-homomorphism, and conversely: Hom?^ (M, M') = HomDll(M,M'). Farber defined further operations d{ = —Xidf, TTI = (xi—\)df = -df - df and z = -Si
214
9. FREE COVERS
on an abelian group M may be given by a direct sum splitting M = (B*~.i Mi and an endomorphism z : M —> M. (When /x = 1 we have Ti = Ai, z = —dF and D\ = P\ = 1\z\ is a commutative ring, acting via the isomorphism z.m = (1 — £) - 1 m). An important example is the quotient T^/r^. (This module is not of type L since it is not finitely generated). We may define an additive map df : F^ —• F^ which deletes the factor Xi from monomials beginning with Xi and is 0 on all other monomials. We then have 7 = e( 7 ) + S j ^ X i S f (7) for all 7 € I > These maps induce derivations df on T^/r^. A lattice in a Ql^-module M is a Q£)^-submodule which is finite dimensional as a Q-vector space and which generates M as a T^-module. Every module of type L contains an unique minimal lattice. (This is not necessarily so for the integral analogue). Hermitean forms on M correspond bijectively to pairings on the minimal lattice. (When /x = 1 this reduces to the equivalence between rational Blanchfield pairings and rational Seifert forms). See [Fa91]. Every Ql^-module M of type L determines a rational function XM € r^^ which encapsulates the "semisimple" part of M. (When /j, = 1 this invariant is equivalent to Ao(M), and so is a pseudoisomorphism invariant). See [Fa92'], [GL02]. 9.5. The maximal free cover and duality Let L be a //-component homology boundary n-link with group 7r = TTL. Thus there is an epimorphism / : w —• F(/J) with kernel 7rw. After composing / with an automorphism of ^(/x), if necessary, we may assume that the composition of / with the abelianization : F(fi) —• Z^ sends meridians to standard generators. (We may refine the notion of homology boundary link by defining an hF(fi)-(n)-lmk to be a //-component homology boundary n-link with a conjugacy class of such epimorphisms / ) . If /x = 1 there is an unique such isomorphism. If /x = 2 it is determined up to composition with an inner automorphism of F(2), by a theorem of Nielsen (Theorem 3.9 of [MKS]), and so the ambiguity is no worse than that involved in choosing a basepoint for X.
9.5. THE MAXIMAL FREE COVER AND DUALITY
215
The maximal free cover of X = X(L) is the cover pw : Xw —> X determined by the normal subgroup iru < IT. An epimorphism / : 7r —• F(fi) determines a basis for Aut(Xw/X) which we may use to u identify f = Z[Aut(X /X)] with TM = Z[F(/x)]. We shall use the abbreviations ElM = Exti(M,f) and M* = E°M. T H E O R E M 9.11. Let L be a [i-component homology boundary nlink with exterior X = X(L). Then
(1) Hj(X;T) and W(X;T) are finitely presentable, and are 0 if 3 >n + l; (2) Hj(X; r ) is a module of type L, for 1 < j < n; (3) Hn+i(X;T) is a free T-module; (4) Hi(X;T) **„/(*„)'; (5) H2(X;t) maps onto H2(ir;f) = H2(iru;Z); (6) Ze Hn(X; T) = 0, and there is an exact sequence -+ Z " " 1 -» r o r i ( Z , # n ( X ; f ) ) -» 0.
0 -» Z®£ Hn+l{X-t)
Hence Hn+\{X;Y) has rank < // — 1, urai/i equality if and only if Hn(X;F) has type L; (7) there are short exact sequences
0 - E2Hm-2(X;f)
- ffm(X;f) - ^ f l ^ X j f ) - 0,
/or eac/i m < n, and a four term exact sequence 0 - J n>1 - Hn+1(X;T)
-
ffn+1(X;f)*
- ^ i
w/tere „,! is an extension ofE1Hn(X;T)
£ 2 # n ( * ; f ) - 0, by
E2Hn-.i(X;T).
PROOF. The first assertion holds since X is a compact (n + 2)manifold with nonempty boundary and F is a coherent ring, and so the homology and cohomology modules of a finite free T-complex are finitely presentable. The module H„+i(X;T) is free since it is the kernel of a homomorphism between free modules. Parts (4) and (5) follow from the Hurewicz and Hopf Theorems. The Cartan-Leray spectral sequence for p w collapses at the E2 level, since it has the form E2q = Tor^(Hq(X;t),Z) =• Hp+q(X;Z) and the augmentation module Z has a short free resolution. Hence Hj(X;f) is of type L if j ^ 0, 1, n or n + 1, while H0(X;f) = Z,
9. FREE COVERS
216
Tor\ (Z, Hi(X; f)) = 0 if n > 1, and Z£ Hn(X; f ) = 0. Moreover there are exact sequences 0 -> Z ®e iJi(X; f) - • # i ( X ; Z) -> Torf (Z, Z) S Z^ -> 0 and 0 -> Z ®£ tfn+i(X; f) - Hn+1(X; Z) - Torf (Z, # n ( X ; f)) -> 0. Since # i ( X ; Z ) £* Z^ we also have Z ®e # i ( X ; f ) = 0, and so Hi(X;T) is also of type L, if n > 1. Lemma 9.4 implies that Hj(X; f )* = 0 for all j ^ n + 1. Hence the only differentials in the UCSS Eg1 = EqHp(X; f) =» # P + < 7 ( X ; f ) which may be nonzero are the d% ' : E% ' —• -E^' • Thus the spectral sequence breaks up into the exact sequences of part (7). D The module H\{X\ F) need not be of type L when n = 1. The situation is simpler with coefficients in a field K. Let KT denote the X-algebra K[Aut(Xu/X)]. Then Ext2Kf,(M,N) = 0 for all .KT-modules M, N, and we obtain isomorphisms H^{X;KT) = E1Hj^i(X; KF) for all j ^ n + 1, and an exact sequence 0 -> ElHn{X;KF)
- • Hn+1(X;KF)
-* Hn+1(X;KF)*
-> 0.
Since dXw is a union of copies of Sn x R the natural homomorphism Hj(X;F) —> Hj(X,dX;F) is an isomorphism if j ^ 0, 1, n or n + 1, a monomorphism if j = 1 or n + 1 and an epimorphism if j = 0 or n. It is an isomorphism for j = n if and only if the homomorphism induced by the inclusion dX^ C Xu is 0. If L is a boundary link we may construct X" by splitting X along a family of disjoint Seifert hypersurfaces {Ui}. Since the n-spheres generating Hn(dX;F) = Hn(dXw;Z) bound lifts of these hypersurfaces in Xu, this homomorphism is always 0 for boundary links. The splitting construction also works for homology boundary links (although the spheres need no longer bound in Xw). There is a corresponding Mayer-Vietoris sequence: • f ® Hj{U) —^-> f ® HjiX) -» Hj(X; f ) - • . . .
9.5. THE MAXIMAL FREE COVER AND DUALITY
217
where dj(-y ® vk) = ^xkik+*{vk) - 7 ik-*(vk) for 7 G f and ufc e Hj(Uk;Z). (See §2 of Chapter 2). If 2 < Jfe < n - 1 or if L is a boundary link Y ~ 5 n + 2 — (7 and so we may describe the maps (ik±)* in terms of Alexander duality in Sn+2. Suppose that L is a boundary link. Since each component of U is a punctured (n + l)-manifold Hn+\(U) = 0 and Hn(U) is free abelian, while Hn+1(Y) ^ H°(U) * Z»~l and Hn(Y) ^ if 1 (17) is free abelian, by Alexander duality. Therefore Ker(d n ) is a free Tmodule, since dn is a homomorphism between free modules. The Mayer-Vietoris sequence gives Hn+i(X;f) = ( f ) ^ _ 1 0 Ker(d n ). It now follows from Theorem 9.11 that Hn+\(X\ F) has rank /x — 1 and d n is injective. (In general this need not be so). Given any sequence H2, • • • Hq of T^-modules of type L there is a boundary (2q + l)-link L such that Hj(X(L);F^) 9* Hj for 1 < j < q. If moreover p.d.rHq < 1 there is a boundary 2g-link with this homology [Sa81']. As in the case of abelian coverings, Poincare duality and the UCSS together give nonsingular pairings between natural subquotients of the homology modules. An e-linking form over F^ is a pair {M,4>), where M is a r M -module of type L and <j> : M -> E1M is an isomorphism such that El4> = £(f>. (It is neutral if there is a submodule J of type L such that (J) — Ker(£' 1 (j)), where j : J —> M is the inclusion). Let Bj = Hj(X;F)/E2E2Hj(X;F) be the maximal Z-torsion free quotient of the homology. Lemmas 9.4 and 9.8 together with Theorem 9.11 imply that duality determines an isomorphism Bq = ElBq if n — 2q — 1 and q > 2; this can be shown to be a(—l) 9+1 -linking form over F^ on interpreting duality in terms of intersections of cells. It is the analogue for free covers of the Blanchfield pairing (and is the Blanchfield pairing for knots). If q > 3 every (—1)9+1 -linking form over F^ is realized by some simple ^-component boundary (2q — l)-link L [Du86], and the isomorphism class of the pairing is a complete invariant for such simple boundary links [Fa91]. If q = 2 there are constraints related to Rochlin's Theorem. If L is a boundary link the image of (B]Zi Hk(Ui;Z) in the module Hk(X(L);F^) is a lattice. Moreover the Farber derivations df
218
9. FREE COVERS
have analogues for the stable homotopy pairings of "stable boundary links", and such links may be classified in terms of such pairings [Fa92]. 9.6. The classical case When n — \ the top dimensional homology is H.2{X;T), which is free of some rank r < // — 1, by part (4) of Theorem 9.11. The UCSS gives H°(X;t) = 0, i^psTjf) ^ E1Z and an exact sequence
o - E^/fa)')
- H\x-t) -»(£ry - E W K ) ' ) - o.
If L is a boundary link the Mayer-Vietoris sequence becomes
o _»(ry-1 _ H2{X-Y) -> (fy -^-> (fy - w ^ y -^— . The right hand end of this sequence continues to the standard resolution of Z, and so 5 = 0. As observed in §5 above, the monomorphism from ( f y - 1 to H2(X; F) is an isomorphism. Therefore d\ is a monomorphism and so iru/(irj)' has a short free resolution. Furthermore, the longitudes of L are in (nuY an^ s o * n e l° n S exact sequence of the pair (X, dX) breaks up into two exact sequences: 0 -> H2(X; f) -+ H2(X, dX; f ) -> H^dX; f ) -+ 0 and 0 -> iru/M'
-> ^ i ( X , 9 X ; f ) -* H0(dX;T)
-> ffo(*;f) -> 0.
The right hand end of the latter sequence is just the obvious homomorphism from 0 ( r / r ( x ; — 1)) to Z, and so its kernel is free of rank /i - 1. Therefore H2(X; f) ^ {iru/(iruY) 0 (f )fi~1, by Poincare duality. On substituting this into the sequence obtained from the UCSS we conclude that for L a boundary 1-link (or if L is a homology boundary 1-link whose longitudes lie in (TTUY) there is an isomorphism El{irw/{irJ)') = 7rw/(7rw)'. (This could also be obtained from the symmetry of linking coefficients in »S3 and the Mayer-Vietoris resolution 0 -» (f) v -> ( f y -» Hi(X; f ) -» 0. In the knot theoretic case this condition implies the symmetry of the Alexander polynomials).
9.6. THE CLASSICAL CASE
219
The next result is due to Brin. THEOREM 9.12. Let L be a 2-component homology boundary 1link. Then L is a boundary link if and only if H2(X;T) / 0. (Sketch). This condition is clearly necessary. Assume that H2(X; T) ^ 0, and let F be a closed connected surface in X w representing a generator of this module. Since H\{X\ T)* is 0 every closed 2-sided surface in Xw separates. Therefore the complement X" — F must have at least two components. The complementary components cannot be compact, since [F] ^ 0. Therefore F separates two ends. Now Xu has infinitely many ends. Hence we may assume that F is disjoint from its translates, and so projects to a nonsingular, two-sided surface in X, by Theorem A of [Br81]. Since H2(X;T) maps onto H2(X;Z) this surface is homologically nontrivial, and so it separates the components of L. Since this separating surface lifts to the maximal abelian cover X' the link is a boundary link, by duality. • PROOF.
If L is the homology boundary link of Figure 1.5 (and §7 of Chapter 7) then Ton(Q, W W ) ^ 0> and so # 2 ( X ; f ) = 0. A good boundary link is a boundary 1-link L such that {nL)lJj is perfect. Replacing each component of a link by an (untwisted) Whitehead double gives a good boundary link if and only if all the linking numbers of the original link are 0. It is known that the question of whether 4-dimensional TOP surgery techniques are valid without restriction on fundamental groups is equivalent to showing that certain infinite families of such Whitehead doubles of iterated Bing doubles of the Hopf link are "freely slice", i.e., bound disjoint locally flat discs in D4 such that the fundamental group of the complement is free. The existence of such slicing discs has been established for <92-links, which form a somewhat more restricted class [Fr93], [FT95]. If T is a torus in the exterior of a boundary 1-link, with core in 7rw, then ±l-framed surgery on T gives a new boundary link. Can all boundary 1-links be obtained from the trivial link by a sequence of such surgeries?
220
9. FREE COVERS
9.7. The case n = 2 When n = 2 the UCSS gives H°(X;t) = 0, J J ^ X j f ) = ^ Z , H2(X;T) = E1(irlJj/(7ru,y) and an exact sequence 0 - J 2 a - # 3 ( X ; f ) - # 3 ( * ; f ) * - E2H2(X;f) - 0, 1 2 where J2,i is an extension of E H2(X;f) by E (7ru)/(TTu,y). Hence 2 2 2 2 2 3 £ ( W W ) - E E J2,i = E E H (X;f). Moreover, # 3 ( X ; f ) e* Hi(X,dX;F) and there is an exact sequence 0 - • W K ) ' -f i?!(X, 3X; f ) -» © ( f / f (a* - 1)) -> Z -» 0; it follows that E2E2(wU}/(nu;y) g E2E2Hi{X,dX;t). Hence there 2 2 2 is an isomorphism E {irLJ/('nUJ)') = E E (irul/(iTul)'). (This isomorphism could have been obtained by considering n as the fundamental group of the closed 4-manifold obtained by surgery on the link). In the knot theoretic case this isomorphism gives the FarberLevine duality pairing, since -KW = IT1 when p, = 1. This was used independently by Farber and Levine to show that there are high dimensional knot groups which are not 2-knot groups [Fa77], [Le77]. If L is a boundary 2-link then H2(X;F) S H2(X,dX;F) and so H2(-KU))'£) is a quotient of El{Trw/(TrJ)'), by Poincare duality and Theorem 9.11. 9.8. An unlinking theorem A 1-link is trivial if and only if its group is free, by Theorem 1.1. Gutierrez showed that if n > 4 an n-link is trivial if and only if its group is freely generated by meridians and the higher homotopy groups of the exterior are 0, up to the middle dimension. The following proof uses the s-cobordism theorem and is valid also for n = 3. While the fundamental group condition is necessary when n = 2, we do not yet know whether it is a complete criterion for triviality of 2-links with more than one component, and we can only show that such a 2-link is s-concordant to a trivial 2-link. THEOREM 9.13. Let L be a ^-component n-link with n > 3. Then L is trivial if and only if TTL = F(/J,), with basis a set of meridians, and irj(X(L)) = 0 for 1 < j < [(n + l)/2].
9.8. AN UNLINKING THEOREM
221
P R O O F . Let U be a trivial /z-component n-link. Then X(U) = ^(Dn+1 x S1), where the summands correspond to the components of U. Hence nU is freely generated by meridians and TTJ(X(U)) = 0 for 1 < j < n, by general position. Thus the conditions are necessary. Assume that they hold, and choose a basepoint * € X = X(L) and arcs a^ from * to dX(Li) which meet only at *. Let N be a closed regular neighbourhood of Uctj in X and let W = X — N. Then Kj(W) = TTJ(X) for all j < n, by general position. Let V be a regular neighbourhood of a wedge of loops V^S 1 C intW representing a set of meridians. Poincare duality gives Hq(X; F^) — 0 for each [(n + l)/2] < q < n. If moreover n = 2r is even then # r + i ( X ; r M ) ^ F r + 1 ( X ; T M ) SS Hr+i(X;Tfj,)*, and so i J r + i ( X ; r M ) is free. Hence it must also be 0, by the considerations of §5. The Hurewicz Theorem now implies that ITJ(X) = 0 for 1 < j < n. Therefore TTJ(W) = 0 for 1 < j < n. Hence the inclusion of dW into W is (n — l)-connected and so Hq(W, dW; Tfj) = 0 for 0 < q < n. Poincare duality now implies that H^W-T^) = 0 for all q > 2. Hence Hn(W;r„) = Hn+1(W;TM) = 0, and so W is contractible. Thus the inclusion V C W is a homotopy equivalence. The region W — V is an fo-cobordism, by Van Kampen's Theorem and the Mayer-Vietoris sequence in the universal covers. Since Wh(F(fi)) = 0 this region is an s-cobordism and so W = V = If (LP+ 1 x S1). Hence M(L) = Wu|f(£> n + 1 x 5 1 ) ^ ^(Sn+1 x S1) ^ M(U). (Note that every self homeomorphism of dP extends to a self homeomorphism of P).
The elements of the meridianal basis for TTL are freely homotopic to loops representing the standard basis for ni(M(U)). We may realise such homotopies by \i disjoint embeddings of annuli in the product M(U) x [0,1] running from meridians for L in M(L) = M(U) x {0} to such standard loops in M(n). Surgery on these annuli (i.e., replacing Dn+1 x S1 x [0,1] by Sn x D2 x [0,1]) then gives an s-concordance from L to the trivial /^-component n-link. Hence L is trivial, by the s-cobordism theorem. • ADDENDUM. A ^-component 2-link L is s-concordant to a trivial 2-link if and only if irL = F(/J,), with basis a set of meridians.
222
9. F R E E COVERS
PROOF. The homotopical part of the above argument applies without change. We may then use Proposition 11.6A of [FQ] to conclude that W is s-cobordant rel dW = ^(S1 x S2) to P. Hence M(L) is s-cobordant to M(!7), and we may surger embedded annuli as before to get an s-concordance from L to U. • The hypothesis that nL be freely generated by meridians cannot be dropped entirely [Po71]. (See also Chapter 7 above). On the other hand, if L is a 2-link whose longitudinal 2-spheres are all null homotopic then (X(L), dX(L)) is homotopy equivalent to the model (X(U),dX(U)) [Sw77], and hence the Addendum applies. 9.9. P a t t e r n s a n d calibrations If L is a /^-component homology boundary n-link the images of a set of meridians under an epimorphism from n = irL to F(/J,) is an ordered /x-tuple of words which normally generates F(/z). Although this /z-tuple depends on various choices, we may obtain an invariant for L as follows. Let 9 : Aut(F(fi) —» Aut{F(nY) be the diagonal homomorphism, and let G = F(fiY Xg Aut(F(fi). The group G acts on F{nY by g.(fu---f^) = (gia.(h)g^1,.. .g^aif^g'1), for i 9 = (9i, • • • 3A*. °0 € G and (fh ... f^) € F(fi)f . The pattern of L is the G-orbit of the /x-tuple determined by a set of meridians and an epimorphism from -K onto F(n). This notion is clearly well defined. An homology boundary link is a boundary link if and only if its pattern is represented by (xi,... x^). Every /x-tuple of elements which normally generate F(fi) represents the pattern of some ribbon homology boundary link [CL91]. Is every homology boundary link group the group of a boundary link? The notion of pattern has been extended to a wider class of links [Le89]. A group G is a (finite) E-group if it is the fundamental group of a (finite) 2-complex K with H\(K; Z) torsion free and H2(K; Z) = 0. It is a finite .E-group if and only if it is finitely presentable and G/G' = Zd, where d = def (G) is the deficiency of G. A calibration for a finitely generated E-group G is a set of def (G) elements whose normal closure is G. (Thus a finite E-group admits a calibration if and only if its weight is equal to its deficiency. A calibration for a
9.10. CONCORDANCE
223
free group determines a pattern). A /^-component link L is a (finite) E-link if there is a normally surjective homomorphism ip from TTL to a (finite) .E-group G of weight \x. In the classical case we require also that the longitudes of L are in Ker(V>)- It follows easily from the argument of Theorem 1.14 that every SHB link is a finite .E-link. Every pair (finite J3-group, calibration) is realized by some ribbon n-link, for all n > 1 [Be98]. Kaiser has computed the patterns of links obtained by strong fusion of homology boundary links, and has given thereby a more systematic treatment of some of the examples of Chapter 7. If L is an n-link a choice of arcs a.{ from a basepoint to the components dX(Li) of dX(L) determines a basing m : F(/z) —> irL. If /3 = (b,u) is a fusion band from L\ to Li (as in §7 of Chapter 1) and n > 1 then the isotopy type of the strong fusion of L along (3 is determined by 7rL and the double coset of the loop ot\.b.a.2 with respect to the images of iri(dX(Li)) on the left and ni(dX(L2)) on the right. If L is an homology boundary link and: TTL —* F(fx) is an epimorphism then the strong fusion of L along fi is an homology boundary link if and only if the 1-relator group (x\,...xtl,z | (f)(m\)z = z (m2)) is free. In particular, if 0(mi) = x\ and <j)(m2) = %2 then this is so. (See [Ka92] for more details). 9.10. Concordance The high dimensional knot concordance groups have been computed in a variety of ways — using Seifert forms, linking pairings and homological surgery — and each of these approaches has been applied to boundary links [CS80], [Ko87], [Mi87]. In even dimensions boundary links are null concordant [Gu72], [De81], [Co84], but in odd dimensions they need not be concordant to split links [CS80], [Kw80]. (See also §3 of Chapter 7 above for the classical case). Thus the problem of link concordance does not reduce to concordance of the components. An F(/x)-(n)-link (L, 6) is a /^-component n-link L with a conjugacy class of epimorphisms 6 : nL —* F(fj,) which carry some set of meridians to the standard basis. (Thus it is a boundary
224
9. FREE COVERS
link with additional structure refining the pattern). Let U71^ be the /x-component trivial n-link. Then X{Un>») S* f (S 1 x Dn+1), and any such epimorphism 8 may be realized by a degree 1 map / : (X(L), dX{L)) - (if (S 1 x Dn+1), ^S1 x 5")) such that f\dX{L) is a homeomorphism. Moreover two such maps are homotopic if and only if the induced epimorphisms are conjugate. Any sum of two F(/i)-n-links (as defined in §7 of Chapter 2) is again an F(/x)-n-link. Although the sum is not well defined on link types, if n > 1 it induces a well defined operation making the set of F(^)-concordance classes of F(/j,)-n-lmks into an abelian group C n (F(/z)). Moreover every F(/z)-n-link is F(/i)-concordant to a trivial link if n is even and to a simple F(/i)-n-link if n is odd. If n = 2q — 1 and q > 3 the group Cn(F(fj,)) may be identified with an homology surgery obstruction group [CS80]. Using a different formulation of the surgery approach, Duval identified C n (F(/i)) with We(IV*> •""//> ~)> the Witt group of (-l)+1-linking pairings over 1 M [Du86]. The most substantial part of his argument is a realization theorem, constructing links with given linking pairings. We shall verify only that the Witt class is an additive invariant of F(/x)concordance. Let bF^(L,0) be the (—l) 9+1 -linking pairing over F^ corresponding to (L, 6) and let BF^(L,d) its Witt class. THEOREM 9.14. Let(L-,0-) n = 2q - 1 > 3.
and(L+,0+)
be F(n)-n-links, where
(1) 7/(L_,#_) and (L+,0+) are F(/J,)-concordant then BFM(L-,6_) = BFM(L+,0+). F (2) B M(L_$L+,9_$9+) = BFM(L-,6„) + BF^(L+,0+). P R O O F . Let (£, 6 ) be a concordance from (L_, 0_) to (L + , 0+). It is easily seen that if a is an inner automorphism of F(/J,) then bF^(L,0) ^ bF^(L,a0). Hence we may assume that the actions of F(fi) on the free covers of X- = X(L-), X+ = X(L+) and X — X(C) are compatible. Let Bj(X) = Hj(X;T^)/E2E2Hj(X-ril), for F F j > 0 and let= 6 M(L_,0_) © -b ^(L+,0+) be the linking form on Bq(X-) © Bq(X+). Since dX ^ X_ U X+, identified along copies of niS2^1 x S1), the exact sequence of homology for the pair
9.10. CONCORDANCE
225
(X, d) = (X, dX) and Poincare duality give a commutative diagram Bq+1(X,d)
WBjX)
- ^
Bq(X-)
• ElBq(X^)
® Bq(X+)
>
0 E^Bq(X+)
•
Bq(X)
EiBq+1(X,d)
in which the rows are exact modulo Z-torsion. It is easily verified that J = Im(9*) 1 is of type L and that J1- = J. Henceis neutral and so BFM{L-,0J) = BF^{L+),e+). F( Since B -^(L, 6) is an invariant of F(/u)-concordance, by (1), we may assume that L_ and L+ are simple F(/z)-links such that L± C D%+1 and L_ n S2" = L+D S2i e* /uD 2 *" 1 . Additivity of the linking pairing then follows by a standard Mayer-Vietoris argument. • The addition may also be defined in terms of boundary connected sums of spanning hypersurfaces corresponding to the splitting, and Cn(F(fi)) may be identified with a cobordism group of "Seifert" matrices G(/x, (—l)q) [Ko87]. These descriptions extend to the case n = 3, provided that we either work in the TOP locally flat category or pass to subgroups of index 2M determined by (Rochlin) signature parity condition. Sheiham has recently shown that the torsion subgroup of Wefipif,, Tp, —) has exponent 8, and the quotient is a direct sum of copies of Z, with one summand for each isomorphism class of simple self dual complex representations of Farber's ring P^ [She]. The group 7i(fJ.) of "special" automorphisms of F(fi), which send each basis element to a conjugate, acts on Cn(F(fi)). The boundary concordance set of boundary links is then obtained by factoring out the action of 7i(^t). In [C094] the notion of pattern is refined to fix the combinatorial "scheme" in which the singular Seifert hypersurfaces of an homology boundary link meet the components of dX, and the linking pairing is extended to odd-dimensional homology boundary links. It is shown that any scheme and any Witt class of linking pairings is realized by some homology boundary (2q — l)-link, for q > 2. (When q — 2 there are again signature parity constraints). The set of homology boundary concordance classes of homology boundary (2q — l)-links
9. FREE COVERS
226
with fixed pattern is then described in terms of quotients of homology surgery obstruction groups modulo the action of a group of patternpreserving automorphisms of F(n). It is not known whether concordant boundary links need be boundary concordant, and in high dimensions there are homology boundary links which are not concordant to boundary links [C093], [GL92]. The examples of [C093] are constructed from the untwisted double of a knot with nontrivial signature invariants by taking the strong fusion with respect to a suitable band. Let BL, HBL and SHB denote the sets of boundary links, homology boundary links and sublinks of homology boundary links, respectively, and let cBL, cHBL and cSHB denote the set of links conconcordant to boundary links, etc. We may display schematically the inclusions between these sets as in the following diagram: BL
—^-» HBL
—^-»
SHB
cBL —£-» cHBL • cSHB Is SHB = cHBLl Is every high dimensional link concordant to (a sublink of) an homology boundary link? The general problem of link concordance is perhaps best approached through the notion of disc link. (This is outlined in Chapter 12 below).
CHAPTER 10
Nilpotent Quotients The theorem of Stallings (Theorem 1.3) demonstrates a close connection between the homology of a group and its lower central series. To what extent can we derive the nilpotent quotients homologically? The answer is that, roughly speaking, the Massey product structure on H1(G;Qi) determines the rational Mal'cev completion of G (denned below). The importance of the lower central series for links is that the quotients are the primary invariants of /-equivalence. Duality then gives rise to other invariants (such as Witt classes) derived from the homology of coverings associated to canonical subgroups of the link group. The Massey products in the cohomology of a 1-link group are essentially equivalent to the Milnor invariants, which are denned in terms of Magnus expansions of words representing longitudes. 10.1. Massey p r o d u c t s Let G be a group and R a commutative ring. The cohomology of G with coefficients in the trivial G-module R may be computed from the complex of inhomogeneous cochains C*{G; R). The module Cq(G; R) is the module of functions from the q-fold product Gq to R. In low degrees the differentials are given by <5° = 0,
S\f)(g,h)
= f(g) + f(h)-f(gh)
S2(F)(g,h,j)
= F(h,j)
- F(gh, j) + F(g,hj)
and -
F(g,h),
for g, h, j € G. Therefore H°(G;R) = R, Hl(G;R) = Hom(G,R) and H2(G;R) = {F : G 2 -> R | 52(F) = 0}/Im(5 1 ). The cup product of / i , /2 € HX(G; R) is represented by the function F denned by 227
228
F(g,h) — fi(g)f2(h), tative, since
h(9)h{h)+h{g)h{h)
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
for all g, h £ G. Cup product is anticommu-
=
-fi(g)f2(g)-fi(h)Mh)-(-f1(gh)f2(gh))
= —
^ 1 (/i/2), if / l a nd fi are 1-cocycles. Therefore it induces a "cup product" homomorphism from H\G; R) A H1 (G; # ) to # 2 ( G ; fl), if 2 is invertible in R. This is also the case if R — Z. For if / : G —> Z is a homomorphism and F is denned by F(h) = f(h)(l — f(h))/2, for all /i G G, then f{g)f{h) = 51F(g,h), for all g, h G G, and so / U / = 0. If 2 = 0 in R there is a cup product homomorphism from the symmetric product HX{G;R) © # X (G;.R) to H2(G;R) instead. Massey products were introduced as "higher linking invariants" in [Ma68]. The nth order Massey product of fh ... fn e Hl(G\R) is defined if there is a strictly upper triangular (n + 1) x (n + 1) matrix M with entries in Cl(G;R) such that m ^ + i = fa for 1 < i < n, mi > n + i = 0 and S1mij(g,h) = S ^ ^ m j ^ ^ m f c ^ ^ / i ) for all (i,j) 7^ ( l , n + 1). Its value relative to this defining system M is the class of the cocycle E*^2mi,Jfc ^mk,n+i in H2(G;R), and is denoted ( / i , . . . fn)M- The Massey product is the subset ( / i , . . . fn) of H2(G; R) consisting of all elements obtained in this way from some defining system. It is essential if it is denned and ( / i , . . . fn)M 7^ 0 for all defining systems M. It is inessential, or said to contain 0 if (fli • • • fn)M — 0 f° r some choice of defining system. The indeterminacy of ( / i , . . . fn) is the subset {a — b | a, b e ( / i , . . . fn)}- When n — 2 the Massey product is just the cup product, and there is no indeterminacy. The submatrices determined by the ith rows and j t h columns for *' < * < j < f (for some fixed i' < f) define Massey products of order / — i' called subproducts. If ( / i , . . . fn) is defined each proper subproduct contains 0. The Massey product is strictly defined if all the proper subproducts are 0. If ( / i , . . . fn) is defined and h : H —> G is a homomorphism (h*fi,...h*fn) is defined and h*{f\,...fn) C
{h*fu...h*fn). The nth order Massey products in H2(G;R) may be identified with the cohomology classes of the central extensions of G by R
10.2. PRODUCTS, THE DWYER FILTRATION AND GROPES
229
induced from the canonical extension of the group of upper triangular (n + 1) x (n + 1) matrices over R (with Is on the diagonal), modulo its centre [Dw75]. Let G = irBo be the group of the Borromean rings Bo, and let / l , / 2 and fy be the generators of H1(G;R) which are Kronecker dual to the meridians {xi,X2,x$} (i.e., fi(xj) = 5ij). Then all cup products fi U fj are 0. The Massey triple product (/i,/2,/3) is defined, with 0 indeterminacy, and is a generator for H2(G;R) = R. See [0'N79] for connections between 4th order Massey products and Steenrod functional products, with exemplary calculations for 2-component links. 10.2. Products, the Dwyer filtration and gropes Let G(R) = nKer(A), where the intersection is taken over all homomorphisms A : G —> R. Then the epimorphism from G to G = G/G(R) induces an isomorphism H 1 (G;i?) —> /f 1 (G;i?). Moreover if G is finitely generated and R — Z or F p (for some prime p) then G = Rb for some b. The 5-term exact sequence of low degree for the LHS cohomology spectral sequence for G as an extension of G by G(R) then gives an exact sequence 0-+#°(G;tf 1 (G( J R); J R)) ^ - ^
H2(G;R)^H2(G;R),
where r is the transgression homomorphism. This leads to an exact sequence Ker(Uc) - • Ker(U G ) -> H^G-H^GiR^R))
->
Coker(Ug) -> Coker(U G ). Note that H°{G;H {G{Ry,R)) ^ Hom(G(R)/[G,G{R)],R). If R = Z then G is free abelian and H*(G;Z) is the exterior algebra generated by Hom(G,Z). In particular, Ug- is an isomorphism and so Ker(U G ) = Hom(G(Z)/[G, G(Z)], Z). The inclusion of G2 into G(Z) induces a homomorphism G2/G3 -» G(Z)/[G, G(Z)] which has finite kernel and cokernel. Since localization is exact we may then identify the kernel of cup product with coefficients Q with Hom(G2/G3,Q). In particular, cup product with coefficients Z or Q is injective if and only if G2/G3 is finite. l
230
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
On the other hand, let 9 : F(b) —• G induce an isomorphism i7 1 (0;Z). Then cup product with coefficients R = Z oris identically 0 if and only if the induced map from F(b)/F(b)3 to G/Gz is a monomorphism. Dwyer gave an analogous criterion for the relative freedom of nilpotent quotients of a group in terms of the vanishing of Massey products, involving an extension of Stallings' Theorem. If Y is a topological space with TTI(Y) = IT let $fc(F) be the kernel of the composite H2(Y;Z) -> H2(TT;Z) -> H2{n/nk_1;Z), and let * fc (G) = $k(K(G, 1)). The image of ir^iY) under the Hurewicz homomorphism is contained in &W(Y) < Hfc>2$fc(lr). THEOREM. [DW75] Let f : G —> H be a homomorphism of groups such that Hi(f;Z) is an isomorphism, and let k > 2. Letk(f) '• H2(G;Z)/$k(G) —> H2(H;Z)/$k(H) be the homomorphism induced by f. Then the following conditions are equivalent: (1) 4>k{f) is an epimorphism; (2) <j>k(f) is an isomorphism and (f>k+i(f) is a monomorphism; (3) / induces an isomorphism GjGk —> H/Hk• The proof is similar to that of Theorem 1.3, being a finite induction based on the exact sequence of low degree from the homology LHS spectral sequence and the 5-Lemma. If these conditions hold then (4) f induces an isomorphism $ f e - 1 (#;>!) = <J>fc-1(G; A) and an epimorphism from $k(H;A) to G induces an isomorphism Hl(f;Z) and all Massey products of order < k contain 0 then Ker(/) < F(b)k+i. In particular, / is a monomorphism if all Massey products contain 0. The Dwyer filtration {®k(Y)}k>i has a geometrical interpretation in terms of singular gropes in Y. This notion is defined inductively. The pair (S 1 , 5 1 ) is the standard grope of class 1. A grope of
10.3. MOD-p ANALOGUES
231
class 2 is a pair (S, dS), where S is a compact connected oriented surface with a single boundary component. Let {ai,/9j | 1 < i < g} be embedded circles in S representing a symplectic basis for Hi(S;Z). A grope of class k is a pair (X, S 1 ), where X is a 2-complex constructed from such a grope of class 2 by attaching gropes of class Pi > 1 to each circle a, and gropes of class qj > 1 to each circle /3j and such that Pi + q% > k for at least one index i. An oo-grope is a pair (X,^ 1 ) where X = \Jk>xXk is an increasing union of finite subcomplexes such that (Xk,Sl) is a fc-grope, for all k > 1. [FT95] An element g E ir — TTI(Y) is in TT^ if and only if it bounds a map of a k-grope into Y, for 1 < k < oo. It is in n^ if it bounds a map of an oo-grope into Y. • LEMMA.
The spherical k-grope determined by (X, 5 1 ) is the 2-complex X — XLiD2. The notions of annular grope, etc., are defined similarly. [FT95] Let Y be a cell complex. Then $k(Y) is the subset of H2(Y;71) represented by maps of spherical k-gropes into Y. D LEMMA.
10.3. Mod-p analogues Let Xn(H) denote the verbal subgroup of H generated by all nth powers. If p is a prime the restricted p-lower central series is given by {Tk(G;p)}k>i, where Tk(G;p) is the subgroup generated byUpmn>kXPm(Gn). If p = 2 then G(F 2 ) = X2(G) > G2 and G = G/G(¥2) £* (Z/2Z)b, say, where XP(G) is the verbal subgroup of G generated by all pth powers. The cohomology ring H*(G;F2) is now the polynomial algebra over ¥2 generated in degree 1 by H1(G;¥2). Since U^ is again an isomorphism Ker(U G ) = Hom(X2{G)/[G,X2(G)},¥2) 3* Hom(X2(G)/[G,X2(G)]XA{G),¥2). Hence cup product is injective if and only if G does not map onto Z/AZ and G2/G3 is finite of odd order. If G is abelian the kernel of cup product with coefficients F2 is isomorphic to the image of reduction modulo (2) from H1{G\ZIAT) to i? 1 (G;F 2 ), which is also the kernel of the mod-2 Bockstein homomorphism /32 : ^" 1 (G;F 2 ) -» H2(G;¥2). On the
232
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
other hand, cup product is identically 0 if and only if there is a homomorphism from a free group F to G which induces an isomorphism from F/[F,X2(F)]X4(F) to G/[G,X2(G)]X4(G) [Hi87]. If p is odd then G(¥p) = G2(p) = G2XP(G) and G = G/G{¥p) 9* (Z/pZ)b, say. The cohomology ring H*(G;¥p) is the tensor product of an exterior algebra generated in degree 1 by Hom(G, ¥p) with a polynomial algebra generated in degree 2 by f3p{H1{G;¥p)), where (3P is the mod-p Bockstein homomorphism. In this case we have Ker(U G ) = HoTn(G2(p)/[G,G2(p)],¥p). Cup product is identically 0 if and only if there is a homomorphism from a free group F to G which induces an isomorphism from F/Ts(F]p) to G/T3(G;p), where T3(G;p) is the subgroup generated by XP(G) U (G 3 ) [Hi85']. If / : G —> H is a homomorphism such that Hl(f\¥p) is an isomorphism then there are Massey product criteria (analogous to those cited in §2 above) for / to induce an isomorphism G/Yk (G; p) = H/Tk(H;p)iovk>3 [Dw75].
10.4. The graded Lie algebra of a group Let G be a group. In any nilpotent group the subset of elements of finite order forms a normal subgroup. If the group is finitely generated this subgroup is finite. Let Gf = G and let G^+1 be the preimage in G of the torsion subgroup of G/[G,G%]. Then G/G% is a torsion free nilpotent group, and {Gj~}k>i is the most rapidly descending series of subgroups of G with this property. (See [Rob]). If g e Gm and h e Gn then [g,h] = ghg~lh~l e Gm+n, while the Hall-Witt identity [yxy~l, [z,y\[[zyz~l, [x, zJUxzx*1, [y, x]] = 1 holds for any three elements x, y, z of G. The graded Lie algebra associated to G is C(G) = ®k>i(Gk/Gk+i), with the Lie bracket determined by the commutator. (The Jacobi relation follows from the Hall-Witt identity). Since Q ® z Gk/Gk+l £ Q ® z G%/G%+v the tensor product Q ®% £>{G) is determined by the rational lower central series {G^}. (The restricted p-lower central series determines an analogous p-Lie algebra £(G;Fp) = ®k>i(Th(G;p)/Fk+1(G;p)), th which inherits a p power operation from G).
10.5. DGAS AND MINIMAL MODELS
233
THEOREM. [Ma49] Let £ be a nilpotent graded Lie algebra which is generated in degree 1. Let Gc be the group whose underlying set is Q ®% £ and whose multiplication is given by the Campbell-BakerHausdorff formula. Then Gc is nilpotent and £{Gc) — Q <8>z £ . If moreover £ = £(G) for some finitely generated nilpotent group G then there is a homomorphism f : G —• GC(G) such that Q ®% £{f) is an isomorphism. • The tower of groups constructed in this way from the truncations ofC(G) is called the Q-Mal'cev completion of G. The denominators in the CBH formulae for a nilpotent Lie algebra of nilpotency class k divide k\, and Mal'cev's Theorem can be refined to show that the Lie algebra determines G/Gk modulo p-torsion for primes p < k [CP84]. Let Gr(Z[G}) = e„>o(/£/IS + 1 ) be the graded algebra determined by the Io-a-dic filtration of Z[G]. Let L(A) and T^(A) be the free Lie algebra and free tensor algebra generated by the abelian group A, and let U be the universal envelope functor from graded Lie algebras to graded associative algebras. There are canonical homomorphisms a : L(Hi(G;Z)) -> C{G), (3 : T®{Hi{G;Z)) - • Gr(Z[G}) and 7 : UC(G) -* Gr(Z[G\). If G = F(fi) these homomorphisms are isomorphisms, by results of Witt and Magnus; in general they are not bijective. Griinenfelder has constructed (for any subring R of Q) two spectral sequences E(R,G) and E(R,G), with E1 page determined by if*(G;i?), and a homomorphism K : E{R,G) —> E(R,G), which converge (in an appropriate sense) to R ®% £(G), Gr(R[G]) and I\R®C(G), respectively [Gr80]. (See also [Wa80]). 10.5. D G A s and minimal models The rational de Rham algebra of a finite simplicial complex P is the algebra A(P) generated by forms in the barycentric coordinates, with polynomial coefficients. The cohomology of this algebra is isomorphic to the rational cohomology of P, but the algebra carries also deeper information about the rational homotopy type of P.
234
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
A connected differential graded algebra A — (A, d) over Q (or DGA) is an associative Q-algebra A — (Bn>oAn with multiplication A and differential d of degree + 1 such that A0 = Q, xAy = (—l)pqyAx, d2 = 0 and d(x Ay) = (dx) Ay+ {-\)px A dy, for all x e Ap and y € Aq. The augmentation ideal is A+ = ©„>o^4" and the space of indecomposables is 1(A) = A+ /A+ A A+. The DGA is minimal if dx is a sum of products of terms of degree < p, for all x G Ap. (If A is generated as an algebra by A1 then .4 is minimal). We may define Massey products in the cohomology of A just as before. A Hirsch extension of degree 1 of a DGA A is a DGA B such that the underlying algebra is a graded tensor product B = A* <8>Q A*V, for some vector space V, and such that dV < A1. (In particular, B1 = A1 © V). The extension is finite if V is finite dimensional. If A is a DGA such that ^ 2 = .4 1 A .4 1 the dual oid:Al^A2 induces a Lie bracket on L = Homq(A1,Q). Conversely, if L is a finite-dimensional Q-Lie algebra the dual of the bracket defines a graded differential on L* = Afci?omQ(L,Q), such that d\(m, n) — X([m, n]) for A € Ll and m, n 6 L. (In each case the Jacobi identity and the property "d2 = 0" are dual). The Lie algebra is nilpotent if and only if A may be obtained by iterated finite Hirsch extensions from the trivial algebra Q. A 1-minimal model for A is a Z)Gyl-morphism p : M. —> A such that M. is generated in degree 1, W(p) is an isomorphism for i < 1 and H2(p) is injective. We may construct the 1-minimal model for A as an increasing union of Hirsch extensions of degree 1. Let Mi = A*V, where V = HX(A), with differential 0. Choose a splitting : V —> Ker(d| j4 i), and let p\ : M\ —• A be the homomorphism extending this splitting. Assuming Mk and pk have been defined, let Vk+i = Kei(H2(pk)). Let M^+i = Mk® A*V^+1 and choose a linear homomorphism d : Vk+\ —> Z2(Mk) lifting the inclusion V^+i < H2(Mk), to give A^fc+i. We then choose a linear homomorphism Pk+i • Vfc+i —> ^l 1 such that d/9fc+1(v) = pk{dv), for all w e VJt+i, and extend as a .DG^l-morphism from .Mfc+i to A.
10.5. DGAS AND MINIMAL MODELS
235
The 1-minimal model of a finitely presentable group G is the 1minimal model of A(P), where P is a finite simplicial complex with TTI(P) £
G.
THEOREM. [SU77] The 1-minimal model of a connected DGA is well-defined up to isomorphism. If G/G' is finitely generated and the quotients GjGy. are all torsion free then QC(G) is isomorphic to the Lie algebra of the 1-minimal model of G. • The 1-minimal model of a group G determines iJ 1 (G;Q) and its Massey product structure; to what extent is the converse true? Suppose that M. and M are DGAs which are generated in degree 1 and hs : HS(M) —> HS(M) are homomorphisms for s — 1, 2 such that hl is an isomorphism, ( / i , . . . fn) is defined if and only if (/i 1 (/i), • • •/i 1 (/ n )) is defined and h2((fi,... /„)) is a subset of {hl(fl)i • • • h1 (fn))• Are h1 and h? induced by a DGA-morphism
h:M^M? A space X is formal if there is a .DCA-morphism from the minimal model of X to H*(X;Q) (considered as a DGA with trivial differential) which induces an isomorphism on cohomology. (Thus its rational homotopy type is determined by its cohomology ring). A connected, graded commutative Q-algebra 7i* is intrinsically formal if any space X such that H*(X;Q) = H* is formal. For the study of classical links a variation is more useful. The algebra H* is 1intrinsically formal if the existence of a 2-connected homomorphism from H* to H*(G;Q) determines Qz £(G) U P t o isomorphism. Let L be a /x-component 1-link with group n = irL and let T be the Z-weighted graph with /x-vertices and with an edge of weight tij joining the ith and j t h vertices if and only if £ij ^ 0. Then H*(X(L);Q) is 1-intrinsically formal if and only if T is connected [MP92]. (In particular, the complements of algebraic links in S3 are formal). The integral cohomology ring determines £(ir) if the graphs T p obtained by reducing the weights modulo (p) are connected for all primes p. (See also [BP94]). In this case £(ir) a* L*(ir/^)/lm(d), where L*(ir/ir') is the free graded Lie algebra generated in degree 1 by 7I-/7I-' = Hi(Tr;!i) and d is the dual of the cup product from J J V . Z ) AiJ^TrjZ) to H2(n;Z).
236
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
10.6. Milnor invariants Let L be a 2-component 1-link with linking number £, and let Xi = X(Li), for i = 1, 2. The inclusion j \ : dX\ —> X induces an isomorphism H2(h;Z), since H2(X,dX2;Z) = fT1 (A", dXi; Z) = 2 0. Let ab : X —> T = K(Z ,1) be the map corresponding to the abelianization homomorphism. Since the composition ab o ji has degree £, it follows that if {zi,z2} is the basis for H1(X;Z) which is Kronecker dual to the meridians {x\,x2} and £ is the generator of H2(X;IJ) which is Lefschetz dual to the class of a path from L\ to L2 in # i ( S 3 , L; Z) then ziUz2 = it This connection between cup product and linking numbers extends to a relationship between Massey products and Milnor invariants, which are "higher linking numbers" defined in terms of the coefficients of Magnus expansions of words representing the longitudes. The main results of this section are from [Mi57]. Let {xi^.-Xy} be a fixed basis for the free group F(fi), and let di : Z[F(/t)] —> Z[F(/i)], for 1 < i < /x, be the corresponding free derivatives. These are additive functions such that di(uv) — di(u) + udi(v), for u, v € -F(/i), and di(xj) — Sij, for 1 < j < JJ,. If u € F(fi) and / = ( i i , . . . ir) is a multi-index of length \I\ = r > 1, with 1 < ij < (J, for all 1 < j < r, let ej{u) = 6(8^ ... dir(u)), and let eq>(u) — 0 (rather than 1). The image of u under the Magnus imbedding is M(u) = 1 + E|/|> 1 e/(u)X/, where Xj is the monomial Xix ... Xir. Let IF([J.) denote the 2-sided ideal generated by {X1,...Xll}mZ({X1,...Xll)). LEMMA 10.1. Ifu G F(^) thenu e F(n)k if and only ifM(u) mod IF(^
=1
.
An easy induction on k shows that if u e F(fi)k then M(u) = 1 mod {Ifj,)k. The other implication is more difficult. See Chapter V of [MKS]. • PROOF.
Suppose now that n = irL is the group of a /^-component 1-link, and let 9 : F(fi) —> iv be a basing for L. Let k > 1 and let {wi,... w^} be words in F(fi) representing the images of the longitudes in n/nk-
10.6. MILNOR INVARIANTS
237
If 7 = ( i i , . . .ir) is a multi-index of length r < A; let 7' = («i,.. .ir-i), and let //(/) = £/v(u>jr). (Thus u;.,- = 1 + E|/| > 0 ^(7j)X/, for 1 < j < n). The Milnor invariant p,(ii,.. .ir) — p,(I) is the image of //(7) in Z/A(7), where A (J) is the ideal generated by the elements fi(J), where J runs over the cyclic permutations of proper subsequences of I. In particular, p.(i,j) = ^(i,j) = (-ij for all 1 < i,j < fi. THEOREM 10.2. LetL be a fi-component 1-link and I — («i,.. -ir) be a multi-index with 1 < ij < fi for all 1 < j < r. Then (1) fl(I) is a well defined invariant of the I -equivalence class of L; (2) reflecting L (changing the ambient orientation) multiplies /i(7) by (—l) r _ 1 , while reversing the component Lj multiplies /l(7) by (—l) s , where s is the number of times j occurs in the sequence I. (1). Comparing the coefficients of monomials on either side of the equation M{xiwx~x) = (1 + X;)M(™)£(-l) m X™ gives ei(xiwx^1) = ei(w) modulo the ideal generated by the £j(w), for certain proper subsequences J of I. If u G -P\/^)m+i then £j(uw) = PROOF.
£l(w), since M{u) — 1 e IF(^) > by Lemma 10.1. Suppose J — ( i i , . . .is) for some 1 < s < r is an initial segment of V. Then £j(wkxk) = sj(wk) \ik^is and £j{wisxia) - £j{wis) + H(J) - n(Jia) + n{J). Similarly ej(xkwk) = £j(wk) if k ^ ix and Let v ej(xilwil) = £j(wh) + /i(J), where J = fo, • • -is,h)= l 1 [wk,xk] = wkxkw^ x^ . Since M(v) = 1 + (M(wkxk)
-
M(xkwk))M(w^)M(x^)
it follows that £j(v) in in A (7) for all initial segments J of I'. (It is here that cyclic permutations are needed). Now £p(vu>ir) = £p{wiT) + T>£j{v)^i{Kir) + £p{v), where the sum is over ordered partitions I' — (J,K) with J and K nonempty. Hence £i>(vwir) = £r(wir) modulo A(7). Hence Jx(I) is unchanged if Wir is conjugated or multiplied by an element of F(fi) representing 1 in 7r/7rr. In particular, it does not depend on the value of k > r. If £ is an 7-equivalence from L
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
238
to V then the inclusions of X{L) and X(L') into X(C) satisfy the hypotheses of Theorem 1.3, and the ith longitudes of L and L' are conjugate in nC = TT\{X{C). Hence the p, invariants of L and L' are equal. (2). Since reflection inverts the meridians of L, while reversing Lj inverts the j t h meridian and the j t h longitude, this follows easily from the fact that M{x~l) — l-Xi modulo higher order terms. • Lemma 10.1 and Theorem 1.4 together imply the following result. 10.3. Let L be a ^-component 1-link with group IT = TTL and let 9 : F(fi) —> IT be the homomorphism determined by a set of meridians. All Milnor invariants of L of length < r are 0 if and only if 0 induces an isomorphism F(^)/F(fi)r = 7r/7Tr. • THEOREM
Cochran and Orr have conjectured that if all Milnor invariants of L of length < r are 0 then all Milnor invariants of length up to Ir may be denned with zero indeterminacy. A proper shuffle of two sequences I and J of lengths r and s, respectively, is one of the ( r ^ s ) sequences obtained by intermeshing / with J. Let Sh(IJ) be the set of such proper shuffles. THEOREM 10.4. Let L be a \x-component 1-link. Then (1) /2(zi, ...ir)
= p,(i2,...
ir, i\) = • • • = p,(ir,
h, • • • V - i ) ;
(2) if I and J are given sequences of length > 0 then ^HeSh(IJ)HHk) = ° mod h.c.f.{A(Hk) | H e Sh(IJ)}; (3) /2(ii,... ir) is determined by the sublink Uir. Then 7r/ivq has a presentation (XJ, 1 < i < fj, | [tyi,Xj] = 1,1 < i < /x, F(/x) g ), where the Wi represent the longitudes, and there are words yi € F(fi) such that IIyi[wi, x^y" 1 is in F(p)q. (See Theorem 1.4). Let D be the ideal in Z ( ( X 1 , . . . XJ) of elements YidiXi such that A(J) divides di for all |/| < q. Write M(w{) — 1 + Vi, for 1 < i < /i. Then XjXiVi, XjViXi, X^X^ and ViXiXj are all in D, since li is a cyclic permutation of a proper subsequence of each of jil, jli, ilj and Iij, respectively. It follows
10.6. MILNOR INVARIANTS
239
that M(yi[wi, Xi]y~ ) = 1 + XiVi — ViXi mod D, for 1 < i < /i, and so 1 + T,(XiVi — ViXi) is in D. Now the coefficient of Xu in this sum is fi(Ji) — n(iJ), and so fi(Ji) = [i{iJ) mod A(iJ), provided \iJ\ < q. This implies (1). Property (2) follows from general facts about the coefficients of the Magnus expansion of a word in F(/i) [CFL58], while (3) is clear. To establish homotopy invariance it shall suffice to consider an elementary homotopy affecting only one component. We may assume that {i\,... ir} = { 1 , . . . //} (so r = /x), by (3), and that the homotopy changes only the last component and i^ = fi, by (1). In the construction of Theorem 1.4 we may choose the arcs a.{ with i < /J. so that the homotopy takes place in W(fl) = X(L(fi)) — Uj<MQ!j. Since /2(7) depends only on the image of the nth longitude in IT\(W(JJ)) it is unchanged under homotopy of L^. • These cyclic symmetries and shuffle relations are a complete set of relations [HL98]. The "indeterminacy" A (I) may be reduced under additional hypotheses. (See Chapter 12). On the other hand, Theorem 10.4 may be extended somewhat at the cost of coarsening the indeterminacy. Let A* (I) be the ideal generated by the elements fi( J), where J runs over all permutations of proper subsequences of I, and let /**(/) be the image of /i(J) in Z/A*(J). Then A(J) < A*(I) and n*(I) is a homotopy invariant for all multi-indices I. Moreover /x*(v, ...»!) = (-1) V ( « i , • • • ir)- (See [Mi57]). COROLLARY 10.4.1. Let I = («i,... ir) where r > 2 and ik = i for at least r — 1 values of k, while the remaining index is j . Then (rs)jl(I) -0 for allO < s < r. If moreover £ij = 0 then /2(J) = 0. •
Turaev showed that the choices of defining systems for Massey products in link complements could be normalized in a way that reduced the indeterminacy and hence that the Milnor invariants are essentially equivalent to Massey products [Tu76]. Let xi,... x^ be a set of meridians for a ^-component 1-link L. A normalized Massey system for (X(L); x i , . . . x^) is a system of ideals v(I) and cochains w{I) € Cl(X(L); Z/u(I)), where I varies over multi-indices of length r > 1, which are required to satisfy the following conditions. Firstly,
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
240
v{I) is the smallest ideal containing \j{u(I') \ I' < 1} (taken over all proper subsequences /') and such that T>I=JKW(J) U W(K) is a coboundary in C2(X(L);Z/u(I)) (where the summation is taken over all nonempty proper initial segments J ) . Secondly, this sum is the coboundary of w(I). (In [Tu76] it is the coboundary of —w(I)). Thirdly, w(i)(xi) — 1 for 1 < i < // and W(I)(XJ) = 0 in all other cases. (We have omitted the reduction of coefficents homomorphisms Z/V(J) —> JJ/V{I) from the notation). It is easily shown by induction on |/| that normalized Massey systems exist. The class m(I) of EI=JKw(J)Uw(K) in H2(X;Z/A(J)) is the corresponding normalized Massey product (z^,... Zir), where {z\,... zM} is the basis for i7 x (X; Z) Kronecker dual to the meridians. (This differs in sign from the definition in [Tu76]). Let L be a ^-component 1-link and let I — (zi,... ir) be a multi-index with 1 < ij < \i for all 1 < j < r. Let r\i be the image of the fundamental class ofdX(Li) in H2(X (L);7J/ A(I)). Then T H E O R E M . [TU76]
(1) the ideals v(I) are independent of the choice of meridians
for L; (2) the ideal generated by all v(I') with I' a proper subsequence of I is A(7); (3) m ( / ) f o r ) = - m ( / ) ( % ) = (-l) r /2(J) and m{I){r,j) = 0 */ j 7^ i\ or ir. D Turaev also proves a corresponding result for links in Z/mZhomology 3-spheres, for any m > 0. (He defines analogues of the p, invariants after extending Milnor's Theorem 1.4 to give presentations for the quotients of the most rapidly descending central series whose sections have exponent m. See also [Po80], [St90], and see [Ko83] for an application to 4-manifolds). All the Milnor invariants of L of length at most 2k vanish if and only if L is k-slice, i.e., bounds fj, disjoint properly embedded oriented surfaces V* C D4 such that the image of iri(Vi) in G — ni(D4 — UF;) under the homomorphisms induced by pushing Vi off itself in the
10.7. LINK HOMOTOPY AND THE MILNOR GROUP
241
normal direction lies in the subgroup Gfc, for 1 < i < /j, [IO01]. (Compare the results of [FT95] quoted above).
10.7. Link homotopy and the Milnor group Let G be a group which is normally generated by { x i , . . . x^}. The Milnor group Mil(G) is the largest quotient of G in which each of these generators commutes with all of its conjugates. If A\ is the normal closure of (x;) then Ai is an abelian normal subgroup, and G — IL4i. Therefore Mil(G) is nilpotent of class at most fi, by Fitting's Theorem (Proposition 5.2.8 of [Rob]). Hence it is generated by the images of the elements { x i , . . . x^} and so is a quotient of the "reduced free group" RF(/J,) — Mil(F(n)). It is easily verified that the images in RF{2>) of X1X2 and its conjugate by X3 do not commute. Thus in general the Milnor group depends on the generating set. (The structure of RF(n) is described in [Hu93]). The Milnor group of a 1-link L is the Milnor group of IT = irL with respect to a set of meridians. It is the largest common quotient of the groups of links which are link homotopic to L. Milnor showed that this group together with a certain "peripheral structure" formed a link homotopy invariant, which determines the p,(ii,... ir) with all indices distinct. Moreover L is homotopically trivial if and only if all such Ji invariants are 0 if and only if all the longitudes of L have trivial image in Mil(n). In particular, boundary 1-links are homotopically trivial. (See [CF88] for a direct geometric proof). A colouring of a link is a partition into sublinks. Freedman and Teichner considered coloured homotopies, in which components of the same colour are allowed to cross, and defined the coloured Milnor group, in which all conjugates of meridians of the same colour commute. This is again a nilpotent group, with nilpotency class bounded by the number of colours. Let Ni be the subgroup of Mil(ir) generated by {[g, [g, x*]] | g 6 Mil(n)}. (Thus Ni = Iiix^Ai). Levine has conjectured that the link homotopy type of L is determined by the isomorphism class of (Mil(ir), ((mi,ni),... (m^,n M )), where m; is the image of an ith
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
242
meridian in Mil(7t) and rii is the image of the corresponding longitude in Mil(ir)/Nii and has verified this for /* < 4. Hughes has given examples of links distinguished by this invariant but not distinguished by Milnor's original formulation of the peripheral structure (which used instead the images of the rij in Mil(Tx)/Ai). Habegger and Lin have shown that the set of link homotopy classes of //-component 1-links is the orbit space of a certain group action on the group of link homotopy classes of //-component string links, and have thereby given an algorithmic classification of links up to link homotopy. (See Chapter 12). Teichner and Krushkal have interpreted link homotopies in terms of gropes [KT97]. THEOREM 10.5. Two ^-component 1-links L(0) and L(l) are link homotopic if and only if they bound \x disjointly immersed annular gropes of class \i in S3 x / . (Sketch). The condition is clearly necessary, since a link homotopy gives disjointly immersed (level-preserving) annuli. Let {Gj}i<j<M be a set of disjoint immersions of annular gropes of class // connecting L(0) and L(l) in S 3 x [0,1]. Choose an arc 7 in G\ from L(0)i to £(l)i- Then the concatenation c = £(0)1.7.1,(1)1.7 is in 7ri(5 3 x [0,1] — Il2
The surgery equivalence class of a link is determined by its Milnor invariants of length at most 3 (with a sharpened indeterminacy). In particular, two links whose linking numbers are all 0 are surgery equivalent if and only if their corresponding 3-component sublinks are link homotopic [Le87'].
10.8. VARIANTS OF THE MILNOR INVARIANTS
243
Every higher dimensional link is link homotopic to a trivial link ([BT99] - see also [BaOl]). 10.8. Variants of the Milnor invariants Cochran uses intersections of surfaces to define and compute invariants which tend to have smaller indeterminacy than the Milnor invariants. Moreover they are particularly well suited to the construction of examples. For instance, the Bing double of the Borromean rings (which is a 6-component link) has trivial Alexander module but is not even homotopic to a boundary link, since /2(1,2,3,4,5,6) 7^ 0. Many other examples demonstrate quite convincingly that one cannot expect criteria for concordance to a boundary link in terms of the Alexander module alone. (See [Coc] for a detailed exposition). In particular, there are nontrivial ^-component links L such that 7r = irL is generated by /i meridians and cx(L) = fi, for each \i > 6 [Co96]. This answers a question of Birman, who observed that the closure of a pure braid in the kernel of the Gassner representation is of this kind (see page 130 of [Bir]). Since L is nontrivial TV is a proper quotient of F(fi), and so some Milnor invariant must be nontrivial. Are there such links for 2 < \i < 5? (It is known that the Gassner representation is faithful for \x < 3). Two ^-component 1-link Ls are k-cobordant if they bound fi disjoint properly embedded oriented surfaces V{ C <S3 x [0,1] such that the image of 7Ti(Vi) in G = iri(S3 x [0,1] — UVj) under the homomorphisms induced by pushing V* off itself in the normal direction lies in the subgroup generated by G^ and the image of TTi(dVi), for 1 < i < ji. Two 2-component links are fc-cobordant if and only if a finite collection (depending on k) of invariants related to the Ji invariants agree. There are similar results for links with more than 2 components [Co91]. Let L be a /it-component 1-link such that all Milnor invariants of length < r are 0. A basing 9 : F(/j,) —• IT = nL determines an isomorphism F(fj,)/F(fi)r = ix/-Kr and hence an epimorphism from 7r to F(/j,)/F((j,)r, which may be realized by a map / : X(L) —>
244
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
K(F((j,)/F([j,)r, 1). Since the longitudes are all in nr this extends to a map from S3 to the space Kr(fx) obtained from K(F(/j,)/F(/j,)r, 1) by adjoining \x 2-cells along loops representing a basis of F{p). Links with all Ji invariants of length < r zero and realizing a given element of -K3(Kr(fi)) may be constructed by taking the transverse inverse image of the midpoints of the 2-cells. These Orr invariants Or(L;0) 6 TTz(Kr(n)) are invariants of based link concordance, and are all defined and 0 if and only if all the jl invariants are 0. (See [Or87], [Co87]). Instead of using the Magnus embedding, the Campbell-BakerHausdorff formulae may be used to embed F(fi) in the "free complete Lie algebra on x\,... x^\ leading to concordance invariants similar to the p, invariants [Pa97]. At the primary level these invariants agree with the p, invariants, but in general they are independent. Another scheme for obtaining presentations of the nilpotent quotients of link groups is based on Chen's theory of iterated path integrals and power series connections [Ha85]. The Milnor invariants of L may be interpreted as linking numbers in certain finite nilpotent branched coverings of (S3,L). More precisely, suppose I = (Jii1) is a multi-index of length k + 2 and that p.(I') has been defined for multi-indices / ' of length < k + 1. Let m be a nonzero integer dividing A(7), and for each i < /J, let Mj(i) be the (k + 1) x (k + l)-matrix over Z/mZ such that Mj(i)Ptq = 1 if q — p + 1 and jp = i, and is 0 otherwise. Then we may define a representationj(xi) = I + Mj(i), for 1
10.9. SOLVABLE QUOTIENTS AND COVERING SPACES
245
mod-(p) and Z(p) versions of the Milnor invariants for links in such homology spheres. These are homology cobordism invariants, and so are potentially useful invariants of link concordance. The mod(p) invariants vanish if all the Milnor invariants are 0, and all vanish if L is an SHB link. Thus the Z(p) invariants may detect links with vanishing Milnor invariants which are not SHB links [C099].
10.9. Solvable quotients and covering spaces The most useful invariants of knots and links after the link groups are the homology modules and duality pairings of canonical covering spaces, in particular those of the maximal abelian covering space. In the classical case this correspond to studying the metabelian quotients n/n", which are rarely nilpotent. The study of Alexander modules and of nilpotent quotients have two natural common generalizations. Firstly, one may consider the homology of nilpotent covers. If G is a finitely generated torsion free nilpotent group, or more generally if it is torsion free and polycyclic then the group ring Z[G] is noetherian, of finite global dimension and KQ(Z[G]) = 0. Hence the homology modules of any corresponding covering space of a finite complex are noetherian and have finite free resolutions. We would hope to derive Witt class invariants of concordance from the homology of such covers. (The case of 2-component Z/2Z-homology boundary links and the group C of §5 of Chapter 7 seems one deserving of early consideration). Cochran, Orr and Teichner found such invariants for classical knots [COT99]. They construct a canonical tower of torsion free solvable groups, to which "most" classical knot groups map nontrivially. The group rings of such groups are Ore domains, and have skew fields of fractions. (However these solvable groups are not necessarily polycyclic, or even of finite Hirsch length). They define R-valued concordance invariants in terms of L2 signatures of suitably localized duality pairings. (The localization ensures that the pairings are nonsingular; compare §5 of Chapter 2).
246
10. NILPOTENT QUOTIENTS
Secondly, if G is solvable of finite Hirsch length and has no nontrivial torsion normal subgroup then G is an extension of a virtually abelian group by a nilpotent normal subgroup [BH72]. This suggests we should consider the lower central series of n'. If TT is the group of a fibred 1-knot then n' is a finitely generated free group, and so is residually nilpotent. (The commutator subgroup is also residually nilpotent if the knot is in the class generated by fibred knots and 2bridge knots under the operations of cabling and forming connected sums [Go81]). On the other hand, if L is a knot or link such that Ai(L) = 1 then n' is perfect, and so the lower central series takes us no further. Fortunately, this can only happen if \i < 2 and L is a TOP slice knot or is TOP concordant (modulo a Kervaire invariant question - see §6 of Chapter 7) to the Hopf link. The 1-minimal model approach can be extended to the solvable case in terms of twisted Hirsch extensions [Su77].
CHAPTER 11
Algebraic Closure This chapter shall summarize work of Cochran, Le Dimet, Levine, Orr and Vogel on universal groups for links whose groups have relatively free nilpotent quotients (7r/7Tfc = F(fj,)/F(fj,)k for 1 < k < oo). This includes all 1-links /-equivalent to sublinks of homology boundary links and all higher dimensional links.
11.1. Homological localization If £ is an /-equivalence from L(0) to L(l) the inclusion of X(L(i)) into X(C) induces a (homologically) 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphism on fundamental groups, for i — 0 and 1. Therefore if F is a functor from groups (of finite weight) to groups which takes 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphisms to isomorphisms F(TTL) is an invariant of /-equivalence. For example, F{G) — G/Gn is such a functor for any 1 < n < oo, by Stallings' Theorem. The tower of nilpotent quotients gives the nilpotent completion G, discussed in §1 below. Is there a universal such functor through which all others factor? Following [Ad75], it may be prudent to require that there be a natural transformation T] from the identity functor to F such that a TJG is 2-connected and normally surjective and F(j]a) = ??F(G)> * least for groups of finite weight. Thus F is naturally idempotent. We may then say that a group G is F-local if 77c? is an isomorphism. Note however that the nilpotent quotient (and nilpotent completion) functors do not satisfy these additional conditions, since Hi{F(ji)/F(n)n;Z) + 0 if /x > 1 and n > 1 (and H2(F(n);Z) ^ 0 [Bsf]). 247
11. ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE
248
Vogel has shown that there is an essentially unique pair (E,r)), where E is a functor from the category of pointed CW-complexes to itself and r] is an idempotent natural transformation, which localizes maps of finite complexes with contractible cofibre. (See [LeD]). Such maps induce 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphisms of fundamental groups, and so F(G) = TVI(EK(G,1)) is a candidate for a universal functor satisfying the conditions of the previous two paragraphs. We shall discuss this functor from a more grouptheoretic point of view, introduced earlier by Gutierrez and Levine.
11.2. The nilpotent completion of a group Let G be a group. The nilpotent completion of G is the inverse limit of the tower of quotients of the lower central series, G — limG/Gfc. The canonical homomorphism from G to G is a monomorphism if and only if G is residually nilpotent, i.e., G^ = 1. If G is finitely generated then G/Gn 2* G/(G)n [Bsf]. The group G is weakly parafree (of rank /x) if it satisfies the following equivalent conditions: (1) G/Gk 9i F(n)/F(jA)k forlG which induces isomorphisms F(/j,)/F(fx)k — G/Gk for 1 < & < oo;
(3) Ffa) - G. It is parafree if moreover it is residually nilpotent. Let L be a //-component n-link with group IT = TTL. If either n > 1 or n = 1 and all the Milnor invariants of L are 0 then it is weakly parafree. The link groups G(i,j) introduced in Chapter 1 are parafree [Ba69]. Every finitely generated .E-group is weakly parafree, by Stallings' Theorem. The Parafree Conjecture is that if G is finitely generated and parafree then H2(G;Z) = 0. The more optimistic Strong Parafree Conjecture is that c.d.G < 2 also. If K
11.3. THE ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE OF A GROUP
249
Conjecture is true if G^+i = G^ for every finitely generated weakly parafree group G [C098]. An automorphism of F{/J) is special if it sends each basis element Xi (for 1 < i < fi) to a conjugate. The set of such automorphisms clearly forms a group, which we shall denote by H(fi). If g\,... g^ are any \i elements of F(/J,) there is an unique automorphism of F(fi) sending X{ to giXig~\ for 1 < i < fi [Le89]. (See Theorem 6 below, which proves the analogous result for the algebraic closure F(fi)). Let KM be the cofibre of the map from V S 1 to K(F(n), 1) induced by the inclusion of F([i) into its nilpotent completion. This space is simply-connected, and its higher homology groups agree with those of F(/x). In particular, ^{K^in)) = H2(F(fx);Z), which is uncountable [Bsf]. As in the definition of the Orr invariants Ok(L; 9) (in §8 of Chapter 10) there are Orr invariants O^L; 6) in •Kn+2{Ku}{y)) for based links L such that n = irL is weakly parafree. A basing 0 : F(/J.) —> 7r determines an isomorphism F(/J,) = n, and the corresponding homomorphism from n to F(/J.) may be realized by a map from X(L) to K(F(fi), 1). This extends to a map from Sn+2 to KW(IJ), which defines the homotopy class O^L-,9). A concordance C between based links L(0) and L(l) is based if there is a homomorphism 6 : F(fi) —> -KC which agrees with the given basings up to composition with conjugations by elements of TTJC. The element Ow(L;6) G 7r„+2(isrw(/i)) is an obstruction to a based link L with weakly parafree group being based-concordant to a boundary link. The special automorphisms of F(/J.) determine self homotopy equivalences of K(F(IJ,), 1), and there is an induced homotopy action of 'H(fJ-) on Ku(y)- Factoring out the action of H(fi) gives a concordance invariant of unbased links. It is not known how large these obstruction groups are, nor whether every element is realized by some based link [Or87]. 11.3. The algebraic closure of a group The notion of algebraic closure of a group was introduced into link theory by Gutierrez [Gu79]. There are various interpretations of this notion in the literature. (See for instance [BDH80]). The
11. ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE
250
particular version that we shall describe is due to Levine, who used it to define a modification of Orr's invariant, which takes values in the homology of a countable group and has the further advantage that all elements of the obstruction group can be realized. (If n > 1 the notion of link must be broadened somewhat). Most of the arguments in this section are from [Le89']. A contractible system of equations in m variables Xi = u>i over a group G is determined by a finite set of words {WJ | 1 < j < m} in the free product G * F(m), such that each word has trivial image in F{m). Let e : G -» G*F(m)/((x^wi | 1 < i < m)) be the canonical homomorphism. (This is a monomorphism if m = 1 and G is torsion free [K193]). If h : G —> H is a homomorphism, a solution under h to such a system is a homomorphism h:G*
F(m)/{(xr1wi
| 1 < i < m)) -> H
such that ho e = h. The group is algebraically closed if every contractible system of equations over G has an unique solution under idG- (In this case h is a retraction and we speak of solutions in G). LEMMA 11.1. Let G be a group. Then G is algebraically closed if whenever f : H —> J is a 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphism of finitely presentable groups and a : H —> G is a homomorphism there is an a' : J —> G such that a'f = a. PROOF. Let {vjj \ 1 < j < m} be a finite subset of G * F(m) determining a contractible system of equations. These words involve only finitely many elements of G. Therefore there is a homomorphism a : F(p) —> G and a contractible system of equations {Wj | 1 < j < m} over F(p) whose image is the given system. Let S = F(p) * F{m)/((x-lWi | 1 < i < m)). Then S has deficiency p and weight p, so the natural homomorphism / : F(p) —> S is 2-connected and normally surjective. Hence there is a unique homomorphism a' : S —> G extending a, which clearly induces a solution to the original system of equations. • The next lemma is easily verified.
11.3. THE ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE OF A GROUP
251
LEMMA 11.2. The inverse or direct limit of a system of algebraically closed groups is algebraically closed. If G is a central extension of H then G is algebraically closed if and only if H is algebraically closed. • It follows easily that nilpotent groups and nilpotent completions of groups are algebraically closed. An algebraic closure of a group G is a homomorphism cfi : G —> H with range an algebraically closed group, and which is universal with respect to such homomorphisms. We shall show next that every finitely presentable group has an algebraic closure. It is convenient to introduce the following notion. A subgroup if of a group G is invisible if it is the normal closure in G of a finite subset and [G, K] = K. The terminology is motivated by the next lemma. LEMMA 11.3. Let G be a group. Every contractible system of equations over G has at most one solution in G if and only if G has no nontrivial invisible subgroup. Let K be an invisible subgroup which is the normal closure in G of {k\,... km}. Then fcj = Wi(k\,... km), where Wi 6 G*F(m) is a product of conjugates of commutators of the form [xi, ], since K — [G, K\. Hence {>(fci),...(km)} is a solution set in H for the system of equations Xi = (u>i(xi,... xm)) G H * F(m), where (j) = (j>*idp(m} is the obvious extension of <j> to a homomorphism from G * F(m) to H * F(m). But this is clearly a contractible system of equations with the trivial solution X{ = 1, for all i. Therefore if every contractible system of equations over G has at most one solution in G the invisible subgroup K must be trivial. Suppose S : xi — u>i is & contractible system over G with two solution sets X{ — gi and X{ = h\. Then X{ = 1 and X{ = gih~ are solution sets for the contractible system S' : X{ = w[, where w[{x\,.. .xm) = u>i(xihi,.. .xmhm)h~l. Now we see that w'^ is a product of conjugates of commutators [£j,a], where a can be any monomial. In fact, since u ^ ( l , . . . 1) = 1 we can first write w\ as a product of conjugates I[^z\arxe^a~l where ar € G. This can be rewritten w[ — (II^f6 r [a r ,x^ r ]67 1 )6 s + i where 6i = 1 and br+\ = PROOF.
252
11. ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE
bTx^r. But since w\ is also contractible over H, 6 s + i = 1. So {g%h~ } are seen to be solutions of a system which displays them as normally generating a nontrivial invisible subgroup. • In particular, if K is an invisible subgroup of a group G and (j> : G —> H is a homomorphism with algebraically closed codomain H then the normal closure of(K) in H is invisible, and so <j>{K) — 1. THEOREM 11.4. Let G be a finitely presentable group. There is a universal homomorphism <j> : G —» G where G is algebraically closed, through which every other homomorphism to an algebraically closed group factors uniquely. Moreover G is countable, and <j> is 2-connected and normally surjective. P R O O F . Enumerate the contractible systems of equations over G as {Sn}n>i. We shall assume that Sn = {x^lWi} where the w\ are words in G * F{Xn) with Xn = {XJ}, and the alphabets Xm and Xn are disjoint if m ^ n. Let Qo = G. Assume that we have defined groups Qk and 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphisms i). : Qk-i -> Qk for 1 < k < n. Let Qn+1 = Qn * F(Xn)/({Sn)). Let Q = lim Qn. Then every contractible system of equations over G has a solution in Q, but the solution need not be unique. Let N be the union of all the invisible subgroups of Q. It is easily seen that the normal closure of the union of two invisible subgroups is again invisible, and so N is an increasing union N = UNf. of invisible subgroups. Let G — Q/N, and let cf> be the composition of the natural homomomorphism from G to Q with projection onto Q/N. It is easily verified that G has no nontrivial invisible subgroups. Hence any contractible system of equations over G has at most one solution in G, by Lemma 11.3. Let S be a contractible system over G and lift S to a system over Q. The finitely many elements of Q involved in the contractible words defining S are themselves solutions of equations S' : yj = Vj(yi,.. .yp) over G. We may rewrite the words u>i as words w^ in G * F(xi) * F(yj), and obtain a system 5" : Xi = w'^yj = Vj over G, which has a solution X{ — gi,yj = hj in Q. The images of these elements in G give a solution to the system S. Hence G
11.3. THE ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE OF A GROUP
253
is algebraically closed. The universal property follows easily as G is generated by solutions of contractible systems of equations over
G.
•
The construction actually shows that G = limP n is the direct limit of a sequence of finitely presentable groups such that the connecting homomorphisms are homologically 2-connected and normally surjective. For let ax,... ap normally generate Nk, and write each a; as a product Wi of conjugates of commutators of the form [a,j, g}. We may choose Qs such that a,- lifts to a'- 6 Qs and w^ lifts to a product w[ of conjugates of commutators of the form [a^g']1*1 in Qs. After increasing s, if necessary, we may assume that a\ = wj in Qs. Let Kk be the normal closure of {a[,... a'p} in Qs. After enlarging Kk and renumbering a subsequence, if necessary, we may assume that ik(Kk) < Kk+i and that Qs = Qk. Let Pn = Qn/Kn for all n > 1. Then Pn is finitely presentable and the natural homomorphism from G to Pn is 2-connected and normally surjective and G = HmP n . Lemma 11.1 and Theorem 11.4 together imply the following corollary. COROLLARY 11.4.1. A 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphism of finitely presentable groups f : G —> H induces an isomorphism f : G —» H of the algebraic closures. • The algebraic closure of a finitely generated perfect group is trivial, but this is not true in general. (Consider G an increasing union of nonabelian free groups, each embedded in the commutator subgroup of the next. Then G = G' and G embeds in G. Moreover G is not even transfinitely nilpotent). We shall show next that this algebraic closure is the group theoretic aspect of the homological localization functor (E, 77) of Vogel. THEOREM
11.5. If G = TTI(X) for some finite complex X then
A contractible system of equations over TT\(EX) corresponds to a map a : W = V^S1 —> EX and a map / : W —> W' = (W V \Jm S1) U mD2 which is normally surjective and (so) PROOF.
11. ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE
254
induces an isomorphism on integral homology. Hence there is a map a' : W —• EX extending a, by the universal property of Vogel's homology localization functor E. It follows easily that 7Ti(EX) is algebraically closed. Let rjx* '• G —> TTI(EX) be the homomorphism of fundamental groups induced by rjx- Then rjx* is normally surjective, and is 2connected since rjx induces isomorphisms on integral homology. As in the remark following Theorem 11.4, this implies that G = TTI(EX).
• It is not known in general whether EK(G, 1) is aspherical. Let H(fi) denote the group of special automorphisms of F(fi) (i.e., those which send each basis element Xi (for 1 < i < fi) to a conjugate). The special automorphisms of F(/x) and F(fi) were determined in [Le89] and [Le89']. T H E O R E M 11.6.
Let
G = F(/J,)
or F(n)
and
let s i , . .
. ^
e
G.
Then there is an unique automorphism of G sending X\ to giX{g~ , for 1 < i < fi. Let 4> • F(fx) —> F(/J,) be the homomorphism defined by 4>(xi) = g{X{g~ , for 1 < i < fi. Since F(fj,) is the algebraically closure of F(/J,), this extends uniquely to an endomorphism 4> of F(/x). If g e F(fi) then F(/j,)U{g, gi,... g^} is contained in a finitely generated subgroup H which is normally generated by F(/x). Now (/>(F(/x)) < H and H is also normally generated by(F{n)). We may write S = 4>{S') for some contractible system S' over F(fx). Since S' has an unique system of solutions in F(/i), the solutions of S are in >(F(/x)), and so g is in (j>(F(/j,)). Hence <j> is surjective. If we now define if) similarly by ip(xi) — gi %igi, for 1 < i < //, we see that $ $ = id, and so 4> is an automorphism. The case of F(fi) is similar. • PROOF.
The following related result of Levine [Le89] is used at one point in Chapter 12.
11.4. COMPLEMENTS ON F(^)
255
LEMMA 11.7. The centralizer in F(/i) of a primitive element x e F(fi) is the cyclic group (x) generated by x. Let Q(l) = 0 and let Q(g) be the nonzero homogeneous term of lowest degree > 0 in the Magnus expansion of g in T^, if g ^ 1. (Thus Q(g) = 0 if and only if g = 1). We may assume that x = x\ and Q(x) = X\. An easy calculation shows that Q([g,h]) = Q(g)Q(h) — Q(h)Q(g). Therefore gx — xg implies that Q{g)X\ = XiQ{g), and so Q(g) = m(Xi) fc for some k > 0. If k > 1 then g G F(n)' and so the image of g in the commutative ring AM must be 1. Hence Q(g) = 0 and so g = 1. If k = 1 then on applying the same argument to gx~m we find that gx~m — 1 and so g £ (x). • PROOF.
11.4. Complements on F(/i) Since the algebraic closureF(fi) is 2-connected # I ( F ( , L Z ) ; Z ) £ Z" and H2(F(fi);Z) = 0, and so F{fi)/F{n)n S* F(/x)/(jP(//)) n , for 1 < n < oo, by Stallings' Theorem. Let C/n be the group of units in T^ = Z((-Xi,... -X"^)) which are congruent to 1 modulo the nth power of the augmentation ideal, and let U = U\. Then U is the inverse limit of the tower of nilpotent quotients {U/Un}, and so is algebraically closed. Hence the Magnus embedding of F(fi) extends to a homomorphism from F(fi) to U < F^ [LeD]. Is this extension a monomorphism? Let T^c D e the Cohn localization of T^ = Z[F(/z)] with respect to the augmentation, as in Chapter 9. The following result of Le Dimet [LD92] is an analogue for F([i) of the fact that the augmentation ideal of F(fi) is free of rank \x as a left T^-module. 11.8. Let v : (f ^cY - • f Mc ®f J(-F(/x)) be the homomorphism defined by f ( 7 i , . . . ,7^) = £7; ® (xi — 1). Then v is an isomorphism of left T^c-modules. THEOREM
The universal properties of Cohn localization of group rings and Vogel localization of spaces imply that the inclusion nw of W = V^S1 into EiV^S1) induces an isomorphism of tfi(F(/x);fMc) with i/i(F(/i);r M c). Since rjw also induces a homomorphism from the sequence obtained by tensoring the augmentation sequence for PROOF.
256
11. ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE
T^ with Tpc to the augmentation sequence for f ^, and since I(F(fi)) is freely generated by the elements x\ — 1, the claim now follows from the 5-Lemma. • As a consequence, F(/J,) admits a free differential calculus with values in A^s, where S = 1 + 1 ^ = {/ € AM | e(f) = 1}. (This is the Cohn localization of Z[F(n)/F(ji)'] = Z[F(ji)/P(jj)'] with respect to the augmentation). For the corresponding homomorphism from (A^s)M to Afts <S>f I(F(p)) is a l s o a n isomorphism, and so we may define derivations <9j by d^E^i(XJ — 1)) = 7*. These have the usual properties; in particular, if g G F{[i) and di(g) — 0 for all i then g e F(n)', while if g G F(fi)" then dt(g) = 0 for all i. Le Dimet uses these to extend the Gassner representations for the pure braid groups to representations for string link groups. (See Chapter 12). The next theorem, due to Vogel [V692], implies that every invariant of boundary links defined in terms of unitary representations may be extended to an invariant of all higher-dimensional links. (See also [Le94] on links and the Atiyah-Patodi-Singer ^-invariant). THEOREM 11.9. Every representation of F(fi) in a compact connected Lie group extends to a representation of F(fi). PROOF. (Sketch). A series u = S n 7 7 G T^ is said to be convergent, of size < c, if there is an a > 0 that |n 7 | < acm for every monomial 7 of length m. The set of convergent series of size < c is a subalgebra of F^. Substitution of convergent series with augmentation 0 into a convergent series gives a convergent series. It is then shown that if w is a convergent series in T M+ i with augmentation 0 and such that the coefficient of X^+i in w is 1 then there is an unique series u G T^ with augmentation 0 such that w(Xi,... X^, u) = 0, and this u is convergent. This analogue of the implicit function theorem is used to show that the image of each element of F(/x) under the Magnus embedding is convergent. Let R(G) denote the set of representations of the group G in the compact connected Lie group J . If G is finitely generated then R(G) is naturally a compact algebraic variety (in the strong topology). In particular, R(F(fi)) is connected and nonsingular. Let Ro(G) be
11.5. OTHER NOTIONS OF CLOSURE
257
the component containing the trivial representation. As F(/JL) is the direct limit of a sequence of 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphisms of finitely presentable groups Gp, by Theorem 11.4, R(F(/J,)) is the inverse limit of the tower of representation varieties {R(Gp)}p>i. Since these are compact it shall suffice to show that the restrictions from RQ(GP) to R(F(/j,)) are surjective, for all p > 1. Convergence of the Magnus expansions is used to show that every representation of F(/j) in GL(m, C) which is sufficiently close to the trivial representation extends to a representation of Gp. The rest of the argument uses algebraic geometry to show that the complexification of this map has odd degree and hence that there are (real) points of Ro(Gp) over every point of R(F(fi)). • 11.5. Other notions of closure Since the algebraic closure 4> '• G —> G is 2-connected G/Gn = G/(G)n for all 1 < n < oo, by Stallings' Theorem, and so G and G have isomorphic nilpotent completions. The residually nilpotent algebraic closure of G is the image G of G in G. (We could also argue that since G is algebraically closed cf> extends to a homomorphism from G to G, with image G). Thus G = G/(G%, is countable and contains G/Gu. If G is finitely presentable is G = G? (The known examples of finitely generated groups G such that G is not residually nilpotent are infinitely related). In particular, F(n) is the image of F(jiz) under the homomorphism extending the Magnus embedding. The argument for Theorem 11.4 implies that F(/x) is a direct limit of finitely generated parafree groups. Hence if the Parafree Conjecture is true then H2(F(/J,);7*) = 0 and F(/i)a;+i = -F,(/x)UJ. If the Strong Parafree Conjecture is true then F(/J.) has homological dimension 2 and so H3(F(fi);Z) = 0 also. Is F(/x) £* F(fx)? Let W(/^) denote the group of special automorphisms of F(fi). It is an immediate consequence of Theorem 11.6 that the special automorphism of F([j) determined by \i elements gi 6 F{y) restricts to an automorphism of F(fj,). Similarly, Lemma 11.7 implies that the centralizers of the generators of F(/J.) in F(/J,) are cyclic.
258
11. ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE
If we relax the requirement in the definition of algebraic closure that the words Wi 6 G*F(m) determining a system of equations have trivial image in F(m), to requiring only that they lie in the kernel of G * F{m) —» F(m) —• F{m)/F(m)' we obtain the notion of acyclic closure. It is not known whether the canonical homomorphism from the algebraic closure to the acyclic closure is an isomorphism. Acyclic closure is closely related to Bousfield's /fZ-localization [DOS89]. A group G is HZ-local if for any 2-connected homomorphism / : H —> J and any homomorphism a: H —• G there is an unique a' : J —> G such that a'f — a. (We do not require that H and J be finitely presentable and / normally surjective). Every HZ-local group is transfinitely nilpotent. The ilZ-localization may be constructed as a transfinite tower. Let 4>\ : G —> G(l) = G/G' be the abelianization. For each ordinal a, suppose that a group G(a) and a homomorphisma : G —• G(a) have been defined. The epimorphism from H2(G(a);Z) to Coke^i^^c*;^)) determines a central extension 0 -> Coker(# 2 (^ Q ;Z)) -> G(a + 1) -> G(a) -> 1 and a lift <j>a+i. If a is a limit ordinal let G(a) be the /fZ-closure of G in lim G(/3), and let 4>a be the corresponding homomorphism. It can be shown that this transfinite construction eventually stabilizes [Bsf]. The groups G(a) are algebraically closed, by transfinite induction (since they are either central extensions or projective limits of algebraically closed groups). Hence HZ-localization factors through the algebraic closure. Direct limits of iJZ-local groups are not usually HZ-\oc&\. 11.6. Orr invariants and
cSHB-links
A F-link is a link L admitting a basing 6 : F(/j,) —> n = irL such that 6 is an isomorphism and (if n = 1) the longitudes have trivial image in TV. (It is not known whether the latter condition is automatic - this is so if F(/x) is residually nilpotent). If 9' is another basing for L then 6' = Oh for some special automorphism of F(fi), and so whether a link is a F-link is independant of the choice of
11.6. ORR INVARIANTS AND
cSHB-UNKS
259
basing. Every link concordant to a F-link is a F-link. Is every link with weakly parafree group an F-link? The map / : X(L) —• K(F(/J,), 1) determined by 9 extends to a map /M '• M(L) —• K(F(/J,), 1) (using the longitude condition, if n = 1). On the other hand, / also extends to a map fs '• -S"^ 2 —> Kac(/j,), where Kac(iu,) is the cofibre of the map from V i ? 1 to K(F(u),l) induced by the inclusion of F(u-) into F(/J,). The maps JM a n d fs together extend to a map fw • W(L) —> Kac(fx), where W(L) is the trace of 0-framed surgery on L, with oriented boundary dW(L) = Sn+2U-M{L). Let Oac(L; 0) be the homotopy class of fs in -rcn+2(Kac{ii)). This is a lift of the Orr invariant Ow(L; 6) (for L a F-link), since nilpotent completion factors through algebraic closure. Let [Oac(L;6)\ be the image of Ou{L;6) in Hn+2(Kac{fJ-)','^') under the Hurewicz homomorphism. Since the images of the fundamental classes of the boundary components of W(L) in Hn+2(W(L);Z) agree we see that [0ac(L;9)] = fs*[Sn+2} = fM*[M(L)] in Hn+2(F(n);Z) = t iJ n +2(K a c(A ))^)- (This modification of the Orr invariant is from [Le89']). This is invariant under based concordance, and is 0 for boundary links. Factoring out the action of H(^) gives a concordance invariant of unbased links. It is not known how large these obstruction groups are, nor whether Hz{F(pL);2) — 0, the case relevant for classical links. (The latter is so if EK{F{n),\) = E^S1) is aspherical). Every element of fl^3(F(/x);Z) is realized by some F-l-link. In [Le89'] it is shown that the following conditions are equivalent, for L a /x-component 1-link: (1) L is cSHB (concordant to a sublink of an homology boundary link); (2) there is a 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphism $ : 7rL —• G, where O is finitely presentable, HziG; Z) = 0, the longitudes of L are in Ker(<&) and [M(L)] has image 0 inH3(G;Z); (3) L is a F-link and [Oac(L; 9)} — 0 for some (and hence any) basing 6.
260
11. ALGEBRAIC CLOSURE
Is there always such a homomorphism $ to a group G of cohomological dimension < 2? Every SHB link is a finite .E-link, by the argument of Theorem 1.14. The 2-complex corresponding to a presentation of maximal deficiency for a finite E'-group is a subcomplex of a contractible 2-complex. If the Whitehead Conjecture is true every such group has cohomological dimension < 2, and hence every finite £-link is cSHB [Le89]. Is every cSHB link a finite £-link? If L is a null-concordant 1-link are all the longitudes of L in the intersection of the terms of the transfinite derived series? (See [CC-98]).
CHAPTER 12
Disc Links One serious difficulty in attempting to classify links up to concordance is that the set of concordance classes does not have a natural group structure. Le Dimet, working in higher dimensions, and subsequently Levine and Habegger and Lin, in the classical case, have shown that one should first study disc links (or "string links"). This chapter sketches some of their work. 12.1. Disc links and string links It shall be convenient here to identify the n-disc Dn with the product (D 1 )". Let j ^ : {l,.../x} —> D2 be the embedding given by j^(k) — i e 27nfc /^ for 1 < k < /i. If n > 1 the standard trivial (n,n)-disc link is E^ = j M x idDn : /j£>n - • Dn+2 = D2 x Dn. A (n, n)-disc link is a locally flat embedding E : fiDn -> Dn+2 such that E\tlSn-i = E^^l^gn-i. In the classical case 5° has two components and we allow a more general possibility. A /i-component string link is a locally fiat embedding E : /xD1 —> D3 such that E(-l,k) = (-l,j M (fc)) and E(l,k) = (l,^(<7(fe))) for 1 < k < /x, where a G S^ is a permutation of { 1 , . . . //}. It is pure if it is a (1, ^ ) disc link, i.e., if a — id. A string link such that projection onto the last coordinate is a local homeomorphism is a braid. (See [Bir]). It is already clear in the 1-component case that, in general, string links are not isotopic to braids. The notions of exterior and group and the equivalence relations isotopy, concordance, /-equivalence and link-homotopy extend in an obvious manner, with the proviso that all /-equivalences and homotopies (etc.) are constant on the boundary. (We take (*, 0) € 5 1 x Dn as basepoint, where * e S1 = 3D2 is not a root of unity). If n > 1 261
262
12. DISC LINKS
a fixed choice of meridians for the trivial link El^gn-i determines a canonical set of meridians for E. In the string link case there are two natural meridianal homomorphisms to consider, namely the inclusions e± of Do = X(jfj,) C -D2 as the top and bottom of X(E). (In the (1, ii)-disc link case we may define meridian-longitude pairs. See §2 below). The inclusion of V^S 1 into X(E) determined by the meridians induces an isomorphism on homology, and so these spaces have equivalent homological localizations. We may define standard spanning surfaces for EQ '** by setting Uk(t,d) = ((3±*)e27rifc/^,d) for all 1 < k < /i and {t,d) € Dn+l = D1 x Dn. Let Wk = Sn+1 n dUk(Dn+1), for all 1 < Jfc < //. A (n, /z)-disc link E is boundary if it extends to an embedding of fi disjoint orientable hypersurfaces Vk such that dVk — Ek U Wk, for all 1 < k < /x, where Ek is the kth component of E. A string link is boundary if it is a boundary (l,ju)-disc link. Taking the pairwise boundary connected sum of two disc links (stacking with respect to the last coordinate) defines an operation t] which makes the set of ambient isotopy classes of such links into a monoid with identity represented by the trivial (n,/x)-disc link. When n — 1 this monoid contains the group P^ of pure braids on /i strings as a subgroup of the group of invertible elements. This is in fact the full group of invertible elements. (See §3 below). Stacking also defines a multiplication on the set of //-component string links, for which the group of invertible elements is the braid group B^. A colouring of a string link is a partition of the index set { 1 , . . . //} such that both ends of each string have the same colour, i.e., are images of points in the same subset. The set of string links with a given colouring is closed under stacking. Sending a string link to the permutation a of its endpoints defines an epimorphism from the monoid of /x-component string links to the symmetric group 5 M . The set of concordance classes of (n, /x)-disc links is a group Cntfi, with inverse given by changing the signs of the last coordinate in both domain and range. If \i — 1 this is just the n-dimensional knot concordance group C n , and so is abelian. A straightforward geometric argument (similar to a well known argument for the commutativity
12.2. LONGITUDES
263
of the higher homotopy groups of a space) shows that Cn^ is also abelian if n > 1 [LeD]. However the natural homomorphism from Pp to C\^ is injective (see §3 below) and so C\ylx is not abelian, if /i > 2. Is Ci^ abelian? There is a corresponding notion of boundary concordance. The set B(n,//) of boundary concordance classes of boundary (n, |u)-disc links is a group, and is abelian if n > 2 [LeD]. Fix iorientation preserving homeomorphisms hn± : Dn —> D"± onto the upper and lower hemispheres of Sn = D " U D™ which agree on 5 n _ 1 . The closure of the (n, /z)-disc link E is the yu-component n-link L(E) = h^n+2)+ °EU /i( n+ 2)_ o EQ'M. Closure maps the group C n / i onto the set Cn{^) and maps the group B(n,^) onto the set C n (F(/x)). (The latter function is a homomorphism if n > 2). Composition with the surjection from Ci(F(fj,)) to G(/J,, — 1) of [Ko87] gives an epimorphism from B(l,/x) to G(/x, —1) [deC99]. A d- base for a ^-component link L is an embedding of D2 in Sn+2 such that D meets Li transversely in the point j M (i) with intersection number + 1 , for 1 < i < /x. The closure of a string link has a canonical d-base. This induces bijections between the isotopy classes and homotopy classes (respectively) of string links and of d-based 1links. Other, weaker notions of basing have been considered [Le88"], [HL90]. The weakest form of basing is a choice of meridians. 12.2. Longitudes Let £ be a (n, /x)-disc link with exterior X(E) and group nE — 7n(X(£)). Then Hi(X(E);Z) £* Z" and H2{X{E);Z) = 0, and the inclusion of the meridians determines a 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphism from F(/j,) to TTE. The natural homomorphism from irE to nL(E) is a surjection, and is an isomorphism if n > 1. If E is a string link then nE has deficiency /i, and nL(E) S* nE/((e+*(g) = e*_( 5 ),V 5 e F(/x)», by the Van Kampen Theorem. (Here we connect e±(*) to the basepoint (*,0) via paths in {*} x D1). If E is a (l,/x)-disc link we may define meridian-longitude pairs {(mi,li)}. Let Ni be a regular neighbourhood of the ith component Ei. Let sf be the arcs from (*,0) to each end of dNi in X{E\lisa) C
264
12. DISC LINKS
S2 = d(D2xD1) given by the intersection of X(E\^so) with the plane through (*,0) and (j M (z),±l), for 1 < i < /i. Let m; = s~.6j.(s~) _1 , where b{ is a (suitably oriented) loop around the bottom end of N{ and k = s^".pi.(s~) _1 , where pi is a parallel of i?j (running from top to bottom, and chosen so that li is null homologous in X(Ei)). The kernel of the natural homomorphism from TTE to nL(E) is the normal closure of the subgroup generated by {[mj,Zj] | 1 < % < / / } . (This is straightforward, on observing that Pi.bi.(pi)~x is homotopic to a loop around the top end of Ni). Let Ak C d(D2 x D1) be the arc connecting e_jM(fc) to e+j^k) formed by radii to e±(S1) and the arc {e2nik^} x D1, for 1 < k < fi, and let OJJ be a (based) loop around the boundary of a regular neighbourhood of Ai in S2, for 1 < i < fi. Then TTI(S2 - UAt) = F(/x — 1) is generated by such loops, with the single relation LTaj = 1. Since [m;,/;] is homotopic to ai in X(E) we obtain the relation U[mi,li] = 1 [Le88"]. Let li and Ij be the images of Zj in TTE = F(/x) and 7T.E = F(n), respectively, for 1 < i < p,. Then If is the image of li under the natural homomorphism from TTE to nE, and so lies in the subgroup 7f = F(fi). Levine defines the Milnor invariants of E as the images 7j [Le88"]. If L = L(E) is the closure of a (1, /i)-disc link E and 7r = rcL the longitudes of L are in 7rg if and only if the meridians determine an isomorphism F(p)/F(p)q+i if and only if the Milnor invariants li are all in F{^i)q. In particular, if E is a pure braid irL(E) has a presentation (xi, 1 < i < p \ [wi,Xi], 1 < i < p), where Wi represents the ith longitude, for 1 < i < \i. A (n, /x)-disc link £ is a boundary disc link if the canonical meridianal homomorphism from F(fx) to TTE induces an isomorphism F(n) = IIE/(-KE)W. When n — 1 both inclusions e± of DQ as the top and bottom of X{E) must induce the same isomorphism. The meridianal homomorphism then has an unique splitting. 12.3. Concordance and the Artin representation If E is a braid X(E) collapses to Do, and so the meridianal homomorphisms e± are isomorphisms. The Artin representation of
12.3. CONCORDANCE AND THE ARTIN REPRESENTATION
265
B^ is the homomorphism Ar : B^-* Aut(F([i)) denned by Ar(E) = e^*e_*. The image of the ith standard generator Gi of B^ is the automorphism which fixes the basis elements Xj for j ^ i or z + 1 , and sends Xi to Xi+\ and Xj+i to x~+lXiXi+\. The Artin representation is faithful, and its image consists of the automorphisms of F(fx) which preserve the product x\... x^ and send each basis element x\ to a conjugate of xa^, for some permutation a G 5^ [Bir]. The image of the pure braid group P^ is the subgroup Auto(F(fx)) consisting of such automorphisms of F(/j.) for which a = I. If E 6 P^ then Ar{E){xi) = w~1XiWi, where wi represents the ith longitude, for 1 < i < fi. (The ith word Wi is uniquely determined by the condition that it have exponent sum 0 in the letter X{). Hence if E is nontrivial some Wi ^ 1 in F(/J.) and so some /x-invariant of L(E) is nonzero. The pure braid groups PM are residually nilpotent, by the following result of Ohkawa [Oh82]. THEOREM 12.1. The pure braid group P^ is residually a finite p-group, for all primes p. Let p be a prime and let rq(F(/j,);p) be the qth term of the restricted lower central series for F(/x)). Let P$ be the set of pure /x-component braids E such that Ar(E)(g) = g mod r g (F(/x);p). Then P^ is a normal subgroup of B^, and ^q>\P^q = 1, since free groups are residually finite p-groups (r\q>iFq(F(iJ,);p) = 1; see 6.1.9 of [Rob]) and Ar is injective. As an easy induction on q shows that P^,/P^q is a finite p-group for all q > 1, the result follows. • PROOF.
Ohkawa observed that E G PJ% if and only if fii(L(E)) = 0 mod (j>) for all multi-indices / of length |/| < q, and used the injectivity of the mod-(p) analogue of the Magnus embedding. The intersection over all primes gives the subgroup Pm — C\pP^q, which consists of pure braids E such that p,i(L(E)) = 0 for all multi-indices / of length |/| < q. Analogous representations are central to the work of Habegger and Lin. They define the "universal" Milnor invariant of a (1, /x)-disc link as its image under the Artin representation, and argue that the
266
12. DISC LINKS
indeterminacy of the classical Milnor invariants arises in representing the link as the closure of a (1, /i)-disc link. Let E be a (l,/u)-disc link. The inclusions e± : DQ —> X(E) induce 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphisms from F(fi) to TTE. Let An(E) = eljl^e_* be the corresponding automorphism of F(fi)/F(fx)n+i. It is immediate that An(E\\E') = An(E)An(E'). If E and E are concordant (1, /x)-disc links then Stallings' Theorem (applied to the exterior of the concordance) implies that An(E) = An(E). The level-n Artin representation is the induced homomorphism An : C\^ —» Aut(F(n)/F(/j,)n+i). Since An(E) conjugates each meridian by the corresponding longitude and preserves the element represented by dD2, the image of An lies in the subgroup Auto(F([i)IF(fj,)n+i) consisting of the automorphisms which preserve the product x\... x^ and send each basis element a;, to a conjugate. There is a natural homomorphism from Auto(Fdj,)/F({i)n+2) to Auto(F(iJ,)/F(ii)n+i), which is easily seen to be surjective, and its kernel Kn(/j,) is central. Thus Auto(F(fi)/F(/j,)n+i) is nilpotent of class n. The level-n Artin representations are surjective, by Theorem 1.1 of [HL98]. The proof is by induction on n, and involves a string theoretic analogue of Orr's construction of links realizing given Milnor invariants. (One constructs a map from D2 x D 1 to the space obtained by adjoining 2-cells to K(F(/j,)/F(n)n+i) along a meridian basis. The string link is then obtained as the transverse inverse image of the midpoints of the 2-cells). A further argument using the fact that H2(F(/J,);Z) is 0 (see Theorem 11.4) gives a surjective representation of C\^ onto Auto(F(n)). (This was constructed earlier in Chapter I.§3.3 of [LeD]). This representation is determined by the images of the longitudes in F(fi). Conversely, it determines their images li in F([i), by Lemma 11.7, which implies that the centralizers of the generators of F(/J,) in F(n) are cyclic. Every automorphism of F(/J,) extends uniquely to an automorphism of F(/i), and the representation of C\^ onto Auto(F([t)) extends Ar\p^. Hence the natural homomorphism from P^ to C\^ is
12.3. CONCORDANCE AND THE ARTIN REPRESENTATION
267
injective. The image of Auto(F(n)) in Auto(F(fi)) is a proper subgroup (see Theorem 11.6) and so there are pure string links which are not concordant to braids. (Le Dimet gives examples of 2-component pure string links which are not /-equivalent to pure braids). We may now sketch the argument of [HL98] which identifies the units of the (1, /x)-disc link monoid as the pure braids. Suppose that E and E' are (l,/z)-disc links such that E\\E' is isotopic to EQ,IX. It follows easily from Van Kampen's Theorem that •KE = F(fi). Hence the Artin representation of E is in the image of Auto(F(/j,)) and so there is a pure braid B such that the Artin representation of E\[B~l is trivial. But then each longitude of E\\B~l has trivial image in ir(E^B~l) and so bounds a disc in X(E\\B~1). Hence this string link is trivial and so E is isotopic to B. Habegger and Lin give a general structure theorem (Theorem 2.2 of [HL98]) which applies to various equivalence relations coarser than isotopy, including concordance and link-homotopy (but not including isotopy itself, unless \i = 1). Under suitable hypotheses on the equivalence relation ~ the operation \\ induces a group multiplication on on the set SL(fi)/ ~ of equivalence classes of (l,/x)-disc links. If we regard a string link as a tangle in the upper (respectively, lower) half ball, stacking defines a left (respectively, right) action of SL(2/J,)/ ~ on SL(fj,)/ ~ . Let SR(fx; ~) be the stabilizer of EQ'^ under the right action. The set of equivalence classes of \icomponent links is then the orbit space of the left action of SR(fi; ~ ) on SL(fi)/ ~ . Their main result for link concordance is as follows. [HL98] The group C\t2y, acts on the set C\^ (on the left and on the right). The stabilizers of the identity under the left and right actions agree. Let S(/j,) be this common stabilizer. Then closure induces a bijection from the set of left S(/J,) orbits in Ci)M to C\ (fi). In particular, a pure string link is null concordant if and only if its closure is null concordant. • THEOREM.
The concordance classification of 1-links remains far from being settled. Even in the knot theoretic case there are only partial invariants known.
268
12. DISC LINKS
The intersection of 5 (/x; ~) with P^ acts on the set of boundary string links, and this action passes to an action on the cobordism group B(l,fi) [deC99]. (This paper also gives a criterion for two boundary pure string links to have boundary-concordant closures). 12.4. Homotopy The hypotheses of the structure theorem were established for the case of link-homotopy in [HL90]. This paper gives an algorithmic approach to describing the set of link-homotopy classes of closed links. As in §3 above, Stallings' Theorem gives rise to a representation of the group LH(fi) of link-homotopy classes of (1, /x)-disc links in Auto(RF(n)), the group of automorphisms of the reduced free group RF(fi) which send each basis element Xi to a conjugate and preserve the product xi.-.x^. This representation is an isomorphism, by Theorem 1.7 of [HL90]. The first step in the proof is to show that the kernel of the projection of LH(fi) onto LH(fj, — 1) given by omitting the last string is isomorphic to RF(fi — 1) and hence that LH(n) is a semidirect product RF(p — 1) x LH(/J, — 1). (This is essentially due to Goldsmith, who defined the homotopy braid group and gave a presentation for such groups [Go74]). Since there are analogous decompositions P^ = F(n — 1) XJ P^-i for the pure braid groups an easy induction shows that the natural homomorphism from P^ to LH(fj,) is an epimorphism. In fact LH(JJ.) may be identified with the group of link-homotopy classes of pure braids on the same number of strings. If a 6 LH(/J,) is decomposed as a = 9g with 9 € LH(/J, — 1) and g G RF(/J,— 1) then a partial conjugate of a is an element of the form Ohghr1, where h G RF(fi-l) also. Conjugate string links determine link-homotopic closed links, since cyclically permuted products of string links yield the same closed link. Since partial conjugation corresponds to conjugating one component of the closed link in the link group of the complementary closed link, partially conjugate string links also determine link-homotopic closed links. Conversely, if the closures of two string links are link-homotopic then the string links
12.5. MILNOR INVARIANTS AGAIN
269
are equivalent under the equivalence relation generated by conjugacy and partial conjugacy. The analysis of this equivalence relation in [HL90] involves a Markov-type theorem, using moves suggested by Levine, which do not change the number of strings (in contrast to the classical Markov moves). 12.5. Milnor invariants again Habegger and Lin gave also an algebraic version of their structure theorem. Define homomorphisms q : F(2/J,) —> F(fi), zo : F(fx) —•* F(2fj.) and z'i : F(fi) -> F(2//) by q(xi) = i0(xi) = xh q(x2^+i-i) = x~ and ii(xi) = Xfy+i-n for 1 < i < //. We shall use the same symbols for the corresponding maps between nilpotent quotients. If a e Auto(F(fj,)/F(fi)n+i) let a(xi) — a(xi) and Z(xil+i) = x^+i, for 1 < i < fx. If A € Auto(F(2/j,)/F(2n)n+i) then atj = qaAij is an automorphism of F(/x)/F(^) n + i, for j = 0 and 1. Then a.A — <*i ato and A.a = (a~1A~1)~1 determine right and left actions of Auto(F(2/j,)/F(2iJ,)n+i) on the set Auto(F(fi)/F(fi)n+i), which are compatible with the geometrically defined actions of C\$,\J. o n Ci,/i via the level-n Artin representation. The results in this section are all from [HL98]. LEMMA 12.2. Let j n = idc, where G = F(fj,)/F(/j.)n, and let and S^d-i) be the stabilizers of j n + i under the right and left actions (respectively) of Auto(F(2fj,)/F(2fi)n+i). Then
S*~([JL)
(1) S*fr) = 5^/x); (2) the image of S*(ji) in AutQ(F(2fi)/F{2fi)n) is S ^ / x ) ; (3) S^(fi) acts unipotently on the set Auto(F(fi)/F([j,)n+i). PROOF. The proofs of (1) and (2) are straightforward calculations. If k e Kn-i(/j.) and A 6 S^(fi) then kA — Ak. Hence k.A — l.kA = l.Ak = l.fc = k, and so the action of S^(fx) on the subgroup if n _i(/x) is trivial. It follows that if a € Auto(F(/j,)/F(iJ,)n+i) induces j r for some r < n then a.A and a have the same image in Aut0(F{ij)/F{n)r+i). Hence (3) holds also. •
12. DISC LINKS
270
THEOREM 12.3. Let E be a (l,p,)-disc link with closure L = L(E). Then An(E) = 1 if and only if all Milnor invariants of L of length < n vanish.
Let 9 : F{p)/F{p)n+l ^ nE/(irE)n+1 -» nL/(nL)n+1 be the homomorphism induced by the inclusion of the meridians. Then each condition is equivalent to 6 being an isomorphism. • PROOF.
COROLLARY 12.3.1. / / all Milnor invariants of L(E) of length < n vanish An+i(E) € Kn(p) is an invariant of the concordance class ofL(E). The group Kn{p) is isomorphic to the group o/(l,/z)disc links whose jl-invariants of length < n vanish modulo sum with links whose Jl-invariants of length < n + 1 vanish. Hence the number of linearly independent Jx-invariants of length n + 1 is the rank of
KM.
•
Let h& : (F(p,)n/F(p)n+1y -» F{p)n+1/F(p)n+2 be the homomorphism which sends ( y i , . . . y^) to II[y,, xi\. Then hfc is onto, and Kn(p) = Ker(^n)- (The isomorphism sends ( y i , . . . y^) to the automorphism which conjugates each Xi by yi, for 1 < i < p). Thus Kn(p) has rank pNn(p) — Nn+i(p), where Nn(p) is the rank of F(p)n/F(p)n+i. (Let mb be the Mobius function. Then Nn(p) — l n d n- i:d\nmb{d)ii / . See page 330 of [MKS]). The number of linearly independent /2-invariants of length n + 1 was first calculated in [Or89]. The p, invariants of pure string links are all of finite type [Li97]. 12.6. The Gassner representation An automorphism cj> € Auto(F(p)) induces the identity on the abelianization F(p)/F(p)' = Z^, and hence on its group ring A^. Hence it also induces an automorphism of the A^-modules A(F(p)) — A,, ® f I(F(p)) and B(F(p)) = F(p)'/F(p)". The localisation of A(F(p)) with respect to the multiplicative system S = 1 + 1 ^ is free of rank p, and so determines a p x /i-matrix p{4>) over A^s, with entries [p{4>)]ij — dj(cj)(xi)), by the work of Le Dimet [LD92]. (See Theorem 11.8). The function p is a homomorphism (essentially by the chain rule) and composition with the Artin representation gives the Gassner representation of the (1, /x)-disc link monoid. Since the
12.6. THE GASSNER REPRESENTATION
271
automorphisms in Auto(F(fi)) preserve the product xi.-.x^ this representation is equivalent to the sum of one of rank \i — 1 with the trivial rank 1 representation. (In the case of pure braids the representation has values in GL(fi, AM). The argument of [Bir] for this case applies without essential change to string links). Our exposition of these representations is taken from [KLW01]. LEMMA 12.4. Let X be the exterior of a (l,/J.)-disc link E, and fix a basepoint * in dD2. Let P = {*} x D1. Then the inclusions e± : Do —> X as the top and bottom of X induce isomorphisms #i(£> 0 ; A„s) = ( A ^ ) " - 1 = Hx(X; AMs) and Hi (Do, *; A»s) = (A^sT = H^X, P; A M s). Let C* = C*(X,L>±;AM) = C*{X',D'±) be the chain complex of the maximal abelian cover of the pair (X, D± — e±(Do))Then Z ®A C* is acyclic and so C*s = AMs ®A C* is also acyclic, by Nakayama's Lemma. Hence the maps e± induce isomorphisms on the absolute homology modules, and similarly on the relative homology. • PROOF.
The Gassner representation of E is ry(E) = i7i(e+) - 1 iJi(e_) in Aut(Hi(Do,*; A^s)) = GL(//, A^s). The reduced Gassner representation is the corresponding automorphism j(E) of H\(DQ; A M s). It is immediate from the definitions that these representations are homomorphisms. (Using cohomology instead of homology gives the dual representation, with respect to the Kronecker pairing). We may use the total linking number infinite cyclic cover instead to define the (reduced) Burau representation TJ, with values in GL(n, As) (where As = Z[t, t~l, (t - l ) - 1 ] ) , for any /i-component string link. As automorphisms of F(/i) which conjugate and permute the basis elements preserve the homomorphism r : F(fj,) —> Z defined by r(xi) = 1 for 1 < i < JJL, they induce automorphisms of A^ = As ®f I(F(fi)). These representations are homomorphisms on the full /^-component string link monoid. (We may also construct representations of string links with fixed colourings, interpolating between the Burau and Gassner representations).
272
12. DISC LINKS
The group of the closure L = L(E) of a braid E is TVL = F(^)/((g^1Ar(E)((g)))). The Artin representation Ar induces the Gassner representation on Hx(F(n); A^), and it follows easily that i" — j(E) is a presentation matrix for A{L). There is a similar connection between the Burau representation on Hi(F(fi);Ai) = K/K' (where K = Ker(T)) and the reduced Alexander module: I — r'y(E) is then a presentation matrix for Ared(L). (See Chapter 3 of [Bir]). These results extend readily to string links. If L — L(E) for E a ^-component string link TTL = irE/((e+(g) = e_{g),\/g € F(/x))). If E is pure then / — -y(E) is a presentation matrix for A(L)s, by a Mayer-Vietoris argument. Similarly, if E is an arbitrary string link then I — T'y(E) is a presentation matrix for Are^(L)s12.5. If E(0) and E(l) are I-equivalent (l,fi)-disc then^{E{0)) = 7 ( £ ( l ) ) . LEMMA
links
PROOF. Let £ be an /-equivalence between £(0) and E(l). The inclusions of X(E(0)) and X(E(1)) into X{£) induce isomorphisms on homology with coefficients A^s, as in the previous lemma. The compositions of these isomorphisms with H\(e+) are identical, as are the compositions with i7i(e_). The lemma follows easily. • In particular, the Gassner representation factors through C\ttl [LD92]. It is also trivial for boundary string links. LEMMA 12.6. Let E be a boundary string link. Then ^y(E) = 1 and ^(E) = 1.
If E is boundary there is a map f : X -+ Do such that fe+ = / e _ = ido0 and f(P) — *. Hence the homomorphisms H\{f) on relative and absolute homology modules are isomorphisms, so PROOF.
iJ 1 (e + )- 1 F 1 (e_) = / / 1 ( / ) ^ 1 ( / ) - 1 = 1. Let (, )s be the intersection pairing into AMs. This is skew-hermitean, and Aps) = 0- The following result shows representation is unitary with respect to
• of H\(DQ\ A ^ S ) with itself is perfect since H*(dDo : that the reduced Gassner this pairing.
12.7. Let E be a (l,/j,)-disc link. Then (j(E)(a),Tr(E)(P))s = {a,P)s, for all a,(3 e
THEOREM
H^DQ^^).
12.7. HIGH DIMENSIONS
273
PROOF. Let d±X = e±(Do), and let (, )xs be the intersection pairing of Hi(X, d+X U <9_X;AMs) with Hi(X;A^,s)Given a e Hi(Do; A^s) there is a class Aa in H2(X,d+X U d_X; A^s) whose image in H\(d+X; Ans)®Hi(d-X; A^s) under the connecting homomorphism is 5(Aa) = tf(E)(a), -a). Then (i(E)(a),i(E)(P))s = (A Q ,ifi( e + )(/3)) X 5 = {AcH^e-W^xs = (a,(3)s. D There is a similar result for the Burau representation and the localized intersection form on the homology of the infinite cyclic cover DQ. This unitarity was first observed for braids by Squier, who showed that the images of the standard generators of Bn are unitary reflections with respect to an algebraically defined hermitean formon(K/K')®A(A[s]/(s2-t)) [Sq84]. Goldschmidt embedded L>J 3 in R and used linking numbers to give a geometric interpretation of this construction [Go90]. (The Squier-Goldschmidt pairing may be related to the intersection form via the formula £(a+, /?) — £(a_, /?) = (a,(3), for 1-cycles a,/3 on DQ. It turns out to be (s — s)'1 — s/(t — l) times this form, and thus is indeed hermitean rather than skewhermitean). He derived a sesquilinear pairing with values in Q(i)/A on TAred(L(E)), for E a braid. (It is not clear how it is related to the Blanchfield pairing. The terminology in [Go90] differs from ours. In particular, his "Alexander module" is H\(X; Ai) = H\(XT\'L)). Let r be a compact connected Lie group. Le Dimet uses Vogel's extension theorem (Theorem 11.9) to construct a representation of Auto(F(/j,)) in the group of germs of diffeomorphisms at the identity of r M , and shows that the representation obtained as the differential of the restriction to a maximal torus of V decomposes as the direct sum of the trivial representation and copies of the Gassner representation [LD98]. 12.7. High dimensions One difficulty in using homology surgery for general links is that there is no universal candidate for a target space or group. Le Dimet overcame this problem for disc links (in principle), using the (Vogel) localization of V^S 1 as a universal target for reference
274
12. DISC LINKS
maps for (n, /x)-disc links; algebraically, the free group F(fx) is enlarged to its algebraic closure F(fi). Fix a homotopy equivalence s : X £ + 1 = X{EQ~1^) -* V S 1 , and let r/v = r)^si. Let G n + 1 be the set of homotopy classes (rel dX™+l) of maps h : X£+1 -> E^^S1) such that h\dXn+i = T/vS^n+i. Since X™+1 = X™ x [0,1] we may add and invert such homotopy classes by stacking and flipping with respect to the [0,1] factor, and so Gn+i has a natural group structure, which is abelian if n > 2. Let r)X(E) '• X(E) -* E^^S1) be the Vogel localization of X(E). The Le Dimet homotopy invariant of an (n,/x)-disc link E is the element d([E]) = T)x(E)\xn+1x{o} e ^n+iThis depends only on the concordance class of E, and d is a homomorphism of abelian groups if n > 1. The set G n +i may also be described as the set of homotopy classes of maps from \^(Sn x 5 1 ) to E^^S1) which induce the inclusion (j) : F(fi) —»• F(/J) on fundamental groups. The bijection sends a map h as above to h U s. Since dX(E) = dX™+2 = ^(Sn x S 1 ), we may then define d([E]) as the class of f\dX(E)t where / : X(E) —> E^^S1) is a homology equivalence such that Mf\ax(E)) =• F(IJL) - F(/x). (See [LM093]). Let $ be the diagram Z[F(ji)] - ^ - v Z[F(/i)]
Z[F(/x)] — ^
Z.
The set <Sn+2 of homology equivalences of bounded (n + 2)-manifolds with X™+2 (rel homeomorphisms of the boundary) may be identified with the homology surgery obstruction group r ^ + 3 ( $ ) (if n > 4), and there is a long exact sequence . . . it +3 (<&) -> Cn,» - Gn+l -> • • • - G 4 -
I*(*)
An (n,/x)-disc link (with n > 4) is concordant to a 5 i 7 B link if and only if it has trivial Le Dimet homotopy invariant [LM093]. This is always the case if E^^S1) is aspherical, for then the groups Gn are trivial.
12.7. HIGH DIMENSIONS
275
The group B(n, /x) may be identified with a T-group if n > 4. In particular, B(2q, /x) = 0 for all q > 2 and so boundary disc links of even dimension > 4 are nullconcordant. Closure determines a bijection from Cn^ to the set of concordance classes of weakly based links C'n^, and forgetting basings induces a bijection from the set of left 7^(/x) orbits in Cn^ to Cn(fi). Actual computation of these groups and actions remains a difficult problem. (See [LeD]). A 2(?-link L is null concordant if there is a 2-connected, normally surjective homomorphism from irL to a finitely presentable group G such that Hi(G; Z) = 0 for 1 < i < 2q + 2. (Note that all string link groups have the latter property). This was proven for q > 2 by De Meo, using homological surgery [De81], and for q = 1 by Cochran (under slightly weaker hypotheses on G), using Spin cobordism arguments [Co84]. In particular, even dimensional SHB links are slice. It is an open question whether this is so for all even dimensional links. More generally, one may ask whether every high dimensional link is concordant to a SHB link.
This page is intentionally left blank
Bibliography Books [AM] Atiyah, M. and MacDonald, I.G. Introduction to Commutative Algebra, Addison-Wesley, Reading - Menlo Park - London - Don Mills (1969). [Bai] Bailey, J.L. Alexander Invariants of Links, Ph.D. thesis, University of British Columbia (1977). [BM] Bass, H. and Morgan, J.W. (editors) The Smith Conjecture, Academic Press, New York - London (1984). [Bir] Birman, J. Braids, Links and Mapping Class Groups, Annals of Mathematics Study 82, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1974). [Bou] Bourbaki, N. Commutative Algebra, Addison-Wesley/Hermann et Cie, Boston - Paris (1972). [Bsf] Bousfield, A.K. Homological Localizations for Groups and Tr-Modules, Memoir 186, American Mathematical Society, Providence (1977). [Bre] Bredon, G. Introduction to Compact Transformation Groups, Academic Press, New York - London (1972). [BZ] Burde, G. and Zieschang, H. Knots, de Gruyter Studies in Mathematics 5, W. de Gruyter, Berlin - New York (1985). [Coc] Cochran, T.D. Derivatives of Links, Memoir 427, American Mathematical Society, Providence (1990). [Coh] Cohn, P.M. Free Rings and their Relations, Academic Press, New York - London (1985). [CF] Crowell, R.H. and Fox, R.H. Introduction to Knot Theory, Ginn and Co., Boston (1963). Second revised edition, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 57, Springer-Verlag (1977). [EN] Eisenbud, D. and Neumann, W.D. Three-dimensional Link Theory and Invariants of Plane Curve Singularities, Annals of Mathematics Study 110, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1985). 277
278
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[Fen] Fenn, R. (editor) Low Dimensional Topology London Mathematical Society Lecture Note Series 95, Cambridge University Press (1985). [For] Fort, M.K. (Jr) (editor) Topology of 3-Manifolds and Related Topics Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.(1962). [FQ] Freedman, M.H. and Quinn, F. Topology of 4-Manifolds, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1990). [Hau] Hausmann, J.-C. (editor) Knot Theory, Proceedings, Plans-sur-Bex, Switzerland 1977, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 685, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1978). [Hem] Hempel, J. 3-Manifolds, Annals of Mathematics Study 86, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1976). [Hil] Hillman, J.A. Alexander Ideals of Links, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 895, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1981). [Hi2] Hillman, J.A. S-Knots and their Groups, Australian Mathematical Society Lecture Series 5, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge - New York - Melbourne (1989). [Kai] Kaiser, U. Link Theory in Manifolds, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1669, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1997). [Kal] Kawauchi, A. (editor) Knots 90, W. de Gruyter, Berlin (1992). [Ka2] Kawauchi, A. A Survey of Knot Theory, Birkhauser Verlag, Basel - Boston - Berlin (1996). [Kaz] Kazez, W.H. (editor) Geometric Topology, American Mathematical Society /International Press (1997). [KN] Koschorke, U. and W.D.Neumann (editors) Differential Topology, Siegen Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1350, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1988). [Lam] Lam, T.Y Serre's Conjecture, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 635, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1978). [Lan] Lang, S. Algebra, Addison-Wesley, Reading - Menlo Park - London - Don Mills (1965). [LeD] Le Dimet, J.-Y. Cobordisme d'Enlacements de Disques, Mem. Soc. Math. France 32 (1988). [Les] Lescop, C. Global Surgery Formula for the Casson-Walker Invariant,
BIBLIOGRAPHY
279
Annals of Mathematics Study 140, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1996). [Lev] Levine, J. Algebraic Structure of Knot Modules, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 772, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1980). [Lom] Lomonaco, S.J., Jr, (editor) Low Dimensional Topology, Contemporary Mathematics 20, American Mathematical Society, Providence (1983). [McC] McCleary, J. User's Guide to Spectral Sequences, Mathematics Lecture Series 12, Publish or Perish, Inc., Wilmington (1985). [MKS] Magnus, W., Karras, A. and Solitar, D. Combinatorial Group Theory, Interscience Publishers, New York - London - Sydney (1966). Second revised edition, Dover Publications inc, New York (1976). [Mat] Matlis, E. Torsion-free Modules, University of Chicago Press, Chicago - London (1972). [Mil] Milnor, J.W. Singularities of Complex Hypersurfaces, Annals of Mathematics Study 61, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1968). [Neu] Neuwirth, L.P. (editor) Knots, Groups and 3-Manifolds, Annals of Mathematics Study 84, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1975). [Qua] Quach thi Cam Van Invariants des noeuds classiques fibres, doctoral thesis, Universite de Geneve (1981). [Rob] Robinson, D.J.S. A Course in the Theory of Groups, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 80, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1982). [Rol] Rolfsen, D. Knots and Links, Publish or Perish, Inc., Berkeley (1976). [RS] Rourke, C. and Sanderson, B.J. Introduction to Piecewise-linear Topology, Ergebnisse der Mathematik 69, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1972). [She] Sheiham, D. Invariants of Boundary Link Cobordism, PhD thesis, The University of Edinburgh. (2001). [Sto] Stoltzfus, N. Unravelling the Integral Knot Concordance Group, Memoir 192, American Mathematical Society, Providence (1977). [Tur] Turaev, V.G. Introduction to Combinatorial Torsions (Notes taken by F.Schlenk), Lectures in Mathematics ETH Zurich, Birkhauser Verlag, Basel (2001).
280
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[Wal] Wall, C.T.C. Surgery on Compact Manifolds, Academic Press, New York - London (1970). The books [BZ] and [Ka2] have comprehensive bibliographies of papers on knot theory published before 1985 and 1995, respectively. Journal articles [A'C73] A'Campo, N. Sur la monodromie des singularites isolees d'hyper-surfaces complexes, Invent. Math. 20 (1973), 147-169. [A'C73'] A'Campo, N. Le nombre de Lefshetz d'une monodromie, Indag. Math. 35 (1973), 113-118. [Ad75] Adams, J.F. Idempotent functors in homotopy theory, in Manifolds Tokyo 1973 (edited by A.Hattori), Mathematical Society of Japan, University of Tokyo Press, Tokyo (1975), 247-253. [ASZ94] Adams, S. and Sarnak, P. Betti numbers of congruence varieties, (with an appendix by Z.Rudnick), Israel J. Math. 88 (1984), 31-72. [AFR97] Aravinda, C.S., Farrell, F.T. and Roushon, S.K. Surgery groups of knot and link complements, Bull. London Math. Soc. 29 (1997), 400-406. [AB62] Auslander, M. and Buchsbaum, D.A. Invariant factors and two criteria for projectivity of modules, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 104 (1962), 516-522. [BH72] Baer, R. and Heineken, H. Radical groups of finite abelian section rank, Illinois J. Math. 16 (1972), 533-589. [Ba85] Barlet, D. Forme hermitienne canonique sur la cohomologie de la fibre de Milnor d'une hypersurface a singularity isolee, Invent. Math. 81 (1985), 115-153. [BT99] Bartels, A. and Teichner, P. All two dimensional links are null homotopic, Geometry and Topology 3 (1999), 235-252. [BaOl] Bartels, A. Higher dimensional links are singular slice, Math. Ann. 320 (2001), 547-576. [Ba64] Bass, H. X-theory and stable algebra, Publ. Math. I.H.E.S. 22 (1964), 1-50. [Ba64'] Bass, H. Projective modules over free groups are free, J. Algebra 1 (1964), 367-373. [Ba69] Baumslag, G. Groups with the same lower central series as a relatively free group. II. Properties, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 142 (1969), 507-538. [BDH80] Baumslag, G., Dyer, E. and Heller A. The topology of discrete groups, J. Pure Appl. Math. 16 (1980), 1-47. [Be98] Bellis, P. Realizing homology boundary links with arbitrary patterns, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 350 (1998), 87-100. [BS98] Benedetti, R. and Shiota, M. On real algebraic links in S3, Boll. Unione Mat. Italiana 8 (1998), 585-609.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
281
[BP94] Berceanu, B. and Papadima, S. Cohomologically generic 2-complexes and 3-dimensional Poincare complexes, Math. Ann. 298 (1994), 457-480. [B157] Blanchfield, R.C. Intersection theory of manifolds with operators with applications to knot theory, Ann. Math. 65 (1957), 340-356. [Br81] Brin, M. Torsion free actions on 1-acyclic manifolds and the loop theorem, Topology 20 (1981), 353-363. [BE77] Buchsbaum, D.A. and Eisenbud, D. What annihilates a module?, J. Algebra 47 (1977), 231-243. [Bu78] Burde, G. Uber periodische Knoten, Arch. Math. (Basel) 30 (1978), 487-492. [BM70] Burde, G. and Murasugi, K. Links and Seifert fibre spaces, Duke Math. J. 37 (1970), 89-93. [CS80] Cappell, S.E. and Shaneson, J.L. Link cobordism, Comment. Math. Helvetici 55 (1980), 20-49. [CG86] Casson, A. and Gordon, C.McA. Cobordism of classical knots, in A la Recherche de la Topologie Perdue, (edited by L.Guillou and A.Marin), Progress in Mathematics, Vol. 62, Birkhauser Verlag (1986), 181-197. [CP84] Cenkl, B. and Porter, R. Lazard completion of a group and free graded differential algebra models over subrings of the rationals, Topology 23 (1984), 445-464. [CF88] Cervantes, L. and Fenn, R. Boundary links are homotopy trivial, Quarterly J. Math. (Oxford) 39 (1988), 151-158. [CK99] Cha, J.C. and Ko, K.H. Signature invariants of links from irregular covers and non-abelian covers, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 127 (1999), 67-81. [Ch51] Chen, K.T. Integration in free groups, Ann. Math. 54 (1951), 147-162. [CFL58] Chen, K.T., Fox, R.H. and Lyndon, R.C. Free differential calculus IV. The quotient groups of the lower central series, Ann. Math. 68 (1958), 81-95. [Co84] Cochran, T.D. Slice links in S4, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 285 (1984), 389-401. [Co87] Cochran, T.D. Link concordance invariants and homotopy theory, Invent. Math. 90 (1987), 635-645. [Co90] Cochran, T.D. Links with trivial Alexander's module but non- vanishing Massey products, Topology 29 (1990), 189-204. [Co91] Cochran, T.D. fc-cobordism for links in S3, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 327 (1991), 641-654. [Co96] Cochran, T.D. Non-trivial links and plats with trivial Gassner matrices, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 119 (1996), 43-53. [CL91] Cochran, T.D. and Levine, J. Homology boundary links and the AndrewsCurtis conjecture, Topology 30 (1991), 231-239.
282
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[C093] Cochran, T.D. and Orr, K.E. Not all links are concordant to boundary links, Ann. Math. 138 (1993), 519-554. [C094] Cochran, T.D. and Orr, K.E. Homology boundary links and Blanchfield forms: concordance classification and new tangle-theoretic constructions, Topology 33 (1994), 397-427. [C098] Cochran, T.D. and Orr, K.E. Stability of lower central series of compact 3-manifold groups, Topology 37 (1998), 497-526. [C099] Cochran, T.D. and Orr, K.E. Homology cobordism and generalizations of Milnor's invariants, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 8 (1999), 429-436. [COT99] Cochran, T.D., Orr, K.E. and Teichner, P. Knot concordance, Whitney towers and L2 signatures, preprint (75 pages), http://xxx.lanl.gov/abs/math/9908117. [CS99] Cohen, D.C. and Suciu, A.I. Alexander invariants of complex hyperplane arrangements, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 351 (1999), 4043-4067. [CN96] Coleman, R.F. and Nicolau, M. Periodicity and the monodromy theorem, Duke Math. J. 82 (1996), 369-380. [Cn59] Conner, P.E. Transformation groups on a K(TT, 1), II, Michigan Math. J. 6 (1959), 413-417. [Co70] Conway, J.H. An enumeration of knots and links, and some of their algebraic properties, in Computational Problems in Abstract Algebra (edited by J.C.Leech), Pergamon, Oxford (1970), 329-358. [Cp82] Cooper, D. The universal abelian cover of a link, in Low-Dimensional Topology (edited by R.Brown and T.L.Thickstun), London Mathematical Society Lecture Note Series 48 (1982), 51-66. [CM83] Coray, D. and Michel, F. Knot cobordism and amphicheirality, Comment. Math. Helvetici 58 (1983), 601-616. [Cr61] Crowell, R.H. Corresponding group and module sequences, Nagoya Math. J. 19 (1961), 27-40. [Cr64] Crowell, R.H. The annihilator of a link module, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 15 (1964), 696-700. [Cr65] Crowell, R.H. Torsion in link modules, J. Math. Mech 14 (1965), 289-298. [Cr71] Crowell, R.H. The derived module of a homomorphism, Adv. Math. 6 (1971), 210-238. [Cr76] Crowell, R.H. (letter to N.F.Smythe, May 1976). [CSt69] Crowell, R.H. and Strauss, D. On the elementary ideals of link modules, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 142 (1969), 93-109. [CS00] Cutkosky, S.D. and Srinivasan, H. The algebraic fundamental group of a curve singularity, J. Algebra 230 (2000). [Da95] Davis, J.F. The homology of cyclic branched covers of S3, Math. Ann. 301 (1995), 507-518.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
283
[DL91] Davis, J.F. and Livingston, C. Alexander polynomials of periodic knots, Topology 30 (1991), 551-564. [DL91'] Davis, J.F. and Livingston, C. Periodic knots, Smith theory and Murasugi's congruence, L'Enseignement Math. 37 (1991), 1-9. [DN02] Davis, J.F. and Naik, S. Alexander polynomials of equivariant slice and ribbon knots in S3, arXiv:math.GT/0201179 (19 Jan 2002). [deC99] de Campos, J.E.P.P. Boundary string links, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 8 (1999), 855-878. [DW90] Del Val, P. and Weber, C. Plans' theorem for links, Top. Appl. 34 (1990), 247-255. [De81] DeMeo, R. Cobordism of even dimensional links, Duke Math. J. 48 (1981), 23-33. [deR67] de Rham, G. Introduction aux polynomes d'un noeud, L'Enseignement Math. 13 (1967), 187-194. [DOS89] Dror Farjoun, E., Orr, K.E. and Shelah, S. Bousfield localization as an algebraic closure of groups, Israel J.M. 66 (1989), 143-153. [DuOl] Dunfield, N.M. Alexander and Thurston norms of fibered 3-manifolds, Pacific J. Maths. 200 (2001), 43-58. [Du74] Durfee, A. Fibred knots and algebraic singularities, Topology 13 (1974), 47-59. [Du75] Durfee, A. The characteristic polynomial of the monodromy, Pacific J. Math. 59 (1975), 21-26. [Du86] Duval, J. Forme de Blanchfield et cobordisme d'entrelacs bords, Comment. Math. Helvetici 61 (1986), 617-635. [Dw75] Dwyer, W.G. Homology, Massey products and maps between groups, J. Pure Appl. Alg. 6 (1975), 177-190. [DF87] Dwyer, W.G. and Fried, D. Homology of free abelian covers, I, Bull. London Math. Soc. 19 (1987), 350-352. [Ed84] Edmonds, A. Least area Seifert surfaces and periodic knots, Top. Appl. 18 (1984), 109-113. [EL83] Edmonds, A. and Livingston, C. Group actions on fibered 3-manifolds, Comment. Math. Helvetici 58 (1983), 529-542. [Er69] Erie, D. Die quadratische Form eines Knotens und ein Satz iiber Knotenmannigfaltigkeiten, J. Reine Angew. Math. 236 (1969), 174-218. [Fa77] Farber, M.S. Duality in an infinite cyclic covering and even-dimensional knots, Izv. A. N. Ser. Mat. 41 (1977), 794-828 (Russian); English translation: Math. USSR Izvestija 11 (1977), 749-781. [Fa83] Farber, M.S. The classification of simple knots, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 38:5 (1983), 59-106 (Russian); English translation: Russian Math. Surveys 38:5 (1983), 61-117. [Fa91] Farber, M.S. Hermitean forms on link modules,
284
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Comment. Math. Helvetici 66 (1991), 189-236. [Fa92] Farber, M.S. Stable homotopy and homology invariants of boundary links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 334 (1992), 455-477. [Fa92'] Farber, M.S. Noncommutative rational functions and boundary links, Math. Ann. 293 (1992), 543-568. [FV92] Farber, M.S. and Vogel, P. The Cohn localization of the free group ring, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. I l l (1992), 433-443. [F185] Flapan, E. Infinitely periodic knots, Canad. J. Math. 37 (1985), 17-28. [Fo53] Fox, R.H. Free differential calculus, Ann. Math. 57 (1953), 547-560. [Fo62] Fox, R.H. A quick trip through knot theory, in [For], 120-167. [Fo62'] Fox, R.H. Some problems in knot theory, in [For], 168-176. [Fo62"] Fox, R.H. Knots and periodic transformations, in [For], 177-182. [FS64] Fox, R.H. and Smythe, N.F. An ideal class invariant of knots, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 15 (1964), 707-709. [FT54] Fox, R.H. and Torres, G. Dual presentations of the group of a knot, Ann. Math. 59 (1954), 211-218. [Fr88] Freedman, M.H. Whiteheads is a "slice" link, Invent. Math. 94 (1988), 175-182. [Fr93] Freedman, M.H. Link compositions and the topological slice problem, Topology 32 (1993), 145-156. [FT95] Freedman, M.H. and Teichner, P. 4-Manifold topology I: subexponential groups, Invent. Math. 122 (1995), 509-529; II: Dwyer's filtration and surgery kernels, ibid. 122 (1995), 531-557. [Fr87] Fried, D. Homology of free abelian covers, II, Bull. London Math. Soc. 19 (1987), 353-358. [Ga87] Gabai, D. Foliations and the topology of 3-manifolds, III, J. Diff. Geom. 26 (1987), 479-536. [GL01] Garoufalidis, S. and Levine J. Homology surgery and invariants of 3-manifolds, Geometry and Topology 5 (2001), 551-578. [GL02] Garoufalidis, S. and Levine J. Analytic invariants of boundary links, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 11 (2002), 283-293. [Gi67] Giffen, C.H. On transformations of the 3-sphere fixing a knot, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 73 (1967), 913-914. [Gi76] Giffen, C.H. F-isotopy and /-equivalence unpublished manuscript, The University of Virginia (1976). [Gi79] Giffen, C.H. Link concordance implies link homotopy,
BIBLIOGRAPHY
285
Math. Scandinavica 45 (1979), 243-254. [Gi93] Gilmer, P.M. Link cobordism in rational homology 3-spheres, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 2 (1993), 285-320. [GL92] Gilmer, P. and Livingston, C. The Casson-Gordon invariant and link concordance, Topology 31 (1992), 475-492. [Go90] Goldschmidt, D.M. Classical link invariants and the Burau representation, Pacific J. Math. 144 (1990), 277-292. [Go74] Goldsmith, D. Homotopy of braids - in answer to a question of E. Artin, in Topology Conference, VPISU (1973), (edited by Raymond F. Dickman, Jr, and Peter Fletcher), Lecture Notes in Mathematics 375, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1974), 91-96. [Go75] Goldsmith, D. Symmetric fibred links, in [Neu], 3-23. [Go78] Goldsmith, D. A linking invariant of classical link concordance, in [Hau], 135-170. [Go79] Goldsmith, D. Concordance implies homotopy for classical links in M3, Comment. Math. Helvetici 54 (1979), 347-355. [GAR99] Gonzalez-Acuiia, F. and Ramirez, A. A composition formula in the rank two free group, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 127 (1999), 2779-2782. [GAS91] Gonzalez-Acufia, F. and Short, H. Cyclic branched coverings of knots and homology spheres, Revista Math. 4 (1991), 97-120. [Go72] Gordon, C.McA. Knots whose branched covers have periodic homology, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 168 (1972), 357-370. [Go81] Gordon, C. McA. Ribbon concordance of knots in the 3-sphere, Math. Ann. 257 (1981), 157-170. [GL78] Gordon, C. McA. and Litherland, R.A. On the signature of a link, Invent. Math. 47 (1978), 53-70. [GL79] Gordon, C. McA. and Litherland, R.A. On a theorem of Murasugi, Pacific J. Math. 82 (1979), 69-74. [GLM81] Gordon, C. McA., Litherland, R.A. and Murasugi, K. Signatures of covering links, Canad. J. Math. 33 (1981), 381-394. [Gr74] Grima, M.-C. La monodromie rationelle ne determine pas la topologie d'une hypersurface complexe, in Fonctions de Plusieurs Variables Complexes, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 409, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1974), 580-602. [GM86] Groves, J.R.J, and Miller, C.F., III Recognizing free metabelian groups, Illinois J. Math. 30 (1986), 246-254. [Gr80] Griinenfelder, L. Lower central series, augmentation quotients and homology of groups, Comment. Math. Helvetici 55 (1980), 159-177.
286
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[GDC99] Gusein-Zade, S.M., Delgado, F. and Campillo, A. The Alexander polynomial of plane curve singularities and rings of functions on curves, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 54 (1999), 157-8 (Russian); English translation: Russian Math. Surveys 54 (1999), 634-5. [Gu72] Gutierrez, M.A. Boundary links and an unlinking theorem, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 171 (1972), 491-499. [Gu79] Gutierrez, M.A. Concordance and homotopy, I: fundamental group, Pacific J. Math. 82 (1979), 75-91. [Ha92] Habegger, N. Applications of Morse theory to link theory, in [Kal], 389-394. [HL90] Habegger, N. and Lin, X. The classification of links up to homotopy, J. Amer. Math. Soc. 2 (1990), 389-419. [HL98] Habegger, N. and Lin, X. On link concordance and Milnor's /I-invariants, Bull. London Math. Soc. 30 (1998), 419-428. [H099] Habegger, N. and Orr, K. Milnor link invariants and quantum 3-manifold invariants, Comment. Math. Helvetici 74 (1999), 322-344. [Ha85] Hain, R. Iterated integrals, intersection theory and link groups, Topology 24 (1985), 45-66. [Ha79] Hartley, R. Metabelian representations of knot groups, Pacific J. Math. 82 (1979), 93-104. [Ha80] Hartley, R. Knots and involutions, Math. Z. 171 (1980), 175-185. [Ha80'] Hartley, R. Invertible amphicheiral knots, Math. Ann. 252 (1980), 103-109. [Ha81] Hartley, R. Knots with free period, Canad. J. Math. 33 (1981), 91-102. [Ha83] Hartley, R. The Conway potential function for links, Comment. Math. Helvetici 58 (1983), 365-378. [Ha83'] Hartley, R. Lifting group homomorphisms, Pacific J. Math. 105(1983), 311-320. [HM77] Hartley, R. and Murasugi, K. Covering linkage invariants, Canad. J. Math. 29 (1977), 1312-1319. [HM78] Hartley, R. and Murasugi, K. Homology invariants, Canad. J. Math. 30 (1978), 655-670. [HK78] Hausmann, J.-C. and Kervaire, M. Sur le centre des groupes de noeuds multidimensionelles, C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris 287 (1978), 699-702. [Hi78] Hillman, J.A. Alexander ideals and Chen Groups, Bull. London Math. Soc. 10 (1978), 105-110. [Hi81] Hillman, J.A. Blanchfield pairings with squarefree Alexander polynomial, Math. Z. 176 (1981), 551-563. [Hi81'] Hillman, J.A. New proofs of two theorems on periodic knots,
BIBLIOGRAPHY
287
Arch. Math. (Basel) 37 (1981), 457-461. [Hi81"] Hillman, J. A. Finite knot modules and the factorization of certain simple knots, Math. Ann. 257 (1981), 261-274. [Hi83] Hillman, J.A. On the Alexander polynomial of a cyclically periodic knot, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 89 (1983), 155-156. [Hi84] Hillman, J.A. Links with infinitely many semifree periods are trivial, Arch. Math. (Basel), 42 (1984), 568-572. [Hi84'] Hillman, J.A. Polynomials determining Dedekind domains, Bull. Austral. Math. Soc. 29 (1984), 167-175. [Hi85] Hillman, J.A. Topological concordance and F-isotopy, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 98 (1985), 107-110. [Hi85'] Hillman, J. A. The kernel of the cup product, Bull. Austral. Math. Soc. 32 (1985), 261-274. [Hi86] Hillman, J.A. Knot modules and the elementary divisor theorem, J. Pure Appl. Alg. 40 (1986), 115-124. [Hi86'] Hillman, J.A. Finite simple even-dimensional knots, J. London Math. Soc. 34 (1986), 369-374. [Hi87] Hillman, J.A. The kernel of integral cup product, J. Austral. Math. Soc. 43 (1987), 10-15. [Hi95] Hillman, J.A. On the splitting field of the Alexander polynomial of a periodic knot, Bull. Aust. Math. Soc. 52 (1995), 313-315. [Hi95'] Hillman, J.A. Free products and 4-dimensional connected sums, Bull. London Math. Soc. 27 (1995), 387-391. [HS97] Hillman, J. A. and Sakuma, M. On the homology of finite abelian coverings of links, Canad. Bull. Math. 40 (1997), 309-315. [Hr97] Hironaka, E. Alexander stratifications of character varieties, Ann. Institut Fourier 47 (1997), 555-583. [Hr80] Hirschhorn, P.S. Link complements and coherent group rings, Illinois J. Math. 24 (1980), 159-163. [Ht79] Hitt, L.R. Examples of higher-dimensional slice knots which are not ribbon knots, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 77 (1979), 291-297. [HS66] Holmes, R. and Smythe, N.F. Algebraic invariants of isotopy of links, Amer. J. Math. 88 (1966), 646-654. [Hs58] Hosokawa, F. On V-polynomials of links, Osaka Math. J. 10 (1958), 273-282. [Ho84] Hoste, J. The Arf invariant of a totally proper link, Top. Appl. 18 (1984), 163-177. [Hu93] Hughes, J. Structured groups and link-homotopy, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 2 (1993), 37-63. [IO01] Igusa, K. and Orr, K. Links, pictures and the homology of nilpotent groups, Topology 40 (2001), 1125-1166.
288
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[Ji87] Jin, G.T. On Kojima's ^-function of links, in [KN], 14-30. [KYOO] Kadokami, T. and Yasuhara, A. Proper links, algebraically split links and Arf invariant, J. Math. Soc. Japan 52 (2000), 591-608. [Ka92] Kaiser, U. Homology boundary links and fusion constructions, Osaka J. Math. 29 (1992), 573-593. [Ka92'] Kaiser, U. Geometric properties of strong fusion, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 1 (1992), 297-302. [Ka93] Kaiser, U. Homology boundary links and strong fusion, Kobe J. Math. 10 (1993), 179-188. [KT76] Kauffman, L.R. and Taylor, L. Signature of links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 216 (1976), 351-365. [Kw77] Kawauchi, A. On quadratic forms of 3-manifolds, Invent. Math. 43 (1977), 177-198. [Kw78] Kawauchi, A. On the Alexander polynomials of cobordant links, Osaka J. Math. 15 (1978), 151-159. [Kw80] Kawauchi, A. On links not cobordant to split links, Topology 19 (1980), 321-334. [Kw84] Kawauchi, A. On the Robertello invariants of proper links, Osaka J. Math. 21 (1984), 81-90. [Kw86] Kawauchi, A. Three dualities on the integral homology of infinite cyclic coverings of manifolds, Osaka J. Math. 23 (1986), 633-651. [Kw02] Kawauchi, A. An intrinsic Arf invariant on a link and its surface-link analogue, Top. Appl. 121 (2002), 255-274. [Ke75] Kearton, C. Blanchfield duality and simple knots, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 202 (1975), 141-160. [Ke75'] Kearton, C. Cobordism of knots and Blanchfield duality, J. London Math. Soc. 10 (1975), 406-408. [Ke79] Kearton, C. Signatures of knots and the free differential calculus, Quart. J. Math. Oxford 30 (1979), 157-182. [Ke81] Kearton, C. Hermitian signatures and double-null-cobordism of knots, J.London Math. Soc. 23 (1981), 563-576. [KW92] Kearton, C. and Wilson, S.M.J. Cyclic group actions and knots, Proc. Roy. Soc. London A 436 (1992), 527-535. [Ke65] Kervaire, M.A. Les noeuds de dimensions superieures, Bull. Soc. Math. France 93 (1965), 225-271. [Ke65'] Kervaire, M.A. On higher dimensional knots, in Differential and Combinatorial Topology (A Symposium in Honor of Marston Morse) (edited by S.S.Cairns), Princeton University Press, Princeton (1965), 105-109. [KW78] Kervaire, M.A. and Weber, C. A survey of higher dimensional knots,
BIBLIOGRAPHY
289
in [Hau], 61-134. [Ki78] Kidwell, M.A. On the Alexander polynomials of certain three-component links, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 71 (1978), 351-354. [Ki78'] Kidwell, M.A. Alexander polynomials of links of small order, Illinois J. Math. 22 (1978), 459-475. [Ki79] Kidwell, M.A. On the Alexander polynomials of alternating 2-component links, Internat. J. Math. Math. Sci. 2 (1979), 229-237. [Ki58] Kinoshita, S. On knots and periodic transformations, Osaka Math. J. 10 (1958), 43-52. [KT57] Kinoshita, S. and Terasaka, H. On unions of knots, Osaka Math. J. 9 (1957), 131-153. [Ki97] Kirby, R.C. Problems in low-dimensional topology, in [Kaz],Part 2, 35-473. [KL99] Kirk, P. and Livingston, C. Twisted Alexander invariants, Reidemeister torsion and Casson-Gordon invariants, Topology 38 (1999), 635-662. [KL99'] Kirk, P. and Livingston, C. Twisted Alexander invariants: inversion mutation and concordance, Topology 38 (1999), 663-672. [KLW01] Kirk, P., Livingston, C. and Wang, Z. The Gassner representation for string links, Comm. Contemp. Math. 3 (2001), 87-135. [K193] Klyachko, A. Funny property of sphere and equations over groups, Comm. Alg. 21 (1993), 2555-2575. [Ko87] Ko, K.H. Seifert matrices and boundary link concordance, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 229 (1987), 657-681. [Ko82] Kobelskii, V.L. Modules of multidimensional links of codimension two, Zap. LOMI 122 (1982), 109-116 (Russian). [Ko82'] Kobelskii, V.L. Isotopy classification of odd-dimensional links in codimension two, Izv. A.N. 46 (1982), 983-993 (Russian); English translation: Math. USSR Izvestiya 21 (1983), 281-290. [Ko89] Kobelskii, V.L. Modules of two-component codimension two links, Algebra i Analiz 1 (1989), 160-171 (Russian); English translation: Leningrad Math J. 1 (1990), 727-739. [Ko83] Kojima, S. Milnor's p.-invariants, Massey products and Whitney's trick in 4 dimensions, Top. Appl. 16 (1983), 43-60. [KY79] Kojima, S. and Yamasaki, M. Some new invariants of links, Invent. Math. 54 (1979), 213-228. [KT98] Krushkal, V.S. Additivity properties of Milnor's /I-invariants, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 7 (1998), 625-637. [KT97] Krushkal, V.S. and Teichner, P. Alexander duality, gropes and link homotopy, Geometry and Topology 1 (1997), 51-69. [Ku93] Kulikov, V.S. Alexander polynomials of plane algebraic curves, Izv. A.N. 57 (1993), 77-101 (Russian);
290
BIBLIOGRAPHY
English translation: Russ. Acad. Sci. Izv. Math. 42 (1994), 67-89. [Ku89] Kuo, T.-C. Generalized Newton-Puiseux theory and Hensel's lemma in C[[x,y]], Canad. J. Math. 41 (1989), 1101-1116. [L£71] Laufer, H. Some numerical link invariants, Topology 10 (1971), 119-131. [LD92] Le Dimet, J.Y. Enlacements d'intervalles et representation de Gassner, Comment. Math. Helvetici 67 (1992), 306-315. [LD98] Le Dimet, J.Y. Representations du groupe des tresses generalisees dans des groupes de Lie, Manus. Math. 96 (1998), 507-515. [LD01] Le Dimet, J.Y. Enlacements d'intervalles et torsion de Whitehead, Bull. Soc. Math. Prance. 129 (2001), 215-235. [Le72] Le Dung Trang, Sur les noeuds algebriques, Compositio Math. 25 (1972), 281-321. [Le33] Lehmer, D.H. Factorization of certain cyclotomic functions, Ann. Math. 34 (1933), 461-479. [LeOO] Letsche, C.F. An obstruction to slicing knots using the eta invariant, Math. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc. 128 (2000), 301-319. [LV68] Levin, G. and Vasconcelos, W.V. Homological dimensions and Macaulay rings, Pacific J. Math. 25 (1968), 315-323. [Le65] Levine, J. A characterization of knot polynomials, Topology 4 (1965), 135-141. [Le66] Levine, J. Polynomial invariants of knots of codimension two, Ann. Math. 84 (1966), 537-554. [Le67] Levine, J. A method for generating link polynomials, Amer. J. Math. 89 (1967), 69-84. [Le69] Levine, J. Knot cobordism groups in codimension two, Comment. Math. Helvetici 44 (1969), 229-244. [Le70] Levine, J. An algebraic classification of some knots of codimension two, Comment. Math. Helvetici 45 (1970), 185-198. [Le77] Levine, J. Knot modules. I, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 229 (1977), 1-50. [Le82] Levine, J. The module of a 2-component link, Comment. Math. Helvetici 57 (1982), 377-399. [Le83] Levine, J. Localization of link modules, in [Lom], 213-229. [Le87] Levine, J. Links with Alexander polynomial zero, Indiana Univ. Math. J. 36 (1987), 91-108. [Le87'J Levine, J. Surgery on links and the /i-invariants, Topology 26 (1987), 45-61. [Le88] Levine, J. Symmetric presentations of link modules, Top. Appl. 30 (1988), 183-198.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
291
[Le88'] Levine, J. An approach to homotopy classification of classical links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc 306 (1988), 361-387. [Le88"] Levine, J. The /i-invariants of based links, in [KN], 87-103. [Le89] Levine, J. Link concordance and algebraic closure of groups, Comment. Math. Helvetici 64 (1989), 236-255; [Le89'] Levine, J. Link concordance and algebraic closure of groups, II, Invent. Math. 96 (1989), 571-592. [Le94] Levine, J. Link invariants via the ^-invariant, Comment. Math. Helvetici 69 (1994), 82-119. [LM093] Levine, J., Mio, W. and Orr, K.E. Links with vanishing homotopy invariant, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 46 (1993), 213-220. [Li77] Liang, C.-C. An algebraic classification of some links of codimension two, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 67 (1977), 147-151. [Li02] Libgober, A. Hodge decomposition of Alexander invariants, Manus. Math. 107 (2002), 251-269. [Li97] Lin, X.S. Power series expansions and invariants of links, in [Kaz], Part 1, 184-202. [Li90] Lipson, A.S. Link signatures, Goeritz matrices and polynomial invariants, L'Enseignement Math. 36 (1990), 93-114. [Li79] Litherland, R.A. Signatures of iterated torus knots, in Topology of Low-Dimensional Manifolds (edited by R.Fenn) Lecture Notes in Mathematics 722, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1979), 71-84. [Li84] Litherland, R.A. Cobordism of satellite knots, in Four-Manifold Theory (edited by C.McA.Gordon and R.C.Kirby), CONM 35, American Mathematical Society, Providence, R.I. (1984), 327-362. [Li95] Livingston, C. Lifting representations of knot groups, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 4 (1995), 225-234. [Lo84] Long, D. Strongly +amphicheiral knots are algebraically slice, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 95 (1984), 309-312. [Lu80] Liidicke, U. Darstellungen der Verkettungsgruppe, Abh. Math. Sem. Hamburg 50 (1980), 232-237. [McOl] McMuUen, C.T. The Alexander polynomial of a 3-manifold and the Thurston norm on cohomology, preprint, Harvard University (2001). [MM83] Maeda, T. and Murasugi, K. Covering linkage invariants and Fox's Problem 13, in [Lorn], 271-283. [Ma49] Mal'cev, A.I. Nilpotent torsion free groups, Izv. A.N. Ser. Mat. 13 (1949), 201-212 (Russian).
292
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[MP92] Markl, M. and Papadima, S. Homotopy Lie algebras and fundamental groups via deformation theory, Ann. Inst. Fourier 42 (1992), 905-935. [MP93] Markl, M. and Papadima, S. Moduli spaces for fundamental groups and link invariants derived from the lower central series, Manus Math. 81 (1993), 225-242. [Ma68] Massey, W.S. Higher order linking numbers, preprint, University of Chicago (1968); published in J. Knot Theory Ramif. 7 (1998), 393-419. [Ma80] Massey, W.S. Completion of link modules, Duke Math. J. 47 (1980), 399-420. [Ma77] Matumoto, T. On the signature invariants of a nonsingular complex sesquilinear form, J. Math. Soc. Japan 29 (1977), 67-71. [MM82] Mayberry, J.P. and Murasugi, K. Torsion-groups of abelian coverings of links, Trans. Amer. Math. soc. 271 (1982), 143-173. [MS86] Meeks, W.H.,III and Scott, P. Finite group actions on 3-manifolds, Invent. Math. 86 (1986), 287-346. [MY81] Meeks, W.H., HI and Yau, S.-T. Equivariant Dehn's lemma and loop theorem, Comment. Math. Helvetici 56 (1981), 225-239. [MT96] Meng, G. and Taubes, C.H. SW = Milnor torsion, Math. Research Letters 3 (1996), 661-674. [Mi54] Milnor, J.W. Link groups, Ann. Math. 59 (1954), 177-195. [Mi57] Milnor, J.W. Isotopy of links, in Algebraic Geometry and Topology, a Symposium in Honour of S.Lefshetz (edited by R.H.Fox, D.C.Spencer and W.Tucker), Princeton University Press, Princeton (1957), 280-306. [Mi62] Milnor, J.W. A duality theorem for Reidemeister torsion, Ann. Math. 76 (1962), 137-147. [Mi66] Milnor, J.W. Whitehead torsion, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 72 (1966), 358-426. [Mi68] Milnor, J.W. Infinite cyclic coverings, in Conference on the Topology of Manifolds (edited by J.G.Hocking), Prindle, Weber and Schmidt, Boston - London - Sydney (1968), 115-133. [Mi69] Milnor, J.W. On isometries of inner product spaces, Invent. Math. 8 (1969), 83-94. [Mi87] Mio, W. On boundary link cobordism, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 101 (1987), 259-266. [Mo75] Montesinos, J.M. Surgery on links and double branched covers of S 3 , in [Neu], 227-259. [MoOO] Morishita, M. On certain analogies between knots and primes,
BIBLIOGRAPHY
293
J. Reine Angew. Math. 550 (2002), 141-167. [Mu65] Murasugi, K. On the center of the group of a link, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 16 (1965), 1052-1057. Corrigendum ibid. 18 (1967), 1142. [Mu65'] Murasugi, K. On a certain numerical invariant of link types, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 117 (1965), 387-422. [Mu66] Murasugi, K. On Milnor's invariant for links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 124 (1966), 94-110. [Mu70] Murasugi, K. On Milnor's invariant for links. II. The Chen group, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 148 (1970), 41-61. [Mu70'] Murasugi, K. On the signature of links, Topology 9 (1970), 283-298. [Mu71] Murasugi, K. On periodic knots, Comment. Math. Helvetici 46 (1971), 162-174. [Mu80] Murasugi, K. On symmetry of knots, Tsukuba J. Math. 4 (1980), 331-347. [Mu80'] Murasugi, K. (letter to J.A.Hillman, January 1980) [Mu85] Murasugi, K. Nilpotent coverings of links and Milnor's invariant, in [Fen], 106-142. [Mu85'] Murasugi, K. On the height of 2-component links, Top. Appl 19 (1985), 227-243. [Mu85"] Murasugi, K. Polynomial invariants of 2-component links, Rev. Mat. Iberoamericana 1 (1985), 121-144. [Mu86] Murasugi, K. Milnor's /I-invariant and 2-height of reducible plane curves, Arch. Math. (Basel) 46 (1986), 466-472. [Na78] Nakagawa, Y. On the Alexander polynomials of slice links, Osaka J. Math. 15 (1978), 161-182. [Na94] Naik, S. Periodicity, genera and Alexander polynomials of knots, Pacific J. Math. 166 (1994), 357-371. [Ni92] Nicolau, M. Semifree actions on spheres, Pacific J. Math. 156 (1992), 337-358. [Ne88] Neto, O.M. Total linking number modules, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 307 (1988), 503-533. [Og99] Ogusa, E. Link cobordism and the intersection of slice discs, Bull. London Math. Soc. 31 (1999), 729-726. [Oh82] Ohkawa, T. The pure braid group and the Milnor /2-invariants, Horishima Math. J. 12 (1982), 485-489. [Oh82'] Ohkawa, T. Homological separation of 2-spheres in a 4-manifold, Topology 21 (1982), 297-313. [0'N79] O'Neill, E.J. Higher order Massey products and links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 248 (1979), 37-46.
294
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[Or87] Orr, K.E. New link invariants and applications, Comment. Math. Helvetici 62 (1987), 542-560. [Or89] Orr, K.E. Homotopy invariants of links, Invent. Math. 95 (1989), 379-394. [Or91] Orr, K.E. Link concordance invariants and Massey products, Topology 30 (1991), 699-710. [OZ81] Osborne, R.P. and Zieschang, H. Primitives in the free group on two generators, Invent. Math. 63 (1981), 17-24. [Pa97] Papadima, S. Campbell-Hausdorff invariants of links, Proc. London Math. Soc. 75 (1997), 641-670. [PaOl] Papadima, S. Braid commutators and homogeneous Campbell-Hausdorff tests, Pacific J. Math. 197 (2001), 383-416. [Pa02] Papadima, S. Generalized p,-invariants for links and hyperplane arrangements, Proc. London Math. Soc. 84 (2002), 492-512. [P153] Plans, A. Apportacion al estudio de los grupos de homologia de los recubrimientos ciclicos ramificados correspondientes a un nudo, Rev. real. Acad. Cienc. exact. Fis. Natur. Madrid 47 (1953), 161-193. [P186] Piatt, M.L. Insufficiency of Torres' conditions for two-component links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 296 (1986), 125-136. [P188] Piatt, M.L. Alexander ideals of links with all linking numbers 0, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 306 (1988), 597-605. [Po71] Poenaru, V. A note on the generators for the fundamental group of the complement of a submanifold of codimension 2, Topology 10 (1971), 47-52. [Po80] Porter, R. Milnor's //-invariants and Massey products, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 257 (1980), 39-71. [Ri90] Riley, R. Growth of order of homology of cyclic branched covers of knots, Bull. London Math. Soc 22 (1990), 287-297. [Ro65] Robertello, R. An invariant of knot cobordism, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 18 (1965), 543-555. [Ro72] Rolfsen, D. Isotopy of links in codimension two, J. Indian Math. Soc. 36 (1972), 263-278. [Ro74] Rolfsen, D. Some counterexamples in link theory, Canad. J. Math. 26 (1974), 978-984. [Ro75] Rolfsen, D. Localized Alexander invariants and isotopy of links, Ann. Math. 101 (1975), 1-19. [Ro85] Rolfsen, D. Piecewise linear /-equivalence of links, in [Fen], 161-178. [Ru80] Rubinstein, J.H. Dehn's lemma and handle decompositions of some 4-manifolds, Pacific J. Math. 86 (1980), 565-569. [Sa90] Sabbah, C. Modules d'Alexander et D-modules, Duke Math. J. 60 (1990), 729-814.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
295
[Sa77] Sakai, T. A remark on the Alexander polynomials of knots, Math. Sem. Notes Kobe University 5 (1977), 451-456. [Sa83] Sakai, T. Polynomials of invertible knots, Math. Ann. 266 (1983), 229-232. [Sk79] Sakuma, M. The homology groups of abelian coverings of links, Math. Sem. Notes Kobe University 7 (1979), 515-530. [Sk81] Sakuma, M. Periods of composite links, Math. Sem. Notes Kobe University 9 (1981), 445-452. [Sk81'] Sakuma, M. On the polynomials of periodic links, Math. Ann. 257 (1981), 487-494. [Sa81] Sato, N. Alexander modules of sublinks and an invariant of classical link concordance, Illinois J. Math. 25 (1981), 508-519. [Sa81'] Sato, N. Free coverings and modules of boundary links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 264 (1981), 499-505. [Sa81"] Sato, N. Algebraic invariants of boundary links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 265 (1981), 359-374. [Sa84] Sato, N. Alexander modules, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 91 (1984), 159-162. [Sa86] Sato, N. Boundary link modules I: below the middle dimension, preprint, Texas A. and M. University (1986). [Se34] Seifert, H. Uber das Geschlecht von Knoten, Math. Ann. 110 (1934), 571-592. [SW99] Silver, D.S. and Williams, S.G. Periodic links and augmented groups, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 127 (1999), 217-236. [SW99'] Silver, D.S. and Williams, S.G. Knot invariants from symbolic dynamical systems, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 351 (1999), 3243-3265. [SW02] Silver, D.S. and Williams, S.G. Mahler measure, links and homology growth, Topology, to appear. [Si80] Simon, J. Wirtinger approximations and the knot groups of Fn in S n + 2 , Pacific J. Math. 90 (1980), 177-190. [Sm89] Smolinsky, L. A generalization of the Levine-Tristram invariant, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 315 (1989), 205 -217. [Sm89'] Smolinsky, L. Invariants of link cobordism, Top. Appl. 32 (1989), 161-168. [Sm66] Smythe, N.F. Boundary links, in Topology Seminar, Wisconsin 1965 (edited by R.H.Bing), Annals of Math. Study 60, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1966), 69-72. [Sm67] Smythe, N.F. Isotopy invariants of links and the Alexander matrix, Amer. J. Math. 89 (1967), 693-704. [Sm70] Smythe, N.F. n-linking and n-splitting,
296
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Amer. J. Math. 92 (1970), 272-282. [Sq84] Squier, C. The Burau representation is unitary, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 90 (1984), 199-202. [St62] Stallings, J. On fibering certain 3-manifolds, in [For], 95-100. [St65] Stallings, J. Homology and central series of groups, J. Algebra 2 (1965), 170-181. [St89] Stein, D. Computing Massey products of links, Top. Appl. 32 (1989), 169-181. [St90] Stein, D. Massey products in the cohomology of groups with applications to link theory, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 318 (1990), 301-325. [Stl2] Steinitz, E. Rechteckige Systeme und moduln in algebraische Zahlkorpern. I, Math. Ann. 71 (1912), 328-354. [St99] Stevens, W. Periodicity for the Z/p r -homology of cyclic covers of knots and Z-homology circles, J. Pure Appl. Alg. (in press). [StOO] Stevens, W. Recursion formulas for some abelian knot invariants, J. Knot Theory Ramif. 9 (2000), 413-422. [Su77] Sullivan, D. Infinitesimal computations in topology, Publ. Math. IHES 47 (1977), 269-332. [Su74] Sumners, D.W. On the homology of finite cyclic coverings of higherdimensional links, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 46 (1974), 143-149. [Su75] Sumners, D.W. Smooth Zp-actions on spheres which leave knots pointwise fixed, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 205 (1975), 193-203. [SW77] Sumners, D.W. and Woods, J. The monodromy of reducible plane curves, Invent. Math. 40 (1977), 107-141. [Sw77] Swarup, G.A. Relative version of a theorem of Stallings, J. Pure Appl. Alg. 11 (1977), 75-82. [Th93] Thang, Le Ty Quoc, Representation varieties and cohomology jumps for knot groups, Mat. Sbornik 184 (1993), 57-82 (Russian); English translation: Russ. Acad. Sci. Sb. Math. 78 (1994), 187-209. [To53] Torres, G. On the Alexander polynomial, Ann. Math. 57 (1953), 57-89. [Tr82] Traldi, L. A generalization of Torres' second relation, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 269 (1982), 593-610. [Tr82'] Traldi, L. The determinantal ideals of link modules. I, Pacific J. Math. 101 (1982), 215-222. II, ibid. 109 (1983), 237-245. [Tr83] Traldi, L. Linking numbers and the elementary ideals of links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 275 (1983), 309-318. [Tr84] Traldi, L. Milnor's invariants and completions of link modules, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 284 (1984), 401-424.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
297
[Tr85] Traldi, L. On the Goeritz matrix of a link, Math. Z. 188 (1985), 203-213. [Tr69] Tristram, A.G. Some cobordism invariants for links, Math. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 66 (1969), 251-264. [Tr61] Trotter, H.F. Periodic automorphisms of groups and knots, Duke Math. J. 28 (1961), 553-557. [Tr62] Trotter, H.F. Homology of group systems with applications to knot theory, Ann. Math. 76 (1962), 464-498. [TV77] Trotter, H.F. Knot modules and Seifert matrices, in [Hau], 291-299. [Tu76] Turaev, V.G. The Milnor invariants and Massey products, Zap. Nauchn. Sem. Leningr. Otdel Mat. Inst. Steklova A.N. U.S.S.R. 66 (1976), 189-203 (Russian); English translation: J. Sov. Math. 66 (1976), 189-203. [Tu86] Turaev, V.G. Reidemeister torsion in knot theory, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 41 (1986), 97-147 (Russian); English translation: Russian Math. Surveys 41 (1986), 119-182. [Tu88] Turaev, V.G. On Torres-type relations for the Alexander polynomials of links, L'Enseignement Math. 34 (1988), 69-82. [Tu89] Turaev, V.G. Elementary ideals of links and manifolds: symmetry and asymmetry, Algebra i Analiz 1 (1989), 223-232 (Russian); English translation: Leningrad Math. J. 1 (1990), 1279-1287. [Tu98] Turaev, V.G. A combinatorial formulation for the Seiberg-Witten invariants of 3-manifolds, Math. Res. Letters 5 (1998), 583-598. [Va79] Van Buskirk, J. The converse of Kawauchi's amphicheiral knot conjecture, Notices Amer. Math. Soc. (1979), abstract 768-55-2. [Vi73] Viro, O.G. Branched coverings of manifolds with boundary, and invariants of links, Izv. A.N. Ser. Mat. 37 (1973), 1241-1258 (Russian); English translation: Math. USSR Izvestija 7 (1973), 1239-1256. [Vo88] Vogel, P. 2 x 2-Matrices and application to link theory, in Algebraic Topology and Transformation Groups, Proceedings, Gottingen 1987, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1361, Springer-Verlag, Berlin - Heidelberg - New York (1988), 269-298. [Vo92] Vogel, P. Representations of link groups, in [Kal], 381-387. [Wa94] Wada, M. Twisted Alexander polynomial for finitely presentable groups, Topology 33 (1994), 241-256. [Wa80] Wanna, S. A spectral sequence for group presentations with applications to links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 261 (1980), 271-285. [We80] Weber, C. Sur une formule de R.H.Fox concernant l'homologie d'une revetement ramifie, L'Enseignement Math. 25 (1980), 261-272.
298
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[Wh69] Whitten, W. Symmetries of links, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 135 (1969), 213-222. [Wh50] Whitehead, J.H.C. Simple homotopy types, Amer. J. Math. 72 (1950), 1-57. [Ym84] Yamamoto, M. Classification of isolated algebraic singularities by their Alexander polynomials, Topology 23 (1984), 277-287. [Yn69] Yanagawa, T. On ribbon 2-knots. The 3-manifold bounded by the 2-knots, Osaka J. Math. 6 (1969), 447-464. [Yn70] Yanagawa, T. On ribbon 2-knots III. On the unknotting ribbon 2-knots in S4, Osaka J. Math. 7 (1970), 165-172.
Index
Expressions beginning with Greek characters and other symbols are listed at the end of this index.
K a(2q-l)-knot), B(L)
the metabelian section), 78 BQM) (= FOMY/FOM)"),
7l(G)(=Z[G/G']®z[G]J(G)),70 adjoint, 33, 67 Aff(F) (automorphisms of the affine F-line), 124 Alexander ideal (Ek(L)), 78 Alexander module (A(L)), 78 Alexander nullity (ct(L)), 78 Alexander polynomial (At(L)), 78 algebraic link, 111 algebraically closed (group), 250 algebraic closure, 250 amphicheiral (knot, link), 24 annihilator ideal (Ann(M)), 47 Arf invariant, 45 Artin representation, 264 augmentation (e : Z[G] —> Z), 69 bs(L), 6 E ( L ) (localized Blanchfleld pairings), 36 bF^(L, 9) (linking form of an odd-dimensional F(/x)-link), 224 BS(L), Bs(L) (Witt classes ot bs(L), bv(L)), 37 BF^\L,6) (Witt class of6 F ( ' i ) (L,6l)),224 B(K) (=Hq(X(K);A)/Z-torsion),
172
(= TT'/TT",
72
B(n,fi) (boundary concordance of boundary disc links), 263 Bailey's Theorem (on link modules of 2-component links), 150 based concordance, 249 basing, 4 Baumslag parafree group (G(i,j)), 20 Bing doubling, 26 BL (property of A M -modules), 92 Blanchfleld pairing, 31 Borromean rings (Bo), 26 boundary concordance, 14 boundary disc link, 262 boundary link, 5 braid, 261 Brin's Theorem, 219 Burau representation, 272 Cn, C„(fi) (knot and link concordance), 14 Cn,n (disc link concordance), 262 Cn(F(iJ.)) (based concordance of based boundary links), 224 calibration, 222
300
INDEX determinant class (6(M,b)), 68 determinant of a link, 108 1-dimensional ring, 63 disc link, 261 divisorial hull, 49 doubly null concordant, 14 doubly slice, 14 Dwyer filtration ({$ fc (Y)}fc>i),
Cartan-Leray Spectral Sequence, 29 characteristic map (of a bundle over S1), 110 characteristic variety Vt(L), 122 Chen group (Ch(G;q) = GqG"/Gq+1G"), 77 classical (knot, link), 3 closed fibre, 5 closure of disc link, 263 coherent (ring), 205 Cohn localization (: TM —• r M * ) , 204 colouring (of a link), 241, 262 column ideal class ('y(M)), 61 commutator ([x,y] = xyx~ly~l), 8 component (of a link - Li), 3 composite (of links), 25 concordance, 14 conjugate module (M), 30, 67 contractible system of equations, 250 conull space, 67 Cramer's rule, 48 crossed homomorphism, 69 Cr(G), Cr(f) (Crowell sequence), 70 Crowell sequence, 70 cSHB, 226, 260 cyclic branched cover, 113
(evM, WM), 53, 205 exterior (X(L) or X), 4
d-base, 263 Der(G; M) (derivations, crossed homomomorphisms), 69 DGA (differential graded algebra), 234 Dn (unit n-disc in Rn), 3 Dedekind domain, 63 Dedekind element, 132 deficiency (of a module presentation), 48 defining system, 228 derivation, 69
F(r) (free group of rank r), 6 F-isotopy, 14 F-link, 258 F(/i)-(n-)link, 223 Parber derivation (d[), 213 Farber-Levine pairing, 35 fibred link, 4, 110 finite .E-group, 222 finite £-link, 223 formal (space), 235 free period, 178 fusion, 24
230
e:R-»S1,33 E (Vogel localization functor), 248 ekM (=ExtkR(M,R)), 33, 53 EkM (= Ext^(M,T^)), 205 Ei(M), Ei{L) " (elementary ideal), 48, 78 Eo'" (trivial disc link), 261 evM (evaluation : M -» M"), 53, 205 Elementary Divisor Theorem, 50 elementary F-isotopy, 14 elementary ideal (Ek{M)), 48 elementary surgery, 17 equivariant (co) homology, 28 equivariant concordance, 196 equivariantly slice, 197 essential (Massey product), 228 evaluation homomorphisms
INDEX G(i,j),
20 (terms of lower central series), 8 G(oo) (= n ( G n G " ) ) , 77 Gjj? (rational lower central series), 232 Gassner representation, 270 Giffen's Theorem (on shift-spinning), 15 global dimension (of a ring), 47 good boundary link, 219 graded Lie algebra (£()), 232 grope, 231 'H(p-) (special automorphisms of F(fi)), 225 H(IJ,) (special automorphisms of F(/J.)),
249
'H(p) (special automorphisms of F(/x), 254 'H(p) (special automorphisms ofF(M)), 257 /i-orientation, 89 H(R) (ribbon group), 21 hermitean pairing, 67 high dimensional, 3 higher dimensional, 3 .Ho (Hopf link), 6 homogeneous (pure A-torsion module), 139 homologically 2-connected (homomorphism, map), 9 homology boundary link, 10 homotopy ribbon (link), 18 Hopflink(.Ho),6 Hosokawa polynomial (V(L)), 107 hyperbolic (e-linking pairing), 37 /-equivalence, 13 1(G) (= Ker(e : Z[G] — Z), augmentation ideal), 69 J„ = / ( Z " ) ( = ( * ! - ! , . . . t „ - l ) ,
301 AM-ideal), 71 ideal class, 61 indeterminacy, 228 inner product module, 66 interchangeable (link), 25 intrinsically formal (algebra), 235 invertible (knot, link), 24 invertible (ideal), 47 invisible subgroup, 251 Km,n ((m,n)-torus knot), 177 Kr(/x), Ku(fi) (Chapters X, XI: re Orr invariant), 214, 249 Kn(n) (Chapter XII: kernel), 266 Kacin) (Levine analogue of Orr invariant), 259 Kp (knot with reversed string orientation), 24 A:-cobordant, 243 fc-slice, 240 knot module, 130 knot, 3 Koszul complex (K(A^)), 71 Kronecker dual, 229 £(G) (graded Lie algebra of a group G), 232 LQ) (sublink), 95 L4, (sublink), 115 L(E) (link closure of disc link E), 263 L(m,n) (torus link), 178 LS(n) (link-symmetric group), 25 lattice, 214 Le Dimet homotopy invariant, 274 level-re Artin representation, 266 link (L), 3 link group (TTL or 7r), 4 link homotopic, 16 linking form (over T M ), 217 linking number (lk(Li,Lj)), 6 linking pairing, 33
302
link module sequence, 74 link polynomial, 149 link-symmetric group (LS(n)), 25 link type, 13 locally isotopic, 13 longitude, longitudinal curve, 6 longitudinal element (^j), 81 longitudinal polynomial, 82 M(S) ((<5)-primary submodule), 138 Mk (cyclic branched covering space), 113 M(L) (closed manifold obtained by 0-framed surgery on L), 4 M^,{L) (branched covering space), 115 Magnus embedding, 204 Q-Malcev completion, 233 Massey product, 228 Mayer-Vietoris sequence for a splitting, 29 meridian, meridianal curve, 4 meridianal element (m.j), 81 Mil(G) (Milnor group), 241 Milnor group (Mil(G)), 241 Milnor invariant, 237 Milnor signature, 43 Milnor's Theorem (on nilpotent quotients of TTL), 8 minimal (model), 234 monodromy, 112 Murasugi congruence, 182 Murasugi nullity (T](L)), 108 Murasugi's Theorem (on the derivative), 103 n-link, 3 n(x) (order of a character of a finite abelian group), 115 neutral (pairing, form), 37, 217 nilpotent completion (G), 248 normal closure (((—))), 5
INDEX normalized Massey product, 240 normalized Massey system, 239 null concordant (knot, link), 14 order (of torsion module), 50 orientation convention, 3 Orr invariant, 243, 249, 259 p : X' —* X (maximal abelian cover), 36, 78 p : X -+ X (universal cover), 28 Pk : Xk —* X (finite cyclic cover), 113 pT : XT —• X (total linking number cover), 33, 105 p w : X " —» X (maximal free cover), 29, 215 PM (pure braid group), 262 parafree, 248 Parafree Conjecture, 248 pattern (of an homology boundary link), 222 perfect pairing, 67 periodically +amphicheiral, 178 Poincare duality, 30 polynomially periodic, 125 preabelian presentation, 8 primitive element (of F(fj,)), 167 primitive pairing, 67 proper link, 45 pseudoisomorphism, 51 pseudonull, 51 pseudonull (r^-module), 206 pure (A-torsion module), 132 pure (r M -torsion module), 206 pure (string link, braid), 261 Q-Malcev completion, 233 rK (reflection of knot), 24 RF(fj) (= Mil(F(fi)), 241 /{-torsion (sub-)module, 47 Rx (ring of cyclotomic integers), 115
INDEX radR (radical of a commutative ring R), 47 rank, 47 reduced Alexander module (TA(L)),
105
reduced Alexander polynomial ( A „ d ( i ) ( t ) ) , 105 reduced nullity (K(L)), 105 reflexive module, 53 Reidemeister-Franz torsion, 59, 89, 100 residually nilpotent algebraic closure (G), 257 resultant (of two polynomials in fl[u,u-1] ResR(0,ip)),57 ribbon (link, map), 18 ribbon group (H(R)), 21 row ideal class (p(M)), 61 5(AM)(=0(ti,...t#.)/AM),31 s-concordance, 14 satellite (knot), 25 Seifert hypersurface, 4 semifree period, 178 separated (I^-module), 212 sesquilinear, 31 SFS invariant (p(M),7(M)), 61 SHB link (sublink of an homology boundary link), 11 short free resolution, 48 signatures, 43 sign-determined Alexander polynomial, 90 sign-determined torsion, 90 simple (boundary link), 10 singular Seifert hypersurface, 11 slice (knot, link), 14 slit, 18 Smythe's Theorem (characterizing (homology) boundary links), 10 solution under h, 250 special homomorphism (H(—)),
303
225, 249, 254, 257 split link, 5 splitting along Seifert hypersurfaces, 29 Stallings' Theorem (on homology and nilpotent quotients), 9 strictly defined, 228 strictly F-isotopic, 14 string link, 261 strong fusion, 24 strongly amphicheiral, 178 strongly invertible, 178 sum of links (D), 25, 39 sum of linking pairings, 37 surgery equivalent, 18 TM (torsion submodule of a module M), 31, 47 tM (torsion modulo pseudonull torsion), 33, 67 throughcut, 18 Torres conditions, 95 torsion (r M -module), 206 torsion (Reidemeister-Franz), 59 torsion submodule (TM), 31, 47 total linking number cover (pT :XT ->J>Q,33, 105 transposed (pairing), 67 trivial link, 5 twisted Alexander invariants, 125 twisted Alexander polynomial, 126 type BL (property of A M -modules), 92 type L (property of r M -modules), 211 UCSS (Universal Coefficient spectral sequence), 28 unlinked (longitudinal element), 82 unlinking theorem, 6, 220 Vi(L) (ith characteristic variety
INDEX
304
of A(L)), 122 Vogel's theorem (on representations), 256 WE(Ro,R;-) (Witt group), 37, 68 WM (evaluation : M —• e1e1M), 54 Wh (the Whitehead link 6§ in the tables of [Rol]), 26 Witt equivalence, 37 Witt group, 37 Whitehead doubling, 26 Whitehead link, 26 Wirtinger presentation, 7 XH (covering space), 28 X' (maximal abelian covering space), 36, 78 X (universal covering space), 28 Xk (finite cyclic covering space), 113 XT (total linking number covering space), 33, 105 Xw (maximal free covering space), 29, 215 X(L) (link exterior), 4 X$(L) (covering space of X(L)), 115 zM (the maximal finite submodule of a Ai-module), 33 Z/2Z-boundary link, 11 Z/2Z-homology boundary link, 13 Z«Xi,...X„)>,204 Greek characters a(L) (Alexander nullity), 78 akM ( = Ann(AkM)), 48 /9i(ir;p) (Betti number), 122 7L (image of link L under 7 e LS(jt)), 25 7(M) (column ideal class), 61 r M (= Z[F(/i)]), 203 Ak(M), Ak(L) (polynomial invariants), 49, 78
Ared(L), 105 Ai(X,a,V), 126 e : Z[G] —> Z (augmentation homomorphism of a group ring), 69 •q(L) (Murasugi nullity), 108 K(L) (reduced nullity), 106 X(K) (annihilator of B(K)), 174 A = Ai =Z[t,t~1], 33 AM ( = Z [ t i , t r 1 , . . . t | 4 ) - t - 1 ] ) , 3 1 I 7 1 Xk(M) (polynomial invariants of a module), 50 /^-component (link, ribbon), 3, 18 p,(I) (Milnor invariant), 237 fj,Y (disjoint union of fi copies of Y), 3 uk(t)(=(tk-l)/(t-l)), 113 TTL (link group), 4 p(M) (row ideal class), 61 <JL (signature function : S1 —> Z), 44 Og (Milnor signature), 43 £(L) (symmetries of the link L), 25 T (total linking number homomorphism), 33, 105 T ( C „ ; C „ , / I „ ) , 59 T{X,Y;0)
(Reidemeister-Pranz torsion), 89 T+(X,Y;9)
(sign-determined torsion), 90 (p(n) (Euler's totient function), 113 {$k(Y)}k>i (Dwyer filtration), 230 V> : AM —» A M _i (specialization), 95 (sign-determined w-torsion), 100 Other
symbols
V(L) (Hosokawa polynomial), 107 —K (inverse of the knot K), 24 ./", as in \ / / (intersection of prime ideals containing I), 47 = (equal up to multiplication
by a unit), 47 ", as in / (divisorial hull of the ideal 7), 49 ~, as in X (universal cover of X), 28 ~, as in G (nilpotent completion of a group), 248 AM (7M-adic completion of A M ), 77 TM (I(F((j,))-adic completion of r M ) , 204 x, as in Rx (units of a ring R), 47 ((S)) (normal closure of the subset S), 5 [x,y] = xyx~xy~^ (commutator), 8 tt (sum of links - not well defined), 25,39 * , as in AT* (dual module), 53, 205 ", as in G (algebraic closure of the group G), 252 G (residually nilpotent algebraic closure), 257 M (conjugate module), 30, 67 f (transpose of a pairing), 67
SERIES ON KNOTS AND EVERYTHING Editor-in-charge: Louis H. Kauffman (Univ. of Illinois, Chicago) The Series on Knots and Everything: is a book series polarized around the theory of knots. Volume 1 in the series is Louis H Kauffman's Knots and Physics. One purpose of this series is to continue the exploration of many of the themes indicated in Volume 1. These themes reach out beyond knot theory into physics, mathematics, logic, linguistics, philosophy, biology and practical experience. All of these outreaches have relations with knot theory when knot theory is regarded as a pivot or meeting place for apparently separate ideas. Knots act as such a pivotal place. We do not fully understand why this is so. The series represents stages in the exploration of this nexus. Details of the titles in this series to date give a picture of the enterprise.
Published: Vol.1:
Knots and Physics (3rd Edition) L. H. Kauffman
Vol. 2:
How Surfaces Intersect in Space — An Introduction to Topology (2nd Edition) J. S. Carter
Vol.3:
Quantum Topology edited by L. H. Kauffman & R. A. Baadhio
Vol. 4:
Gauge Fields, Knots and Gravity J. Baez & J. P Muniain
Vol. 5:
Gems, Computers and Attractors for 3-Manifolds S. Lins
Vol. 6:
Knots and Applications edited by L. H. Kauffman
Vol. 7:
Random Knotting and Linking edited by K. C. Millett &D.W. Sumners
Vol. 8:
Symmetric Bends: How to Join Two Lengths of Cord R. E. Miles
Vol. 9:
Combinatorial Physics T. Bastin &C.W. Kilmister
Vol. 10: Nonstandard Logics and Nonstandard Metrics in Physics W. M. Honig
Vol. 11: History and Science of Knots edited by J. C. Turner & P. van de Griend Vol. 12: Relativistic Reality: A Modern View edited by J. D. Edmonds, Jr. Vol.13: Entropic SpacetimeTheory J. Armel Vol.14: Diamond — A Paradox Logic N. S. Hellerstein Vol. 15: Lectures at KNOTS '96 S. Suzuki Vol. 16: Delta — A Paradox Logic N. S. Hellerstein Vol. 19: Ideal Knots A. Stasiak, V. Katritch & L. H. Kauffman Vol. 20: The Mystery of Knots — Computer Programming for Knot Tabulation C, N. Aneziris Vol. 24: Knots in HELLAS '98 — Proceedings of the International Conference on Knot Theory and Its Ramifications edited by C. McA Gordon, V. F. R. Jones, L. Kauffman, S. Lambropoulou & J. H. Przytycki Vol. 26: Functorial Knot Theory — Categories of Tangles, Coherence, Categorical Deformations, and Topological Invariants by David N. Yetter Vol. 27: Bit-String Physics: A Finite and Discrete Approach to Natural Philosophy by H. Pierre Noyes; edited by J. C. van den Berg Vol. 29: Quantum Invariants — A Study of Knots, 3-Manifolds, and Their Sets by Tomotoda Ohtsuki Vol. 30: Symmetry, Ornament and Modularity by Slavik Vlado Jablan Vol. 31: Mindsteps to the Cosmos by Gerald S Hawkins
This book is intended as a reference on links and on the invariants derived via algebraic topology from covering spaces of link exteriors. It emphasizes features of the multicomponent case not normally considered by knot theorists, such as longitudes, the homological complexity of many-variable Laurent polynomial rings, free coverings of homology boundary links, the fact that links are not usually boundary links, the lower central series as a source of invariants, nilpotent completion and algebraic closure of the link group, and disc links. Invariants of the types considered here play an essential role in many applications of knot theory to other areas of topology.
ISBN 981-238-154-6
www. worldscientific.com 5091 lie